तत्र सिद्धासनम् ।
tatra siddhāsanam /
Now, the adept’s pose (siddhāsana).
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 |
| 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
| 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 |
| 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 |
| 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 |
| 65 | |||||||
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 |
| 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
| 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 |
| 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 |
| 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 |
| 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 |
| 73 | 74 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 |
| 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
| 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 |
| 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 |
| 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 |
| 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 |
| 73 | 74 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 |
| 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86 | 87 | 88 |
| 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
| 97 | 98 | 99 | 100 | 101 | 102 | 103 | 104 |
| 105 | 106 | 107 | |||||
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 |
| 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
| 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 |
| 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 |
| 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 |
| 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 |
| 73 | 74 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | ||
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
| 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 |
| 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
| 41 | 42 | 43 | 44 | 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 |
| 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55 | 56 |
| 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 |
| 65 | 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 |
| 73 | 74 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 |
| 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86 | 87 | 88 |
| 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
| 97 | 98 | 99 | 100 | 101 | 102 | 103 | 104 |
| 105 | 106 | 107 | 108 | 109 | 110 | 111 | 112 |
| 113 | 114 | 115 | 116 | 117 | 118 | 119 | 120 |
| 121 | 122 | 123 | 124 | 125 | 126 | 127 | 128 |
| 129 | 130 | 131 | 132 | 133 | 134 | ||
श्रीआदिनाथाय नमोऽस्तु तस्मै
येनोपदिष्टा हठयोगविद्या ।
विराजते प्रोन्नतराजसौध-
मारोढुमिच्छोरधिरोहिणीव ॥
śrīādināthāya namo’stu tasmai
yenopadiṣṭā haṭhayogavidyā /
virājate pronnatarājasaudha-
m āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇīva //
In his commentary on Haṭhapradīpikā 1.1 Brahmānanda first states that the author Svātmārāma starts appropriately with
a maṅgala, a verse of adoration addressing Ādinātha, i.e. Śiva, but in accordance with his
non-sectarian approach leaves room for a second interpretation of the word as Viṣṇu.
A sentence later this is contradicted by his explanantion that Ādinātha, who first
taught Yoga, taught it to Pārvatī, which limits the scope to Śiva.
The reading rājasaudham in the third verse quarter is well attested by the manuscripts, including α1. However, the most common reading in manuscripts on the lower branches of the stemma
is rājayogam, which was accepted by Brahmānanda in Jyotsnā 1.1 (see below). It appears that some scribes have made a concerted effort to replace
words like saudha, vidyā and mārga with yoga in the opening verses of the text (see also 1.2d and 1.3b), even at the expense of
the poetic imagery.
In light of the variants, which have led to our critical edition, Brahmānanda’s choices
and interpretation of the second half cannot be upheld. This is Brahmānanda’s version
and the relevant portion of his commentary:
śrīādināthāya namo’stu tasmai
yenopadiṣṭā haṭhayogavidyā/
vibhrājate pronnatarājayogam
āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇīva// 1.1//
rājayogaś ca sarvavṛttinirodhalakṣaṇo’saṃprajñātayogaḥ. tam icchor mumukṣor adhirohiṇīva adhiruhyate’nayety adhirohiṇī niḥśreṇīva vibhrājate viśeṣeṇa bhrājate śobhate. yathā pronnatasaudham āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇy anāyāsena saudhaprāpikā bhavati evaṃ haṭhapradīpikāpi pronnatarājayogam āroḍhum icchor anāyāsena rājayogaprāpikā bhavatīti upamālaṅkāraḥ. indravajrākhyaṃ vṛttam.
गुरुं नत्वा शिवं साक्षाद्ब्रह्मानन्देन तन्यते
हठप्रदीपिकाज्योत्स्ना योगमार्गप्रकाशिका
इदानींतनानां सुबोधार्थमस्याः
सुविज्ञाय गोरक्षसिद्धान्तहार्दम्
मया मेरुशास्त्रिप्रमुख्याभियोगात्
स्फुटं कथ्यते ऽत्यन्तगूढो ऽपि भावः
हकारः कीर्तितः सूर्यष्ठकारश्चन्द्र उच्यते
सूर्यचन्द्रमसोर्योगाद्धठयोगो निगद्यते
guruṃ natvā śivaṃ sākṣād brahmānandena tanyate
haṭhapradīpikājyotsnā yogamārgaprakāśikā
idānīṃtanānāṃ subodhārtham asyāḥ
suvijñāya gorakṣasiddhāntahārdam
mayā meruśāstripramukhyābhiyogāt
sphuṭaṃ kathyate ’tyantagūḍho ’pi bhāvaḥ
hakāraḥ kīrtitaḥ sūryaṣ ṭhakāraś candra ucyate
sūryacandramasor yogād dhaṭhayogo nigadyate
śrīādināthāya namo ’stu tasmai ] sadādināthāya namo ’stu tubhyaṃ YSS, ādīśvarāya praṇamāmi tasmai GhS
Cf. Bhāvanāpuruṣottama pp. 99–100rājayogābhidhānasaudhādhirohaṇādhirohiṇī haṭhavidyā//
प्रणम्य श्रीगुरुं नाथं स्वात्मारामेण योगिना ।
केवलं राजयोगाय हठविद्योपदिश्यते ॥
praṇamya śrīguruṃ nāthaṃ svātmārāmeṇa yoginā /
kevalaṃ rājayogāya haṭhavidyopadiśyate //
भ्रान्त्या बहुमतध्वान्ते राजमार्गमजानताम् ।
हठप्रदीपिकां धत्ते स्वात्मारामः कृपाकरः ॥
bhrāntyā bahumatadhvānte rājamārgam ajānatām /
haṭhapradīpikāṃ dhatte svātmārāmaḥ kṛpākaraḥ //
Most witnesses (including α2) have rājayogam ajānatām (‘for those ignorant of Rājayoga’) in 1.3b. The reading rājamārgam ajānatām (α1 and α3), “for those unable to find the royal highway”, is more appropriate to the metaphor
of being lost in darkness.
As Brahmānanda notes, the compound kṛpākaraḥ can be understood as one who is compassionate (kṛpā + kara) or one who is a mine (i.e. a rich source) of compassion (kṛpā + ākara). In the Devanāgarī transmission, the kṣamā of kṣamākaraḥ probably arose as a mistake for kṛpā.
ज्ञानभूमिः शुभेच्छाख्या प्रथमा समुदाहृता
विचारणा द्वितीया स्यात्तृतीया तनुमानसा
सत्त्वापत्तिश्चतुर्थी स्यात्ततो ऽसंसक्तिनामिका
परार्थाभाविनी षष्ठी सप्तमी तुर्यगा स्मृता इति
jñānabhūmiḥ śubhecchākhyā prathamā samudāhṛtā
vicāraṇā dvitīyā syāt tṛtīyā tanumānasā
sattvāpattiś caturthī syāt tato ’saṃsaktināmikā
parārthābhāvinī ṣaṣṭhī saptamī turyagā smṛtā iti
bhrāntyā bahumatadhvānte rājayogam ajānatām/
kevalaṃ rājayogāya haṭhavidyopadiśyate//
b rājayogam ] rājamārgam P,T,t1
हठविद्यां हि मत्स्येन्द्रगोरक्षाद्या विजानते ।
स्वात्मारामोऽथवा योगी जानीते तत्प्रसादतः ॥
haṭhavidyāṃ hi matsyendragorakṣādyā vijānate /
svātmārāmo’thavā yogī jānīte tatprasādataḥ //
The word athavā (‘or’) is well attested but difficult to construe here. Brahmānanda understands it as a conjunction (athavāśabdaḥ samuccaye), and this is how we have interpreted it. The variant mahāyogī in ζ1 and other manuscripts (, J4, J11 and Ko) is probably an attempt to remove the difficulty of understanding athavā. One could adopt tathā, which is attested by α3, but this would be at odds with the weight of the evidence supporting ’thavā.
(1.4)
हिरण्यगर्भो योगस्य वक्ता नान्यः पुरातनः
नास्ति बुद्धिरयुक्तस्य न चायुक्तस्य भावना
न चाभावयतः शान्तिरशान्तस्य कुतः सुखम्
स्वातन्त्र्यसत्यत्वमुखं प्रधाने
सत्यं च चिद्भेदमभेदवाक्यैः
व्यासो निराचष्ट न भावनाख्यं
योगं स्वयं निर्मितब्रह्मसूत्रैः
अपि चात्मप्रदं योगं व्याकरोन्मतिमान्स्वयम्
भाष्यादिषु ततस्तत्राप्याचार्यप्रमुखैर्मतः
मतो योगो भगवता गीतायामधिको ऽन्यतः
कृतः शुकादिभिस्तस्मादत्र सन्तो ऽतिसादराः
इति
वेदेषु यज्ञेषु तपःसु चैव
दानेषु यत्पुण्यफलं प्रदिष्टम्
अत्येति तत्सर्वमिदं विदित्वा
योगी परं स्थानमुपैति चाद्यम्
(1.4)
hiraṇyagarbho yogasya vaktā nānyaḥ purātanaḥ
nāsti buddhir ayuktasya na cāyuktasya bhāvanā
na cābhāvayataḥ śāntir aśāntasya kutaḥ sukham
svātantryasatyatvamukhaṃ pradhāne
satyaṃ ca cidbhedam abhedavākyaiḥ
vyāso nirācaṣṭa na bhāvanākhyaṃ
yogaṃ svayaṃ nirmitabrahmasūtraiḥ
api cātmapradaṃ yogaṃ vyākaron matimān svayam
bhāṣyādiṣu tatas tatrāpy ācāryapramukhair mataḥ
mato yogo bhagavatā gītāyām adhiko ’nyataḥ
kṛtaḥ śukādibhis tasmād atra santo ’tisādarāḥ
iti
vedeṣu yajñeṣu tapaḥsu caiva
dāneṣu yat puṇyaphalaṃ pradiṣṭam
atyeti tat sarvam idaṃ viditvā
yogī paraṃ sthānam upaiti cādyam
matsyendragorakṣādyā ] gorakṣamatsyendrādyā HRĀ svātmārāmo’ thavā yogī ] ātmārāmo ’pi jānīte HRĀ jānīte tat prasādataḥ ] śrīnivāsas tathā svayam HRĀ
श्रीआदिनाथमत्स्येन्द्रशाबरानन्दभैरवाः ।
चौरङ्गीमीनगोरक्षविरूपाक्षबिलेशयाः ॥
śrīādināthamatsyendraśābarānandabhairavāḥ /
cauraṅgīmīnagorakṣavirūpākṣabileśayāḥ //
In Śaiva texts which predate the Haṭha corpus, Mīnanātha and Matsyendra are one and
the same, but they are differentiated in later Tibetan and Indian lists of siddhas
(Mallinson 2019: 273 n. 35).
Two manuscripts of the α and δ groups have the variant reading virūpākṣaḥ savālikaḥ ( and ) for virūpākṣabileśayāḥ. In another α manuscript, , the original reading was savālmikaḥ, which may reflect an attempt at some stage to change savālikaḥ to a name similar to Vālmīki, the celebrated author of the Rāmāyaṇa.
cauraṅgi ] śāraṅgī HRĀ
मन्थानभैरवो योगी सिद्धबुद्धश्च कन्थडिः ।
गोरण्टकः सुरानन्दः सिद्धपादश्च चर्पटिः ॥
manthānabhairavo yogī siddhabuddhaś ca kanthaḍiḥ /
goraṇṭakaḥ surānandaḥ siddhapādaś ca carpaṭiḥ //
The α manuscripts have goraṇṭaka, and several other manuscript groups have pauraṇṭaka. We are yet to find the name goraṇṭaka in other Sanskrit texts but it may be a Sanskrit rendering of Goraṇṭakuḍu, which is the name of a disciple of Gorakṣanātha in the Navanāthacaritramu (Jones 2017: 194 n. 3). The spelling koraṇṭaka is attested in the Haṭhābhyāsapaddhati, and it is reasonably well attested by manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, as well as those of the Haṭharatnāvalī (which also has gonandaka).
The compound siddhapāda could be a respectful affix to Surānanda, but it seems unlikely here because then
the name would cross the pāda break.
kanthaḍiḥ ] kandalī HRĀ, kanthaḍī MA goraṇṭakaḥ ] koraṇṭakaḥ MA, korandakaḥ HRĀ, gonandaka HRĀv.l. carpaṭiḥ ] carpaṭī HRĀ MA
कणेरी पूज्यपादश्च नित्यनाथो निरञ्जनः ।
कपाली बिन्दुनाथश्च काकचण्डीश्वराह्वयः ॥
kaṇerī pūjyapādaś ca nityanātho nirañjanaḥ /
kapālī bindunāthaś ca kākacaṇḍīśvarāhvayaḥ //
It is possible that pūjyapāda is a respectful affix to the name Kaṇerī. The variant dhvaninātha may have resulted from a transposition of the first two syllables of nityanātha.
The α group supports kākacaṇḍīśvaro gayaḥ but we have not been able to find evidence for a Siddha called Gaya.
kaṇerī MA ] karoṭiḥ HRĀ kākacaṇḍīśvarāhvayaḥ HRĀ ] kākacaṇḍīśvaro gajaḥ MA
अल्लमप्रभुदेवश्च घोडाचोली च टिण्टिणिः ।
भालुकिर्नागबोधश्च खण्डकापालिकस्तथा ॥
allamaprabhudevaś ca ghoḍācolī ca ṭiṇṭiṇiḥ /
bhālukir nāgabodhaś ca khaṇḍakāpālikas tathā //
The name Allamaprabhudeva (sometimes Allama Prabhu Deva or Allama Prabhudeva in secondary
literature) is frequently transmitted as allamaḥ prabhudevaḥ (cf. α2), as though it were two names. However, manuscripts α1, α3 and π1 do not have the visarga and write it as one name (i.e. allamaprabhudevaś ca). This is also the case in some manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī (P,T,t1 in Gharote et al. 2009: 35 n. 8).
The names Nāgabodha, Nāgabodhi, and Nāgadeva are all possible in 1.8c. The adopted
reading nāgabodhaś ca is attested across several primary groups of manuscripts. We consider the readings
of α1 (namioḍḍīśa) and α2 (nāma tuṃḍīśa) to be corrupt.
The α1 and α2 reading of siddhaḥ kāpālikas is an exception among the manuscripts and seems too vague to be referring to someone
within a lineage. Khaṇḍakāpālika is well attested by the remaining manuscripts (including
α3) and this name appears in other texts, e.g. Vajrapāṇi’s Laghutantraṭīkā, p. 45, where Khaṇḍakāpālika is the first of the 24 Vīras (vīrāḥ khaṇḍakāpālikādayaś caturviṃśatiḥ). It is likely to refer to an ascetic who carries a broken skull. Matsyendrasaṃhitā 33.2 mentions a practice for which one needs a khaṇḍakapāla and in the Saṃvaramaṇḍala of the Niṣpannayogāvalī, p. 26, Vajravārāhī is kapālakhaṇḍakṛtakaṭibhūṣaṇā. The compound khaṇḍakāpālika is found at Kathāsaritsāgara 18.2.6, but there khaṇḍa is being used in a derogatory sense (18.2.15 refers to the same character as a duṣṭakāpālika).
allamaḥ HRĀ ] allama HRĀv.l., āllamaḥ MA ghoḍācolī MA ] naiṭacūṭiś HRĀ tiṇṭiṇiḥ HRĀ ] ṭhiṇṭhinī MA nāgabodhaś HRĀ ] nāgadevaś MA khaṇḍa HRĀ ] khaṇḍī MA
इत्यादयो महासिद्धा हठयोगप्रभावतः ।
खण्डयित्वा कालदण्डं ब्रह्माण्डेषु चरन्ति ते ॥
ityādayo mahāsiddhā haṭhayogaprabhāvataḥ /
khaṇḍayitvā kāladaṇḍaṃ brahmāṇḍeṣu caranti te //
The reference to brahmāṇḍa (‘the world’) implies that these great Siddhas have attained liberation-in-life (jīvanmukti) and physical immortality.
योगेश्वराणां गतिमाहुरन्तर्
बहिस्त्रिलोक्याः पवनान्तरात्मनामिति.
yogeśvarāṇāṃ gatim āhur antar
bahistrilokyāḥ pavanāntarātmanām iti.
ityādayo mahāsiddhā MA HRĀ ] ūrdhvaṃretaḥprabhāvena HTK haṭhayogaprabhāvataḥ ] haṭhayogaprasādataḥ HRĀ, rasabhogaprasādataḥ MA, sanakādyā maharṣayaḥ HTK brahmāṇḍeṣu caranti ] brahmāṇḍe vicaranti HRĀ, trilokyāṃ vicaranti MA, yathecchaṃ viharanti HTK
संसारतापतप्तानां समाश्रयमठो हठः ।
अशेषयोगजगतामाधारकमठो हठः ॥
saṃsāratāpataptānāṃ samāśrayamaṭho haṭhaḥ /
aśeṣayogajagatām ādhārakamaṭho haṭhaḥ //
The α group omits the second line of this verse, but this was probably the result of eyeskip caused by the repetition of maṭho haṭhaḥ. The reading jagatāṃ makes good sense with ādhārakamaṭhah in light of the cosmological notion that the worlds are supported by a tortoise. However, it appears not to have been understood by some and was changed in other witnesses to yuktānām (e.g., π in the collated group), which was later adopted by Brahmānanda in Jyotsnā 1.10.
samāśrayamaṭho ] samāśrayahaṭho YSS
हठविद्या परं गोप्या योगिनां सिद्धिमिच्छताम् ।
भवेद्वीर्यवती गुप्ता निर्वीर्या तु प्रकाशिता ॥
haṭhavidyā paraṃ gopyā yogināṃ siddhim icchatām /
bhaved vīryavatī guptā nirvīryā tu prakāśitā //
Either the singular or plural of yogin could be read here. The singular is well attested among the testimonia, but the manuscript transmission favours the plural.
जिताक्षाय शान्ताय सक्ताय मुक्तौ
विहीनाय दोषैरसक्ताय भुक्तौ
अहीनाय दोषेतरैरुक्तकर्त्रे
प्रदेयो न देयो हठश्चेतरस्मै
विध्युक्तकर्मसंयुक्तः कामसङ्कल्पवर्जितः
यमैश्च नियमैर्युक्तः सर्वसङ्गविवर्जितः
कृतविद्यो जितक्रोधः सत्यधर्मपरायणः
गुरुशुश्रूषणरतः पितृमातृपरायणः
स्वाश्रमस्थः सदाचारो विद्वद्भिश्च सुशिक्षितः
ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविशां स्त्रीशूद्राणां च पावनम्
शान्तये कर्मणामन्यद्योगान्नास्ति विमुक्तये
दृष्टे तथानुश्रविके विरक्तं विषये मनः
यस्य तस्याधिकारो ऽस्मिन्योगे नान्यस्य कस्यचित्
इहामुत्रविरक्तस्य संसारं प्रजिहासतः
जिज्ञासोरेव कस्यापि योगे ऽस्मिन्नधिकारिता
नैतद्देयं दुर्विनीताय जातु
ज्ञानं गुप्तं तद्धि सम्यक्फलाय
अस्थाने हि स्थाप्यमानैव वाचां
देवी कोपान्निर्दहेन्नो ऽचिराय
jitākṣāya śāntāya saktāya muktau
vihīnāya doṣair asaktāya bhuktau
ahīnāya doṣetarair uktakartre
pradeyo na deyo haṭhaś cetarasmai
vidhyuktakarmasaṃyuktaḥ kāmasaṅkalpavarjitaḥ
yamaiś ca niyamair yuktaḥ sarvasaṅgavivarjitaḥ
kṛtavidyo jitakrodhaḥ satyadharmaparāyaṇaḥ
guruśuśrūṣaṇarataḥ pitṛmātṛparāyaṇaḥ
svāśramasthaḥ sadācāro vidvadbhiś ca suśikṣitaḥ
brāhmaṇakṣatriyaviśāṃ strīśūdrāṇāṃ ca pāvanam
śāntaye karmaṇām anyad yogān nāsti vimuktaye
dṛṣṭe tathānuśravike viraktaṃ viṣaye manaḥ
yasya tasyādhikāro ’smin yoge nānyasya kasyacit
ihāmutraviraktasya saṃsāraṃ prajihāsataḥ
jijñāsor eva kasyāpi yoge ’sminn adhikāritā
naitad deyaṃ durvinītāya jātu
jñānaṃ guptaṃ tad dhi samyak phalāya
asthāne hi sthāpyamānaiva vācāṃ
devī kopān nirdahen no ’cirāya
yogināṃ ] yoginā ŚS YCM icchatām ] icchatā ŚS YCM tu YCM ] ca ŚS
सुराज्ये धार्मिके देशे सुभिक्षे निरुपद्रवे ।
एकान्तमठिकामध्ये स्थातव्यं हठयोगिनाम् ॥*
surājye dhārmike deśe subhikṣe nirupadrave /
ekāntamaṭhikāmadhye sthātavyaṃ haṭhayoginām //*
The term maṭhikā occurs in narrative literature and yoga texts in the sense of a small hut. For example,
in the Kathāsaritsāgara (12.9.14, 29–30), maṭhikā refers to the small hut built in a cremation ground by a young Brahmin who makes
as his bed the ashes of the dead girl he had hoped to marry. In several other stories
(Kathāsaritsāgara 6.6.132, 10.5.89, 12.25.35), maṭhikā is the term used for the hut of an ascetic. In an elaborate description of the huts
(maṭhikā) used for Haṭhayoga, the author of the Haṭhābhyāsapaddhati states that the dimensions of the hut are four “hastas” high and wide (there are various definitions of the term: 18 inches according to
the Larger Petrograd Dictionary and Monier-Williams (1899), 48 inches according to the Smaller Petrograd Dictionary; the NWS lists even
more variations, but the stipulation that the hut is the length of a bow found in
the Gorakṣaśataka (on which see below) suggests that 18 inches was meant). The hut can be made of various
materials, such as red earth, ashes, plaster and so on (Birch and Singleton 2019: 17–18).
In the Jyotsnā and printed editions of the Haṭhapradīpikā, including one by Digambara and Kokaje (1970: 6), this verse has the additional line, dhanuḥpramāṇaparyantaṃ śilāgnijalavarjite. This line derives from the Gorakṣaśataka (32cd), which has paryante instead of paryantaṃ. It stipulates that the hut should be built in a place measuring up to a bow length
and free from rocks, fire and water. None of the early manuscripts has this line,
which suggests that it was added at a later time. Nonetheless, it appears in over
a dozen manuscripts that were consulted for this edition. These manuscripts are not
close to an early hyparchetype of the text.
वासे बहूनां कलहो भवेद्वार्ता द्वयोरपि
vāse bahūnāṃ kalaho bhaved vārtā dvayor api
surājye YCM ] surāṣṭe HRĀ ekānta HRĀ ] ekānte YCM
अल्पद्वारमरन्ध्रगर्तपिटकं नात्युच्चनीचायतं
सम्यग्गोमयसान्द्रलिप्तममलं निःशेषबाधोज्झितम् ।
बाह्ये मण्डपवेदिकूपरुचिरं प्राकारसंवेष्टितं
प्रोक्तं योगमठस्य लक्षणमिदं सिद्धैर्हठाभ्यासिभिः ॥
alpadvāram arandhragartapiṭakaṃ nātyuccanīcāyataṃ
samyaggomayasāndraliptam amalaṃ niḥśeṣabādhojjhitam /
bāhye maṇḍapavedikūparuciraṃ prākārasaṃveṣṭitaṃ
proktaṃ yogamaṭhasya lakṣaṇam idaṃ siddhair haṭhābhyāsibhiḥ //
The syntax of this verse is problematic. One would expect the features of the hut,
which are listed in the first three quarters of the verse, to be in the nominative
case. Then, the words idaṃ lakṣaṇaṃ in the fourth quarter would refer back to them. However, the compounds in the first
three verse-quarters appear to qualify lakṣaṇa as though they were adjectives, and this seems to have been the way the verse was
composed.
The manuscripts preserve many different readings at the end of the compound beginning
with arandhragarta. We have adopted piṭaka, which usually means “a basket” but can also mean “a boil or blister,” because it
is well attested and might here refer to bumps on the floors or walls that would make
them uneven. Another possibility is piṭharaṃ, which can have the sense of potsherds and would here mean that the hut should be
free of rubbish on the floor. One would expect a word for a defect in a hut that is
similar to, but not the same as, cracks (randhra) and holes (garta). For this reason, the reading vivaraṃ looks like a patch, as its meaning does not add anything to randhragarta. The reading viṭapaṃ (‘the young branch of a tree or creeper’) attested in some manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā is difficult to construe in this context unless it was intended to refer to creepers
or branches that might invade or encroach upon the hut.
Manuscripts of several groups, namely ε, η, and π, have bādhojjitaṃ, whereas γ, δ and the Yogacintāmaṇi have the more easily understood reading of jantūjjhitaṃ (‘free from creatures’). The α group is split on this, with α3 (bodhojhitaṃ) closer to bādhojjhitaṃ and α1 (jyaṃtyūpsitaṃ) and α2 (jaṃtūṣṇitaṃ) closer to jantūjjhitaṃ. We have adopted the more unusual reading of bādhojjhitaṃ with the support of a similar description of a hut in Suśrutasaṃhitā 6.17.67 (gṛhe nirābādhe).
मन्दिरं रम्यविन्यासं मनोज्ञं गन्धवासितम्
धूपामोदादिसुरभि कुसुमोत्करमण्डितम्
मुनितीर्थनदीवृक्षपद्मिनीशैलशोभितम्
चित्रकर्मनिबद्धं च चित्रभेदविचित्रितम्
कुर्याद्योगगृहं धीमान्सुरम्यं शुभवर्त्मना
दृष्ट्वा चित्रगतांश्छान्तान्मुनीन्याति मनः शमम्
सिद्धान्दृष्ट्वा चित्रगतान्मतिरभ्युद्यमे भवेत्
मध्ये योगगृहस्याथ लिखेत्संसारमण्डलम्
श्मशानं च महाघोरं नरकांश्च लिखेत्क्वचित्
तान्दृष्ट्वा भीषणाकारान्संसारे सारवर्जिते
अनवसादो भवति योगी सिद्ध्यभिलाषुकः
पश्यंश्च व्याधितान्जन्तून्नतान्मत्तांश्चलद्व्रणात्
mandiraṃ ramyavinyāsaṃ manojñaṃ gandhavāsitam
dhūpāmodādisurabhi kusumotkaramaṇḍitam
munitīrthanadīvṛkṣapadminīśailaśobhitam
citrakarmanibaddhaṃ ca citrabhedavicitritam
kuryād yogagṛhaṃ dhīmān suramyaṃ śubhavartmanā
dṛṣṭvā citragatāṃś chāntān munīn yāti manaḥ śamam
siddhān dṛṣṭvā citragatān matir abhyudyame bhavet
madhye yogagṛhasyātha likhet saṃsāramaṇḍalam
śmaśānaṃ ca mahāghoraṃ narakāṃś ca likhet kvacit
tān dṛṣṭvā bhīṣaṇākārān saṃsāre sāravarjite
anavasādo bhavati yogī siddhyabhilāṣukaḥ
paśyaṃś ca vyādhitān jantūn natān mattāṃś caladvraṇāt
suśobhanaṃ maṭhaṃ kuryāt sūkṣmadvāraṃ tu nirvraṇaṃ//
suṣṭhu liptaṃ gomayena sudhayā vā prayatnataḥ/
matkuṇair maśakair bhūtair varjitaṃ ca prayatnataḥ//
dine dine susammṛṣṭaṃ sammārjanyā hy atandritaḥ/
vāsitaṃ ca sugandhena dhūpitaṃ guggulādibhiḥ//
malamūtrādibhir vargair aṣṭādaśabhir eva ca/
varjitaṃ dvārasampannaṃ vastrāvaraṇam eva vā//
piṭakaṃ HRĀv.l. ] piṭharaṃ HRĀ, ghaṭitaṃ YCM mamalaṃ ] mavilaṃ YCMv.l., vimalaṃ HRĀ YCM nātyuccanīcāyataṃ HRĀ ] nāpy uccanīcāyitam YCM bādhojjhitam HRĀ ] jantūjjhitam YCM vedikūparuciraṃ HRĀ ] kūpavediracitaṃ YCM
एवंविधे मठे स्थित्वा सर्वचिन्ताविवर्जितः ।
गुरूपदिष्टमार्गेण योगमेव सदाभ्यसेत् ॥
evaṃvidhe maṭhe sthitvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ /
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa yogam eva sadābhyaset //
मरुज्जयो यस्य सिद्धस्तं सेवेत गुरुं सदा
गुरुवक्त्रप्रसादेन कुर्यात्प्राणजयं बुधः
वेदान्ततर्कोक्तिभिरागमैश्च
नानाविधैः शास्त्रकदम्बकैश्च
ध्यानादिभिः सत्करणैर्न गम्यश्
चिन्तामणिर्ह्येकगुरुं विहाय
आचार्याद्योगसर्वस्वमवाप्य स्थिरधीः स्वयम्
यथोक्तं लभते तेन प्राप्नोत्यपि च निर्वृतिम्
गुरुप्रसादाल्लभते योगमष्टाङ्गसंयुतम्
शिवप्रसादाल्लभते योगसिद्धिं च शाश्वतीम्
यस्य देवे परा भक्तिर्यथा देवे तथा गुरौ
तस्यैते कथिता ह्यर्थाः प्रकाशन्ते महात्मनः
marujjayo yasya siddhas taṃ seveta guruṃ sadā
guruvaktraprasādena kuryāt prāṇajayaṃ budhaḥ
vedāntatarkoktibhir āgamaiś ca
nānāvidhaiḥ śāstrakadambakaiś ca
dhyānādibhiḥ satkaraṇair na gamyaś
cintāmaṇir hy ekaguruṃ vihāya
ācāryād yogasarvasvam avāpya sthiradhīḥ svayam
yathoktaṃ labhate tena prāpnoty api ca nirvṛtim
guruprasādāl labhate yogam aṣṭāṅgasaṃyutam
śivaprasādāl labhate yogasiddhiṃ ca śāśvatīm
yasya deve parā bhaktir yathā deve tathā gurau
tasyaite kathitā hy arthāḥ prakāśante mahātmanaḥ
evaṃvidhaṃ guruṃ labdhvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ/
sthitvā manohare deśe yogam eva samabhyaset//
अत्याहारः प्रयासश्च प्रजल्पोऽनियमग्रहः ।
जनसङ्गश्च लौल्यं च षड्भिर्योगो विनश्यति ॥
atyāhāraḥ prayāsaś ca prajalpo’niyamagrahaḥ /
janasaṅgaś ca laulyaṃ ca ṣaḍbhir yogo vinaśyati //
Since many scribes do not use an avagraha, we cannot be sure whether to understand niyamagrahaḥ in pāda b as having a negative prefix. Although yama and niyama are not included in the Haṭhapradīpikā as auxiliaries of Haṭhayoga, verse 2.14 implies that some niyamas are necessary at least in the early stages of establishing a practice. However, verse 3.78 suggests that a yogi who does not practice niyama might obtain success in yoga through the practice of vajrolī. Thirty of the manuscripts consulted for this critical edition contain additional verses on ten yama and ten niyama, which are usually inserted after 1.16 and derive from either the Śāradātilakatantra (25.7–8) or the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (1.38, 1.53).
’niyamagrahaḥ HRĀ YCM ] niyamāgrahaḥ HRĀv.l.YBhD janasaṅgaś ca YCM YBhD ] janasaṅgaṃ ca HRĀ yogo vinaśyati YBhD HRĀ ] yogaḥ praṇaśyati YCM
Cf. Jyotsnā 1.15śītodakena prātaḥsnānanaktabhojanaphalāhārādirūpaniyamasya grahaṇaṃ niyamagrahaḥ/
niyamāgrahaḥ vakṣyamāṇaniyamāparipālanaṃ
उत्साहात्साहसाद्धैर्यात्संतोषात्तत्त्वदर्शनात् ।
जनसङ्गपरित्यागात्षड्भिर्योगः प्रसिध्यति ॥*
utsāhāt sāhasād dhairyāt saṃtoṣāt tattvadarśanāt /
janasaṅgaparityāgātṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati //*
α and several other groups of manuscripts have tattvajñānārthadarśanāt (as found in Bhagavadgītā 13.11), tattvajñānāc ca darśanāt or something very similar in the second pāda of the verse, but darśanāt (α1) by itself is problematic: a vision of what? The early sources of this verse, in
particular the Śivadharmottara, indicate that the second verse quarter read as santoṣāt tattvadarśanāt, which makes much better sense of the word darśanāt so we have adopted that reading.
It should also be noted that the word tattva could have a more specific meaning in the Haṭhapradīpikā (4.32–33) as Svātmārāma states that it is a synonym of samādhi. In other yoga texts, it can sometimes refer to the practices of yoga (e.g. tritattva in Amṛtasiddhi 13.12, 14.2–3) or, more generally, to the highest reality or truth (e.g. Amanaska 1.2, 1.20–21, 2.17 etc.).
utsāhāt ] utsāhān JA YB ŚDhU, utsāho DhP sāhasād ] niścayo DhP, niścayād JA YB ŚDhU dhairyāt JA YB ŚDhU ] dhairyaṃ DhP saṃtoṣāt JA YB ŚDhU ] santoṣas DhP darśanāt YB ŚDhU ] darśanam DhP, niścayāt JA janasaṅgaparityāgāt ] muner janapadatyāgād JA YB ŚDhU, kratūnāṃ copasaṃhāraḥ DhP ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati JA YB ŚDhU ] ṣaṭsādhanam iti smṛtam DhP
saṃtoṣāt tattvadarśanāt ] tatvajñānād viniścayāt YCM
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 1.78:utsāhān niścayād dhairyāt tattvajñānārthadarśanāt/
bindusthairyān mitāhārāj janasaṅgavivarjanāt//
nidrātyāgāj jitaśvāsāt pīṭhasthairyād anālasāt/
gurvācāryaprasādāc ca ebhir yogas tu sidhyati//
हठस्य प्रथमाङ्गत्वाद्आसनं पूर्वमुच्यते ।
तत्कुर्यादासनं स्थैर्यमारोग्यं चाङ्गपाटवम् ॥
haṭhasya prathamāṅgatvādāsanaṃ pūrvam ucyate /
tat kuryād āsanaṃ sthairyam ārogyaṃ cāṅgapāṭavam //
The reading aṅgapāṭavam is attested among many of the early manuscripts, including the α group. Although this compound rarely appears in other yoga texts, a similar term, śarīrapāṭava, occurs in the Śivasaṃhitā (2.35) as one of the benefits bestowed by digestive fire (vaiśvānarāgni), which indicates that the word pāṭava was used in relation to the body and the benefits of yoga. The compound aṅgapāṭava seems to imply the optimal functioning of the body. The variant reading, aṅgalāghava (‘lightness of the limbs’ or ‘dexterity’) is more common in yoga texts and similar formulations occur even in works known to Svātmārāma, such as the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (śarīralaghutā) and the Amanaska ([...] laghutvaṃ ca śarīrasyopajāyate). It appears that the less common term aṅgapāṭavam was changed to the more widely used notion of aṅgalāghava, perhaps early in the transmission, as the latter is attested by manuscripts in several early groups (i.e. γ, δ, and π).
आसनं कुम्भकं चित्रं मुद्राख्यं करणं तथा
अथ नादानुसन्धानम्
āsanaṃ kumbhakaṃ citraṃ mudrākhyaṃ karaṇaṃ tathā
atha nādānusandhānam
pūrvam ucyate YCM ] darśyate mayā HRĀ āsanaṃ HRĀ ] āsana YCM pāṭavam HRĀ ] lāghavaṃ YCM
वसिष्ठाद्यैश्च मुनिभिर्मत्स्येन्द्राद्यैश्च योगिभिः ।
अङ्गीकृतान्यासनानि कथ्यन्ते कानिचिन्मया ॥*
vasiṣṭhādyaiś ca munibhir matsyendrādyaiś ca yogibhiḥ /
aṅgīkṛtāny āsanāni kathyante kānicin mayā //*
On the historical implications of these two traditions of postural practice in early Haṭhayoga, see Mallinson 2016: 119–122 and Birch 2018a: 45–46.
kathyante ] lakṣyante HRĀ, vakṣyante YCM
जानूर्वोरन्तरे सम्यक् कृत्वा पादतले उभे ।
ऋजुकायः समासीनः स्वस्तिकं तत्प्रचक्षते ॥
jānūrvor antare samyak kṛtvā pādatale ubhe /
ṛjukāyaḥ samāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate //
One might wonder how the soles of the feet could be placed between the knees and thighs. Brahmānanda explains that the region of the shank near the knee should be understood by the word ‘knee’ in this verse (atra jānuśabdena jānusaṃnihito jaṅghāpradeśo grāhyaḥ jānusaṃnihito jaṅghāpradeśaḥ). This is consistent with the earliest known description of svastikāsana, found in the Pātañjalayogaśāstravivaraṇa (2.46), which states that the big toe of one foot is tucked in between the shank and thigh of the other so it is not seen (dakṣiṇaṃ pādāṅguṣṭhaṃ savyenorujaṅghena parigṛhyādṛśyaṃ kṛtvā tathā savyaṃ pādāṅguṣṭhaṃ dakṣiṇenorujaṅghenādṛśyaṃ parigṛhya yathā ca pārṣṇibhyāṃ vṛṣaṇayor apīḍaṇaṃ tathā yenāste tat svastikam āsanam). For a discussion of svastikāsana in the Pātañjalayoga tradition, see Maas 2018: 68–69. The descriptions of svastikāsana in early Śaiva Tantras do not mention the inserting of the toes between the knees and thighs (see Goodall 2004: 348–350, fn. 371).
ऊरुजङ्घान्तराधाय प्रपदे जानुमध्यगे
योगिनो यदवस्थानं स्वस्तिकं तद्विदुर्बुधाः इति
ūrujaṅghāntar ādhāya prapade jānumadhyage
yogino yad avasthānaṃ svastikaṃ tad vidur budhāḥ iti
antare ŚT YY ] antaraṃ VS samāsīnaḥ ] sukhāsīnaḥ YY, tathāsīnaḥ VS, viśed yogī ST
antare YCM ] antaraṃ HRĀ pādatale YCM ] padatale HRĀ ṛjukāyaḥ YCM ] ṛjukāya HRĀ
सव्ये दक्षिणगुल्फं तु पृष्ठपार्श्वे नियोजयेत् ।
दक्षिणेऽपि तथा सव्यं गोमुखं गोमुखं यथा ॥
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niyojayet /
dakṣiṇe’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ gomukhaṃ yathā //
This posture first appears in some Vaiṣṇava Saṃhitās that predate the Haṭhapradīpikā, including the Ahirbudhnyasaṃhitā and the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, which is likely to have been the source of this verse. The position of the ankles is the same in all the source texts. The Ahirbudhnyasaṃhitā adds that the hands are crossed behind the back and hold the big toes. For illustrations of six possible positions of the arms and hands, see Gharote, Jha, Devnath, Sakhalkar 2006: 111–113.
niyojayet ] niveśayet VS YY gomukhaṃ gomukhaṃ yathā YY ] gomukhaṃ tat pracakṣate VS
Cf. Ahirbudhnyasaṃhitā 31.45cd–46ubhayor gulphayoḥ kṛtvā pṛṣṭhapārśvāv ubhāv api//
vyutkrameṇātha pāṇibhyāṃ vinyastābhyāṃ vigṛhya ca/
pṛṣṭhagābhyāṃ padāṅguṣṭhāv etad gomukham ucyate//
niyojayet HRĀ ] niveśayet YCM gomukhaṃ yathā YCM ] gomukhāsanam HRĀ
एकं पादमथैकस्मिन्विन्यस्योरुणि संस्थितम् ।
इतरस्मिंस्तथा चोरुं वीरासनमितीरितम् ॥
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitam /
itarasmiṃs tathā coruṃ vīrāsanam itīritam //
Although most witnesses have tathā in 1.21a, the word atha has been accepted because it is attested by α3 and η1, the sources and the testimonia. It appears to be verse filler here rather than indicating
a temporal sequence of actions. Svātmārāma borrowed the verse on vīrāsana from the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, the redactor of which appears to have adapted its first line from a description
of this posture in the Śāradātilakatantra. This would explain the rather strange syntax of the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā’s version, in which adhaḥ kṛtvā was changed to athaikasmin, and tathetaram became ca saṃsthitam. It seems that saṃsthitaṃ must be understood with ūruṃ in the third pāda in the sense of saṃsthāpya (i.e. ‘having placed’).
Different versions of vīrāsana are found in earlier tantric and yogic works, such as the Kiraṇatantra, Hemacandra’s Yogaśāstra and commentaries on the Pātañjalayogaśāstra. For a discussion of some of these, see Maas 2018: 66–68.
vinyasyoruṇi YY ] vinyasyorau VS tathā coruṃ YY ] tathaivoruṃ VS itīritam VS ] udāhṛtam YY
Cf. Śāradātilakatantra 25.15cd–16abekaṃ pādam adhaḥ kṛtvā vinyasyorau tathetaram//
ṛjukāyo viśed yogī vīrāsanam itīritam/
vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitam ] vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitaḥ YCM, vinyased ūruṇi sthiram HRĀ, vinyased ūruṇi sthitam HRĀv.l. itīritam HRĀ ] udāhṛtam YCM
गुदं निष्पीड्य गुल्फाभ्यां व्युत्क्रमेण समाहितः ।
कूर्मासनं भवेदेतदिति योगविदो विदुः ॥
gudaṃ niṣpīḍya gulphābhyāṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ /
kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad iti yogavido viduḥ //
In the first quarter of the verse, the witnesses are split between nirudhya (‘having blocked’), nibadhya (‘having bound’), niyamya (‘having restrained’) and niṣpīḍya (‘having pressed’). The source, the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, and two manuscripts of the γ and π groups support nirudhya whereas α2 and the testimonia support niyamya and α3 has niṣpīḍya. While nirudhya makes sense here (i.e. ‘having blocked or closed the anus...’), we have adopted niṣpīḍya because it is better attested among the α, ε and η groups.
The word vyutkrameṇa describes the position of the ankles. Its basic meaning is ‘against the normal direction.’
In āsana descriptions it usually means ‘crossed’ (see e.g. Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā 1.71), which is how we have understood it here. It could also mean ‘turned out’:
if the yogi is in a kneeling-type position, turning the feet out would bring the ankles
together, blocking the perineal area. See Yoga Mīmāṃsā, vol. 8, no. 2 (1965: 29–30) for a discussion of vyutkrameṇa and the position of the ankles in kūrmāsana, and vol. 8, no. 2, figures 3–6 for photographs of a practitioner performing this
āsana.
niṣpīḍya ] nipīḍya ABS, nirudhya VS kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad VS ] etat kūrmāsanaṃ proktaṃ ABS iti yogavido viduḥ VS ] yogasiddhikaraṃ param ABS
niṣpīḍya ] niyamya YCM YBhD
पद्मासनं सुसंस्थाप्य जानूर्वोरन्तरे करौ ।
निवेश्य भूमौ संस्थाप्य व्योमस्थः कुक्कुटासनम् ॥
padmāsanaṃ susaṃsthāpya jānūrvor antare karau /
niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya vyomasthaḥ kukkuṭāsanam //
The names kurkuṭa and kurkkuṭa in some manuscripts are variant spellings of kukkuṭa attested in the Pañcatantra (MW).
susaṃsthāpya ] samāsthāya VS, adhiṣṭhāya ABS jānūrvor antare karau VS ] jānvantaraviniḥsṛtau ABS niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya VSv.l. ] bhūmau niveśya saṃsthāpya VS, karau bhūmau niveśyaitad ABS vyomasthaḥ ] vyomasthaṃ VS ABS
susaṃsthāpya HRĀ ] tu saṃyojya YCM YBhD vyomasthaḥ HRĀ ] vyomasthaṃ YCM YBhD
कुक्कुटासनबन्धस्थो दोर्भ्यां संबध्य कन्धराम् ।
शेते कूर्मवदुत्तान एतदुत्तानकूर्मकम् ॥
kukkuṭāsanabandhastho dorbhyāṃ saṃbadhya kandharām /
śete kūrmavad uttāna etad uttānakūrmakam //
The oldest dated manuscript, η1, has kukkuṭāsanavat kṛtvā, which is a simpler alternative to the widely attested reading kukkuṭāsanabandhasthaḥ (including α2 and α3), which we have accepted. Since there is no known source for this verse other than the Haṭhapradīpikā, it appears that the reading of η1 was an isolated attempt to simplify the syntax.
uttāna etad ] uttānam etad HRĀ YCM YBhD
पादाङ्गुष्ठौ तु पाणिभ्यां गृहीत्वा श्रवणावधि ।
धनुराकर्षणं कृत्वा धनुरासनमुच्यते ॥
pādāṅguṣṭhau tu pāṇibhyāṃ gṛhītvā śravaṇāvadhi /
dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā dhanurāsanam ucyate //
We have adopted the reading dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā, which is in the δ group, as well as the principal testimonia (i.e. the Yogacintāmaṇi and Haṭharatnāvalī), because it fits the overall syntax of the verse, unlike the readings with kṛṣṭaṃ (for kṛtvā) that are found in the early manuscripts. It is curious that kṛṣṭaṃ is so well attested because it seems redundant with ākarṣaṇaṃ. The following reading in Godāvaramiśra’s Yogacintāmaṇi (f. 40r) appears to be an attempt to make sense of kṛṣṭaṃ: dhanurākarṣavat kṛṣṭaṃ dhanurāsanam ucyate.
A different version of dhanurāsana is described in the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā. On the two versions of dhanurāsana, see Hargreaves and Birch 2017.
One of the collated manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, ζ3, has a scribal comment stating that dhanurāsana should be done continuously (anavarata) on the left and right sides (tatra ekam dhanurākarṣaṇāsanam āsanaṃ savyāpasavyapādahastābhyām [abhy]ased anavaratam). This would make dhanurāsana a dynamic practice as shown in this video.
tu HRĀ YBhD ] ca YCM ākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā HRĀ YCM YBhD ] ākarṣaṇākṛṣṭaṃ HRĀv.l. ucyate HRĀ ] īritam YCM YBhD
Cf. Haṭhayogasaṃhitā p. 21dhanurāsanam/
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau karau ca pṛṣṭhe dhṛtapādayugmau/
kṛtvā dhanustulyavivarttitāṅgaṃ nigadyate vai dhanurāsanaṃ tat// 25//
वामोरुमूलार्पितदक्षपादं
जानोर्बहिर्वेष्टितदक्षदोष्णा ।
प्रगृह्य तिष्ठेत्परिवर्तिताङ्गः
श्रीमत्स्यनाथोदितमासनं स्यात् ॥
vāmorumūlārpitadakṣapādaṃ
jānor bahirveṣṭitadakṣadoṣṇā /
pragṛhya tiṣṭhet parivartitāṅgaḥ
śrīmatsyanāthoditam āsanaṃ syāt //
In the second verse quarter, most of the manuscript groups have a compound with doṣṇā at the end, as seen also in the Yogacintāmaṇi, Haṭharatnāvalī and Yuktabhavadeva. The instrumental ending (‘with the hand’) works well with the gerund (pragṛhya) in the third verse quarter and the object (dakṣpādaṃ) in the first quarter. This reading indicates that the right foot is held by the
hand of the arm that is wrapped around the outside of the left leg, which would be
the right hand (dakṣadoṣṇā) rather than the left (vāmadoṣṇā), as shown in Figure 1.
α3 and most manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī have dakṣapādo in the first pāda. This reading yields the same meaning as the adopted one if read with vāmapādaṃ in the second. However, α3 and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī read vāmadoṣṇā, which is not good because it leaves the gerund without an object.
The version of this verse in Jyotsnā (1.26), which is supported by some manuscripts in two important groups, η and π,
has two objects of the gerund, namely the left and right feet, without an instrumental
or conjunctive particle. In his commentarial remarks, Brahmānanda proposes that the
left foot is grasped by the right hand and the right foot by the left foot, as seen
in Figure 2.
dakṣapādaṃ HRĀv.l.YCM YBhD ] dakṣapādo HRĀ, dakṣapādau HRĀv.l. jānor ] jānvor HRĀ YCM YBhD tiṣṭhet HRĀ YCM ] tiṣṭhan YBhD
मत्स्येन्द्रपीठं जठरप्रचण्ड-
पिचण्डरुङ्मण्डलखण्डनास्त्रम् ।
अभ्यासतः कुण्डलिनीप्रबोधं
दण्डस्थिरत्वं च ददाति पुंसाम् ॥
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharapracaṇḍa-
picaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanāstram /
abhyāsataḥ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍasthiratvaṃ ca dadāti puṃsām //
Here we understand jaṭhara, which usually refers to the stomach, to mean “tough” or “persistent” (cf. Amarakośa 3.3.189: jaṭharaḥ kaṭhine’pi syād adhastād api cādharaḥ).
In 1.27d, the compound daṇḍasthiratvaṃ (‘steadiness of the spine’) is attested by all the important manuscript groups and
testimonia, so it was likely original. However, the Jyotsnā (1.27d) has candrasthiratvaṃ (‘steadiness of the moon’), and this reading is well-attested in many manuscripts
that are lower on the stemma. Brahmānanda understands steadiness here as ‘the absence
of flow’ (sthiratvaṃ kṣaraṇābhāvaṃ), a reference to the moon retaining its nectar.
jaṭharapracaṇḍa HTK ] jaṭharapradīptaṃ HRĀ, jaṭharapravṛddha YCM, jaṭharapravṛddhiṃ YCMv.l., jaṭharaprabuddhaṃ YBhD picaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍala ] pracaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍala YCM YBhD, pracaṇḍarugmaṇḍala HRĀ, ruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍana HTK abhyāsataḥ HRĀ YCM HTK ] abhyasataṃ YBhD daṇḍa HRĀ HTK YBhD ] daṇḍe YCM ca dadāti HRĀ HTK YBhD ] pradadāti YCM
प्रसार्य पादौ भुवि दण्डरूपौ
दोर्भ्यां पदाग्रद्वितयं गृहीत्वा ।
जानूपरिन्यस्तललाटदेशो
वसेदिदं पश्चिमताणमाहुः ॥
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃ gṛhītvā /
jānūparinyastalalāṭadeśo
vased idaṃ paścimatāṇam āhuḥ //
The reading dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃ is well attested but is somewhat strange because dos usually means ‘the arm’ rather than the hands. The variant dvābhyāṃ karābhyāṃ dvitayaṃ, “with both hands”, appears to be an attempt to remove dorbhyāṃ, but it introduces the problem of the toes not being mentioned.
prasārya caraṇadvandvaṃ parasparasusaṃyutam/
svapāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ dhṛtvā jānūpari śiro nyaset//
dorbhyāṃ HRĀ YBhD ] dvābhyāṃ HRĀv.l., YCM padāgradvitayaṃ HRĀ ] ca pādadvitayaṃ YCM YBhD, karābhyāṃ dvitayaṃ HRĀv.l. lalāṭadeśo HRĀ YCM ] lalāṭapaṭṭo YBhD vased idaṃ HRĀ ] ’bhyased idaṃ YCM, nyased idaṃ YBhD
इति पश्चिमताणमासनाग्र्यं
पवनं पश्चिमवाहिनं करोति ।
उदयं जठरानलस्य कुर्या-
दुदरे कार्श्यमरोगतां च पुंसाम् ॥
iti paścimatāṇam āsanāgryaṃ
pavanaṃ paścimavāhinaṃ karoti /
udayaṃ jaṭharānalasya kuryā-
d udare kārśyam arogatāṃ ca puṃsām //
The use of the word paścima to mean the central channel is found at Yogabīja 95 (paścimamārgataḥ), 108 (paścime pathi), 117 (paścimadvāramārgeṇa) and 121 (paścimaṃ). Cf. the usages of paścimamārga in Dattātreyayogaśāstra 140 and Śivasaṃhitā 3.110 (from which this verse is likely to be derived). Brahmānanda understands paścima as referring to the Suṣumṇā (Jyotsnā 1.29): paścimavāhinaṃ paścimena paścimamārgeṇa suṣumṇāmārgeṇa vahatīti paścimavāhī.
āsanāgryam idaṃ proktaṃ jaṭharānaladīpanam/
dehāvasādaharaṇaṃ paścimottānasaṃjñakam//
ya etad āsanaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ pratyahaṃ sādhayet sudhīḥ/
vāyuḥ paścimamārgeṇa tasya saṃcarati dhruvam//
arogatāṃ HRĀ ] arogitāṃ YCM
धरामवष्टभ्य करस्थलाभ्यां
तत्कूर्परस्थापितनाभिपार्श्वः ।
उच्चासनो दण्डवदुत्थितः खे
मयूरमेतत्प्रवदन्ति पीठम् ॥
dharām avaṣṭabhya karasthalābhyāṃ
tat kūrparasthāpitanābhipārśvaḥ /
uccāsano daṇḍavad utthitaḥ khe
mayūram etat pravadanti pīṭham //
There is no direct source of this verse, but it has the same elements as two verses
in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (1.76–77), which are themselves derived from earlier Vaiṣṇava sources (see Mallinson 2014: 227 n. 9). The compound uccāsanaḥ in the third verse quarter seems to approximate in a somewhat vague way the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā’s reading samunnataśiraḥpādaḥ.
In the second verse quarter, the pronoun in tatkūrpara° refers to the two hands. This is stated more explicitly (i.e. hastayoḥ kūrparau) in Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā 1.76c and Yogayājñavalkya 3.15c.
avaṣṭabhya dharāṃ samyak talābhyāṃ ca karadvayam/
hastayoḥ kūrparau cāpi sthāpayan nābhipārśvayoḥ//
samunnataśiraḥpādo daṇḍavad vyomni saṃsthitaḥ/
mayūrāsanam etad dhi sarvapāpavināśanam//
76b ca karadvayam ] karayor dvayoḥ
karasthalābhyāṃ ] karadvayena HRĀ, punaḥ karābhyāṃ YCM kūrpara ] kūrpare HRĀ YCM uccāsano HRĀ ] tadāsane YCM pīṭham HRĀ ] santaḥ YCM mayūram HRĀ YCM ] māyūram HRĀv.l.
हरति सकलरोगानाशु गुल्मोदरादी-
नभिभवति च दोषानासनं श्रीमयूरम् ।
बहुकदशनभुक्तं भस्म कुर्यादशेषं
जनयति जठराग्निं जारयेत्कालकूटम् ॥
harati sakalarogān āśu gulmodarādī-
n abhibhavati ca doṣān āsanaṃ śrīmayūram /
bahukadaśanabhuktaṃ bhasma kuryād aśeṣaṃ
janayati jaṭharāgniṃ jārayet kālakūṭam //
aśeṣam YCM ] vicitram HRĀ jārayet YCM ] jīryate HRĀ
उत्तानशववद्भूमौ शयनं तु शवासनम् ।
सर्वासनश्रान्तिहरं चित्तविश्रान्तिसाधनम् ॥
uttānaśavavad bhūmau śayanaṃ tu śavāsanam /
sarvāsanaśrāntiharaṃ cittaviśrāntisādhanam //
uttānaśavavad bhūmau śayanaṃ coktam uttamam//
śayanaṃ tu śavāsanam YBhD ] śavāsanam idaṃ smṛtam YCM sarvāsana ] śavāsanaṃ YCM YBhD sādhanam YCM ] kārakam YBhD
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 3.76athāntimaṃ śavāsanam
prasārya hastapādau ca viśrāntyā śayanaṃ tathā/
sarvāsanaśramaharaṃ śayitaṃ tu śavāsanam//
śavāsanaṃ hṛtkupitavātagranthivibhedakam/
sarvāsanaśrāntijit hṛtśramaghnaṃ yogisaukhyadam//
चतुराशीत्यासनानि शिवेन कथितानि तु ।
तेभ्यश्चतुष्कमादाय सारभूतं ब्रवीम्यहम् ॥
caturāśītyāsanāni śivena kathitāni tu /
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya sārabhūtaṃ bravīmy aham //
The word tu is often used to introduce a new posture, but in this case seems to be a verse filler.
In the first and third verse quarters, Svātmārāma appears to have rewritten Śivasaṃhitā 3.96 to include the information that it was Śiva (śivena) who taught the eighty-four āsanas, whereas in the source Śiva is himself speaking. Svātmārāma also changes the meaning
of the second half of the verse, as the Śivasaṃhitā states that Śiva picked out the four best postures and taught them, whereas in the
Haṭhapradīpikā it reads as though Svātmārāma himself is responsible for picking out the four best
postures and teaching them. There are other instances in the Haṭhapradīpikā where Svātmārāma borrows a verse with a first person verb (e.g. 3.43). However, in
this instance, he may have intended to indicate that he chose the four postures coming
after this verse (i.e. siddha, padma, siṃha and bhadra) because the Śivasaṃhitā follows 3.96 with teachings on the postures called siddha, padma, paścimottāna and svastika. The vocative here (sakhe) is also found in Haṭhapradīpikā 4.56, which is also likely to be an authorial verse.
आसनानि च तावन्ति यावन्त्यो जीवजातयः
एतेषामखिलान्भेदान्विजानाति महेश्वरः
चतुराशीतिलक्षाणि एकैकं समुदाहृतम्
ततः शिवेन पीठानां षोडशोनं शतं कृतमिति.
āsanāni ca tāvanti yāvantyo jīvajātayaḥ
eteṣām akhilān bhedān vijānāti maheśvaraḥ
caturāśītilakṣāṇi ekaikaṃ samudāhṛtam
tataḥ śivena pīṭhānāṃ ṣoḍaśonaṃ śataṃ kṛtam iti.
caturaśīty āsanāni santi nānāvidhāni ca/
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya mayoktāni bravīmy aham//
caturāśītilakṣānām ekaikaṃ samudāhṛtaṃ/
ataḥ śivena pīṭhānāṃ ṣoḍaśonaṃ śataṃ kṛtam//
tu HRĀ ] vai YCM
सिद्धं पद्मं तथा सिंहं भद्रं चेति चतुष्टयम् ।
श्रेष्ठं तत्रापि च सखे तिष्ठ सिद्धासने सदा ॥
siddhaṃ padmaṃ tathā siṃhaṃ bhadraṃ ceti catuṣṭayam /
śreṣṭhaṃ tatrāpi ca sakhe tiṣṭha siddhāsane sadā //
It is likely that the original version of this verse contained the vocative with the imperative form of the verb (sakhe tiṣṭha). There are other instances where Svātmārāma included a verse with the vocative (e.g. 4.7c, 4.56b, 4.72d, 4.74c) as though the text were a dialogue. Other versions of this verse are transmitted by some manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, in which the vocative and imperative verb have been removed. In these cases, sukhe and sukham are difficult to construe because the context suggests that the intended meaning was that one should always sit in siddhāsana (as opposed to the other three āsanas), rather than the prescription to always sit in a comfortable siddhāsana.
siṃhaṃ HRĀ ] bhadraṃ YCM bhadraṃ HRĀ ] siṃhaṃ YCM ca HRĀ ] vai YCM sakhe HRĀv.l. ] tathā HRĀ, satve HRĀv.l., padmam YCM tiṣṭha ] tiṣṭhet HRĀ YCM
योनिस्थानकमङ्घ्रिमूलघटितं कृत्वा दृढं विन्यसे –
न्मेढ्रे पादमथैकमेकहृदयो धृत्वा समं विग्रहम् ।
स्थाणुः संयमितेन्द्रियोऽचलदृशा पश्यन् भ्रुवोरन्तरं
चैतन्मोक्षकपाटभेदजनकं सिद्धासनं प्रोच्यते ॥
yonisthānakam aṅghrimūlaghaṭitaṃ kṛtvā dṛḍhaṃ vinyase –
n meḍhre pādam athaikam ekahṛdayo dhṛtvā samaṃ vigraham /
sthāṇuḥ saṃyamitendriyo’caladṛśā paśyan bhruvor antaraṃ
caitanmokṣakapāṭabhedajanakaṃ siddhāsanaṃ procyate //
In the second verse quarter, the adopted reading ekahṛdayo is supported by two manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā (J2 and ) and is close to the α1 reading ekahṛdaye. It is also attested by the six-chapter Vivekamārtaṇḍa and the Yogacintāmaṇi, which attributes this verse to an unkown work called the Pavanayogasaṅgraha. In this case, ekahṛdayaḥ appears to describe the yogi as having his mind focused on one thing. There are many variations of this verse quarter in the Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts, as well as in the manuscripts of the sources and testimonia. Most of the collated witnesses have athaikam eva hṛdaye dhṛtvā, which is close to the adopted reading. Other readings allude here to the practice of the Jālandhara lock, in which the chin is placed on the chest. This is most clearly seen in the Jyotsnā’s version, hṛdaye kṛtvā hanuṃ susthiram (‘having put the jaw firmly on the chest’). The other well-attested reading, athaikaṃ eva niyataṃ, was an attempt to fix the problem of hṛdaye by replacing it with niyatam, which must be read with meḍhre pādam athaikaṃ (‘having fixed one foot on the penis’), but niyatam is redundant here because of vinyaset in the first verse quarter.
athaikam ekahṛdayo VM ] athaikadeśahṛdayo VMv.l., athaikam eva niyataṃ VMv.l., athaikam eva hṛdayaṃ VMv.l., athaikam ekahṛdayaḥ VMv.l. dhṛtvā VM ] kṛtvā VMv.l. paśyan VM ] paśyed VMv.l., paśyad VMv.l.
yonisthānakam HRĀ YCM ] yonidvārakam HRĀv.l. ekahṛdayo ] ekahṛdayaḥ YCM, eva niyataṃ HRĀ eva hṛdaye HRĀv.l. dhṛtvā ] kṛtvā HRĀ YCM paśyan HRĀ ] paśyed YCM caitan HRĀ ] etan YCM kapāṭa HRĀ YCM ] kavāṭa HRĀv.l. janakaṃ HRĀ ] nakaraṃ YCM
मेढ्रादुपरि निक्षिप्य सव्यगुल्फं तथोपरि ।
गुल्फान्तरं च निक्षिप्य सिद्धासनमिदं भवेत् ॥
meḍhrād upari nikṣipya savyagulphaṃ tathopari /
gulphāntaraṃ ca nikṣipya siddhāsanam idaṃ bhavet //
Svātmārāma’s introductory and following remarks to verse 1.36 indicate that he preferred the siddhāsana of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa over the version taught as muktāsana in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā and Yogayājñavalkya.
ca nikṣipya YY ] vinikṣipya VS bhavet ] smṛtam VS, tu vā YY
nikṣipya ] niḥkṣipya HRĀ, vinyasya YCM ca niḥkṣipya HRĀ ] tu vinyasya YCM siddhāsanam idaṃ bhavet YCM ] siddhāḥ siddhāsanaṃ viduḥ HRĀ
एतत्सिद्धासनं प्राहुरन्ये वज्रासनं विदुः ।
मुक्तासनं वदन्त्येके प्राहुर्गुप्तासनं परे ॥
etat siddhāsanaṃ prāhur anye vajrāsanaṃ viduḥ /
muktāsanaṃ vadanty eke prāhur guptāsanaṃ pare //
etat siddhāsanaṃ prāhuḥ padmāsanam atho viduḥ/
guptāsanaṃ vadanty eke prāhur vajrāsanaṃ pare/
ke cin muktāsanaṃ prāhur idam āsanam uttamam//
siddāsanambunu, gondaru vajrāsanambaniyu/
gondaru muktāsanambaniyu, gondadu gulbāsanam//
kondaru siddāsanamani
kondaru vajrāsanamani koniyādudurī
pondaga dīnini mariyoka
kondaru guptāsamanu kondru mahātmā
यमेष्विव मिताहारमहिंसां नियमेष्विव ।
मुख्यं सर्वासनेष्वेकं सिद्धाः सिद्धासनं विदुः ॥
yameṣv iva mitāhāram ahiṃsāṃ niyameṣv iva /
mukhyaṃ sarvāsaneṣv ekaṃ siddhāḥ siddhāsanaṃ viduḥ //
laghvāhāras tu teṣv eko mukhyo bhavati nāpare/
ahiṃsā niyameṣv eko mukhyo bhavati nāpare// 33//
yameṣv iva ] niyameṣu YCM mitāhāram ] mitāharo YCM ahiṃsāṃ niyameṣv iva ] yathāhiṃsā yameṣv iva YCM ekaṃ ] evaṃ YCM siddhāḥ siddhāsanaṃ viduḥ ] siddhāsanaṃ idaṃ viduḥ YCM
चतुराशीतिपीठेषु सिद्धमेव सदा भजेत् ।
द्वासप्ततिसहस्रेषु सुषुम्णामिव नाडिषु ॥
caturāśītipīṭheṣu siddham eva sadā bhajet /
dvāsaptatisahasreṣu suṣumṇām iva nāḍiṣu //
Most witnesses have suṣumṇām as the object of the verb abhyaset, which is odd. Others have tried to make sense of this by changing suṣumnām iva nāḍiṣu to nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam, which occurs in the Jyotsnā (1.39), Kumbhakapaddhati (120), and Haṭhayoga (quoted in the Yogacintāmaṇi, f. 79r). This variant reading is probably a patch as no other texts say that siddhāsana clears the channels. It could have been borrowed from verse 3.102*1ab, which has the same half-verse and was added to the section on śakticālana.
siddham eva YSS ] siddhāsanaṃ YCM sadā bhajet ] samabhyaset YCM YSS
आत्मध्यायी मिताहारी यावद्द्वादशवत्सरम् ।
सदा सिद्धासनाभ्यासाद्योगी निष्पत्तिमाप्नुयात् ।
श्रमदैर्बहुभिः पीठैः किं स्यात्सिद्धासने सति ॥
ātmadhyāyī mitāhārī yāvad dvādaśavatsaram /
sadā siddhāsanābhyāsād yogī niṣpattim āpnuyāt /
śramadair bahubhiḥ pīṭhaiḥ kiṃ syāt siddhāsane sati //
The notion of āsanas causing fatigue (śrama) was mentioned earlier in the verse on the corpse pose (1.32).
ātmadhyāyī YCM ] ātmadhyāyo YSS yogī YCM ] yoga YSS kiṃ syāt YCM ] alaṃ YSS
प्राणानिले सावधानं बद्धे केवलकुम्भके ।
उत्पद्यते निरायासात्स्वयमेवोन्मनी यथा ॥
prāṇānile sāvadhānaṃ baddhe kevalakumbhake /
utpadyate nirāyāsāt svayam evonmanī yathā //
sāvadhānaṃ ] sāvadhāne YCM utpadyate ] utpatsyate YCM
तथैकस्मिन्नेव दृढं बद्धे सिद्धासने सदा ।
बन्धत्रयमनायासात् स्वयमेवोपजायते ॥
tathaikasminn eva dṛḍhaṃ baddhe siddhāsane sadā /
bandhatrayam anāyāsāt svayam evopajāyate //
पार्ष्णिभागेन सम्पीड्य योनिमाकुञ्चयेद्गुदम्
pārṣṇibhāgena sampīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam
tathaikasminn YSS ] athaikasminn YCM bandhatrayam YCM ] granthitrayam YSS evopajāyate YCM ] evopabhidyate YSS
नासनं सिद्धसदृशं न कुम्भः केवलोपमः ।
न खेचरीसमा मुद्रा न नादसदृशो लयः ॥
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ /
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ //
na kumbhaḥ ] na kumbha ŚS kevalopamaḥ ] sadṛśaṃ balam ŚS
kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ HRĀ YCM ] kumbhasadṛśo ’nilaḥ HRĀv.l.
वामोरूपरि दक्षिणं च चरणं संस्थाप्य वामं तथा
याम्योरूपरि पश्चिमेन विधिना धृत्वा कराभ्यां दृढम् ।
अङ्गुष्ठौ हृदये निधाय चिबुकं नासाग्रमालोकये-
देतद्व्याधिविघातकारि यमिनां पद्मासनं प्रोच्यते ॥
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇaṃ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya vāmaṃ tathā
yāmyorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ dṛḍham /
aṅguṣṭhau hṛdaye nidhāya cibukaṃ nāsāgram ālokaye-
d etad vyādhivighātakāri yamināṃ padmāsanaṃ procyate //
vighātakāri yamināṃ ] vikārahāri yamināṃ VM, vighātahāri yamināṃ VMv.l., vikāranāśanakaraṃ VMv.l., vikārakaṃdadamanaṇ VMv.l., vināśakāri yamināṃ VMv.l.
ca HRĀ ] hi YCM yāmyorūpari HRĀ ] dakṣorūpari YCM vighātakāri yamināṃ ] vināśakāri yamināṃ HRĀ, vikāranāśanakaraṃ YCM
उत्तानौ चरणौ कृत्वा ऊरुसंस्थौ प्रयत्नतः ।
ऊरुमध्ये तथोत्तानौ पाणी कृत्वा ततो दृशौ ॥
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ /
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau //
नासाग्रे विन्यसेद्राजदन्तमूलं च जिह्वया ।
उत्तभ्य चिबुकं वक्षस्यास्थाप्य पवनं शनैः ॥
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā /
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ //
The syntax of this verse as we have presented it is incomplete: at its end pavanaṃ śanaiḥ, ‘the breath gradually’, is left hanging. In the source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, the following verse completes the syntax with pūrayed, “one should inhale”. Either Svātmārāma chose to leave the verse hanging (the following
verse in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra adds nothing about the form of the posture, which is the topic here) or the verse
that completes the syntax fell out, perhaps because of a scribal error that happened
early in the transmission. In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra verses 36 and 37 both end with pavanaṃ śanaiḥ, the repetition of which may have caused an eyeskip.
The manuscript readings with vakṣa sthāpayet (η2 and πω) or something similar (η1) do not offer a solution to the incomplete syntax and do not indicate that Svātmārāma
rewrote Dattātreyayogaśāstra 36 so that he could omit Dattātreyayogaśāstra 37. (The readings osthāpyot (α2 and π1) and otthāpya (ζ3) are surprising and are perhaps Middle Indic forms in which Sanskrit ava- becomes o-.) In the absence of evidence that Svātmārāma included Dattātreyayogaśāstra 37 or wrote a coherent version of Haṭhapradīpikā 1.46, we have made sense of pavanaṃ śanaiḥ by adding “[draw in]” in our translation.
Brahmānanda’s comment on the statement, ‘having raised the root of the uvula with
the tongue’ (rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā uttabhya) in 1.46 is worth noting. In the context of Haṭhayoga, one would assume this statement
to be referring to a type of khecarīmudrā, in which the tongue lifts the root of the uvula, here called the ‘royal tooth’ (rājadanta, on the meaning of which see Mallinson 2007: 209 n. 258). However, Brahmānanda understands it differently (synonyms omitted
for clarity):
rājadantānāṃ daṃṣṭrāṇāṃ savyadakṣiṇabhāge sthitānāṃ mūle ubhe mūlasthāne jihvayā uttambhya ūrdhvaṃ stambhayitvā/ gurumukhād avagantavyo’yaṃ jihvābandhaḥ/
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ/
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau//
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā/
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ//
yathāśaktyā samākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ/
yathāśaktyaiva paścāt tu recayet pavanaṃ śanaiḥ//
vakṣasy DYŚ ] vakṣe ŚS DYŚv.l., vakṣaḥ DYŚv.l., vakṣya DYŚv.l.
āsthāpya DYŚ ] saṃsthāpya ŚS DYŚv.l., āsthāya DYŚv.l., sthāpayet DYŚv.l., vakṣastha DYŚv.l.
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 3.102–104uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ/
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tu tādṛśau//
nāsāgre vinyased dṛṣṭiṃ rājadantaṃ ca jihvayā/
uttambhya cibukaṃ vakṣe saṃsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ//
yathāśaktyā samākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ/
yathāśaktyaiva paścāt tu recayed anirodhataḥ//
ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ YCM ] ūrvoḥ saṃsthāpya yatnataḥ HRĀ ca HRĀ ] tu YCM vakṣasyāsthāpya ] vakṣaḥ saṃsthāpya HRĀ, vakṣasy utthāpya YCM
इदं पद्मासनं प्रोक्तं सर्वव्याधिविनाशनम् ।
दुर्लभं येन केनापि धीमता लभ्यते भुवि ॥
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ proktaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam /
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate bhuvi //
In this context, the word durlabham is somewhat ambiguous as to whether the posture is hard to perform or hard to acquire
(the more usual meaning). In commenting on durlabham in Jyotsnā 2.74, Brahmānanda glosses it as duṣprāpam, which means ‘difficult to attain’ and ‘inaccessible.’
The comment added to this verse by Svātmārāma indicates that he prefers the second
version of padmāsana, which derives from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, rather than the one he has borrowed from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
proktaṃ DYŚv.l.ŚS ] nāma DYŚ dhīmatā DYŚ ŚS ] dhīmatāṃ DYŚv.l. bhuvi DYŚ ] param ŚS, yadi DYŚv.l., hi vai DYŚv.l.
कृत्वा संपुटितौ करौ दृढतरं बद्ध्वा तु पद्मासनं
गाढं वक्षसि संनिधाय चिबुकं ध्यानं च तच्चेतसि ।
वारं वारमपानमूर्ध्वमनिलं प्रोच्चालयन्पूरितं
मुञ्चन्प्राणमुपैति बोधमतुलं शक्तिप्रभावान्नरः ॥
kṛtvā saṃpuṭitau karau dṛḍhataraṃ baddhvā tu padmāsanaṃ
gāḍhaṃ vakṣasi saṃnidhāya cibukaṃ dhyānaṃ ca tac cetasi /
vāraṃ vāram apānam ūrdhvam anilaṃ proccālayan pūritaṃ
muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvān naraḥ //
The text at end of the second verse quarter is uncertain. Later witnesses, including
Brahmānanda, have dhyāyaṃś ca but none of the early ones has this reading. We are taking dhyānaṃ with saṃnidhāya, but this renders tat problematic because it has no clear referent. In the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa, tat appears to refer to the mokṣadvāra broken by kuṇḍalinī, which is mentioned in the previous verse.
The two participles proccālayan and muñcan imply that the two things are happening at the same time, which is surprising but
perhaps possible.
पश्चादुक्तमेव मत्स्येन्द्रमतम्
paścād uktam eva matsyendramatam
baddhvā tu ] baddhvātha VM dhyānaṃ VMv.l. ] dhyāyaṃś VM cetasi VM ] cetasaṃ VMv.l. proccālayan VM ] proccālayet VMv.l., proccārayet VMv.l., prollāsayet VMv.l., proccārayan VMv.l. muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvān naraḥ VM ] prāṇaṃ muṃcati bodham eti śanakaiḥ proktaprabhāvād ataḥ VMv.l., pāṇaṃ muṃcati bodham eti śanakaiḥ śaktiḥ prabhāvād ataḥ VMv.l., prāṇaṃ muṃcati yāti bodham amalaṃ śaktipradhānoditaḥ VMv.l., muṃcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvād ataḥ VMv.l., muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabodhān naraḥ VMv.l., prāṇaṃ muñcati bodham eti śanakaiḥ śaktiprabodhān naraḥ VMv.l., muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham akhilāṃ śaktiṃ prabhāvād ataḥ VMv.l.
baddhvā tu HRĀ ] badhvā ca YCM proccālayan ] proccālayat HRĀv.l., proccārayet HRĀ, protsārayet YCM pūritam HRĀ ] pūrayet YCM muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ ] muñcat prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ HRĀ, prāṇaṃ muñcati bodham eti niyataṃ YCM śaktiprabhāvān naraḥ ] śakteḥ prabhāvān naraḥ HRĀ, śaktiprabodhodayāt YCM
पद्मासनस्थितो योगी नाडीद्वारेषु पूरयन् ।
मारुतं मारयेद्यस्तु स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
padmāsanasthito yogī nāḍīdvāreṣu pūrayan /
mārutaṃ mārayed yas tu sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
It is not unusual to read forms from pṝ with the locative as seen in this verse (cf. pūrayen mukhe in Amaraugha 21d) but it is not clear what is meant here. Siddhasiddhāntapaddhati 1.66 identifies the ten dvāras at which the ten principle channels terminate, and adds that all other channels
terminate at the pores of the skin. Perhaps the primary nāḍīdvāras are intended here, and the yogi is to fill himself up with air through each of them.
Alternatively, the meaning could be that by filling the dvāras with air, the yogi is blocking them, thus enabling the stilling of the breath as
described in some secondary readings in the second half of the verse. This appears
to be how this verse is understood at Haṭhatattvakaumudī 17.30 (cf. Yogatattvopaniṣad 141–142).
The Jyotsnā (1.49) has nāḍīdvāreṇa instead of nāḍīdvāreṣu, which Brahmānanda understands to mean “by way of the opening of the central channel
(suṣumnāmārgeṇa)”. This yields the idea of filling up the central channel (as opposed to other channels),
which is described in the Yogabīja (94–95).
In order to make sense of this verse we have understood mārutaṃ to be read with the preceding line, as the object of pūrayan. Such enjambement is rare in haṭha texts (other than the Dattātreyayogaśāstra) and is absent from the verses which we have identified as authorial. We have not
identified a source text for this verse but the enjambement and its unusual teaching
suggest that there may be one. The unusual enjambement accounts for many of the variants
in the second line, with α2 reading mārutaṃ mārayed yas tu, invoking an alchemical metaphor for stilling the breath as found in the Amṛtasiddhi (see Mallinson 2021). The reading dhārayet found in some later witnesses may have resulted from confusion over the meaning of
mṛ in this context.
padmāsanasthito YCM ] padmāsane sthito HRĀ DhBU pūrayan YCM DhBU ] pūrayet HRĀ mārutaṃ YCM DhBU ] pūritaṃ HRĀ mārayed ] dhārayed YCM, dhriyate HRĀ, kumbhayan YCM DhBU
गुल्फौ च वृषणस्याधः सीवन्याः पार्श्वयोः क्षिपेत् ।
दक्षिणे सव्यगुल्फं तु दक्षगुल्फं तु सव्यके ॥
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet /
dakṣiṇe savyagulphaṃ tu dakṣagulphaṃ tu savyake //
हस्तौ च जान्वोः संस्थाप्य स्वाङ्गुलीः संप्रसार्य च ।
व्यात्तवक्त्रो निरीक्षेत नासाग्रं सुसमाहितः ॥
hastau ca jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīḥ saṃprasārya ca /
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣeta nāsāgraṃ susamāhitaḥ //
सिंहासनं भवेदेतत् पूजितं योगिभिः सदा ।
बन्धत्रितयसंधानं कुरुते चासनोत्तमम् ॥
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat pūjitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā /
bandhatritayasaṃdhānaṃ kurute cāsanottamam //
Spreading the fingers and keeping the mouth wide open mimic a lion, and this is depicted
in some iconography of Yoganarasiṃha (for example, Yoga Narasimha, Vishnu’s Man-Lion
Incarnation, Samuel Eilenberg Collection, Bequest of Samuel Eilenberg, 1998, Accession
Number: 2000.284.4. https://www.metmuseum.org/art/collection/search/39251).
As far as we are aware, there is no source for the line (1.52cd) mentioning the three
locks, so it may have been composed by Svātmārāma or borrowed from a lost work.
dakṣiṇe ] dakṣiṇaṃ VS YY SS savyagulphaṃ tu ] savyagulphena VS YY SS dakṣagulphaṃ tu savyake ] dakṣiṇenetaretaram VS, dakṣiṇena tathetaram YY, vāmaṃ dakṣiṇagulphataḥ SS hastau ca jānvoḥ YY SS ] hastau jānau ca VS svāṅgulīḥ saṃprasārya ca ] svāṅgulīś ca prasārya ca VS YY SS vyāttavaktro VS YY ] nāsāgraṃ ca SS nāsāgraṃ susamāhitaḥ VS YY ] bhavet siṃhāsanaṃ hi tat SS
dakṣiṇe HRĀ ] dakṣiṇaṃ YCM savyagulphaṃ tu ] savyagulphaṃ ca HRĀ, savyagulphena YCM dakṣagulphaṃ tu savyake ] dakṣiṇe tu tathetaram HRĀ, dakṣiṇena tathetaram YCM ca jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya ] tu jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya HRĀ, jānūpari sthāpya YCM susamāhitaḥ YCM ] tu samāhitaḥ HRĀ pūjitaṃ YCM ] sevitaṃ HRĀ bandhatritayasaṃdhānaṃ kurute cāsanottamam ] bandhatritayasaṃsthānaṃ kurute cāsanottamam HRĀ, om. YCM
गुल्फौ च वृषणस्याधः सीवन्याः पार्श्वयोः क्षिपेत् ।
पार्श्वपादौ च पाणिभ्यां दृढं बद्ध्वा सुनिश्चलम् ॥*
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet /
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ baddhvā suniścalam //*
भद्रासनं भवेदेतत् सर्वव्याधिविषापहम् ।
गोरक्षासनमित्याहुरिदं वै सिद्धयोगिनः ॥
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham /
gorakṣāsanam ity āhur idaṃ vai siddhayoginaḥ //
We have understood pārśvapāda as a ekadeśitatpuruṣa meaning the side of the foot, like agrapāda, the toes.
Manuscripts of two early groups, γ and π, as well as the Jyotsnā (1.53), include an additional line specifying that the left ankle is placed on the
left side and the right ankle on the right (savyagulphaṃ tathā savye dakṣagulphaṃ tu dakṣiṇe). This line appears to have been added to make it clear that the ankles are not crossed
in bhadrāsana, unlike the previous pose, siṃhāsana.
kṣipet YY ] kṣipan VS
एवमासनबन्धेषु योगीन्द्रो विजितश्रमः ।
अथाभ्यसेन्नाडिशुद्धिं मुद्रादिपवनक्रियाम् ॥*
evam āsanabandheṣu yogīndro vijitaśramaḥ /
athābhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ mudrādipavanakriyām //*
The second line can be interpreted in different ways. One possibility is to understand nāḍiśuddhiṃ as a bahuvrīhi qualifying mudrādipavanakriyām in the sense that the yogi should practise the breathing techniques by way of the relevant mudrās and locks (taught in the third chapter), from which purification of the channels arise. Alternatively, one could separate mudrādi from pavanakriyām and understand three different techniques here, namely, the practice of purifying the channels (perhaps by the alternative nostril method mentioned at the beginning of the second chapter), the mudrās and the breathing techniques of prāṇāyāma. The absence of a conjunctive particle, such as ca, makes the second interpretation less likely. The version of this verse in the Yogacintāmaṇi (see the testimonia) was changed to make it clear that nāḍiśuddhi and pavanakriyā with mudrās are two distinct things.
bandheṣu YCM ] bandhastho HSC vijitaśramaḥ YCM ] vigataśramaḥ HSC athābhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ HSC ] abhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ ca YCM mudrādi HSC ] mudrayā YCM
आसनं कुम्भकं चित्रं मुद्राख्यं करणं तथा ।
अथ नादानुसन्धानमभ्यासानुक्रमो हठे ॥
āsanaṃ kumbhakaṃ citraṃ mudrākhyaṃ karaṇaṃ tathā /
atha nādānusandhānam abhyāsānukramo haṭhe //
This verse was omitted from η1, the oldest dated manuscript. The omission is probably deliberate as that manuscript
does not have chapter four, which teaches nādānusandhāna and the numbering in η1 indicates that its exemplar included the verse.
This verse is similar to 1.65, which has mudrādikaraṇāni ca, so perhaps it was through confusion with 1.65 that the same reading is found in
some witnesses of 1.56. It seems that each of the four auxiliaries (aṅga) of Haṭhayoga is being referred to in the singular (hence āsanaṃ), whereas in 1.65 the plural is used (i.e. pīṭhāni) which is why we have adopted the reading citraṃ [...] karaṇaṃ tathā.
°nukramo haṭhe ] °nukrameṇa ca YCM
ब्रह्मचारी मिताहारी योगी योगपरायणः ।
अब्दादूर्ध्वं भवेत्सिद्धो नात्र कार्या विचारणा ॥
brahmacārī mitāhārī yogī yogaparāyaṇaḥ /
abdād ūrdhvaṃ bhavet siddho nātra kāryā vicāraṇā //
The readings tyāgī and yogī are both well attested in Haṭhapradīpikā 1.57b. The confusion between the two appears to have started early in the transmission of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. The occurrence of tyāgī in Vivekamārtaṇḍa 37 may be a dittographical type of mistake because the word tyāgī is in the previous line of that work. But it is more difficult to determine whether Svātmārāma used a manuscript of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa with tyāgī or yogī in verse 37. Since the best α manuscript has yogī, as well as η1 and many others, we have tentatively adopted it bearing in mind that it was changed early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā, most likely by a scribe who knew the reading of tyāgī in a manuscript of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
yogī VM ] tyāgī VMv.l.
yogī HRĀv.l. ] tyāgī HRĀ YCM
सुस्निग्धमधुराहारश्चतुर्थांशविवर्जितः ।
भुज्यते शिवसंप्रीत्यै मिताहारः स उच्यते ॥
susnigdhamadhurāhāraś caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ /
bhujyate śivasaṃprītyai mitāhāraḥ sa ucyate //
This verse probably derives from the ‘original’ Gorakṣaśataka (12c–13b). It is also found, but reworked to be about the mitāhārī, in Nowotny’s Gorakṣaśataka (55), which is an extended recension of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
The expression ‘lacking a fourth part’ (caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ) is somewhat vague but probably refers to the idea of leaving a quarter of one’s
stomach empty, which is stated more clearly in the Dharmaputrikā 1.51–52:
ṣaḍrasopetasusnigdhasvādusāndrasugandhinā/
udarasyārdhabhāgan tu bhojanena prapūrayet//
pānīyena caturbhāgaṃ taccheṣaṃ śūnyam iṣyate/
vāyoḥ saṃcāradānārtham āhāraniyamaḥ smṛtaḥ//
annena kukṣer dvāv aṃśau pānenaikaṃ prapūrayet/
āśrayaṃ pavanādīnāṃ caturtham avaśeṣayet//
द्वौ भागौ पूरयेदन्नैस्तोयेनैकं प्रपूरयेत्
वायोः सञ्चरणार्थाय चतुर्थमवशेषयेतिति
dvau bhāgau pūrayed annais toyenaikaṃ prapūrayet
vāyoḥ sañcaraṇārthāya caturtham avaśeṣayet iti
saṃprītyai YBhD ] saṃprītyā YCU bhujyate YBhD ] bhuñjate YCU mitāhāraḥ YBhD ] mitāhārī YCU
कट्वम्लतीक्ष्णलवणोष्णहरीतशाक-
सौवीरतैलतिलसर्षपमत्स्यमद्यम् ।
आजादिमांसदधितक्रकुलत्थकोल-
पिण्याकहिङ्गुलशुनाद्यमपथ्यमाहुः ॥
kaṭvamlatīkṣṇalavaṇoṣṇaharītaśāka-
sauvīratailatilasarṣapamatsyamadyam /
ājādimāṃsadadhitakrakulatthakola-
piṇyākahiṅgulaśunādyam apathyam āhuḥ //
On the meaning of uṣṇa (1.59a) in relation to food, Meulenbeld (1974: 254 fn. 13) writes:
śigrur haritaśākaś ca śākapattraḥ supattrakaḥ/
śigruko haritaśākaś ca mato vai mūlapatrakaḥ/
añjanaṃ yāmunaṃ kṛṣṇaṃ nādeyaṃ mecakaṃ tathā
srotojaṃ dṛkpradaṃ nīlaṃ sauvīraṃ ca suvīrajam//
lavaṇaṃ sarṣapaś cāmlam uṣṇaṃ rūkṣaṃ ca tīkṣṇakam/
tīkṣṇa HRĀ YCM HTK ] tikta YBhD harītaśāka YCM ] harītaśākaṃ HRĀ, haritaśāka HTK YBhD matsyamadyam HRĀ YCM HTK ] madyamatsyāḥ YBhD ājādimāṃsa ] ajādimāṃsa HRĀ YCM, ajāvimāṃsa YBhD HTK kola YCM YBhD HTK ] kodra HRĀ
भोजनमहितं विद्यात्पुनरप्युष्णीकृतं रूक्षम् ।
अतिलवणमम्लपृक्तं कदशनशाकोत्कटं दुष्टम् ॥
bhojanam ahitaṃ vidyāt punar apy uṣṇīkṛtaṃ rūkṣam /
atilavaṇam amlapṛktaṃ kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ duṣṭam //
Brahmānanda glosses his reading tilapiṇḍa with piṇyāka (on the meaning of which see the notes for the previous verse).
The meaning of the compound kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ is not clear. Brahmānanda understands it as a list (dvandva) consisting of kadaśana, śāka and utkaṭa, which he defines as bad food, prohibited vegetables and pepper, respectively.
There are various possible meanings of utkaṭa. According to some Nighaṇṭus, the word utkaṭā can mean pepper (e.g. Rājanighaṇṭu 5.16: pārvatī śailajā tāmrā lambabījā tathotkaṭā) and, according to Monier-Williams (1899), utkaṭa can refer to Saccharum Sara and utkaṭā also to Laurus Cassia (cinnamon).
However, utkaṭa can be an adjective that means ‘abounding in’ at the end of a compound. Since this
verse consists of many adjectives describing food that is unwholesome, it is likely
that kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ was intended as an adjectival tatpuruṣa, in which case it means ‘[food] full of vegetables’ śākotkaṭa that are ‘bad food’ or, perhaps, ‘bad eating’ (kadaśana) in the sense of hard to chew.
अथ वर्ज्यानि वक्ष्यामि योगविघ्नकराणि च
लवणं सर्षपं चाम्लमुष्णं तीक्ष्णं च रूक्षकम्
अतीव भोजनं त्याज्यमतिनिद्रातिभाषणमिति.
त्यजेत्कट्वम्ललवणं क्षीरभोजी सदा भवेतिति
atha varjyāni vakṣyāmi yogavighnakarāṇi ca
lavaṇaṃ sarṣapaṃ cāmlam uṣṇaṃ tīkṣṇaṃ ca rūkṣakam
atīva bhojanaṃ tyājyam atinidrātibhāṣaṇam iti.
tyajet kaṭvamlalavaṇaṃ kṣīrabhojī sadā bhavet iti
rūkṣaṃ HSC ] tathā YCM atilavaṇam amlapṛktaṃ ] atilavaṇaṃ sapalaṃ vā YCM, atilavaṇādikayuktaṃ HSC kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ duṣṭaṃ HSC ] prasitaṃ śākotkaṭaṃ varjyam YCM
वर्जयेद्दुर्जनप्रान्तं वह्निस्त्रीपथसेवनम् ।
प्रातःस्नानोपवासादिकायक्लेशविधिं तथा ॥
varjayed durjanaprāntaṃ vahnistrīpathasevanam /
prātaḥsnānopavāsādikāyakleśavidhiṃ tathā //
Manuscripts α1α3ζ1π1 have the reading durjanaprāntaṃ (1.61a), which is the lectio difficilior in relation to durjanaprītiṃ (‘the friendship of wicked people’). We have understood durjanaprānta in line with Brahmānanda’s gloss in Jyotsnā 1.64, ‘dwelling near bad people’ (durjanasamīpavāsam).
prāntaṃ HRĀv.l. ] prāptaṃ HRĀv.l., prīti HRĀ, prītiṃ YCM YBhD tathā HRĀ YCM ] tyajet YBhD
गोधूमशालियवषष्टिकशोभनान्नं
क्षीराज्यमण्डनवनीतसितामधूनि ।
शुण्ठीपटोलकफलादि च पञ्चशाकं
मुद्गादि दिव्यमुदकं च यमीन्द्रपथ्यम् ॥*
godhūmaśāliyavaṣaṣṭikaśobhanānnaṃ
kṣīrājyamaṇḍanavanītasitāmadhūni /
śuṇṭhīpaṭolakaphalādi ca pañcaśākaṃ
mudgādi divyam udakaṃ ca yamīndrapathyam //*
In 1.62b, maṇḍa, which is supported by α1, α2, and manuscripts of other important groups, is more likely than khaṇḍa (‘candied sugar’), which is also well-attested (α3, etc.), because the other elements of this compound are dairy products. The term
navanīta is discussed in Suśrutasaṃhitā, sūtrasthāna, 45.92. The word sitā is one of many words for ground sugar. Meulenbeld (1974: 507) comments that sitā is ‘very white and looks like gravel.’
The term paṭola can refer to at least two different gourds. Meulenbeld (1974: 569) compiled a list of six possibilities, including Trichosanthes dioica Roxb. (‘pointed gourd’) and Trichosanthes cucumerina Linn. (‘snake gourd’).
Singh and Chunekar (1999: 232) identify paṭola as Trichosanthas dioica Roxb., more commonly known as the pointed gourd, and they give its Hindi names as paravala and parorāparorā. It is very common in North India and is a popular vegetable in ascetic communities.
Brahmānanda, however, glosses paṭola as kośātakī, which Meulenbeld (1974: 586) identifies as Luffa acutangula Roxb, suggesting that Brahmānanda thought paṭola was some sort of luffa.
Groups of five vegetables (pañcaśāka or śākapañcaka) have been defined in various yoga texts, but such grouping of vegetables does not
seem to occur outside of literature on yoga. The earliest reference to a group of
five vegetables known to us is in the sixteenth-century Yuktabhavadeva 4.22, which attributes the verse to the Śivayoga. The same verse is also quoted in Jyotsnā 1.65 with attribution to a medical source (vaidyake):
sarvaśākam acākṣuṣyaṃ cākṣuṣyaṃ śākapañcakam/
jīvantī vāstumatsyākṣī meghanādaḥ punarnavāḥ// iti//
pañcaśākas tu–
kṣīraparṇī ca jīvantī matsyākṣī ca punarnavā/
meghanādaś ceti budhaiḥ pañcaśākaḥ prakīrtitaḥ// iti//
bālaśākaṃ kālaśākaṃ tathā paṭolapatrakam/
pañcaśākaṃ praśaṃsīyād vāstūkaṃ hilamocikāṃ//
divyodakaṃ svarvāri syād ākāśasalilaṃ tathā/
vyomodakaṃ cāntarikṣajalaṃ ceṣvabhidhāhvayam//
सर्वशाकमचाक्षुष्यं चाक्षुष्यं शाकपञ्चकम्
जीवन्तीवास्तुमत्स्याक्षीमेघनादपुनर्नवाः इति.
sarvaśākam acākṣuṣyaṃ cākṣuṣyaṃ śākapañcakam
jīvantīvāstumatsyākṣīmeghanādapunarnavāḥ iti.
ṣaṣṭika HRĀ ] ṣāṣṭika YCM YBhD maṇḍana HRĀ YCM ] khaṇḍana YBhD phalādi ca YBhD ] phalapatraja HRĀ, phalādika YCM HRĀv.l. pañcaśākaṃ HRĀ YCM ] pañcaśāka YBhD divyam HRĀ YBhD ] cālpam YCM yamīndra HRĀ ] yatīndra HRĀv.l., munīndra YCM YBhD
मृष्टं सुमधुरं स्निग्धं गव्यं धातुप्रपोषणम् ।
मनोऽभिलषितं योग्यं योगी भोजनमाचरेत् ॥
mṛṣṭaṃ sumadhuraṃ snigdhaṃ gavyaṃ dhātuprapoṣaṇam /
mano’bhilaṣitaṃ yogyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret //
The variants of 1.63a are all plausible: mṛṣṭaṃ, miṣṭaṃ and iṣṭaṃ, although the last is made tautologous by mano’bhilaṣitaṃ in 16.3c. Both mṛṣṭaṃ and miṣṭaṃ are well attested by manuscripts of important groups and there is hardly any difference in their meaning in this context. We have adopted mṛṣṭaṃ as it is supported by α1 and α3.
mṛṣṭaṃ ] śreṣṭhaṃ HRĀ YBhD, piṣṭaṃ YCM sumadhuraṃ YCM YBhD ] samadhuraṃ HRĀ yogī bhojanam ācaret YCM YBhD ] caturthāṃśavivarjitam | śivārpitaṃ ca naivedyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret HRĀ
युवा वृद्धोऽतिवृद्धो वा व्याधितो दुर्बलोऽपि वा ।
अभ्यासात्सिद्धिमाप्नोति सर्वयोगेष्वतन्द्रितः ॥
yuvā vṛddho’tivṛddho vā vyādhito durbalo’pi vā /
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ //
yuvā vṛddho ] yuvāvastho DYŚ ’ti ] ’pi DYŚ durlabho ’pi vā ] vā śanaiḥ śanaiḥ DYŚ
vṛddho ’tivṛddho vā ] bhavati vṛddho ’pi HRĀ, bālo ’tivṛddho vā YCM
पीठानि कुम्भकाश्चित्रा दिव्यानि करणानि च ।
सर्वोऽपि च हठाभ्यासो राजयोगफलावधि ॥
pīṭhāni kumbhakāś citrā divyāni karaṇāni ca /
sarvo’pi ca haṭhābhyāso rājayogaphalāvadhi //
sarvo ’pi ] sāṅgo ’pi HRĀ phalāvadhi ] phalārthadaḥ HRĀ
अथासने दृढे योगी वशी हितमिताशनः ।
गुरूपदिष्टमार्गेण प्राणायामं समभ्यसेत् ॥*
athāsane dṛḍhe yogī vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ /
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa prāṇāyāmaṃ samabhyaset //*
Many manuscripts of the ε, γ, ζ and π groups, as well as the Jyotsnā (2.1), have the plural prāṇāyāmān in 2.1d. The plural is possible here as it could refer to multiple repetitions of the basic alternate nostril breath control technique taught at 2.7–11, or to the different techniques of retention (kumbhaka) taught later in the chapter. The variation between singular and plural recurs through this chapter, and we have followed the α1 readings, which make good sense. In this case, since the verse is introducing the topic of breath control, the more general sense of the singular is appropriate.
prāṇāyāmaṃ ] prāṇāyāmān HRĀ HTK
चले वाते चलं सर्वं निश्चले दृढबन्धनम् ।
योगी स्थाणुत्वमाप्नोति ततो वायुनिबन्धनात् ॥
cale vāte calaṃ sarvaṃ niścale dṛḍhabandhanam /
yogī sthāṇutvam āpnoti tato vāyunibandhanāt //
In the second verse quarter we have adopted the reading dṛḍhabandhanaṃ found in most of the α, γ and π manuscripts over that found in the source text, niścalaṃ tathā, which is also found in some δ, η and π manuscripts and testimonia. We thus understand
it to be the result of a deliberate change by Svātmārāma.
As noted by Brahmānanda, in addition to its primary meaning of immobility, sthāṇutvam can also mean the state of being Śiva, for whom Sthāṇu is another name.
dṛḍhabandhanam ] niścalaṃ tathā VM
Cf. Amanaska 2.92citte calati saṃsāro’cale mokṣaḥ prajāyate/
tasmāc cittaṃ sthirīkuryād audāsīnyaparāyaṇaḥ//
niścale dṛḍhabandhanam ] niścale niścalaṃ tathā HRĀ, niścalaṃ niścale tathā YCM
यावद्वायुः स्थितो देहे तावज्जीवितमुच्यते ।
मरणं तस्य निष्क्रान्तिस्ततो वायुं निबन्धयेत् ॥
yāvad vāyuḥ sthito dehe tāvaj jīvitam ucyate /
maraṇaṃ tasya niṣkrāntis tato vāyuṃ nibandhayet //
niṣkrāntis ] niṣkrāntau VM nibandhayet ] nirodhayet VM
tāvaj jīvitam ucyate HRĀ ] tāvad dehaṃ na muñcati YBhD nibandhayet ] nirodhayet HRĀ, nirundhayet YBhD
मलाकुलासु नाडीषु मारुतो नैव मध्यगः ।
कथं स्यादुन्मनीभावः कायसिद्धिः कथं भवेत् ॥
malākulāsu nāḍīṣu māruto naiva madhyagaḥ /
kathaṃ syād unmanībhāvaḥ kāyasiddhiḥ kathaṃ bhavet //
शुद्धिमेति यदा सर्वं नाडीचक्रं मलाकुलम् ।
तदैव जायते योगी प्राणसंग्रहणे क्षमः ॥
śuddhim eti yadā sarvaṃ nāḍīcakraṃ malākulam /
tadaiva jāyate yogī prāṇasaṃgrahaṇe kṣamaḥ //
प्राणाभ्यासं ततः कुर्यान् नित्यं सात्त्विकया धिया ।
यथा सुषुम्णा सुस्वस्था मलाः शोषं प्रयान्ति च ॥
prāṇābhyāsaṃ tataḥ kuryān nityaṃ sāttvikayā dhiyā /
yathā suṣumṇā susvasthā malāḥ śoṣaṃ prayānti ca //
prāṇābhyāsas tataḥ kāryo nityaṃ sattvāsthayā dhiyā/
suṣumnāṃ layate cittaṃ na ca vāyuḥ pradhāvati//
prāṇābhyāsaṃ ] prāṇāyāmaṃ YK yathā suṣumnā susvasthā ] suṣumnā cāntarālasthā YK
बद्धपद्मासनो योगी प्राणं चन्द्रेण पूरयेत् ।
धारयित्वा यथाशक्त्या पुनः सूर्येण रेचयेत् ॥
baddhapadmāsano yogī prāṇaṃ candreṇa pūrayet /
dhārayitvā yathāśaktyā punaḥ sūryeṇa recayet //
yathāśaktyā VMv.l. ] yathāśakti VM punaḥ VMv.l. ] bhūyaḥ VM
yathāśaktyā ] yathāśakti YBhD punaḥ ] bhūyaḥ YBhD
प्राणं सूर्येण चाकृष्य पूरयेदुदरं शनैः ।
विधिवत्कुम्भकं कृत्वा पुनश्चन्द्रेण रेचयेत् ॥
prāṇaṃ sūryeṇa cākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ /
vidhivat kumbhakaṃ kṛtvā punaś candreṇa recayet //
vidhivat kumbhakaṃ kṛtvā HRĀ ] kumbhayitvā vidhānena YBhD
येन त्यजेत्तेन पूर्य धारयेदविरोधतः ।
रेचयेच्च ततोऽन्येन शनैरेव न वेगतः ॥
yena tyajet tena pūrya dhārayed avirodhataḥ /
recayec ca tato’nyena śanair eva na vegataḥ //
The meaning of avirodhataḥ (‘without harm/discomfort’) makes better sense in this context than anirodhataḥ (‘without cessation’). One might try to construe anirodhataḥ as ‘without stopping the breath,’ but verse 2.7 clearly states that the breath should be held as long as possible (yathāśakti). According to the apparatus of the critical edition of the Haṭharatnāvalī, avirodhataḥ is well-attested for the parallel line. In addition, avirodhataḥ is found (and also virodhahīnam) in a passage of the Haṭhatattvakaumudī (36.6–9) that appears to have been loosely based on Haṭhapradīpikā 2.7–9.
yena tyajet tena pūrya ] yayā tyajet tayāpūrya DYŚ
tena pūrya ] tenāpūrya HRĀ
प्राणं चेदिडया पिबेन्नियमितं भूयोऽन्यया रेचयेत्
पीत्वा पिङ्गलया समीरणमलं बद्ध्वा त्यजेद्वामया ।
सूर्याचन्द्रमसोरनेन विधिना बिम्बद्वयं ध्यायतां
शुद्धा नाडिगणा भवन्ति यमिनां मासत्रयादूर्ध्वतः ॥
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā piben niyamitaṃ bhūyo’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇam alaṃ baddhvā tyajed vāmayā /
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatāṃ
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yamināṃ māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ //
alaṃ YBhD ] atho HRĀ YCM
प्रातर्मध्यंदिने सायमर्धरात्रे च कुम्भकान् ।
शनैरशीतिपर्यन्तं चतुर्वारं समभ्यसेत् ॥*
prātar madhyaṃdine sāyam ardharātre ca kumbhakān /
śanair aśītiparyantaṃ caturvāraṃ samabhyaset //*
This verse is summarizing the following passage in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (63cd–65ab):
evaṃ prātaḥ samāsīnaḥ kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān// 63//
evaṃ madhyāhnasamaye kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān/
evaṃ sāyaṃ prakurvīta punar viṃśati kumbhakān// 64//
evam evārdharātre’pi kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān/
madhyaṃdine YCM ] madhyadine HRĀ
कनीयसि भवेत्स्वेदः कम्पो भवति मध्यमे ।
उत्तिष्ठत्युत्तमे प्राणरोधे पद्मासने मुहुः ॥
kanīyasi bhavet svedaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame /
uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsane muhuḥ //
The manuscript readings diverge greatly in the second line. In the third verse quarter, all of the manuscripts have prāṇa in some form (instead of deha as found in the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa). The α manuscript, along with some of the ε, ζ, η and π manuscripts, seems to state that it is padmāsana that rises up again and again in the highest stage of holding the breath (uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsanaṃ muhuḥ). We have adopted a similar reading but with padmāsane (δ1and π2) because it makes better sense that the yogi rises up while seated in lotus pose. Another version is seen in η2, which appears to say that the breaths rise up again and again when one is seated in the lotus pose (uttiṣṭhanty uttame prāṇā baddhe padmāsane muhuḥ). However, the verse is about the external signs that might arise in prāṇāyāma rather than internal processes. Such confusion has arisen because the verse was taken from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa without its context, which is a classification of different levels of prāṇāyāma, so Svātmārāma needed to include prāṇarodhe meaning prāṇāyāma in order for the different adjectives to have something with which to agree, and he did so despite the infelicity of prāṇarodhe crossing the pāda break.
प्राणायामस्य मानं तु मात्राद्वादशकं स्मृतम्
नीचो द्वादशमात्रस्तु सकृदुद्ग्धात ईरितः
मध्यमस्तु द्विरुद्घातश्चतुर्विंशतिमात्रकः
मुख्यस्तु यस्त्रिरुद्घातः षट्त्रिंशन्मात्र उच्यते
प्रस्वेदकम्पनोत्थानजनकश्च यथाक्रमम्
आनन्दो जायते चात्र निद्रा घूर्णिस्तथैव च
रोमाञ्चो ध्वनिसंवित्तिरङ्गमोटनकम्पनम्
भ्रमणस्वेदजल्पाद्यं संविन्मूर्च्छा जयेद्यदा
तदोत्तम इति प्रोक्तः प्राणायामः सुशोभन इति
अधमे द्वादश प्रोक्ता मध्यमे द्विगुणाः स्मृताः
उत्तमे त्रिगुणा मात्राः प्राणायामे द्विजोत्तमैः??
प्राणेनोत्सार्यमाणेन अपानः पीड्यते यदा
गत्वा चोर्ध्वं निवर्तेत एतदुद्द्घातलक्षणम्
अङ्गुष्ठाङ्गुलिमोक्षं त्रिस्त्रिर्जानुपरिमार्जनम्
तालत्रयमपि प्राज्ञा मात्रासंज्ञां प्रचक्षते
एकश्वासमयी मात्रा प्राणायामे निगद्यते
जानुं प्रदक्षिणीकुर्यान्न द्रुतं न विलम्बितम्
प्रदद्याच्छोटिकां यावत्तावन्मात्रेति गीयते
अङ्गुष्ठाङ्गुलिमोक्षं च जानोश्च परिमार्जनम्
प्रदद्याच्छोटिकामेकां मात्रा सङ्ख्यायते तदा
प्राणायाम एवाभ्यासक्रमेण वर्धमानः प्रत्याहारधारणाध्यानसमाधिशब्दैरुच्यत इति.
प्राणायामद्विषट्केन प्रत्याहार उदाहृतः
प्रत्याहारद्विषट्केन धारणा परिकीर्तिता
भवेदीश्वरसङ्गत्यै ध्यानं द्वादशधारणम्
ध्यानद्वादशकेनैव समाधिरभिधीयते
यत्समाधौ परं ज्योतिरनन्तं स्वप्रकाशकम्
तस्मिन्दृष्टे क्रियाकाण्डं यातायातं निवर्तते इति
धारणा पञ्चनाडीभिर्ध्यानं स्यात्षष्ठिनाडिकम्
दिनद्वादशकेन स्यात्समाधिः प्राणसंयमादिति च
prāṇāyāmasya mānaṃ tu mātrādvādaśakaṃ smṛtam
nīco dvādaśamātras tu sakṛd udgdhāta īritaḥ
madhyamas tu dvirudghātaś caturviṃśatimātrakaḥ
mukhyas tu yas trirudghātaḥ ṣaṭtriṃśanmātra ucyate
prasvedakampanotthānajanakaś ca yathākramam
ānando jāyate cātra nidrā ghūrṇis tathaiva ca
romāñco dhvanisaṃvittir aṅgamoṭanakampanam
bhramaṇasvedajalpādyaṃ saṃvinmūrcchā jayed yadā
tadottama iti proktaḥ prāṇāyāmaḥ suśobhana iti
adhame dvādaśa proktā madhyame dviguṇāḥ smṛtāḥ
uttame triguṇā mātrāḥ prāṇāyāme dvijottamaiḥ??
prāṇenotsāryamāṇena apānaḥ pīḍyate yadā
gatvā cordhvaṃ nivarteta etad uddghātalakṣaṇam
aṅguṣṭhāṅgulimokṣaṃ tris trir jānuparimārjanam
tālatrayam api prājñā mātrāsaṃjñāṃ pracakṣate
ekaśvāsamayī mātrā prāṇāyāme nigadyate
jānuṃ pradakṣiṇīkuryān na drutaṃ na vilambitam
pradadyāc choṭikāṃ yāvat tāvan mātreti gīyate
aṅguṣṭhāṅgulimokṣaṃ ca jānoś ca parimārjanam
pradadyāc choṭikām ekāṃ mātrā saṅkhyāyate tadā
prāṇāyāma evābhyāsakrameṇa vardhamānaḥ pratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhiśabdair ucyata iti.
prāṇāyāmadviṣaṭkena pratyāhāra udāhṛtaḥ
pratyāhāradviṣaṭkena dhāraṇā parikīrtitā
bhaved īśvarasaṅgatyai dhyānaṃ dvādaśadhāraṇam
dhyānadvādaśakenaiva samādhir abhidhīyate
yat samādhau paraṃ jyotir anantaṃ svaprakāśakam
tasmin dṛṣṭe kriyākāṇḍaṃ yātāyātaṃ nivartate iti
dhāraṇā pañcanāḍībhir dhyānaṃ syāt ṣaṣṭhināḍikam
dinadvādaśakena syāt samādhiḥ prāṇasaṃyamād iti ca
adhame ca ghano gharmaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame/
uttiṣṭhaty uttame deho baddhapadmāsano muhuḥ//
padmāsane muhuḥ HRĀ ] padmāsanasthitaḥ YCM
जलेन श्रमजातेन गात्रमर्दनमाचरेत् ।
दृढता लघुता चापि तेन गात्रस्य जायते ॥
jalena śramajātena gātramardanam ācaret /
dṛḍhatā laghutā cāpi tena gātrasya jāyate //
Śivasaṃhitā 3.46 adds that if this practice is not done, the body’s constituents (dhātus) are lost.
prasvedo jāyate pūrvaṃ mardanaṃ tena kārayet/
tato’tidhāraṇād vāyoḥ krameṇaiva śanaiḥ śanaiḥ//
svedaḥ saṃjāyate dehe yoginaḥ prathamodyame/
yadā saṃjāyate svedo mardanaṃ kārayet sudhīḥ/
anyathā vigrahe dhātur naṣṭo bhavati yoginaḥ//
aṅga ] gātra HRĀ YCM tena YCM ] tathā HRĀ
अभ्यासकाले प्रथमे शस्तं क्षीराज्यभोजनम् ।
ततोऽभ्यासे दृढीभूते न तादृङ्नियमग्रहः ॥
abhyāsakāle prathame śastaṃ kṣīrājyabhojanam /
tato’bhyāse dṛḍhībhūte na tādṛṅniyamagrahaḥ //
prathame śastaṃ ] prathamaṃ kuryāt ŚS dṛḍhī ] sthirī ŚS
kṣīrājya ] kṣīrādi HRĀ YBhD
यथा सिंहो गजो व्याघ्रो भवेद्वश्यः शनैः शनैः ।
तथैव सेवितो वायुर् अन्यथा हन्ति साधकम् ॥
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ /
tathaiva sevito vāyur anyathā hanti sādhakam //
The second line of this verse has been rewritten to express the same idea (and simile) as that found in Vivekamārtaṇḍa 101, but the author of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa expresses it more clearly.
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ/
anyathā hanti yantāraṃ tathā vāyur asevitaḥ//
anyathā hanti sādhakam ] bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ HRĀ YBhD
प्राणायामेन युक्तेन सर्वरोगक्षयो भवेत् ।
अयुक्ताभ्यासयोगेन सर्वरोगसमुद्भवः ॥
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvarogakṣayo bhavet /
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvarogasamudbhavaḥ //
rogakṣayo bhavet HRĀ ] vyādhikṣayo bhavet YCM, rogasya saṃkṣayaḥ YBhD rogasamudbhavaḥ HRĀ ] vyādhisamudbhavaḥ YCM, rogasya sambhavaḥ YBhD
हिक्का श्वासश्च कासश्च शिरःकर्णाक्षिवेदनाः ।
भवन्ति विविधा दोषाः पवनस्य व्यतिक्रमात् ॥
hikkā śvāsaś ca kāsaś ca śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanāḥ /
bhavanti vividhā doṣāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt //
This verse has parallels in verses on the illnesses caused by incorrect breathing
in earlier Śivadharma works:
Śivadharmottara 10.124cd–125
hikkāśvāsapratiśyāyaḥ karṇadantākṣivedanāḥ//
mūkatā jaḍatā kāsaḥ śirorogaḥ śramakṣaraḥ/
ityevamādayo doṣā jāyante vyutkrameṇa tu//
kaphakoṣṭhe yadā vāyur granthir bhūtvāvatiṣṭhate/
hṛllāsahikkikāśvāsaśiraḥśūlādayo rujāḥ//
jāyante dhātuvaiṣamyāt tadā kuryāt pratikriyāṃ/
kāsaś ca HRĀ YCM ] tathā kāsaḥ YBhD vedanāḥ HRĀ YCM ] vedanā YBhD doṣāḥ ] rogāḥ HRĀ YCM YBhD
युक्तं युक्तं त्यजेद्वायुं युक्तं युक्तं च पूरयेत् ।
युक्तं युक्तं च बध्नीयाद् एवं शुद्धिमवाप्नुयात् ॥
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca pūrayet /
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca badhnīyād evaṃ śuddhim avāpnuyāt //
śuddhim ] siddhim VM
ca pūrayet YCM ] prapūrayet HRĀ, tu pūrayet YBhD ca badhnīyād HRĀ YCM ] tu badhnīyād YBhD evaṃ śuddhim avāpnuyāt ] evaṃ siddhim avāpnuyāt HRĀ YBhD, itthaṃ siddhyati yogavit YCM
यदा तु नाडीशुद्धिः स्यात्तदा चिह्नानि बाह्यतः ।
कायस्य कृशता कान्तिस्तथा जायेत निश्चितम् ॥
yadā tu nāḍīśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cihnāni bāhyataḥ /
kāyasya kṛśatā kāntis tathā jāyeta niścitam //
The idea that alternate nostril breathing is done to purify the channels can be found in early Śaiva tantras; see e.g. the Nayasūtra of the Niśvāsatattvasaṃhitā (4.110) and the Svacchandatantra (7.294cd–7.295ab). The latter verse is as follows:
apasavyena pūryeta savyenaiva virecayet/
nāḍīsaṃśodhanaṃ caitan mokṣamārgapathasya ca//
yadā tu nāḍiśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cihnāni bāhyataḥ//
jāyante yogino dehe tāni vakṣyāmy aśeṣataḥ/
śarīralaghutā dīptir jaṭharāgnivivardhanam//
kṛśatvaṃ ca śarīrasya tadā jāyeta niścitam/
tu HRĀ ] vi YCM kāntis tathā jāyeta ] kāntir jāyate tasya HRĀ, kāntis tadā jāyeta YCM
यथेष्टं धारणं वायोर् अनलस्य प्रदीपनम् ।
नादाभिव्यक्तिरारोग्यं जायते नाडिशोधनात् ॥
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam /
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ jāyate nāḍiśodhanāt //
Similar signs arising from the purification of the channels are mentioned in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (2.68–69) and subsequent works related to it:
nāḍīśuddhim avāpnoti pṛthak cihnopalakṣitām/
śarīralaghutā dīptir jaṭharāgnivivardhanam//
nādābhivyaktir ity etac cihnaṃ tacchuddhisūcakam/
yāvad etāni saṃpaśyet tāvad evaṃ samācaret//
jāyate nāḍīśodhanāt HRĀ YBhD ] bhaven nāḍīviśodhanāt YCM
मेदःश्लेष्माधिकः पूर्वं षट्कर्माणि समाचरेत् ।
अन्यस्तु नाचरेत्तानि दोषाणां समभावतः ॥
medaḥśleṣmādhikaḥ pūrvaṃ ṣaṭ karmāṇi samācaret /
anyas tu nācaret tāni doṣāṇāṃ samabhāvataḥ //
śleṣmādhikaḥ pūrvaṃ ] śleṣmanivṛtyarthaṃ YCM, śleṣmādisampūrṇaḥ YBhD anyas tu YBhD ] anyathā YCM samabhāvataḥ ] samatā yataḥ YCM, samabhāgikaḥ YBhD
धौती र्बस्तिर्नितिश्चैव त्राटकं लौलिकं तथा ।
कपालभातिश्चैतानि षट्कर्माणि प्रचक्षते ॥
dhautī r bastir nitiś caiva trāṭakaṃ laulikaṃ tathā /
kapālabhātiś caitāni ṣaṭ karmāṇi pracakṣate //
Manuscripts across all the groups contain many different spellings of the names of these techniques. As well as the requirements of the metre, the spellings we have favoured take into account the occurrences of each name in subsequent verses.
dhautī bastir nitiś caiva ] dhautir bastis tathā netis HRĀ, dhautī bastī tathā netī YCM, dhautir bastiś ca netiś ca YBhD laulikaṃ ] naulikaṃ HRĀ YCM YBhD kapālabhātiś caitāni ] kapālabhātir etāni HRĀ, kapālabhātī caitāni YCM YBhD
कर्मषट्कमिदं गोप्यं घटशोधनकारकम् ।
विचित्रगुणसंधायि पूज्यते योगिपुंगवैः ॥
karmaṣaṭkam idaṃ gopyaṃ ghaṭaśodhanakārakam /
vicitraguṇasaṃdhāyi pūjyate yogipuṃgavaiḥ //
karmaṣaṭkam YCM YBhD ] karmāṣṭakam HRĀ vicitraguṇasaṃdhāyi pūjyate yogipuṃgavaiḥ YCM ] kasya cin naiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā HRĀ, vicitraguṇasandhāyī kriyate yogibhiḥ sadā YBhD
चतुरङ्गुलविस्तारं सिक्तं वस्त्रं शनैर्ग्रसेत् ।
ततः प्रत्याहरेच्चैतदुखालं धौतिकर्म तत् ॥*
caturaṅgulavistāraṃ siktaṃ vastraṃ śanair graset /
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad ukhālaṃ dhautikarma tat //*
The reading ukhālam which we have adopted in the fourth pāda is a vernacular term for vomiting which is found in the α recension but has been
changed in some witnesses to more Sanskritic forms, such as udgāram and prakṣālyam.
Many manuscripts, including several of those collated (i.e. η2, π2 and πω), and the Jyotsnā (2.24), add two verse quarters stating that the length of the cloth is fifteen cubits
(hastapañcadaśena tu) and that the practice should be performed according to the guru’s teachings (gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa). These additions are absent from the α, γ and ζ groups. Moreover, the compound hastapañcadaśena does not fit the syntax of the sentence, while the pāda referring to the guru’s teaching is a cliché that was probably inserted as a verse
filler when with the pāda on the length of the cloth was added.
atha dhautiḥ
viṃśaddhastapramāṇena dhautavastraṃ sudīrghitam/
caturaṅgulavistāraṃ siktaṃ caiva śanaiḥ graset//
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad abhyāsād dhautir ucyate/
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad YBhD ] punaḥ pratyāhared etad YCM ukhālaṃ ] ākṣālaṃ YBhD, abhyāsād YCM dhautikarma tat YBhD ] dhautikarmavit YCM
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 56–57atha dhautī
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ śuddhaṃ caturaṅgulavistṛtam/
tithihastamitāyāmaṃ dhautīvastrasya lakṣaṇam//
toyasiktaṃ grased vastraṃ ghrāṇābhyāṃ vāyum utsṛjan/
śanaiḥ śanais tu sakalaṃ punaḥ pratyāharec chanaiḥ/
dhautīkarmedam ākhyātaṃ yatra gaṅgādhidaivatam//
कासश्वासप्लीहकुष्ठं कफरोगाश्च विंशतिः ।
धौतीकर्मप्रभावेन धावन्त्येव न संशयः ॥
kāsaśvāsaplīhakuṣṭhaṃ kapharogāś ca viṃśatiḥ /
dhautīkarmaprabhāvena dhāvanty eva na saṃśayaḥ //
The verb dhāvanti is a play on words, using a different root dhāv, “run”, from that of dhauti, which is related to dhāv, “purify”.
Twenty phlegmatic diseases are enumerated at Carakasaṃhitā sūtrasthāna 20.17, a chapter on major diseases (mahārogāḥ).
kāsaśvāsaplīhakuṣṭhaṃ HRĀ YCM ] plīhā śvāsaś ca kuṣṭhaṃ ca YBhD viṃśatiḥ HRĀ YBhD ] vidradhiḥ YCM dhāvanty HRĀ ] prayānty YCM, gacchanty YBhD
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 58kāsasvāsaplīhakuṣṭhādināśam
vahner māndyaṃ viṃśatiḥ śleṣarogān/
dūrīkuryāt karṇabādhir tam uccair
dhautīkarma praditaṃ śaṅkareṇa//
नाभिदघ्ने जले पायुन्यस्तनालोत्कटासनः ।
आधाराकुञ्चनं कुर्यात् पखालं बस्तिकर्म तत् ॥
nābhidaghne jale pāyunyastanālotkaṭāsanaḥ /
ādhārākuñcanaṃ kuryāt pakhālaṃ bastikarma tat //
The reading pakhālaṃ that we have adopted in the fourth pāda is found in α2 and πω and is close to the reading of α1. It reflects vernacular usage as found in the old Hindi Aṣṭāṅgayoga of Caraṇadāsa (6.71ab). Some other witnesses have the Sanskritised form prakṣālaṃ, which is very rare in Sanskrit sources, while others have the more common kṣālanaṃ.
nābhidaghne jale sthitvā pāyunāle sthitāṅguliḥ/
cakrimārgeṇa jaṭharaṃ pāyunālena pūrayet//
vicitrakaraṇīṃ kṛtvā nirbhītaḥ recayej jalam/
yāvad balaṃ prapūryaiva kṣaṇaṃ sthitvā virecayet//
ghaṭītrayaṃ na bhoktavyaṃ bastim abhyasatā dhruvam/
nivātabhūmau santiṣṭhed vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ//
pāyu YCM ] pāyau YBhD pakhālaṃ bastikarma tat ] abhyāsād vastikarmavit YCM, kṣālanaṃ bastikarma tat YBhD
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 132naulīkriyāsusaṃpannas tyaktamūtramalaḥ sudhīḥ/
jānudaghne jale kuryād bastiṃ bastividhānavit//
गुल्मप्लीहोदरं चापि वातपित्तकफोद्भवाः ।
बस्तिकर्मप्रभावेन वार्यन्ते सकलामयाः ॥
gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi vātapittakaphodbhavāḥ /
bastikarmaprabhāvena vāryante sakalāmayāḥ //
We have assumed that the compound gulmaplīhodara is referring generally to swelling (gulma), spleen disorders (plīhan) and stomach diseases (udara), but the terms gulma and plīhodara can refer to more specific diseases. In Suśrutasaṃhitā, uttaratantra 42.4, gulma is defined as a movable or immovable round lump (granthi) that might arise between the heart and lower abdomen (basti) and can grow or shrink:
hṛdbastyorantare granthiḥ saṃcārī yadi vā’calaḥ/
cayāpacayavān vṛttaḥ sa gulma iti kīrtitaḥ//
gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi YBhD ] gulmaplīhodaraṃ vāpi HRĀ, gulmodaraṃ cāpi vāta YCM vātapittakaphodbhavāḥ YBhD ] vātapittakaphādikam HRĀ, plīhapittakaphodbhavāḥ YCM vāryante sakalāmayāḥ ] dhāvanty eva na saṃśayaḥ HRĀ, bādhyante sakalāmayāḥ YCM, naśyanti sakalāmayāḥ YBhD
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 135, 140–141yāvan malā vinaśyanti vātapittakaphodbhavāḥ/
trivāraṃ vā caturvāraṃ kṛtvā bastiṃ virecayet//
mahojasvī mahajjyotir jaṭharāgnipradīpanam/
gulmaplīhodarādīnāṃ nāśanaṃ sukhavardhanam//
vātapittakaphotthānāṃ doṣāṇāṃ nāśanaṃ paraṃ/
kuṣṭhānāṃ nāśanaṃ cāpi bastisiddhe prajāyate//
धात्विन्द्रियान्तःकरणप्रसादं
दद्याच्च कान्तिं दहनप्रदीप्तिम् ।
अशेषदोषोपचयं निहन्या-
दभ्यस्यमानं जलबस्तिकर्म ॥
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādaṃ
dadyāc ca kāntiṃ dahanapradīptim /
aśeṣadoṣopacayaṃ nihanyā-
d abhyasyamānaṃ jalabastikarma //
रसासृङ्मांसमेदोऽस्थिमज्जाशुक्राणि धातवः
rasāsṛṅmāṃsamedo’sthimajjāśukrāṇi dhātavaḥ
prasādaṃ HRĀ YCM ] prabodhaṃ YBhD dadyāc ca HRĀ ] dadhyāc ca YCM, dadāti YBhD
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 139–140abtiṣṭhed vaśī mitāhāraḥ sarvāṅgaṃ tena śudhyati/
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādo dehalāghavam//
mahojasvī mahajjyotir jaṭharāgnipradīpanam/
उदरगतपदार्थमुद्वमन्ती
पवनमपानमुदीर्य कण्ठनाले ।
क्रमपरिचयवश्यवायुमार्गा-
द्गजकरणीति निगद्यते हठज्ञैः ॥
udaragatapadārtham udvamantī
pavanam apānam udīrya kaṇṭhanāle /
kramaparicayavaśyavāyumārgā-
d gajakaraṇīti nigadyate haṭhajñaiḥ //
Manuscripts η2 and πω have an alternative reading for the third verse quarter that explains the name of the practice: it is called the elephant technique ‘because the speed of the breath is like that of water [propelled] by elephants’ (karibhir iva jalasya vāyuvegāt). The syntax of this reading is not so easy to construe with the rest of the verse, which suggests that it was not original. The reading we have adopted (kramaparicayavaśya...) is attested by manuscripts of the most important groups and the same witnesses preserve mārga (rather than vega).
vaśyavāyumārgād ] yatas tu vāyumārge HRĀ, vaśyavāyumārgā YBhD
Cf. Haṭhatattvakaumudī 8.8udaragatapadārthān udvamed eva nityaṃ
pavanagamanamārgāt kaṇṭhanālapraveśāt/
kramaparicayavaśyaṃ syāc ca gargādayo hi
gajakaraṇam itīha prāhur āryā munīndrāḥ//
atha gajakaraṇī
śuddhaṃ toyaṃ nārikelodbhavaṃ vā
pītvākaṇṭhaṃ dugdhamiśraṃ jalaṃ vā/
vāraṃ vāraṃ māṇibandhaṃ tu kurvan
nodgāreṇa prakṣiped bhūmibhāge //
eṣā proktā kaphapittāmayeṣu
medoghnīva kariṇī hastipūrvā//
सूत्रं वितस्तिसुस्तब्धं नासानाले प्रवेशयेत् ।
मुखान्निर्गमयेच्चैषा नीतिः सिद्धैर्निगद्यते ॥
sūtraṃ vitastisustabdhaṃ nāsānāle praveśayet /
mukhān nirgamayec caiṣā nītiḥ siddhair nigadyate //
In this verse and the next the α witnesses read nīti/nītiḥ for the name of this practice. These and related terms are found in various north
Indian vernaculars with meanings appropriate for a practice in which a string is pulled
back and forth through the nose and mouth. In modern colloquial Bengali, niti can mean the string used to spin a top and is likely to be connected with neta/netā which means a small piece of cloth. In modern Hindi and Gujarati netī means the cord of a churning stick and is cognate with Sanskrit netra (Turner 1966: 427, entry 7588). In Old Hindi neta can have the same meaning or be a kind of silk cloth (Callewaert s.v.). In Oriya
neta means “a kind of silk cloth worn by girls” (Praharaj s.v.). We thank Lubomír Ondračka
for alerting us to several of these references.
The Hindi form of the name for this practice, netī, is very well established nowadays, but Svātmārāma’s original readings in this and
the following verse were clearly niti and nīti (vowel length was perhaps not important in the vernacular from which the name was
taken). This is confirmed not just by α’s readings at 2.30d but also by 2.31d where
only the short first vowel of niti works metrically (some witnesses have rewritten the pāda in order to use the spelling netī). We might thus surmise that, like laulī, the practice, or at least its name, was taught to Svātmārāma by Gauḍas, because
it is only from Bengal that we have evidence of the use of the form niti.
अवाप्ताष्टगुणैश्वर्याः सिद्धाः सद्भिर्निरूपिताः
avāptāṣṭaguṇaiśvaryāḥ siddhāḥ sadbhir nirūpitāḥ
nirgamayec caiṣā nītiḥ ] nirgamayet sā hi netī YCM, nirgamayed eṣā netiḥ YBhD
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 1.40–41atha netikarma
ākhupucchākāranibhaṃ sūtraṃ susnigdhanirmitam/
ṣaḍvitastimitaṃ sūtraṃ netisūtrasya lakṣanam//
nāsānāle praviśyainaṃ mukhān nirgamayet kramāt/
sūtrasyāntaṃ prabaddhvā tu bhrāmayen nāsanālayoḥ/
atha netī
mṛdu ślakṣṇaṃ sitaṃ sūtraṃ nāsānāle praveśayet/
mukhān nirgamayed dasrau cintayen netikā smṛtā//
कपालशोधनी चैव दिव्यदृष्टिप्रदायिनी ।
जत्रूर्ध्वजातरोगौघं जयत्याशु सती नितिः ॥
kapālaśodhanī caiva divyadṛṣṭipradāyinī /
jatrūrdhvajātarogaughaṃ jayaty āśu satī nitiḥ //
We have adopted the reading caiva in the first verse quarter, which is attested by manuscripts of the γ, δ and π groups
and is easy to construe. α1 and α2 have vaṭyā and kaṃṭhā respectively, which may derive from kaṇṭhyā (α3, ε1, ζ1), but none of these readings makes sense here. η1 and η2 have kāryā, which is unnecessary because of the main verb in the final verse quarter.
Most witnesses, including the Jyotsnā, read jatrūrdhva in the third verse quarter, which is generally understood as ‘above the collar bones’
or, as Brahmānanda says, the area above the shoulder joints (jatruṇoḥ skandhasandhyor ūrdhvam uparibhāge). On problems concerning the interpretation of jatru, see Meulenbeld 1974: 465. We have adopted jatrūrdhva against the reading of α1 and α2, hanūrdhva, ‘above the jaw’, and α3, kaṇṭhordhva, ‘above the throat’.
स्कन्धे भुजशिरो ऽंसो ऽस्त्री सन्ंधी तस्यैव जत्रुणी
skandhe bhujaśiro ’ṃso ’strī sanṃdhī tasyaiva jatruṇī
śodhanī YCM ] śodhinī HRĀ YBhD caiva YCM YBhD ] kāryā HRĀ rogaughaṃ ] rogaghnī HRĀ, rogaughān YCM, yogādyaiḥ YBhD jayaty āśu satī nitiḥ ] jāyate netir uttamā HRĀ, jarayaty āśu netivit YCM, jayaty eva suniścitam YBhD
निरीक्षेन्निश्चलदृशा सूक्ष्मलक्ष्यं समाहितः ।
अश्रुसंपातपर्यन्तमाचार्यैस्त्राटकं मतम् ॥
nirīkṣen niścaladṛśā sūkṣmalakṣyaṃ samāhitaḥ /
aśrusaṃpātaparyantam ācāryais trāṭakaṃ matam //
nirīkṣen YCM ] nirīkṣya HRĀ, vīkṣeta YBhD sūkṣmalakṣyaṃ HRĀ YCM ] sulakṣyaṃ ca YBhD saṃpāta HRĀ YBhD ] prapāta YCM ācāryais HRĀ YBhD ] āryais tat YCM matam YCM ] smṛtam HRĀ YBhD
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 40cd–41abatha trāṭakam
sūkṣmalakṣye dṛśau sthāpya nirnimeṣaś ciraṃ bhavet/
aśrusampātaparyantaṃ karma trāṭakam īritam //
मोटकं नेत्ररोगाणां तन्द्रादीनां कपाटकम् ।
यत्नतस्त्राटकं गोप्यं यथा हाटकपेटकम् ॥
moṭakaṃ netrarogāṇāṃ tandrādīnāṃ kapāṭakam /
yatnatas trāṭakaṃ gopyaṃ yathā hāṭakapeṭakam //
The witnesses have many different readings for the first word of this verse. The
α manuscripts are split between modaka (α1), mocaka (α2) and movana (α3). Of these, modaka is the most likely, if it is understood as a medicinal pill. However this meaning
is rare, even in medical literature, as modaka is generally used to refer to a small sweet. We have adopted moṭakaṃ, which is attested by δ2, ε1 and η1, as well as the Yuktabhavadeva, and which we understand to mean “destroyer” (muṭa pramardane, Dhātupātha 1.346). Bohtlingk and Roth (s.v.) and Monier-Williams (s.v.) give medicinal pill as a possible meaning of moṭaka (cf. modaka) but it appears that this is mainly an inference drawn only from this verse, where
the pill is merely a comparison. Several witnesses have sphoṭanaṃ (‘destroying’), which is also possible.
The reading kapāṭakam in the second verse quarter is found in most of the witnesses and testimonia and
we have adopted it accordingly. The context indicates that it means “shutter” (in
the sense of shutting out something), but we have not found any parallel usages of
it in this sense.
moṭakaṃ YBhD ] sphoṭanaṃ HRĀ, moṭanaṃ YCM kapāṭakam HRĀ YCM ] kapāṭanam YBhD yatnatas YBhD ] prayatnāt HRĀ, etac ca YCM hāṭakapeṭakam YCM YBhD ] ratnasupeṭakam HRĀ
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 41cd–42abatha trāṭakam
vaṅglāvikaraṇasthe’sminn antarjyotiḥ prakāśyate/
netrarogās tathā tandrā naśyantīty āha dhūrjatiḥ//
अमन्दावर्तवेगेन तुन्दं सव्यापसव्यतः ।
नतांसो भ्रमयेदेषा लौली गौडैः प्रशस्यते ॥
amandāvartavegena tundaṃ savyāpasavyataḥ /
natāṃso bhramayed eṣā laulī gauḍaiḥ praśasyate //
We have adopted α1’s readings of laulī and laulika as the name of this practice in verses 2.34–35 and 2.22 respectively. The vast majority
of manuscripts, including α2, and the most important testimonia support naulī or nauliḥ but the names laulika and laulikī do occur in some more recent works, such as the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 4), Gheraṇḍasaṃhitā (1.12), Yogasārasaṅgraha (pp. 54–55) and Yogakarṇikā (p. 56). The root lul, “roll”, provides an etymology for laulī and the change to naulī can be explained by the similarity in Bengali scripts of la and na (we thank Lubomír Ondračka for this observation).
Mahant Bālyogī Rām Bālak Dās performing laulī at Dīrgheśvar Mahādev, U.P., in 2012.
पिचण्डकुक्षी जठरोदरं तुन्दं स्तनौ कुचौ
picaṇḍakukṣī jaṭharodaraṃ tundaṃ stanau kucau
savyataḥ HRĀ YBhD ] savyayoḥ YBhD bhramayed ] bhrāmayed HRĀ YCM YBhD laulī gauḍaiḥ praśasyate ] naulir gauḍaiḥ praśasyate HRĀ YBhD, naulī yoge pracakṣate YCM
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 110cd–111atha naulī
amandāvartavegena jaṭharaṃ dakṣavāmayoḥ/
cālayec chaṃbhunā proktaṃ tatra lakṣmyadhidevatā /
bāhyanaulir iyaṃ proktā jaṭharānaladīpinī//
तुन्दाग्निसंदीपनपाचनादि-
संधायिकानन्दकरी सदैव ।
अशेषदोषामयशोषणी च
हठक्रियामौलिरियं च लौली ॥*
tundāgnisaṃdīpanapācanādi-
saṃdhāyikānandakarī sadaiva /
aśeṣadoṣāmayaśoṣaṇī ca
haṭhakriyāmaulir iyaṃ ca laulī //*
Manuscripts α1 and α2, ε1, ζ1 and π2 have tundāgni (or a very similar reading) in the first verse quarter. This reading is also supported
by all of the manuscripts collated for the published edition of the Haṭharatnāvalī. The compound tundāgni is rare in Sanskrit literature but it was likely used here because the term tunda appears in the previous verse, which explains how laulī is done. The compound tundāgni is synonymous with udarāgni, jaṭharāgni, śarīrāgni etc., which are commonly used in yoga texts to refer to the body’s digestive fire.
The alternative reading mandāgni (‘sluggish fire’) is reasonably common in contexts of stimulating poor digestion,
and may have been introduced early in the transmission to replace the more unusual
tundāgni.
Most witnesses and the testimonia have maulir iyaṃ in the fourth verse quarter, which expresses the idea that laulī was thought to be the best of the ṣaṭkarma, and the assonance of laulī and mauli may have been intended. The alternative reading of mūlam iyaṃ in ζ1 and η1 would suggest that laulī is necessary for the other practices, which does not seem to be the case because,
according to Haṭhapradīpikā 2.21, the ṣaṭkarmas are more like therapeutic interventions.
tundāgni HRĀ ] mandāgni YCM YBhD HTK ādisaṃdhāyikā HTK ] ādisandīpikā HRĀ, āgnisandhāyikā YCM, adisandhāvanā YBhD sadaiva HRĀ YBhD HTK ] tathaiva YCM śoṣaṇī ca HRĀ ] śoṣiṇī ca YCM, śoṣaṇīyaṃ YBhD, śoṣaṇīva HTK maulir iyaṃ ca laulī ] maulir iyaṃ ca naulī HRĀ, maulir iyaṃ hi naulī YCM, maulir iyaṃ hi nauliḥ YBhD, sau jayatīha nauliḥ HTK
भस्त्रावल्लोहकारस्य रेचपूरौ सुसंभ्रमौ ।
कपालभातिर्विख्याता कफदोषविशोषिणी ॥
bhastrāval lohakārasya recapūrau susaṃbhramau /
kapālabhātir vikhyātā kaphadoṣaviśoṣiṇī //
The word bhāti is derived from bhastrī (Turner 1966: 537, entry 9424).
η2 and other manuscripts have kuryāt savyāpasavyataḥ (‘left and right’) instead of recapūrau sasambhramau. Although one might infer that savyāpasavyataḥ is referring to performing the skull bellows breathing alternately through the left
and right nostrils, it appears to be a secondary reading because there is no indication
of what is moving to the left and right. Such a method of alternate nostril breathing
is explained as a variation of kapālabhāti in the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 14):
iḍayā pūrayed vāyuṃ recayet piṅgalākhyayā/
piṅgalayā pūrayitvā punaś candreṇa recayet/
pūrakaṃ recakaṃ kṛtvā vegena na tu cālayet//
atha kapālabhātiḥ YBhD ] atha kapālabhastrikā HRĀ, atha kapālabhātī YCM recapūrau YCM YBhD ] recapūra HRĀ susambhramau HRĀ ] sasaṃbhramau YCM YBhD bhātir YBhD ] bhātī YCM, bhastrī HRĀ kaphadoṣa YCM YBhD ] sarvaroga HRĀ
Cf. Satkarmasaṅgraha 50cd–51atha bhastrā
lohakārasya bhastreva recapūrau tu vegataḥ//
punaḥ punaḥ prakurvīta sthiramūrdhnā prayatnataḥ/
sthirabhastreti ca khyāta yogināṃ siddhidāyakā//
षट्कर्मभिर्गतस्थौल्यकफमेदोमलादिकः ।
प्राणायामं ततः कुर्याद् अनायासेन सिध्यति ॥
ṣaṭkarmabhir gatasthaulyakaphamedomalādikaḥ /
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryād anāyāsena sidhyati //
ṣaṭkarmabhir YBhD ] karmāṣṭabhir HRĀ, ṣaṭkarmanir YCM sthaulya YCM ] sthaulyaṃ HRĀ YBhD malādikaḥ ] malādikam HRĀ, gadādikaḥ YCM, malātigaḥ YBhD
प्राणायामैरेव सर्वे प्रशुष्यन्ति मला इति ।
आचार्याणां तु केषांचिदन्यत्कर्म न संमतम् ॥
prāṇāyāmair eva sarve praśuṣyanti malā iti /
ācāryāṇāṃ tu keṣāṃcid anyat karma na saṃmatam //
The plural of prāṇāyāma, which we have translated here as ‘breath-controls’, probably refers to practising
multiple repetitions of breath retentions with alternate nostril breathing.
आचिनोति च शास्त्रार्थमाचारे स्थापयेदपि
स्वयमाचरते यस्मादाचार्यस्तेन चोच्यते इति
ācinoti ca śāstrārtham ācāre sthāpayed api
svayam ācarate yasmād ācāryas tena cocyate iti
sarve YBhD ] sarvaiḥ YCM iti YBhD ] yataḥ iti YCM karma YBhD ] krama YCM
ब्रह्मादयोऽपि त्रिदशाः पवनाभ्यासतत्पराः ।
अभूवन्नन्तकभयात् तस्मात्पवनमभ्यसेत् ॥
brahmādayo’pi tridaśāḥ pavanābhyāsatatparāḥ /
abhūvann antakabhayāt tasmāt pavanam abhyaset //
Brahmā is said to have become devoted to prāṇāyāma because of his fear of death in the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (74), a text known to Svātmārāma.
abhūvann antakabhayāt ] abhūvan mṛtyurahitā HRĀ, tena siddhiṃ gatā yoge HTK
यावद्बद्धो मरुद्देहे यावच्चित्तं निराश्रयम् ।
यावद्वीक्षा भ्रुवोर्मध्ये तावत्कालभयं कुतः ॥
yāvad baddho marud dehe yāvac cittaṃ nirāśrayam /
yāvad vīkṣā bhruvor madhye tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ //
We have adopted the reading vīkṣā in the third verse quarter, which is an emendation of α1 and α2’s vīkṣed. The verb vīkṣed is likely an error as the other yāvat clauses have been written as nominal phrases. The reading vīkṣā occurs in the same verse of the six-chapter version of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa, which sometimes preserves old readings of that text.
खाद्यते न च कालेन बाध्यते न च कर्मणा
साध्यते न स केनापि योगी युक्तः समाधिना
khādyate na ca kālena bādhyate na ca karmaṇā
sādhyate na sa kenāpi yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā
vīkṣā VM ] dṛṣṭir VMv.l.
cittaṃ YBhD ] vṛttau YCM vīkṣā ] dṛṣṭir YCM YBhD
विधिवत्प्राणसंयामैर्नाडीचक्रे विशोधिते ।
सुषुम्णावदनं भित्त्वा सुखाद्विशति मारुतः ॥
vidhivat prāṇasaṃyāmair nāḍīcakre viśodhite /
suṣumṇāvadanaṃ bhittvā sukhād viśati mārutaḥ //
The compound prāṇasaṃyāmaiḥ (‘breath-controls’) should be understood here as a synonym for prāṇāyāmaiḥ as found in 2.38 (on which see the note on this verse).
vidhivat HRĀ ] vividhaiḥ YCM
मारुते मध्यसंचारे मनःस्थैर्यं प्रजायते ।
यो मनःसुस्थिरीभावः सैवावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
mārute madhyasaṃcāre manaḥsthairyaṃ prajāyate /
yo manaḥsusthirībhāvaḥ saivāvasthā manonmanī //
madhyasaṃcāre YCM ] madhyame jāte HRĀ yo manaḥ YCM ] manasaḥ HRĀ
तत्सिद्धये विधानज्ञश्चित्रान्कुर्वीत कुम्भकान् ।
विचित्रकुम्भकाभ्यासाद्विचित्रां सिद्धिमाप्नुयात् ॥
tatsiddhaye vidhānajñaś citrān kurvīta kumbhakān /
vicitrakumbhakābhyāsād vicitrāṃ siddhim āpnuyāt //
The majority of witnesses, including α2, have a plural subject (vidhānajñāḥ) and verb (kurvanti) in the first line. We have adopted the singular, which is attested by α1, α3 and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, because it corresponds with the singular subject of the second line.
जन्मौषधितपोमन्त्रैर्यावत्य इह सिद्धयः
योगेनाप्नोति ताः सर्वा नान्यैर्योगगतिं व्रजेत्
janmauṣadhitapomantrair yāvatya iha siddhayaḥ
yogenāpnoti tāḥ sarvā nānyair yogagatiṃ vrajet
jñaś citrān ] jñaḥ sadā HRĀ, jñāś citrān YBhD kurvīta HRĀ ] kurvanti YBhD
सूर्यभेदनमुज्जायी तथा सीत्का च शीतली ।
भस्त्रिका भ्रमरी मूर्छा केवलश्चाष्ट कुम्भकाः ॥
sūryabhedanam ujjāyī tathā sītkā ca śītalī /
bhastrikā bhramarī mūrchā kevalaś cāṣṭa kumbhakāḥ //
On the occurrence of plāvanī in this list in many manuscript groups, including the Jyotsnā, see the note on verse 2.71.
ujjāyī YCM YBhD ] ujjayī HRĀ YLĀ tathā sītkā ca śītalī YLĀ ] tathā sītkāraśītalī HRĀ YCM, sītkārī śītalī tathā YBhD bhramarī YCM ] bhrāmarī HRĀ YLĀ YBhD kevalaś HRĀ ] kevalāś YLĀ YBhD, sahitaṃ YCM
पूरकान्ते तु कर्तव्यो बन्धो जालन्धराभिधः ।
कुम्भकान्ते रेचकादौ कर्तव्यस्तूड्डियाणकः ॥
pūrakānte tu kartavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ /
kumbhakānte recakādau kartavyas tūḍḍiyāṇakaḥ //
The term uḍḍīyāṇa is spelt various ways among manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā and other texts. Generally speaking, the α group have uḍḍīyāṇa, π uḍḍiyāṇa, γ and δ uḍḍiyāna and the Jyotsnā uḍḍīyāna. Other spellings, such as uḍyāṇa and uḍiyāṇa, also occur. We have adopted the spelling of α except in cases where the metre of a verse requires otherwise, as in 2.45d (uḍḍiyāṇakaḥ). As noted by Sanderson (2007: 265), diverse spellings of the place by the same name occur, including Uḍḍiyāna, Oḍḍiyāna, U/Oḍiyāna, U/Oḍyāna, or U/Oḍḍayana.
kartavyas tūḍḍiyāṇakaḥ ] kartavyoḍḍiyaṇābhidhaḥ GŚ
tu HRĀ YCM ] ca YBhD
अधस्तात्कुञ्चनेनाशु कण्ठसंकोचने कृते ।
मध्ये पश्चिमताणेन स्यात्प्राणो ब्रह्मनाडिगः ॥
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte /
madhye paścimatāṇena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ //
As is clear in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, the three techniques alluded to here are mūlabandha, jālandharabandha and uḍḍiyānabandha respectively (on which see chapter three).
The stem form brahma is found in various compounds in the text. We understand it to refer to Brahman,
the absolute, in all instances other than brahmagranthi, where we take it to mean the deity Brahmā. See Mallinson 2007: 205 n. 240.
kuñcanenāśu ] kuñcanenaiva GŚ
adhastāt HRĀ YB YBhD ] adhas tv YCM kocane kṛte HRĀ YB YBhD ] kocanena ca YCM
अपानमूर्ध्वमुत्थाप्य प्राणं कण्ठादधो नयेत् ।
योगी जराविमुक्तः सन् षोडशो वयसा भवेत् ॥
apānam ūrdhvam utthāpya prāṇaṃ kaṇṭhād adho nayet /
yogī jarāvimuktaḥ san ṣoḍaśo vayasā bhavet //
jarāvimuktaḥ san YCM ] jarāvimuktaḥ syāt HRĀ, jarāvinirmuktaḥ YBhD
आसने सुखदे योगी बद्ध्वा वज्रासनं ततः ।
दक्षनाड्या समाकृष्य बहिःस्थं पवनं शनैः ॥
āsane sukhade yogī baddhvā vajrāsanaṃ tataḥ /
dakṣanāḍyā samākṛṣya bahiḥsthaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ //
योगाभ्यासक्रमं वक्ष्ये योगिनां योगसिद्धये
उषःकाले समुत्थाय प्रातःकाले ऽथवा बुधः
गुरुं संस्मृत्य शिरसि हृदये स्वेष्टदेवताम्
शौचं कृत्वा दन्तशुद्धिं विदध्याद्भस्मधारणम्
शुचौ देशे मठे रम्ये प्रतिष्ठाप्यासनं मृदु
तत्रोपविश्य संस्मृत्य मनसा गुरुमीश्वरम्
देशकालौ च सङ्कीर्त्य सङ्कल्पविधिपूर्वकम्
अनन्तं प्रणमेद्देवं नागेशं पीठसिद्धये
ततो ऽभ्यसेदासनानि श्रमे जाते शवासनम्
अन्ते समभ्यसेत्तत्तु श्रमाभावे तु नाभ्यसेत्
करणीं विपरीताख्यां कुम्भकान्पूर्वमभ्यसेत्
जालन्धरस्य दार्ढ्यार्थं कुम्भकेषूपयोगतः
विधायाचमनं कृत्वा कर्माङ्गं प्राणसंयमम्
योगीन्द्रादीन्नमस्कृत्य कौर्माच्च शिववाक्यतः
नमस्कृत्याथ योगीन्द्रान्सशिष्यांश्च विनायकम्
गुरुं चैवाथ मां योगी युञ्जीत सुसमाहितः
बद्ध्वाभ्यासे सिद्धपीठं कुम्भकान्बन्धपूर्वकम्
प्रथमे दश कर्तव्याः पञ्चवृद्ध्या दिने दिने
कार्या अशीतिपर्यन्तं कुम्भकाः सुसमाहितैः
योगीन्द्रैः प्रथमं कुर्यादभ्यासं चन्द्रसूर्ययोः
अनुलोमविलोमाख्यमेतं प्राहुर्मनीषिणः
सूर्यभेदनमभ्यस्य बन्धपूर्वकमेकधीः
उज्जायिनं ततः कुर्यात्सीत्कारीं शीतलीं ततः
भस्त्रिकां च समभ्यस्य कुर्यादन्यान्न वा परान्
मुद्राः समभ्यसेद्बुद्धा गुरुवक्त्राद्यथाक्रमम्
ततः पद्मासनं बद्ध्वा कुर्यान्नादानुचिन्तनम्
अभ्यासं सकलं कुर्यादीश्वरार्पणमादृतः
अभ्यासादुत्थितः स्नानं कुर्यादुष्णेन वारिणा
स्नात्वा समापयेन्नित्यं कर्म सङ्क्षेपतः सुधीः
मध्याह्ने ऽपि तथाभ्यस्य किञ्चिद्विश्रम्य भोजनम्
कुर्वीत योगिनां पथ्यमपथ्यं न कदाचन
एलां वापि लवङ्गं वा भोजनान्ते च भक्षयेत्
केचित्कर्पूरमिच्छन्ति ताम्बूलं शोभनं तथा
चूर्णेन रहितं शस्तं पवनाभ्यासयोगिनाम्
इति चिन्तामणेर्वाक्यं स्वारस्यं भजते न हि
केचित्पदेन यस्मात्तु तयोः शीतौष्ण्यहेतुता
भोजनानन्तरं कुर्यान्मोक्षशास्त्रावलोकनम्
पुराणश्रवणं वापि नामसंकीर्तनं विभोः
सायं सन्ध्याविधिं कृत्वा योगं पूर्ववदभ्यसेत्
यदा त्रिघटिकाशेषो दिवसो ऽभ्यासमाचरेत्
अभ्यासानन्तरं कार्या सायंसन्ध्या तदा बुधैः
अर्धरात्रे हठाभ्यासं विदध्यात्पूर्ववद्यमी
विपरीतां तु करणीं सायंकालार्धरात्रयोः
नाभ्यसेद्भोजनादूर्ध्वं यतः सा न प्रशस्यते
शुचौ देशे प्रतिष्ठाप्य स्थिरमासनमात्मनः
नात्युच्छ्रितं नातिनीचं चैलाजिनकुशोत्तरम्
yogābhyāsakramaṃ vakṣye yogināṃ yogasiddhaye
uṣaḥkāle samutthāya prātaḥkāle ’thavā budhaḥ
guruṃ saṃsmṛtya śirasi hṛdaye sveṣṭadevatām
śaucaṃ kṛtvā dantaśuddhiṃ vidadhyād bhasmadhāraṇam
śucau deśe maṭhe ramye pratiṣṭhāpyāsanaṃ mṛdu
tatropaviśya saṃsmṛtya manasā gurum īśvaram
deśakālau ca saṅkīrtya saṅkalpavidhipūrvakam
anantaṃ praṇamed devaṃ nāgeśaṃ pīṭhasiddhaye
tato ’bhyased āsanāni śrame jāte śavāsanam
ante samabhyaset tat tu śramābhāve tu nābhyaset
karaṇīṃ viparītākhyāṃ kumbhakān pūrvam abhyaset
jālandharasya dārḍhyārthaṃ kumbhakeṣūpayogataḥ
vidhāyācamanaṃ kṛtvā karmāṅgaṃ prāṇasaṃyamam
yogīndrādīn namaskṛtya kaurmāc ca śivavākyataḥ
namaskṛtyātha yogīndrān saśiṣyāṃś ca vināyakam
guruṃ caivātha māṃ yogī yuñjīta susamāhitaḥ
baddhvābhyāse siddhapīṭhaṃ kumbhakān bandhapūrvakam
prathame daśa kartavyāḥ pañcavṛddhyā dine dine
kāryā aśītiparyantaṃ kumbhakāḥ susamāhitaiḥ
yogīndraiḥ prathamaṃ kuryād abhyāsaṃ candrasūryayoḥ
anulomavilomākhyam etaṃ prāhur manīṣiṇaḥ
sūryabhedanam abhyasya bandhapūrvakam ekadhīḥ
ujjāyinaṃ tataḥ kuryāt sītkārīṃ śītalīṃ tataḥ
bhastrikāṃ ca samabhyasya kuryād anyān na vā parān
mudrāḥ samabhyased buddhā guruvaktrād yathākramam
tataḥ padmāsanaṃ baddhvā kuryān nādānucintanam
abhyāsaṃ sakalaṃ kuryād īśvarārpaṇam ādṛtaḥ
abhyāsād utthitaḥ snānaṃ kuryād uṣṇena vāriṇā
snātvā samāpayen nityaṃ karma saṅkṣepataḥ sudhīḥ
madhyāhne ’pi tathābhyasya kiñcid viśramya bhojanam
kurvīta yogināṃ pathyam apathyaṃ na kadācana
elāṃ vāpi lavaṅgaṃ vā bhojanānte ca bhakṣayet
kecit karpūram icchanti tāmbūlaṃ śobhanaṃ tathā
cūrṇena rahitaṃ śastaṃ pavanābhyāsayoginām
iti cintāmaṇer vākyaṃ svārasyaṃ bhajate na hi
kecit padena yasmāt tu tayoḥ śītauṣṇyahetutā
bhojanānantaraṃ kuryān mokṣaśāstrāvalokanam
purāṇaśravaṇaṃ vāpi nāmasaṃkīrtanaṃ vibhoḥ
sāyaṃ sandhyāvidhiṃ kṛtvā yogaṃ pūrvavad abhyaset
yadā trighaṭikāśeṣo divaso ’bhyāsam ācaret
abhyāsānantaraṃ kāryā sāyaṃsandhyā tadā budhaiḥ
ardharātre haṭhābhyāsaṃ vidadhyāt pūrvavad yamī
viparītāṃ tu karaṇīṃ sāyaṃkālārdharātrayoḥ
nābhyased bhojanād ūrdhvaṃ yataḥ sā na praśasyate
śucau deśe pratiṣṭhāpya sthiram āsanam ātmanaḥ
nātyucchritaṃ nātinīcaṃ cailājinakuśottaram
आ केशाग्रान्नखाग्राच्च निरोधावधि कुम्भयेत् ।
ततः शनैः सव्यनाड्या रेचयेत्पवनं सुधीः ॥
ā keśāgrān nakhāgrāc ca nirodhāvadhi kumbhayet /
tataḥ śanaiḥ savyanāḍyā recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ //
An antecedent to the idea of prāṇāyāma affecting the whole body (i.e. as far as the tips of the hair and nails) occurs in the Baudhāyanadharmasūtra (4.1.23):
āvartayet sadā yuktaḥ prāṇāyāmān punaḥ punaḥ/
ā keśāntān nakhāgrāc ca tapas tapyata uttamam//
haṭhān niruddhaḥ prāṇo’yaṃ romakūpeṣu niḥsaret/
dehaṃ vidārayaty eṣa kuṣṭhādi janayaty api//
हठान्निरुद्धः प्राणो ऽयं रोमकूपेषु निःसरेत्
देहं विदारयत्येष कुष्ठादि जनयत्यपि
ततः प्रत्यायितव्यो ऽसौ क्रमेणारण्यहस्तिवत्
वन्यो गजो गजारिर्वा क्रमेण मृदुतामियात्
करोति शास्तृनिर्देशान्न च तं परिलङ्घयेत्
तथा प्राणो हृदिस्थोऽयं योगिनां क्रमयोगतः
गृहीतः सेव्यमानस्तु विश्रम्भमुपगच्छति
haṭhān niruddhaḥ prāṇo ’yaṃ romakūpeṣu niḥsaret
dehaṃ vidārayaty eṣa kuṣṭhādi janayaty api
tataḥ pratyāyitavyo ’sau krameṇāraṇyahastivat
vanyo gajo gajārir vā krameṇa mṛdutām iyāt
karoti śāstṛnirdeśān na ca taṃ parilaṅghayet
tathā prāṇo hṛdistho’yaṃ yogināṃ kramayogataḥ
gṛhītaḥ sevyamānas tu viśrambham upagacchati
pavitre nātyuccanīce hy āsane sukhade śubhe/
baddhvā vajrāsanaṃ kṛtvā sarasvatyāś ca cālanam//
dakṣanāḍyāṃ samākṛṣya bahiṣṭhaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ/
baddhvā vajrāsanaṃ ] baddhavajrāsanas YCM, baddhvā padmāsanaṃ YBhD ā keśāgrān nakhāgrāc ca ] ā keśāgraṃ nakhāgraṃ ca YCM, ā keśād ā nakhāgrāc ca YBhD nirodhāvadhi kumbhayet YBhD ] śirodhāvadhi kumbhakam YCM
Cf. Yogalakṣaṇāvalī f. 32r (attrib. HP)baddhavajrāsano dakṣanāḍyākṛṣyānilaṃ śanaiḥ/
ā nakhāgrālakāgrāntaṃ kumbhayitvā yathāsukham/
savyanāḍyā tato mandaṃ recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ//
कपालशोधनं वातदोषघ्नं कृमिदोषहम् ।
पुनः पुनरिदं कार्यं सूर्यभेदमुदाहृतम् ॥
kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmidoṣaham /
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedam udāhṛtam //
Both doṣaham and doṣahṛt are well attested and possible. We have favoured the former because the α reading (doṣajam) appears to be a corruption of it, and ha is from the same root as the verb in the source text (i.e. nihanti).
kapālaśodhane vāpi recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ/
tundasya vātadoṣaghnaḥ kṛmidoṣaṃ nihanti ca//
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedam udāhṛtam/
kapālaṃ śodhanaṃ cāpi recayet pavanaṃ śanaiḥ//
ālasyaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmikīṭaṃ nihanti ca/
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedākhyakumbhakam//
11cd kapālaṃ ... śanaiḥ HRĀ ] kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmināśanaṃ HRĀv.l.
Yogalakṣaṇāvalī f. 32r (attrib. HP) (ab only), Yogacintāmaṇi f. 101v (attrib. Yogabīja), Yuktabhavadeva 7.100 (attrib. HP)vāta YCM YBhD ] caitad YLĀ doṣaghnaṃ YCM YBhD ] vātaghnaṃ YLĀ ham YBhD ] nut YLĀ, hṛt YCM udāhṛtam YBhD ] uttamam YCM
मुखं संयम्य नाडीभ्याम् आकृष्य पवनं शनैः ।
यथा लगति कण्ठात्तु हृदयावधि सस्वनम् ॥
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāḍībhyām ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ /
yathā lagati kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi sasvanam //
The use of lagati without a locative or direct object (as found in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka) is supported by the paraphrase of the verse in the Haṭhatattvakaumudī (10.7). Most witnesses (including α) have the phrase kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi, which we have understood to have the sense of a locative as it specifies the place within the body where the contact occurs.
saṃyamya HRĀ YLĀ YCM ] niyamya YBhD nāḍībhyām HRĀ YCM YBhD ] nāsābhyāṃ YLĀ kaṇṭhāt tu YBhD ] hṛtkaṇṭhaṃ HRĀ, hṛtkaṇṭhe HRĀv.l., kaṇṭhe su YLĀ, kaṇṭhe suḥ YLĀv.l., hṛtkaṇṭhād YCM sasvanam YLĀ YCM ] sasvanaḥ HRĀ, pūraṇam YBhD
Cf. Haṭhatattvakaumudī 10.7athojjāyī kumbhakaḥ
āsyaṃ saṃyamya nāsāpuṭayugasuṣirābhyāṃ samākṛṣya vāyuṃ
mandaṃ mandaṃ yathāsau lagati galataṭād āhṛdantaḥ saśabdaḥ/
ruddhvā keśān nakhāgrāvadhi pavanam amuṃ recayed vāmanāḍyā
proktojjāyīti kumbhaḥ kaphagadadalano dīptikṛjjāṭharāgneḥ//
पूर्ववत्कुम्भयेत्प्राणं रेचयेदिडया ततः ।
श्लेष्मदोषहरं कण्ठे देहानलविवर्धनम् ॥
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ /
śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ kaṇṭhe dehānalavivardhanam //
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ/
śīrṣotthitānalaharaṃ galaśleṣmaharaṃ param//
śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ kaṇṭhe YCM ] gale śleṣmaharaṃ proktaṃ HRĀ, śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ caitad YLĀ, śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ dehā YBhD dehānalavivardhanam HRĀ YCM ] dhāturogavināśanam YLĀ, naladīptipravardhanam YBhD
†नाडीजलोदरा†धातुगतदोषविनाशनम् ।
गच्छतस्तिष्ठतः कार्यमुज्जाय्याख्यं तु कुम्भकम् ॥
†nāḍījalodarā†dhātugatadoṣavināśanam /
gacchatas tiṣṭhataḥ kāryam ujjāyyākhyaṃ tu kumbhakam //
Nearly all the manuscripts have nāḍījalodarādhātu, which is difficult to understand because of jala (‘water’) in this context and ā+dhātu within the compound. This reading is also present in the transmission of the source
text for the verse, the Gorakṣaśataka, and most of the testimonia. Given the strength of the evidence, we have adopted
the reading and understood it as a list of things in which diseases (doṣa) may occur. This is consistent with Brahmānanda’s explanation (Jyotsnā 2.53). He explains ā+dhātu as samantāt ... dhātavaḥ (‘the bodily constitutents altogether’).
Two later sources attempt to solve these problems. Some of the manuscripts of the
Haṭharatnāvalī read nāḍījālo (‘in the network of channels’), which makes better sense than nāḍījalo, as jala usually means water rather than bodily fluid. Brahmānanda understands jala as water that has been drunk (pītam udakam), which seems far-fetched as the site of a disease. Two old manuscripts have dare dhātu, which avoids the need to read darādhātu. If one were to conjecture nāḍījālodare, the line would mean, ‘it cures diseases of the bodily constitutents inside the network
of channels.’
For the idea of doṣas being in dhātus see Tantrāloka 28.283cd, where Abhinavagupta says that worldly concepts arise as a result (dhātudoṣāc ca saṃsārasaṃskārās te ...). In the Īśvarapratyabhijñāvimarśinī Abhinavagupta notes that they are also the source of physical disorders (2.15 dhātudoṣakṛtaṃ mūrcchā).
The name ujjāyī may be a Prakrit form of uddhmāyī from the verb ud-dhmā, “to blow out”. We thank Diwakar Acharya for this suggestion.
tu ] ca GŚ
jalodarā YBhD ] jālodarā HRĀ, jalodara HRĀv.l.YCM, jalodaraṃ HRĀv.l. vināśanam HRĀ YCM ] nivāraṇam YBhD gacchatas tiṣṭhataḥ YCM ] gacchatā tiṣṭhatā HRĀ YBhD ujjāyyākhyaṃ tu kumbhakam ] ujjāyyākhyaṃ hi kumbhakam HRĀ, ujjāyyākhyaṃ ca kumbhakam YCM, ujjākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam YBhD
Cf. Yogalakṣaṇāvalī f. 32r (attrib. HP)dehānaloddīptikaraṃ jalodaravighātakṛt/
gachatā tiṣṭhatā kāryaś cojjāyākhyas tu kumbhakaḥ//
सीत्कां दद्यात्सदा वक्त्रे घ्राणे चैव विजृम्भिकाम् ।
एवमभ्यासयोगेन कामदेवो द्वितीयकः ॥
sītkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇe caiva vijṛmbhikām /
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ //
There is division between śītkāṃ and sītkāṃ in all the manuscript groups of the Haṭhapradīpikā (note that the likely reading in the source texts was hikkāṃ). The result of becoming a second god of love may be connected with the sound sīt, which is said to be made during sex in the Kāmasūtra (2.7.4–19).
This verse’s source texts are from Kaula tantric milieus and this is reflected in
the result of becoming one with the circle of yoginīs mentioned in the next verse.
cittan dadyāt tu vaktreṇa nāse dadyād vijṛmbhikām/
vācāsiddhir bhavaty eva kāmadevo’paraḥ priyaḥ//
hikkā dadyāt sadā vaktre prāyaś caiva vijṛmbhikām/
evam abhyasyamānas tu kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ//
hikkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇañ caiva vijṛmbhate/
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ//
dadyāt sadā YBhD ] kuryāt tathā HRĀ YCM ghrāṇe caiva YBhD ] ghrāṇenaiva HRĀ YCM vijṛṃbhikām YBhD ] visarjayet HRĀ YCM
Cf. Yogalakṣaṇāvalī f. 32r (attrib. HP)sītkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇe caiva vijṛṃbhitām/
evam abhyasato na kṣuttṛṭ cālasyādi jāyate//
योगिनीचक्रसामान्यः सृष्टिसंहारकारकः ।
न क्षुधा न तृषा निद्रा नैवालस्यं प्रजायते ॥
yoginīcakrasāmānyaḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ /
na kṣudhā na tṛṣā nidrā naivālasyaṃ prajāyate //
cakra ] guṇa JS tṛṣā ] ca tṛṇ JS naivālasyaṃ ] naiva murchā JS
Cf. Kaulajñānanirṇaya 7.18abyoginīgaṇasāmānyāḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ/
sāmānyaḥ YBhD ] saṃsevyaḥ HRĀ YCM saṃhārakārakaḥ HRĀ YCM ] sthityantakārakaḥ YBhD tṛṣā HRĀ YBhD ] tṛṣṇā YCM naivālasyaṃ HRĀ ] tandrālasyaṃ YCM, nālasya ca YBhD prajāyate HRĀ YBhD ] na jāyate YCM
भवेत्स्वच्छन्ददेहश्च सर्वोपद्रववर्जितः ।
अनेन विधिना सत्यं योगीन्द्रो भुविमण्डले ॥
bhavet svacchandadehaś ca sarvopadravavarjitaḥ /
anena vidhinā satyaṃ yogīndro bhuvimaṇḍale //
The aiśa compound bhuvimaṇḍale, which is attested at Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa 45.221, is likely the original reading here. The alternative bhūmi is well-attested and so the change may have happened early in the transmission.
dehaś ca ] dehas tu JS satyaṃ ] devi JS
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 3.94anenaiva vidhānena yogīndro’vanimaṇḍale/
bhavet svacchandacārī ca sarvāpatparivarjitaḥ//
dehaś ca YBhD ] dehas tu HRĀ YCM, dehaḥ syāt HRĀv.l., dehasyāt HRĀv.l. satyaṃ HRĀ YBhD ] yas tu YCM bhuvimaṇḍale YBhD ] bhāti bhūtale HRĀ, bhūmimaṇḍale YCM
रसनातालुमूलेन यः प्राणं सततं पिबेत् ।
अब्दार्धेन भवेत्तस्य सर्वरोगपरिक्षयः ॥
rasanātālumūlena yaḥ prāṇaṃ satataṃ pibet /
abdārdhena bhavet tasya sarvarogaparikṣayaḥ //
The compound rasanātālumūlena is difficult to understand. In his Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f. 79r–79v), Sundaradeva says that the external air strikes the root of the tongue
and palate and the upper part of the uvula (atra muhū (mūhū codex) rasanātālumūlāhataṃ ghaṇṭikordhvabhāgāhataṃ bahiḥsthavāyuṃ vidhāya pibed ity arthaḥ). More helpful are the remarks of the commentator of the Yogataraṅgiṇī (2.39). He says that a hole or cavity (vivara) is made by the root of the palate with the help of the tongue. The yogi breathes
through it (evaṃ rasanātālumūlena rasanā jihvā tatsahāyabhūtatālumūlena kṛtaṃ yad vivaraṃ, tena
kṛtvā yaḥ yogī prāṇam anilaṃ prāṇavāyuṃ pibet pūrayet, tasya yogino ’bdārdhena ṣaṇmāsena
sarvarogāṇāṃ nāśaḥ kṣayo bhavet/).
The idea of breathing through a hole between the root of the palate and tongue might
have been intended by the parallel reading of the Yogacintāmaṇi: rasanātāluyogena (‘by joining the tongue and palate’). We have thus translated rasanātālumūlena as ‘through the tongue and root of the palate’. It could also imply that the tongue
is turned up and back to touch the root of the palate to make a hole that one breathes
through (when the breath is taken in through the mouth). The Kumbhakapaddhati (137ab) states this more clearly:
rasanām unmukhīkṛtya sītkāraṃ kurvatā marut/
rasanāṃ tālumūle yaḥ sthāpayitvā vipaścitaḥ/
pibet prāṇānilaṃ tasya rogāṇāṃ saṃkṣayo bhavet//
satataṃ ] anilaṃ VM
Cf. Kaulajñānanirṇaya 6.19rasanātālumūle tu kṛtvā vāyuṃ pibec chanaiḥ/
ṣaṇmāsād abhyased devi mahārogaiḥ pramucyate//
mūlena YBhD ] yogena YCM
Cf. Ānandakanda 1.20.137jihvayā tālumūlena prāṇaṃ yaḥ pibati priye/
tasya ṣaṇmāsataḥ sarve rogā naśyanti yoginaḥ//
जिह्वया वायुमाकृष्य पूर्ववत्कुम्भनादनु ।
शनैस्तु घ्राणरन्ध्राभ्यां रेचयेदनिलं सुधीः ॥
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kumbhanād anu /
śanais tu ghrāṇarandhrābhyāṃ recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ //
kumbhanād ] kuṃbhakād GŚ
Cf. Vivekamārtaṇḍa 139kākacañcuvad āsyena śītalaṃ salilaṃ pibet/
prāṇaṃ prāṇavidhānajño yogī bhavati nirjaraḥ//
kumbhanād ] kumbhakād HRĀ YCM YBhD śanais tu ghrāṇārandhrābhyāṃ YCM YBhD ] śanair aśītiparyantaṃ HRĀ
Cf. Ānandakanda 1.20.135–136abkākacañcuvad āsyaṃ ca kṛtvā vāyuṃ sasūtkṛtam/
ādāya nāsārandhreṇa punas taṃ śvasanaṃ tyajet//
śītalīkaraṇākhyo’yaṃ yogas tu jvarapittahṛt/
गुल्मप्लीहादिकान्दोषान् ज्वरं पित्तं क्षुधां तृषाम् ।
विषाणि शीतली नाम कुम्भकोऽयं निहन्ति च ॥
gulmaplīhādikān doṣān jvaraṃ pittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām /
viṣāṇi śītalī nāma kumbhako’yaṃ nihanti ca //
An antecedent to a cooling practice involving the tongue can be found in the Kaulajñānanirṇaya (6.23–24), which mentions a point between the two front teeth that is cool to touch with the tongue:
dvaurājadantamadhyasthaṃ bindurūpaṃ vyavasthitam/
amṛtaṃ taṃ vijānīyād valīpalitanāśanam//
śītalasparśasaṃsthāne rasanāṃ kṛtvā tu buddhimān/
valīpalitanirmuktaḥ sarvavyādhivivarjitaḥ//
उदस्य कुम्भीरथह शातकुम्भजाः
udasya kumbhīr athaha śātakumbhajāḥ
gulmaplīhādikān doṣān ] gulmaplīhādikā doṣāḥ GŚ jvaraṃ pittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām ] kṣayaṃ yānti pittaṃ jvaraṃ GŚ
gulmaplīhādikān doṣān YBhD ] gulmaplīhodaraṃ doṣaṃ HRĀ, gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi YCM jvaraṃ pittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām YBhD ] jvarapittakṣudhātṛṣāḥ HRĀ, vātapittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām viṣāṇi HRĀ YCM ] anyāṃś ca YBhD ’yaṃ nihanti HRĀ YBhD ] vinihanti YCM
ऊर्वोरुपरि चेद्धत्ते उभे पादतले तथा ।
पद्मासनं भवेत्सम्यक् सर्वपापप्रणाशनम् ॥
ūrvor upari ced dhatte ubhe pādatale tathā /
padmāsanaṃ bhavet samyak sarvapāpapraṇāśanam //
ced dhatte ] saṃsthāpya YCM, cādhatte YBhD
सम्यक्पद्मासनं बद्ध्वा समग्रीवोदरः सुधीः ।
मुखं संयम्य यत्नेन प्राणं घ्राणेन रेचयेत् ॥*
samyak padmāsanaṃ baddhvā samagrīvodaraḥ sudhīḥ /
mukhaṃ saṃyamya yatnena prāṇaṃ ghrāṇena recayet //*
samyak ] tataḥ GŚ
sudhīḥ YCM ] śanaiḥ YBhD
यथा लगति हृत्कण्ठकपाले श्वसनं ततः ।
वेगेन पूरयेत्किंचित् हृत्पद्मावधि मारुतम् ॥
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhakapāle śvasanaṃ tataḥ /
vegena pūrayet kiṃcit hṛtpadmāvadhi mārutam //
Apart from α1, the reading śvasanaṃ is not well attested. We have adopted it because it provides a plausible subject for the verb lagati (i.e. ‘breath comes into contact with’). Most manuscripts, as well as the Jyotsnā, have sasvanam (‘with sound’), which requires that one infer that the breath is the subject.
hṛtkaṇṭha ] kaṇṭhāt tu GŚ śvasanaṃ ] sasvanaṃ GŚ
kaṇṭhakapāle śvasanaṃ tataḥ ] kaṇṭhe kapālāvadhi pūrayet YCM, kaṇṭhakapāleṣu ca sasvanam YBhD kiñ cit YBhD ] samyag YCM
पुनर्विरेचयेत्तद्वत्पूरयेच्च पुनः पुनः ।
यथैव लोहकाराणां भस्त्रा वेगेन चाल्यते ॥
punar virecayet tadvat pūrayec ca punaḥ punaḥ /
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrā vegena cālyate //
pūrayec ca YBhD ] pūrayitvā YCM bhastrā HRĀv.l.YCM YBhD ] bhastrī HRĀ
तथैव स्वशरीरस्थं चालयेत्पवनं धिया ।
यदा श्रमो भवेद्देहे तदा सूर्येण पूरयेत् ॥
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ dhiyā /
yadā śramo bhaved dehe tadā sūryeṇa pūrayet //
sthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ HRĀ YBhD ] sthaś cālyate pavano YCM dhiyā YCM YBhD ] sudhīḥ HRĀ yadā YBhD ] yathā HRĀ YCM tadā YBhD ] tathā HRĀ YCM sūryeṇa pūrayet HRĀ ] vegena pūrayet YCM, sūryeṇa recayet YBhD
यथोदरं भवेत्पूर्णं पवनेन तथा लघु ।
धारयेन्नासिकां मध्यातर्जनीभ्यां विना दृढम् ॥
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu /
dhārayen nāsikāṃ madhyātarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍham //
Only three of the collated witnesses (γ2, ζ3 and δ2) have madhyātarjanībhyāṃ (‘with the middle and index fingers’) and this reading is not well attested by the manuscripts of the source text and testimonia. To hold the nose without the middle and index fingers is consistent with the way alternate nostril breathing is done in modern yoga (e.g. Iyengar 1991: 443–444) as well as in some ritual manuals, as for instance in Sāhib Kaula’s Śyāmāpaddhati: dakṣānāmākaniṣṭābhyāṃ vāmaṃ puṭaṃ ca niruddhya (see Hanneder: forthcoming). However, the reading of many manuscripts suggests that the nose was held by all the fingers of both hands, except the index fingers (nāsikāmadhye tarjanībhyāṃ vinā), which seems highly impracticable, or that the nose was held by only the index fingers of both hands (nāsikāmadhye tarjanībhyāṃ tathā). It is likely that scribes changed madhyātarjanībhyāṃ to madhye tarjanībhyāṃ or madhyaṃ tarjanībhyāṃ because of the pāda break.
dhārayen ] dhārayan GŚ nāsikāṃ GŚ (em.) ] nāsikā GŚv.l. madhyā GŚ (em.) ] madhyaṃ GŚv.l., madhye GŚv.l.
nāsikāṃ madhyā HRĀ ] nāsikāṃ madhya YCM, nāsikāmadhye YBhD HRĀv.l.
कुम्भकं पूर्ववत्कृत्वा रेचयेदिडयानिलम् ।
वातपित्तश्लेष्महरं शरीराग्निविवर्धनम् ॥
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayānilam /
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam //
शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्
तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति
विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति
śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyas
tāsāṃ mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtaikā
tayordhvam āyann amṛtatvam eti
viṣvaṅṅ anyā utkramaṇe bhavanti
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ ] kaṇṭhotthitānalaharaṃ GŚ
iḍayānilam HRĀ ] iḍayā tataḥ YCM, iḍayā śanaiḥ YBhD
कुण्डलीबोधकं वक्रभावघ्नं सुखदं शुभम् ।
ब्रह्मनाडीमुखे संस्थकफाद्यर्गलनाशनम् ॥
kuṇḍalībodhakaṃ vakrabhāvaghnaṃ sukhadaṃ śubham /
brahmanāḍīmukhe saṃsthakaphādyargalanāśanam //
In the first verse quarter, we have adopted vakra (ε1), which is close to the reading of the α group (i.e. cakraṃ). In compound with bhāvaghnaṃ (α1, α3 etc.) and following the awakening of Kuṇḍalinī, vakra makes good sense. According to the manuscripts available to us, the reading of the Gorakṣaśataka (vajraṃ) is not in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā.
शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्
तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति
विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति
śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyas
tāsāṃ mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtaikā
tayordhvam āyann amṛtatvam eti
viṣvaṅṅ anyā utkramaṇe bhavanti
vakra ] vajraṃ GŚ bhāva ] pāpa GŚ sukhadaṃ śubham ] śubhadaṃ sukham GŚ mukhe saṃstha ] mukhāntaḥstha GŚ
bodhakaṃ ] bodhanaṃ YCM, bodhanaṃ YBhD vakra ] kuryāt YCM, sarva YBhD bhāva ] pāpa YCM, doṣa YBhD mukhe saṃstha HRĀ ] mukhe saṃsthaṃ YCM, mukhāntastha YBhD kaphādyargala HRĀ YBhD ] kapāṭārgala YCM
गुणत्रयसमुद्भूतग्रन्थित्रयविभेदकम् ।
विशेषेणैव कर्तव्यं भस्त्राख्यं कुम्भकं त्विदम् ॥
guṇatrayasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedakam /
viśeṣeṇaiva kartavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam //
In the first verse quarter, nearly all of the manuscripts, including the α group, have gātrasamudbhūta or gātrasamudbhūtaṃ (‘arisen in the limbs/body’). Both are rather meaningless here. In the first case, the three knots are in the central channel rather than the body. In the second case, it is redundant to say that the breath retention has arisen in the body. It is possible that samyaggātra is a corruption of guṇatraya, which is attested by the manuscripts of the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, two of the available manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā (N21, Bo1) and the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā. In the Gorakṣaśataka, it is stated clearly that each of the knots arises from one of the three guṇas: brahmagranthi from rajas (78cd), viṣṇugranthi from sattva (79cd) and rudragranthi from tamas (80cd). With the verses on bhastrā from the Gorakṣaśataka having been extracted without the context of the knots and guṇas, the meaning of guṇatrayasamudbhūtagranthitraya (‘the three knots that have arisen from the three guṇas’) appears to have been forgotten early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā and the compound altered as a result. Alternatively it could be that Svātmārāma deliberately changed the compound in order to remove the reference to the granthis being produced from the guṇas.
guṇatraya HSC ] samyaggātra YCM YBhD vibhedakam HSC ] vibhedanam YCM YBhD tv idam HRĀ YCM YBhD ] svayam HSC
वेगोद्घोषं पूरकं भृङ्गनादं
भृङ्गीनादं रेचकं मन्दमन्दम् ।
योगीन्द्राणामेवमभ्यासयोगा-
च्चित्ते जाता काचिदानन्दमूर्छा ॥
vegodghoṣaṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ
bhṛṅgīnādaṃ recakaṃ mandamandam /
yogīndrāṇām evam abhyāsayogā-
c citte jātā kācid ānandamūrchā //
In the first two pādas we are understanding the usually masculine pūraka and recaka to be neuter nominatives. When explaining this verse, Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 2.68) supplies the gerund kṛtvā with pūrakaṃ and kuryāt with recakaṃ, but it is unlikely that the author of the verse intended this.
The compound vegodghoṣaṃ is rather unusual. We have understood it according to the commentator Bālakṛṣṇa’s
gloss: ‘an inhalation in which sound is produced by force’ (vegena sañjāta udghoṣo yasmin pūrake).
Witnesses of the γ and δ branches of the stemma, and Brahmānanda, have ānandalīlā instead of ānandamūrchā, perhaps in order to avoid the repetition of mūrchā, which is also found in the following verse.
vegodghoṣaṃ HRĀ YCM YBhD ] vegākṛṣṭiṃ HSC evam YBhD HSC ] nityam HRĀ YCM mūrchā HRĀv.l.HSC ] līlā HRĀ YCM YBhD
Cf. Kumbhakapaddhati 169aliśabdayutaṃ vegāt pūrayet kumbhayet tataḥ/
sāliśabdāc chanai rekāt bhrāmarīkumbhako muneḥ//
ānandalīlāṃ kurute bhrāmarīkumbhako muneḥ// 169//
anilaṃ mandavegena bhrāmarīkumbhakaṃ caret/
mandaṃ mandaṃ recayed vāyuṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ tato bhavet//
antaḥsthaṃ bhramarīnādaṃ śrutvā tatra mano nayet/
samādhir jāyate tatra ānandaḥ so’ham ity ataḥ//
पूरकान्ते गाढतरं बद्ध्वा जालन्धरं शनैः ।
रेचयेन्मूर्छनाख्येयं मनोमूर्छा सुखप्रदा ॥
pūrakānte gāḍhataraṃ baddhvā jālandharaṃ śanaiḥ /
recayen mūrchanākhyeyaṃ manomūrchā sukhapradā //
The jālandhara lock is explained at 3.66–69.
baddhvā jālandharaṃ HRĀ YBhD ] bandho jālandharaḥ YCM ākhyeyaṃ YBhD ] ākhyo ’yaṃ HRĀ YCM
अन्तःप्रवर्तितोद्गारमारुतापूरितोदरः ।
पयस्यगाधेऽपि सुखात् प्लवते पद्मपत्रवत् ॥
antaḥpravartitodgāramārutāpūritodaraḥ /
payasy agādhe’pi sukhāt plavate padmapatravat //
Although the important manuscript groups, including α, have this verse on plāvanī (sometimes spelt plāvinī), there is substantial evidence to suggest that plāvanī was incorporated into the Haṭhapradīpikā and its group of eight breath retentions (kumbhaka) sometime after the text was initially composed. Firstly, in most manuscript groups,
the name plāvanī is absent from the list of kumbhakas in 2.44. The better-attested reading, supported by α, includes kevala as the eighth kumbhaka and omits plāvanī. Furthermore, most of the principal testimonia, namely the Haṭharatnāvalī, Yogalakṣaṇāvalī and Yuktabhavadeva, likewise include kevalakumbhaka and omit plāvanī in the list of eight kumbhakas. Secondly, the heading atha plāvanī is absent from the α group and many other manuscripts. Instead, the α manuscripts
have iti plāvanīkumbhakaṃ after the verse on plāvanī, which is not consistent with the other kumbhaka descriptions. Thus, plāvanī was probably not part of the text composed by Svātmārāma and was introduced at an
early stage in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā.
We have understood udgāramāruta to refer to the breath of eructation, i.e. the nāga breath as described in e.g. Vivekamārtaṇḍa 36.
vartitodgāra ] varttitādhāra YBhD
Cf. Kumbhakapaddhati 171yatheṣṭaṃ pūrayed vāyuṃ baddhe jālandhare dṛḍhe/
hṛdi dhṛtvā jale suptvā plāvinīkumbhako bhavet//
प्राणायामस्त्रिधा प्रोक्तो रेचपूरककुम्भकैः ।
सहितः केवलश्चेति कुम्भको द्विविधो मतः ॥
prāṇāyāmas tridhā prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ /
sahitaḥ kevalaś ceti kumbhako dvividho mataḥ //
The import of the name sahita, “accompanied”, is that kumbhaka is accompanied by inhalation and exhalation, and of kevala, “isolated”, that it is not.
प्राणः स्वदेहजो वायुरायामस्तन्निरोधनम्
बहिर्यद्रेचनं वायोरुदराद्रेचकः स्मृतः
निष्क्रम्य नासाविवरादशेषं
प्राणं बहिः शून्यमिवानिलेन
निरुच्छ्वसंस्तिष्ठति रुद्धवायुः
स रेचको नाम महानिरोधः
बाह्यादापूरणं वायोरुदरे पूरको हि सः
बाह्ये स्थितं प्राणपुटेन वायुम्
आकृष्य तेनैव शनैः समन्तात्
नाडीश्च सर्वाः परिपूरयेद्यः
स पूरको नाम महानिरोधः
सम्पूर्य कुम्भवद्वायोर्धारणं कुम्भको भवेत्
न रेचको नैव च पूरको ऽत्र
नासापुटान्तस्थितमेव वायुम्
सुनिश्चलं धारयते क्रमेण
कुम्भाख्यमेतत्प्रवदन्ति तज्ज्ञाः
आरेच्यापूर्य वा कुर्यात्स वै सहितकुम्भकः
prāṇaḥ svadehajo vāyur āyāmas tannirodhanam
bahir yad recanaṃ vāyor udarād recakaḥ smṛtaḥ
niṣkramya nāsāvivarād aśeṣaṃ
prāṇaṃ bahiḥ śūnyam ivānilena
nirucchvasaṃs tiṣṭhati ruddhavāyuḥ
sa recako nāma mahānirodhaḥ
bāhyād āpūraṇaṃ vāyor udare pūrako hi saḥ
bāhye sthitaṃ prāṇapuṭena vāyum
ākṛṣya tenaiva śanaiḥ samantāt
nāḍīś ca sarvāḥ paripūrayed yaḥ
sa pūrako nāma mahānirodhaḥ
sampūrya kumbhavad vāyor dhāraṇaṃ kumbhako bhavet
na recako naiva ca pūrako ’tra
nāsāpuṭāntasthitam eva vāyum
suniścalaṃ dhārayate krameṇa
kumbhākhyam etat pravadanti tajjñāḥ
ārecyāpūrya vā kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
prāṇaś ca dehajo vāyur āyāmaḥ kumbhakaḥ smṛtaḥ/
sa eva dvividhaḥ proktaḥ sahitaḥ kevalas tathā//
prāṇāyāmas tridhā prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ/
bahir virecanaṃ vāyor udarād recakaḥ smṛtaḥ/
bāhyād āpūraṇaṃ vāyor udare pūrakaḥ smṛtaḥ/
saṃpūrṇakuṃbhavad vāyor dhāraṇaṃ kumbhako bhavet/
sahitaḥ kevalaś ceti kumbhako dvividho mataḥ//
रेच्य चापूर्य यः कार्यः स वै सहितकुम्भकः ।
यावत्केवलसिद्धिः स्यात्तावत्सहितमभ्यसेत् ॥
recya cāpūrya yaḥ kāryaḥ sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ /
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset //
In the first pāda, we have adopted a reading similar to that of the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, which is very close to that of δ1 (ārecyāpūrya yat kuryāt) and δ3 (ārecyāpūrya yaḥ kuryāt) and similar to α2’s hypometrical reading (recapūrya y[a]t kāryaḥ). It appears that the relative pronoun dropped out of the first verse quarter early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā and scribes have tried in various ways to restore some sense, with several emending to recakaḥ pūrakaḥ kāryaḥ. Cf. Marcinowska-Rosól & Sellmer 2021, p. 102f.
आरेच्यापूर्य वा कुर्यात्स वै सहितकुम्भकः
ārecyāpūrya vā kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
recya cāpūrya yaḥ YY ] virecyāpūrya yaṃ VS, recya vāpūrya yat VSv.l., ārecyāpūrya yaḥ VSv.l.
Cf. Dattātreyayogaśāstra 66absahito recapūrābhyāṃ tasmāt sahitakumbhakaḥ/
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset/
recya cāpūrya yaḥ kāryaḥ ] sahitaṃ kevalaṃ vātha YCM, recya vā pūrakaḥ kāryaḥ YBhD sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ ] kuṃbhakaṃ nityam abhyaset YCM, śanaiḥ sahitakumbhakaḥ YBhD
रेचकं पूरकं मुक्त्वा सुखं यद्वायुधारणम् ।
प्राणायामोऽयमित्युक्तः स वै केवलकुम्भकः ॥
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā sukhaṃ yad vāyudhāraṇam /
prāṇāyāmo’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ //
On this verse, see Marcinkowska-Rosół and Sellmer 2020: 102–105.
sukhaṃ yad HRĀ YBhD ] yat sukhaṃ YCM
केवले कुम्भके सिद्धे रेचपूरकवर्जिते ।
न तस्य दुर्लभं किंचित् त्रिषु लोकेषु विद्यते ॥
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūrakavarjite /
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiṃcit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate //
शक्तः केवलकुम्भेन यथेष्टं वायुधारणम् ।
राजयोगपदं चैव लभते नात्र संशयः ॥
śaktaḥ kevalakumbhena yatheṣṭaṃ vāyudhāraṇam /
rājayogapadaṃ caiva labhate nātra saṃśayaḥ //
dhāraṇam HRĀ YBhD ] vāyudhāraṇe HTK rājayogapadaṃ caiva labhate HTK ] etādṛśo rājayogo kathito HRĀ, rājayogapadaṃ samyak labhate YBhD
हठं विना राजयोगो राजयोगं विना हठः ।
न सिध्यति ततो युग्ममा निष्पत्तेः समभ्यसेत् ॥
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ /
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset //
On the niṣpatti stage see 4.26–28.
ā niṣpatteḥ YBhD ] manīṣy etau YCM samabhyaset YCM ] samācaret YBhD
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 1.19haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ/
vyāptiḥ syād avinābhūtā śrīrājahaṭhayogayoḥ//
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ/
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset/
tasmāt pravartate yogī haṭhe sadgurumārgataḥ//
[middle line not in mss. I, III, IV, VII, IX, X, XII, XIV–XVI]
कुम्भितप्राणरेचान्ते कुर्याच्चित्तं निराश्रयम् ।
एवमभ्यासयोगेन राजयोगपदं व्रजेत् ॥*
kumbhitaprāṇarecānte kuryāc cittaṃ nirāśrayam /
evam abhyāsayogena rājayogapadaṃ vrajet //*
The reading kumbhitaḥ, which is attested by α1 and the testimonia, does not make sense here because the subject must be the yogi (prānaḥ would be unmetrical). In other texts, the word kumbhita is used to qualify the breath and means ‘retained’ (e.g. Yogabīja 94, Kumbhakapaddhati 127, Yuktabhavadeva 8.32 etc.).
kumbhita ] kumbhitaḥ YBhD HTK nirāśrayam HTK ] nirāmayam YBhD rājayogapadaṃ vrajet YBhD ] rājayogaṃ labhet punaḥ HTK
कुम्भकात्कुण्डलीबोधः कुण्डलीबोधतो भवेत् ।
अनर्गला सुषुम्णा च हठसिद्धिश्च जायते ॥
kumbhakāt kuṇḍalībodhaḥ kuṇḍalībodhato bhavet /
anargalā suṣumṇā ca haṭhasiddhiś ca jāyate //
anargalā suṣumnā ca YBhD HTK ] anargalaḥ suṣumṇānto YCM
वपुःकृशत्वं वदने प्रसन्नता
नादस्फुटत्वं नयने च निर्मले ।
आरोग्यता बिन्दुजयोऽग्निदीपनं
नाडीषु शुद्धिर्हठसिद्धिलक्षणम् ॥
vapuḥkṛśatvaṃ vadane prasannatā
nādasphuṭatvaṃ nayane ca nirmale /
ārogyatā bindujayo’gnidīpanaṃ
nāḍīṣu śuddhir haṭhasiddhilakṣaṇam //
ca nirmale HRĀ YBhD ] sunirmale YCM arogyatā ] arogatā HRĀ YBhD, arogitā YCM nāḍīṣu śuddhir HRĀ ] nāḍīviśuddhir YCM, YBhD
सशैलवनधात्रीणां यथाधारोऽहिनायकः ।
सर्वेषां योगतन्त्राणां तथाधारो हि कुण्डली ॥
saśailavanadhātrīṇāṃ yathādhāro’hināyakaḥ /
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ tathādhāro hi kuṇḍalī //
The plural dhātrīṇām is hard to construe. Only this world has mountains and forests, but we want a plural for the comparison with tantrāṇām. Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.1) understands dhātrīṇām to refer to the different regions of the earth, even though the world (dhātrī) is a single entity (dhātryā ekatve ’pi deśabhedād bhedam ādāya bahuvacanam). A similar comment occurs in the Yogaprakāśikā 5.1 (yathā samastadvīpādisahitapṛthvī ādhāraḥ phaṇīndras tathā samastayogādhāraḥ kuṇḍalīty āha saśaileti). The author of the Haṭharatnāvalī circumvented this issue by adopting the reading dhātryāḥ.
dhātrīṇāṃ ] dhātryās tu HRĀ sarveṣāṃ ] aśeṣa HRĀ
सुप्ता गुरुप्रसादेन यदा जागर्ति कुण्डली ।
तदा सर्वाणि पद्मानि भिद्यन्ते ग्रन्थयोऽपि च ॥
suptā guruprasādena yadā jāgarti kuṇḍalī /
tadā sarvāṇi padmāni bhidyante granthayo’pi ca //
The usual meaning of jāgarti would be “is wakeful” rather than “awakens”, which explains the variant bodhitā.
yadā jāgarti kuṇḍalī YBhD ] bodhitā sukhadā bhavet YCM
प्राणस्य शून्यपदवी तदा राजपथायते ।
तदा चित्तं निरालम्बं तदा कालस्य वञ्चनम् ॥
prāṇasya śūnyapadavī tadā rājapathāyate /
tadā cittaṃ nirālambaṃ tadā kālasya vañcanam //
b: tadā ] tathā YCM c: tadā ] tathā YCM d: tadā ] tathā YCM
सुषुम्णा शून्यपदवी ब्रह्मरन्ध्रमहापथः ।
श्मशानं शाम्भवी मध्यमार्गश्चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥
suṣumṇā śūnyapadavī brahmarandhramahāpathaḥ /
śmaśānaṃ śāmbhavī madhyamārgaś cety ekavācakāḥ //
avadhūtīpadaṃ ke cic chmaśānaṃ ca mahāpatham/
ke cid vadanti ādhārāṃ suṣumnāṃ ca sarasvatīm//
mahāpathaṃ śmaśānaṃ ca suṣumnāpy ekam eva hi//
nāmnāṃ matāntare bhedaḥ phale bhedo na vidyate/
suṣumṇā YCM ] prāṇasya YBhD brahmarandhra ] brahmarandhraṃ YCM, mahārandhraṃ YBhD śmaśānaṃ YBhD ] śmaśānī YCM ekavācakāḥ YCM ] ekavācakam YBhD
तस्मात्सर्वप्रयत्नेन प्रबोधयितुमीश्वरीम् ।
ब्रह्मद्वारमुखे सुप्तां मुद्राभ्यासं समाचरेत् ॥
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena prabodhayitum īśvarīm /
brahmadvāramukhe suptāṃ mudrābhyāsaṃ samācaret //
mudrābhyāsaṃ samācaret YBhD ] mudrābhyāsaparo bhavet YCM
महामुद्रा महाबन्धो महावेधश्च खेचरी ।
उड्डीयाणं मूलबन्धस्ततो जालन्धराभिधः ॥
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī /
uḍḍīyāṇaṃ mūlabandhas tato jālandharābhidhaḥ //
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī/
jālandharo mūlabandho viparītakṛtis tathā//
mahāvedhaś ca khecarī YCM YBhD ] mahāvedhas tṛtīyakaḥ HRĀ uḍḍiyāṇaṃ mūlabandhas ] uḍḍiyānaṃ mūlabandho HRĀ YCM, uḍyānaṃ mūlabandhaś ca YBhD tato jālandharābhidhaḥ ] bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ HRĀ YCM, bandho jālandharas tathā YBhD
करणी विपरीताख्या वज्रोली शक्तिचालनम् ।
इदं मुद्रादिदशकं जरामरणनाशनम् ॥
karaṇī viparītākhyā vajrolī śakticālanam /
idaṃ mudrādidaśakaṃ jarāmaraṇanāśanam //
The reading of α idaṃ mudrādi, is not attested by the other manuscript groups but it makes sense in so far as ‘locks’ (bandha) and ‘actions’ (karaṇa) figure among the ten techniques taught in this chapter. It is also consistent with the reference to mudrādi in 1.55. However, most manuscripts have readings, such as idaṃ hi mudrādaśakam, that refer to the techniques of this chapter as only mudrās, and this is consistent with 3.104.
uḍyānaṃ caiva vajrolī daśamaṃ śakticālanam/
idaṃ hi mudrādaśakaṃ mudrāṇām uttamottamam//
vajrolī HRĀ YBhD ] tathā vai YCM idaṃ mudrādidaśakaṃ ] sampradāyā khecarī sā HRĀ, etad dhi mudrānavakaṃ YCM, idaṃ hi mudrādaśakaṃ YBhD jarāmaraṇanāśanam ] daśa mudrāḥ prakīrtitāḥ HRĀ, jarāmaraṇavarjitam YCM, mudrāṇām uttamottamam YBhD
आदिनाथोदितं दिव्यम् अष्टैश्वर्यप्रदायकम् ।
वल्लभं सर्वसिद्धानां दुर्लभं मरुतामपि ॥
ādināthoditaṃ divyam aṣṭaiśvaryapradāyakam /
vallabhaṃ sarvasiddhānāṃ durlabhaṃ marutām api //
divyam ] samyag YBhD sarvasiddhānāṃ YCM ] sarvasiddhendra YBhD
गोपनीयं प्रयत्नेन यथा रत्नकरण्डकम् ।
कस्यचिन्नैव वक्तव्यं कुलस्त्रीसुरतं यथा ॥*
gopanīyaṃ prayatnena yathā ratnakaraṇḍakam /
kasyacin naiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā //*
yathā ratnakaraṇḍakam YCM ] jarāmaraṇanāśanam YBhD
पादमूलेन वामेन योनिं संपीड्य दक्षिणम् ।
पादं प्रसारितं धृत्वा कराभ्यां पूरयेन्मुखे ॥
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ saṃpīḍya dakṣiṇam /
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ pūrayen mukhe //
dhṛtvā A ] kṛtvā Av.l.
Cf. Amṛtasiddhi 11.3yoniṃ saṃpīḍya vāmena pādamūlena yatnataḥ/
savyaṃ prasāritaṃ pādaṃ karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham//
dhṛtvā ] kṛtvā HRĀ YCM YBhD pūrayen HRĀ YCM ] dhārayed YBhD mukhe HRĀv.l. ] mukham HRĀ YCM, dṛḍham YBhD
कण्ठे बन्धं समारोप्य धारयेद्वायुमूर्ध्वतः ।
यथा दण्डाहतः सर्पो दण्डाकारः प्रजायते ॥
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya dhārayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ /
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate //
The instruction to hold the breath upwards (ūrdhvataḥ) is somewhat vague. In a commentarial passage on this verse in Yuktabhavadeva 7.187, Bhavadevamiśra clarifies this by saying, ‘one should hold it higher than the heart’ (hṛdayād ūrdhvato dhārayet).
dhārayed YCM YBhD ] pūrayed HRĀ
ऋज्वीभूता तथा शक्तिः कुण्डली सहसा भवेत् ।
तदासौ मरणावस्था जायते द्विपुटाश्रिता ॥
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahasā bhavet /
tadāsau maraṇāvasthā jāyate dvipuṭāśritā //
This verse is taken from the Amaraugha, which uses the alchemical imagery of the Amṛtasiddhi to describe the stilling of Kuṇḍalinī in the central channel. Drawing on Hellwig 2009: 238–240, Mallinson and Szántó (2021: 21) note that “In alchemical texts māraṇa (“killing”) involves heating a substance and thereby changing its state, usually
through calcination or oxidation, so that it becomes inert. In the Amṛtasiddhi māraṇa and other derivatives of the root mṛ, “die”, are used to denote the stilling or stopping of either the breath or Bindu.”
Thus when Kuṇḍalinī is said to be in the state of maraṇa the meaning is that she is stilled. The dvipuṭa or “vessel with two halves” in which this occurs is the same as the Amṛtasiddhi’s saṃpuṭa, which, drawing on Hellwig (2009: 342), Mallinson and Szántó (2021: 22) say “consists of two puṭas joined together to form a sealed crucible for heating reagents without evaporation”.
In the yoga of the Amṛtasiddhi, the bodily saṃpuṭa is formed by applying locks at the top and bottom of the central channel, i.e. constricting
the perineal region and the throat. In the Haṭhapradīpikā it is formed by pressing the perineum with the heel and constricting the throat.
As Birch (2019: 971) notes, it is unlikely that later non-Buddhist authors understood maraṇāvasthā and dvipuṭa according to the alchemical metaphors of the Amṛtasiddhi. Later commentators take dvipuṭa as the two nostrils (e.g., Yuktabhavadeva 7.187, dvināsāpuṭa); the iḍā and piṅgalā channels (e.g., Jyotsnā 3.27, puṭayor dvayam iḍāpiṅgalayor yugmam); or the in and out flows of the breath (e.g., Yogaprakāśikā 5.16–17, vāyor bahirnirgamanam antaḥpraveśa iti yat puṭadvayaṃ tam). How these commentators understood asau māraṇāvasthā is less clear. Brahmānanda seems to take it as the death of prāṇa, or in other words, the absence of the breath, in the two nostrils (maraṇāvasthā jāyate kuṇḍalībodhe sati suṣumnāyāṃ praviṣṭe prāṇe dvayoḥ puṭayoḥ prāṇaviyogāt). Bhavadeva thought that Kuṇḍalinī, along with prāṇa and apāna, remains in the two nostrils while the breath is being held (evaṃ vāyudhāraṇāyāṃ kriyamāṇāyāṃ vyākulā bhūtā kuṇḍalinī apānaprāṇābhyāṃ saha nāsāpuṭadvayāśritā
bhavati). Others, such as Śivānanda and Bālakṛṣṇa, favour the reading tadā sā maraṇāvasthāṃ harate dvipuṭāśritām (or dvipuṭāśrayām), which is present in group γ and δ manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā. Bālakṛṣṇa understands this to mean that the great seal destroys death (maraṇāvasthāṃ harate mahāmudreti bhāvaḥ) but it could also mean that the awakened Kuṇḍalinī destroys death, which is usually
dependent on the in and out breaths.
The form ṛjvībhūtā is non-Pāṇinian (it should be ṛjūbhūtā) but all witnesses have ṛjvī or variants thereof. α1 has ṛjvī bhūtvā which is correct morphologically, but it does not make sense with bhavet in the next pāda and may be an attempt at correction by the scribe.
sahasā YBhD ] sahajā HRĀ YCM tathāsau YCM YBhD ] tathā sā HRĀ maraṇāvasthā HRĀ YBhD ] maraṇāvasthāṃ YCM jāyate dvipuṭāśritā YBhD ] jāyate dvipuṭīsthitā HRĀ, harate dvipuṭāśrayām YCM (em., dvipaṭā L, dvipadā N)
ततः शनैः शनैरेव रेचयेन्न तु वेगतः ।
इयं खलु महामुद्रा महासिद्धैः प्रदर्शिता ॥*
tataḥ śanaiḥ śanair eva recayen na tu vegataḥ /
iyaṃ khalu mahāmudrā mahāsiddhaiḥ pradarśitā //*
pradarśitā ] pradṛśyate YBhD
महाक्लेशादयो दोषा जीर्यन्ते मरणादयः ।
महामुद्रां च तेनैव वदन्ति विबुधोत्तमाः ॥
mahākleśādayo doṣā jīryante maraṇādayaḥ /
mahāmudrāṃ ca tenaiva vadanti vibudhottamāḥ //
This verse appears to be explaining the name of mahāmudrā through assonance with mahākleśādayo, doṣā and maraṇādayaḥ in the first line.
mahākleśādayo doṣā A ] mahārogā mahākleśā Av.l. jīryante Av.l. ] bhidyante A
mahākleśādayo ] mahākleśā yato YCM YBhD tenaiva YCM ] tām eva YBhD
चन्द्राङ्गे तु समभ्यस्य सूर्याङ्गे पुनरभ्यसेत् ।
यावत्तुल्या भवेत्संख्या ततो मुद्रां विसर्जयेत् ॥
candrāṅge tu samabhyasya sūryāṅge punar abhyaset /
yāvat tulyā bhavet saṃkhyā tato mudrāṃ visarjayet //
The terms candrāṅga and sūryāṅga are unusual and not used in other yoga texts outside the context of mahāmudrā. In Jyotsnā 3.15, Brahmānanda glosses candrāṅga as vāmāṅga (‘the left side of the body’) and sūryāṅga as dakṣāṅga (‘the right side of the body’) and goes on to explain the sequence of practice as follows:
atrāyaṃ kramaḥ/ ākuñcitavāmapādapārṣṇiṃ yonisthāne saṃyojya prasāritadakṣiṇapādāṅguṣṭham ākuñcitatarjanībhyāṃ gṛhītvābhyāso vāmāṅge ’bhyāsaḥ/ asminn abhyāse pūrito vāyur vāmāṅge tiṣṭhati/ ākuñcitadakṣapādapārṣṇiṃ yonisthāne saṃyojya prasāritavāmapādāṅguṣṭham ākuñcitatarjanībhyāṃ gṛhītvābhyāso dakṣāṅge ’bhyāsaḥ/ asminn abhyāse pūrito vāyur dakṣāṅge tiṣṭhati/
candrāṅge tu ] candrāṅgena YBhD sūryāṅge punar abhyaset ] sūryāṅgenābhyaset tataḥ YBhD
न हि पथ्यमपथ्यं वा रसाः सर्वेऽपि नीरसाः ।
अपि भुक्तं विषं घोरं पीयूषमिव जीर्यते ॥
na hi pathyam apathyaṃ vā rasāḥ sarve’pi nīrasāḥ /
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryate //
jīryate VMv.l. ] jīryati VM, jāyate VMv.l.
rasāḥ sarve ’pi nīrasāḥ HRĀ YCM ] sarasaṃ nirasaṃ ca vā YBhD jīryate HRĀ ] jīryati YCM YBhD
क्षयकुष्ठगुदावर्तगुल्माजीर्णपुरोगमाः ।
तस्य दोषाः क्षयं यान्ति महामुद्रां तु योऽभ्यसेत् ॥
kṣayakuṣṭhagudāvartagulmājīrṇapurogamāḥ /
tasya doṣāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ tu yo’bhyaset //
purogamāḥ ] jvaravyathāḥ VM tasya doṣāḥ VM ] sarvarogāḥ VMv.l., rogās tasya VMv.l.
tasya doṣāḥ YCM ] doṣāḥ sarve HRĀ, tasya rogāḥ YBhD tu HRĀ YBhD ] ca YCM
कथितेयं महामुद्रा महासिद्धिकरी नृणाम् ।
गोपनीया प्रयत्नेन न देया यस्य कस्यचित् ॥
kathiteyaṃ mahāmudrā mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām /
gopanīyā prayatnena na deyā yasya kasyacit //
Two readings of the second quarter are well-attested: jarāmṛtyuvināśinī (α1 etc.) and mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām (α3 etc.). While the first reading is possible, the play on mahāsiddhi and mahāmudrā seems more likely original, as seen in the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (without significant variants).
In Jyotsnā 3.18, Brahmānanda understands mahāsiddhi as referring to ‘great siddhis,’ but in other works it can mean liberation (Mallinson 2012b).
mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām YBhD ] jarāmṛtyuvināśinī HRĀ
पार्ष्णिं वामस्य पादस्य योनिस्थाने नियोजयेत् ।
वामोरूपरि संस्थाप्य दक्षिणं चरणं तथा ॥*
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet /
vāmorūpari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā //*
The seated position for mahābandha described in this verse is not in the Amṛtasiddhi (chapter 12) or Amaraugha (25cd–27). The Amṛtasiddhi instructs the same position for mahāmudrā and mahābandha, and the Amaraugha does not comment on the posture of mahābandha, implying that its posture is the same as mahāmudrā.
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇañ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya HRĀ YCM ] vāmāṅghripārṣṇibhāgena YLĀ, pārṣṇivāmasya pādasya YBhD yonisthāne niyojayet HRĀ YCM YBhD ] yonisthānaṃ nipīḍayet YLĀ
पूरयित्वा मुखे वायुं हृदये चिबुकं दृढम् ।
निभृत्य योनिमाकुञ्च्य मनो मध्ये नियोजयेत् ॥
pūrayitvā mukhe vāyuṃ hṛdaye cibukaṃ dṛḍham /
nibhṛtya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet //
The referent of madhye is uncertain. The verse is derived from the Amaraugha, and the Amṛtasiddhi makes no mention of a place to focus the mind in its treatment of mahābandha (it does however instruct the yogi to place the mind at the catuṣpatha in its teachings on mahāmudrā). Bhavadevamiśra (Yuktabhavadeva 7.196), Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.20) and Bālakṛṣṇa (Yogamārgapradīpa 5.24) take it to mean the central channel. It could also plausibly mean the region between the chest and perineum, or perhaps the place between the eyebrows. At 3.23 this practice is said to make the mind reach Kedāra, which is sometimes located between the eyebrows (see Mallinson 2007: 214 n. 285; Birch 2019: 967 n. 57).
hṛdaye cibukaṃ ] cibukaṃ hṛdaye A nibhṛtya A ] nibhṛtaṃ Av.l.
pūrayitvā mukhe YCM ] pūrayen mukhato HRĀ, pūrayitvā tato YLĀ, YBhD dṛḍham HRĀ YLĀ YBhD ] tathā YCM nibhṛtya HRĀ ] niṣpīḍya HRĀv.l., niḥpīḍya YLĀ YCM, niḥkṣipya YBhD
रेचयेच्च शनैरेव महाबन्धोऽयमुच्यते ॥
recayec ca śanair eva mahābandho’yam ucyate //
This portion of the description of mahābandha has undergone various revisions in the manuscript groups. The shortest version appears in α1, α2 and α3, as well as the δ group and the Haṭharatnāvalī, all of which omit verses 3.21*2 and 3.22*1cd. We have adopted the α version, as it seems that 3.21–22 were reworked in a major redaction of the whole work (for further discussion, see the introduction p. 73).
eva ] evaṃ HRĀ
धारयित्वा यथाशक्त्या रेचयेदनिलं शनैः ।
सव्याङ्गे च समभ्यस्य दक्षाङ्गे च समभ्यसेत् ॥
dhārayitvā yathāśaktyā recayed anilaṃ śanaiḥ /
savyāṅge ca samabhyasya dakṣāṅge ca samabhyaset //
yathāśaktyā ] yathāśakti DYŚ anilaṃ ] iḍayā DYŚ savyāṅge ca ] vāmāṅgena DYŚ dakṣiṇāṅge ca ] dakṣiṇāṅgena DYŚ
yathāśaktyā ] yathāśakti YBhD śanaiḥ ] sudhīḥ YBhD
मतमत्र तु केषांचित् कण्ठबन्धं विसर्जयेत् ।
राजदन्तबिलं तत्र जिह्वयोत्तम्भयेदिति ॥
matam atra tu keṣāṃcit kaṇṭhabandhaṃ visarjayet /
rājadantabilaṃ tatra jihvayottambhayed iti //
This verse expresses an alternative to the application of the chin lock in mahābandha mentioned in 3.20. It is found in all groups except α1 and α2, and the δ group.
We do not find the idea of lifting up the rājadantabila with the tongue in other works, but Vivekamārtaṇḍa 126ab instructs the yogi to press it with the tip of the tongue and Dattātreyayogaśāstra 36 (found at Haṭhapradīpikā 1.46) instructs the yogi in padmāsana to lift up the ‘root of the uvula’ (rājadantamūla) with the tongue.
This verse occurs in the Yogacintāmaṇi in the middle of a quotation attributed to Īśvara. The other verses of the quoted
passage are found in the Śivasaṃhitā (4.37–42), but the verse in question is not reported in the critical edition of the
Śivasaṃhitā (2009). The verse is absent in another passage on mahābandha that the author of the Yogacintāmaṇi cites and attributes to the Haṭhapradīpikā.
saṃpīḍya rasanāgreṇa rājadantabilaṃ mahat/
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā/
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ//
visarjayet ] vivarjayet YCM rājadantabilaṃ ] rājadantadvayaṃ YCM YBhD jihvayottambhayed YCM ] jihvayonnamayed YBhD
अमुं योगी महाबन्धं महासिद्धिप्रदायकम् ।
सव्याङ्गे च समभ्यस्य दक्षाङ्गे च समभ्यसेत् ॥
amuṃ yogī mahābandhaṃ mahāsiddhipradāyakam /
savyāṅge ca samabhyasya dakṣāṅge ca samabhyaset //
amuṃ yogī mahābandhaṃ mahāsiddhipradāyakam ] ayaṃ yogo mahābandhas sarvasiddhipradāyakaḥ HRĀ
अयं खलु महाबन्धो महासिद्धिप्रदायकः ।
कालपाशमहाबन्धविमोचनविचक्षणः ॥*
ayaṃ khalu mahābandho mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ /
kālapāśamahābandhavimocanavicakṣaṇaḥ //*
अयं च सर्वनाडीनामूर्ध्वंगतिविबोधकः ।
त्रिवेणीसंगमं धत्ते केदारं प्रापयेन्मनः ॥*
ayaṃ ca sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvaṃgativibodhakaḥ /
triveṇīsaṃgamaṃ dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ //*
The reading ūrdhvaṃgativibodhakaḥ (‘initiates an upward flow’) is found in the source (Amaraugha 25) and all Haṭhapradīpikā witnesses except the Jyotsnā (where the line is found earlier). While the Amaraughaprabodha has the reading ūrdhvaṃgativiśodhanaḥ (‘purification of the upward flow’), the Amṛtasiddhi (12.14) states that the chin-lock prevents the upward flow (ūrdhvaṃgatinirodhakaḥ) in all the channels. The Amaraugha is referring to the idea (likely accepted by Svātmārāma) that the root lock creates
an upward flow in all the channels that prevents the elements and essences of the
body from escaping (cf. Amṛtasiddhi 12.8–10).
Triveṇī and Kedāra are pilgrimage sites, the former at Prayāga where the Gaṅgā, Yamunā
and subtle Sarasvatī meet, the latter in the Himālaya, near the source of the Gaṅgā.
The bodily triveṇī is located in the navel or heart by earlier Śaiva works (Birch 2019: 967). Here it may be the same as the trikūṭa and located between the eyebrows (Mallinson 2007: 209 n. 259). Brahmānanda, who does not identify a location for Triveṇī, understands
Kedāra to be between the eyebrows. In the Khecarīvidyā it is located on the back of the head above the nape of the neck (Mallinson 2007: 214 n. 285). For other references on the location of Kedāra, see Birch 2019: 967 n. 57.
ca HRĀ ] tu YCM, hi YBhD ūrdhvaṃgativibodhakaḥ YBhD ] ūrdhvagativibodhakaḥ HRĀ, ūrdhvaṃgamanarodhakaḥ YCM
रूपलावण्यसंपन्ना यथा स्त्री पुरुषं विना ।
महामुद्रामहाबन्धौ निष्फलौ वेधवर्जितौ ॥
rūpalāvaṇyasaṃpannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā /
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau //
This verse, which is from the Amaraugha and similar to verses in the Amṛtasiddhi and Śivasaṃhitā, is stating that the great seal, lock and piercing should be practised together. This can be done as a sequence as shown in this video (© Mark Robberds).
bandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau A ] bandho niṣphalo vedhavarjitaḥ Av.l.
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 4.47mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau/
tasmād yogī prayatnena karoti tritayaṃ kramāt//
guṇarūpavatī nārī niṣphalā puruṣaṃ vinā/
mahāmudrāmahābandhau vinā vedhena niṣphalau//
महाबन्धस्थितो योगी कृत्वा पूरकमेकधीः ।
वायूनां गतिमावृत्य निभृतं कण्ठमुद्रया ॥
mahābandhasthito yogī kṛtvā pūrakam ekadhīḥ /
vāyūnāṃ gatim āvṛtya nibhṛtaṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā //
We are not certain of the meaning here of nibhṛtam, which is found in all of the collated witnesses and important testimonia. We have understood it as an adverb with the meaning ‘firmly’ rather than the more usual but here inappropriate ‘secretly’. In the Jyotsnā (3.26), Brahmānanda glosses it as niścalam (‘immovably’).
punar āsphālayet kaṭyāṃ susthiraṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā/
vāyūnāṃ gatim ārudhya kṛtvā pūrakakumbhakau//
c ārudhya ] āvṛtya, āśritya v.l.
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 4.43mahābandhasthito yogī kukṣim āpūrya vāyunā/
sphicau saṃtāpayed dhīmān vedho’yaṃ kīrtito mayā//
mahābandha HRĀ YBhD ] mahābandhe YCM ekadhīḥ HRĀ ] ekadhā YCM YBhD āvṛtya YCM YBhD ] ākṛṣya HRĀ
समहस्तयुगो भूमौ स्फिजौ संताडयेच्छनैः ।
पुटद्वयं समाक्रम्य वायुः स्फुरति सत्वरम् ॥*
samahastayugo bhūmau sphijau saṃtāḍayec chanaiḥ /
puṭadvayaṃ samākramya vāyuḥ sphurati satvaram //*
The term puṭadvaya is referring back to the dvipuṭa mentioned in verse 3.12. On the alchemical meaning and other interpretations by later
commentators, see the note to 3.12.
samahastayugo A ] mahābandhasthito DYŚ sphicau saṃtāḍayec chanaiḥ DYŚ ] samapādayugas tathā A samākramya Av.l. ] samākṛṣya A
sama HRĀ YCM ] nyasta YBhD puṭadvayaṃ YCM ] jaṃghādvayaṃ YBhD samākramya YCM ] samākṛṣya YBhD satvaram YBhD ] madhyagaḥ YCM
सोमसूर्याग्निसंबन्धो जायते चामृताय वै ।
मृतावस्था समुत्पन्ना ततो मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
somasūryāgnisaṃbandho jāyate cāmṛtāya vai /
mṛtāvasthā samutpannā tato mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
The α, γ and other groups have saṃbandhāj, which is possible but somewhat awkward (i.e. ‘because of the union of the moon,
sun and fire, the state of a dead person, which has arisen, leads to immortality’).
The adopted reading saṃbandho, which is supported by ζ2, Yuktabhavadeva 7.200 and Jyotsnā 3.28, makes better sense but its meaning is not as clear as the formulation in the
source text (i.e. Amaraugha 30: °saṃbandhaṃ jānīyād amṛtāya).
The compound mṛtāvasthā (‘the dead state’) refers both to a dead person (in the sense that the yogi appears
as if dead) and the dead state of the breath when the moon, sun and fire have united.
For the alchemical metaphor of mṛtāvasthā (cf. maraṇāvasthā), see the commentary on 3.12.
In the version found in Jyotsnā 3.28 and ζ3, η1, η2 and the Yuktabhavadeva, the final verse quarter has been rewritten to say that the yogi then exhales the
breath (tato vāyuṃ virecayet). This implies that mṛtāvasthā is a breath retention (kumbhaka), which is apparent in Brahmānanda’s explanation:
mṛtasya prāṇaviyuktasyāvasthā mṛtāvasthā samutpannā bhavati, iḍāpiṅgalayoḥ prāṇasañcārābhāvāt/ tatas tadanantaraṃ vāyuṃ virecayen nāsikāpuṭābhyāṃ śanais tyajet/
saṃbandho ] saṃbandhaṃ A, saṃbandhāj Av.l., saṃbandhā Av.l. jāyate cāmṛtāya ] jānīyād amṛtāya A
saṃbandho YBhD ] sandhānaṃ YCM cāmṛtāya vai ] cāmṛtāyate YCM, cāmṛtāya ca YBhD samutpannā YCMv.l.YBhD ] samutpannaṃ YCM mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ YCM ] vāyuṃ virecayet YBhD
महावेधोऽयमभ्यासान्महासिद्धिप्रदायकः ।
वलीपलितवेपघ्नः सेव्यते साधकोत्तमैः ॥
mahāvedho’yam abhyāsān mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ /
valīpalitavepaghnaḥ sevyate sādhakottamaiḥ //
In the third verse quarter, the reading vedhaghnaḥ (‘cures wounds’?) found in α and the other groups, with the exception of δ (vegaghnaḥ), is odd as it does not seem related to the other two symptoms of old age (i.e. wrinkles and grey hair) that this mudrā can cure. Adopting Brahmānanda’s otherwise unattested reading, we have understood vedhaghnaḥ to be a mistake for vepaghnaḥ, ‘cures trembling’, which occurs in some manuscripts in the δω (J1, J3, N16, N18) and π (N12 contaminated) and ζ (J14 contaminated) groups, as well as the Yogacintāmaṇi, Yuktabhavadeva, and Jyotsnā. The mistake likely arose from the similarity of dha and pa in Nagari scripts.
ayam eva mahāvedhaḥ siddhido’bhyāsato bhavet//
abhyāsān YCM ] abhyasto YBhD
एतत्त्रयं महागुह्यं जरामृत्युविनाशनम् ।
वह्निवृद्धिकरं चैव अणिमादिगुणप्रदम् ॥
etat trayaṃ mahāguhyaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśanam /
vahnivṛddhikaraṃ caiva aṇimādiguṇapradam //
etat trayaṃ HRĀ YCM ] bandhatrayaṃ YBhD mahāguhyaṃ HRĀ YBhD ] mahāguptaṃ YCM caiva YCM YBhD ] caiva hy HRĀ
अष्टधा क्रियते चैतद्यामे यामे दिने दिने ।
पुण्यसंभारसंभावि पापौघभिदुरं सदा ॥
aṣṭadhā kriyate caitad yāme yāme dine dine /
puṇyasaṃbhārasaṃbhāvi pāpaughabhiduraṃ sadā //
caitad Av.l. ] caiva A saṃbhāra ] sañcaya A
saṃbhāra YCM YBhD ] saṅghāta HRĀ caitat HRĀ ] caiva YCM YBhD saṃbhāvi ] sandhāyī HRĀ YCM YBhD
सम्यक्शिक्षावतामेव स्वल्पं प्रथमसाधने ।
वह्निस्त्रीपथसेवानामादौ वर्जनमादिशेत् ॥*
samyakśikṣāvatām eva svalpaṃ prathamasādhane /
vahnistrīpathasevānām ādau varjanam ādiśet //*
ādiśet ] ācaret A
sādhane YCM ] sādhanam YBhD ādiśet ] ācaret YBhD
छेदनचालनदोहैः कलां क्रमेण प्रवर्धयेत्तावत् ।
सा यावद्भ्रूमध्यं स्पृशति तदा खेचरीसिद्धिः ॥*
chedanacālanadohaiḥ kalāṃ krameṇa pravardhayet tāvat /
sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati tadā khecarīsiddhiḥ //*
Various versions of this verse have been transmitted in upagīti (γ, δ), gīti (ε), āryā (η2) and anuṣṭubh (πω) metres. We have adopted a version close to α2, which has a slight metrical fault:
chedanacālanaṃ dohaiḥ kalā kramaṇa pravardhayet tāvat/
sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ visati tadānī khecarīsiddhiḥ//
kalāṃ krameṇa pravardhayet ] kalāṃ krameṇa vardhayet HRĀ, jihvāṃ saṃvardhayet YCM, krameṇa jihvāṃ pravardhayet HTK sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati HTK ] yāvad iyaṃ bhrūmadhye spṛśati HRĀ, sā yāti yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati hi HRĀv.l., yāvad iyaṃ bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati YCM tadā khecarīsiddhiḥ YCM HTK ] tadānīṃ khecarīsiddhiḥ HRĀ
कपालकुहरे जिह्वा प्रविष्टा विपरीतगा ।
भ्रुवोरन्तर्गता दृष्टिर् मुद्रा भवति खेचरी ॥
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā /
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī //
कलां पराङ्मुखीं कृत्वा क्षणार्धं यदि तिष्ठति ।
क्षणेन मुच्यते योगी व्याधिमृत्युजरादिभिः ॥
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati /
kṣaṇena mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ //
Although 3.34 is absent in α1, it is in α2 and α3, and also the γ and η groups. Other manuscripts have an additional line that gives vyomacakra as an alternative name for khecarīmudrā (3.34*1). On the meaning of vyomacakra, see the commentary on X4.49.
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā ] rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā ŚS, JS yādhimṛtyu ŚS ] vyādhibhis tu JS
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā tripathe parivartayet/
sā bhavet khecarī mudrā vyomacakraṃ tad ucyate//
rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati/
viṣayair mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ//
कलां पराङ्मुखीं कृत्वा त्रिपथे परिवर्तयेत् ।
सा भवेत्खेचरी मुद्रा व्योमचक्रं तदुच्यते ॥
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā tripathe parivartayet /
sā bhavet khecarī mudrā vyomacakraṃ tad ucyate //
रसनामूर्ध्वगां कृत्वा क्षणार्धं यदि तिष्ठति ।
क्षणेन मुच्यते योगी व्याधिमृत्युजरादिभिः ॥
rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati /
kṣaṇena mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ //
न रोगो मरणं तस्य न निद्रा न क्षुधा तृषा ।
न च मूर्छा भवेत्तस्य यो मुद्रां वेत्ति खेचरीम् ॥
na rogo maraṇaṃ tasya na nidrā na kṣudhā tṛṣā /
na ca mūrchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm //
tasya VMv.l. ] tandrā VM
kṣudhā tṛṣā HRĀ YCM ] tṛṣā kṣudhā YBhD
पीड्यते न स रोगेण न च लिप्यति कर्मणा ।
बाध्यते न च कालेन यो मुद्रां वेत्ति खेचरीम् ॥
pīḍyate na sa rogeṇa na ca lipyati karmaṇā /
bādhyate na ca kālena yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm //
The unusual passive form lipyati, which is found in α2 and has been adopted, is widely attested in epic Sanskrit.
na ca lipyati ] lipyate na ca VM ca kālena ] sa kālena VM
na ca lipyati ] lipyate na ca HRĀ, na ca lipyeta YCM, lipyate na sa YBhD ca kālena HRĀ ] sa kālena YCM YBhD yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm HRĀ YCM ] yasya mudrāsti khecarī YBhD
चित्तं चरति खे यस्माज् जिह्वा चरति खे गता ।
तेनैषा खेचरी नाम मुद्रा सिद्धैर्नमस्कृता ॥
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā /
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā //
tenaiṣā ] tenaiva VM, teneyaṃ VMv.l. nāma mudrā VM ] mudrā sarva VMv.l.
gatā YCM ] yataḥ YBhD tenaiṣā YCM ] teneyaṃ YBhD nāma mudrā YCM ] mudrā sarva YBhD namaskṛtā YBhD ] niṣevitā YCM
खेचर्या मुद्रितं येन विवरं लम्बिकोर्ध्वतः ।
तस्य न क्षरते बिन्दुः कामिन्याश्लेषितस्य च ॥
khecaryā mudritaṃ yena vivaraṃ lambikordhvataḥ /
tasya na kṣarate binduḥ kāminyāśleṣitasya ca //
tasya na VMv.l. ] na tasya VM kāminyāśleṣitasya VMv.l. ] kāminyāliṅgitasya VM
tasya na ] na tasya YCM YBhD kāminyāśleṣitasya ] kāminyāliṅgitasya YCM YBhD
चलितोऽपि यदा बिन्दुः संप्राप्तो योनिमण्डलम् ।
व्रजत्यूर्ध्वं हतः शक्त्या निबद्धो योनिमुद्रया ॥
calito’pi yadā binduḥ saṃprāpto yonimaṇḍalam /
vrajaty ūrdhvaṃ hataḥ śaktyā nibaddho yonimudrayā //
The third quarter of this verse has been subjected to much rewriting. Most of the
collated manuscripts, including α2 (α1 is illegible here and α3 is missing this verse quarter), have the reading haṭhāt śaktyā. This reading only makes sense if one infers that śaktyā is referring to khecarīmudrā, so that the second line means ‘blocked by yonimudrā, semen goes up forcefully by the power [of khecarīmudrā].’ The reading hi tacchaktyā of δ2 (and the Yogacintāmaṇi), appears to be an attempt to render more clearly the meaning ‘by the power of khecarī.’ Such an interpretation suggests that yonimudrā blocks bindu’s downward course and khecarī causes it to go upwards forcefully.
The oldest manuscript of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (ms. no. 4110) has hataḥ śaktyā, which is attested by three Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts on lower branches of the stemma (i.e. Ba, C2 and P4). The participle hataḥ makes sense of the instrumental śaktyā, rendering the meaning ‘struck by Kuṇḍalinī.’
Alternatively, the word hataḥ (as well as the other variants kṛtaḥ, kṛte, and even haṭhāt) may derive from hṛtaḥ, which is attested by manuscripts of the Jyotsnā. The reading hṛtaḥ śaktyā renders the verse as saying that semen goes up, carried by Kuṇḍalinī.
In Jyotsnā 3.43, Brahmānanda explains yonimudrā as essentially the contraction of the penis (yonimudrayā meḍhrākuñcanarūpayā). He may have had in mind the practice of contracting and drawing the urethra upwards,
which is described below in the section on vajrolimudrā (Haṭhapradīpikā 3.82). The author of the Yogaprakāśikā (5.66) states that yonimudrā is well known in treatises on mantra (yonimudrayeti mantraśāstraprasiddhayety arthaḥ/ prasidhyayety ed.). This is consistent with the Śivasaṃhitā’s discussion of yonimudrā (4.2, 5.12), where it is described as activating the perineum (yoni) by contracting it in order to bring about success in mantra repetition. Later compendiums
on yoga reiterate the role of yonimudrā in mantra practice (e.g., the Yogacintāmaṇi f. 65r, citing the Pārameśvaratantra, and Haṭhatattvakaumudī 33.12). The Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (43–48) teaches a different version of yonimudrā in its repertoire of twenty-five mudrās. In this work, yonimudrā is supposed to awaken Kuṇḍalinī and involves sitting in siddhāsana, blocking the ears, eyes, nose and mouth with the thumbs, index, middle and ring
fingers respectively, uniting prāṇa and apāna, meditating on the six cakras, and repeating the mantra huṃ haṃsa.
saṃprāpto yonimaṇḍalam ] saṃprāptaś ca hutāśanam VM vrajaty VMv.l. ] gacchaty VM hataḥ VM ] tanaṃ VMv.l., hṛtas VMv.l., kṛte VMv.l., kṛtaḥ VMv.l., tadā VMv.l., gatā VMv.l. nibaddho VM ] niruddho VMv.l.
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 4.82svakaṃ binduṃ ca saṃbodhya liṅgacālanam ācaret/
daivāc calati ced ūrdhvaṃ nibaddho yonimudrayā//
saṃprāpto yonimaṇḍalam ] saṃprāptaś ca hutāśanam YCM, samprāpte ’pi hutāśanam YBhD hataḥ śaktyā ] hi tacchaktyā YCM, haṭhaḥ śaktyā YBhD nibaddho YBhD ] niruddho YCM
कपालकुहरे जिह्वा कलासन्धानमुद्रया ॥
kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsandhānamudrayā //
Manuscripts of the main groups, including α, γ and ε, contain an additional line after 3.39 that is largely incoherent, aside from indicating that the tongue is in the cavity of the skull and that there is a mudrā for uniting the kalās (kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsandhānamudrayā). This line likely derives from a marginal note, the first half of which was probably explaining ūrdhvajihvaḥ in the next verse. The compound kalāsaṃdhānamudrayā may have been added as some form of dittography or as a gloss on yonimudrā, which is not described elsewhere in the text. In a slightly modified form, this line appears in a verse in the six-chapter version of the Haṭhapradīpikā (f. 112r–112v):
kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsaṃdhānavarjitā/
brahmarandhragatā nityaṃ tasya siddhir na dūrataḥ//
nityaṃ em. ] nityāṃ codex • siddhir em. ] siddhi codex
ऊर्ध्वजिह्वः स्थितो भूत्वा सोमपानं करोति यः ।
मासार्धेन न संदेहो मृत्युं जयति योगवित् ॥
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sthito bhūtvā somapānaṃ karoti yaḥ /
māsārdhena na saṃdeho mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit //
sthito bhūtvā VM ] tato bhūtvā VMv.l., sthiraṃ kṛtvā VMv.l., sthirāṃ kṛtvā VMv.l.
sthito bhūtvā ] sthiro bhutvā YCM, sa medhāvī YBhD
नित्यं सोमकलापूर्णं शरीरं यस्य योगिनः ।
तक्षकेणापि दष्टस्य विषं तस्य न सर्पति ॥*
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ śarīraṃ yasya yoginaḥ /
takṣakeṇāpi daṣṭasya viṣaṃ tasya na sarpati //*
In the context of poison, takṣaka refers to one of the three kings of the snakes (nāga), the other two being Śeṣa and Vāsuki (Mani 1975: 782–783).
sarpati VMv.l. ] pīḍayet VM, pīḍyate VMv.l., bādhyate VMv.l.
tasya na YBhD ] taṃ na ca YCM
इन्धनानि यथा वह्निस्तैलवर्तिं च दीपकः ।
तथा सोमकलापूर्णं देही देहं न मुञ्चति ॥*
indhanāni yathā vahnis tailavartiṃ ca dīpakaḥ /
tathā somakalāpūrṇaṃ dehī dehaṃ na muñcati //*
vartiṃ ca VM] vartīva VMv.l., vartti ca VMv.l.
tailavartīṃ ] tailavartī YCM tathā ] nityaṃ YCM
गोमांसं भक्षयेन्नित्यं पिबेदमरवारुणीम् ।
कुलीनं तमहं मन्ये इतरे कुलघातकाः ॥
gomāṃsaṃ bhakṣayen nityaṃ pibed amaravāruṇīm /
kulīnaṃ tam ahaṃ manye itare kulaghātakāḥ //
itare kulaghātakāḥ ] anye tu kulaghātakāḥ HRĀ, netarān kulaghātakān YCM
गोशब्देनोदिता जिह्वा तत्प्रवेशो हि तालुनि ।
गोमांसभक्षणं तत्तु महापातकनाशनम् ॥
gośabdenoditā jihvā tatpraveśo hi tāluni /
gomāṃsabhakṣaṇaṃ tat tu mahāpātakanāśanam //
जिह्वाप्रवेशसंभूतवह्निनोत्पादितः खलु ।
चन्द्रात्स्रवति यः सारः सा स्यादमरवारुणी ॥*
jihvāpraveśasaṃbhūtavahninotpāditaḥ khalu /
candrāt sravati yaḥ sāraḥ sā syād amaravāruṇī //*
vahninotpāditaḥ YCM ] vahninotthāpitā HRĀ
मूर्ध्नः षोडशपद्मपत्त्रगलितं प्राणादवाप्तं हठा-
दूर्ध्वास्यो रसनां नियम्य विवरे शक्तिं परां चिन्तयेत् ।
उत्कल्लोलकलाजलं च विमलं धारामृतं यः पिबे-
न्निर्दोषः स मृणालकोमलवपुर्योगी चिरं जीवति ॥*
mūrdhnaḥ ṣoḍaśapadmapattragalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhā-
d ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya vivare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayet /
utkallolakalājalaṃ ca vimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ pibe-
n nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalavapur yogī ciraṃ jīvati //*
The meaning of prāṇāt (‘from the breath’) in the first verse quarter is not easy to understand without the context of this verse in the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. In the verse preceding this one in the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (117), the breath, on reaching the “great lotus”, is said to turn into nectar (amṛta). In Jyotsnā 3.51, Brahmānanda notes that there is a variant prāṇaiḥ (‘by means of the breaths’), which is easier to understand than prāṇāt. He nonetheless accepts prāṇāt and understands it as being the means by which the nectar is obtained (prāṇāt sādhanabhūtād avāptam). He also understands the sixteen-petalled lotus to be the lotus in the throat, into which the nectar drips.
padmapattra ] patrapadma VM niyamya VM ] nidhāya VMv.l., vidhāya VMv.l. cintayet VM ] cālayet VMv.l. utkallolakalājalaṃ VM ] utkallolakalākalaṃ VMv.l., utkallolajalākulaṃ VMv.l., utkallolajalāmṛtaṃ VMv.l., tat kallolakalājalaṃ VMv.l., tat kallolajalākulaṃ VMv.l. ca vimalaṃ VM ] suvimalaṃ VMv.l. dhārāmṛtaṃ ] jīvākulaṃ VMv.l., jihvākulaṃ VMv.l., dhārājalaṃ VMv.l. vapur VMv.l. ] tanur VM
utkallolakalāmṛtaṃ ca vimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ pibet/
nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛnālakomalatanur yogī ciraṃ jīvati//
mūrdhnaḥ YCM YBhD ] ūrdhvaṃ HTK, mūrdhvaṃ HTKv.l. padmapattra YCM ] patrapadma YBhD HTK vivare YCM YBhD ] kuhare HTK cintayet YBhD ] cintayan YCM YBhDv.l.HTK utkallola HTK ] tatkallola YCM YBhD ca vimalaṃ YCM ] suvimalaṃ YBhD HTK dhārāmṛtaṃ YBhD HTK ] jihvākulaṃ YCM vapur HTK ] tanur YCM YBhD ciraṃ YCM HTK ] paraṃ YBhD
चुम्बन्ती यदि लम्बिकाग्रमनिशं जिह्वा रसस्यन्दिनी
सक्षारा कटुकाथ दुग्धसदृशा मध्वाज्यतुल्याथवा ।
व्याधीनां हरणं जरान्तकरणं शास्त्रागमोदीरणं
तस्य स्यादमरत्वमष्टगुणवत्सिद्धाङ्गनाकर्षणम् ॥*
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram aniśaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukātha dugdhasadṛśā madhvājyatulyāthavā /
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jarāntakaraṇaṃ śāstrāgamodīraṇaṃ
tasya syād amaratvam aṣṭaguṇavat siddhāṅganākarṣaṇam //*
rasasyandinī VM ] rasaspandanī VMv.l., rasāsvādinī VMv.l. jarāntakaraṇaṃ VMv.l. ] jaropaśamanaṃ VM, jarāpaharaṇaṃ VMv.l. odīraṇaṃ VM ] odgīraṇaṃ VMv.l., occāraṇaṃ VMv.l. guṇavat ] guṇitaṃ VM
aniśaṃ YCM YBhD ] anilaṃ HTK kaṭukātha ] kaṭukāmla YCM YBhD HTK sadṛśā ] sadṛśaṃ YCM, sadṛśī YBhD, sadṛśāṃ HTK tulyāthavā YBhD ] tulyaṃ yadā YCM, tulyā tathā HTK jarāntakaraṇaṃ YCM HTK ] jarāmbutaraṇaṃ YBhD odgīraṇaṃ YBhD HTK ] oddhāraṇaṃ YCM amaratvam YBhD HTK ] iha siddhir YCM guṇavat HTK ] guṇitā YCM, guṇitaṃ YBhD
एकं सृष्टिमयं बीजम् एका मुद्रा च खेचरी ।
एको देवो निरालम्ब एकावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī /
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī //
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā tu khecarī/
dvāv etau jñāyate yena so pi śāntapade sthitam//
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī/
dvāv ekaṃ yo vijānāti sa vai pūjyaḥ kulāgame//
पाताले यद्विशति सुषिरं मेरुमूले तदस्मिन्
तत्त्वं चैतत्प्रवदति सुधीस्तन्मुखं निम्नगानाम् ।
चन्द्रात्सारः स्रवति वपुषस्तेन मृत्युर्नराणां
तं बध्नीयात्सुकरणमृदा नान्यथा कायसिद्धिः ॥*
pātāle yad viśati suṣiraṃ merumūle tad asmin
tattvaṃ caitat pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām /
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
taṃ badhnīyāt sukaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ //*
See 4.9.
पार्ष्णिभागेन संपीड्य योनिमाकुञ्चयेद्गुदम् ।
अपानमूर्ध्वमाकृष्य मूलबन्धोऽयमिष्यते ॥
pārṣṇibhāgena saṃpīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam /
apānam ūrdhvam ākṛṣya mūlabandho’yam iṣyate //
iṣyate ] ucyate VM
iṣyate ] ucyate HRĀ YCM
अधोगतिमपानं वै ऊर्ध्वगं कुरुते बलात् ।
आकुञ्चनेन तं प्राहुर्मूलबन्धं हि योगिनः ॥
adhogatim apānaṃ vai ūrdhvagaṃ kurute balāt /
ākuñcanena taṃ prāhur mūlabandhaṃ hi yoginaḥ //
adhogatiṃ GŚ ] adhogataṃ GŚv.l. ākuñcanena taṃ GŚ ] ākuñcane ca tat GŚv.l. mūlabandhaṃ hi yoginaḥ ] mūlabandhaṃ tu yoginaḥ GŚ, mūlabandho yam ucyate GŚv.l.
adhogatim HRĀ ] adhogatam YCM vai ūrdhvagaṃ HRĀ ] ca tad ūrdhvaṃ YCM balāt HRĀ ] haṭhāt YCM hi HRĀ ] tu YCM
गुदं पार्ष्ण्या तु संपीड्य वायुमाकुञ्चयेद्बलात् ।
वारं वारं यथा चोर्ध्वं समायाति समीरणः ॥
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu saṃpīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt /
vāraṃ vāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ //
The instruction to ‘contract the wind’ (vāyum ākuñcayet) is odd (especially with samīraṇaḥ in the fourth pāda) and not found in other texts. Mallinson has adopted yonim for vāyum (cf. Haṭhapradīpikā 3.49b) in his edition of this verse in its source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, which is not found in the manuscripts of that text but is in the Haṭhapradīpikā’s δ manuscripts. Another possibility is that vāyum is a corruption of pāyum, ‘anus’.
In the context of the root lock, vāyum ākuñcayet can be understood as an instruction to contract apānavāyu, which is mentioned in the previous verse (3.50a). Instructions to contract apānavāyu are found in other yoga texts, such as Yogatārāvalī 7b (ākuñcanaiḥ śaśvad apānavāyoḥ), Śivasaṃhitā 4.84cd (apānavāyum ākuñcya balād...), Śivayogapradīpikā 2.53ab (athordhvamadhyasthirabandhanābhyām ākuñcanād ūrdhvam apānavāyoḥ) and Yuktabhavadeva 7.297 (ādhārakamale suptāṃ cālayet kuṇḍalīṃ dṛḍhām/ apānavāyum ākṛṣya balād ākuñcya buddhimān). In Jyotsnā 3.63, Brahmānanda understands vāyu in this verse as apāna when he says that ‘one should contract the wind, apāna’ (vāyum apānam ākuñcayed), which he explains as, ‘one should pull it by contractions of the anus’ (gudasyākuñcanenākarṣayet). In the same vein, Bhavadevamiśra glosses ‘pulling apāna’ (apānākarṣaṇam) as ‘contracting the anus’ (gudākuñcanam), when commenting on ‘having pulled apānavāyu and forcefully contracted it ...’ (apānavāyum ākṛṣya balād ākuñcya...) in Yuktabhavadeva 297 and 301.
vāyum DYŚv.l. ] yonim (em.)
Cf. Śārṅgadharapaddhati 4416tu YCM, YB ] ca HRĀ
प्राणापानौ नादबिन्दू मूलबन्धेन चैकताम् ।
गत्वा योगस्य संसिद्धिं यच्छतो नात्र संशयः ॥
prāṇāpānau nādabindū mūlabandhena caikatām /
gatvā yogasya saṃsiddhiṃ yacchato nātra saṃśayaḥ //
Since the term nāda usually means ‘internal sound’ in Haṭha and Rājayoga texts, it is possible that bindu here was understood by some to have the tantric connotations of sonic and visual foci (Mallinson 2007: 219 n. 325) or two levels of sonic emanation in mantroccāra, where nāda is an unvoiced sound and bindu is the slightly coarser sound of inner murmuring (see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol. 3: 278–279). However, there is a passage in the Amaraugha (10–12) where nāda and bindu are paired and it is clear that bindu means generative fluid.
gatvā yogasya DYŚ ] gacchato yoga DYŚv.l. yacchato DYŚ ] gacchato DYŚv.l., kurute DYŚv.l., gachate DYŚv.l.
gatvā yogasya saṃsiddhiṃ YCM ] gatau tadā yogasiddhiṃ HRĀ yacchato nātra ] gacchato nātra YCM, prāpnoty eva na HRĀ
अपानप्राणयोरैक्यं क्षयो मूत्रपुरीषयोः ।
युवा भवति वृद्धोऽपि सततं मूलबन्धनात् ॥*
apānaprāṇayor aikyaṃ kṣayo mūtrapurīṣayoḥ /
yuvā bhavati vṛddho’pi satataṃ mūlabandhanāt //*
The diminishing of urine and faeces as a result of success in yoga is mentioned in the Amanaska (1.50c) and Dattātreyayogaśāstra (80a).
अपाने चोर्ध्वगे जाते संप्राप्ते वह्निमण्डलम् ।
तदानलशिखा दीर्घा वर्धते वायुनाहता ॥
apāne cordhvage jāte saṃprāpte vahnimaṇḍalam /
tadānalaśikhā dīrghā vardhate vāyunāhatā //
maṇḍalam GŚ (em. from HP) ] maṇḍale GŚv.l. tadānalaśikhā ] tato ’nalaśikhā GŚ
saṃprāpte YCM ] prayāte HRĀ maṇḍalam ] maṇḍale HRĀ YCM tadānalaśikhā dīrghā ] tathānalaśikhādīptir HRĀ, tathānalaśikhā dīrghā YCM vardhate vāyunāhatā YCM ] vāyunā preritā yathā HRĀ
ततो यातौ वह्न्यपानौ प्राणमुष्णस्वरूपकम् ।
तेनात्यन्तप्रदीप्तस्तु ज्वलनो देहजस्तदा ॥
tato yātau vahnyapānau prāṇam uṣṇasvarūpakam /
tenātyantapradīptas tu jvalano dehajas tadā //
The second verse quarter has been rewritten in α1 and α2 as prāṇamūlasvarūpakam, which is similar to η1 (prāṇamūlasvarūpakau) and the Haṭharatnāvalī (mūlarūpasvarūpakau). It is likely that mūla arose as a misreading of uṣṇa. References to prāṇa being hot by nature (and apāna being cold) occur in other works, such as the Mokṣopāya (6.85.111–112) and Haṭhatattvakaumudī (4.14, 41.2). The commentators Bālakṛṣṇa (Yogaprakāśikā 5.85) and Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.67) accept the idea that prāṇa is hot by nature.
pradīptas tu ] pradīptena GŚ dehajas GŚ ] dehagas GŚv.l. tadā ] tathā GŚ
tato yātau YCM ] yātāyātau HRĀ prāṇam uṣṇasvarūpakam ] mūlarūpasvarūpakau HRĀ, prāṇam uktasvarūpakau YCM tenātyanta YCM ] tenābhyantaḥ HRĀ tadā ] tathā HRĀ YCM
तेन कुण्डलिनी सुप्ता संतप्ता संप्रबुध्यते ।
दण्डाहता भुजङ्गीव निश्वस्य ऋजुतां व्रजेत् ॥
tena kuṇḍalinī suptā saṃtaptā saṃprabudhyate /
daṇḍāhatā bhujaṅgīva niśvasya ṛjutāṃ vrajet //
saṃtaptā ] satataṃ YCM saṃprabudhyate ] saṃprabodhyate YCM daṇḍāhatā HRĀ ] daṇḍāhata YCM niśvasya HRĀv.l. ] niścitaṃ HRĀ YCM vrajet YCM ] iyāt HRĀ
बिलं प्रविष्टेव ततो ब्रह्मनाड्यन्तरं व्रजेत् ।
तस्मान्नित्यं मूलबन्धः कर्तव्यो योगिभिः सदा ॥
bilaṃ praviṣṭeva tato brahmanāḍyantaraṃ vrajet /
tasmān nityaṃ mūlabandhaḥ kartavyo yogibhiḥ sadā //
bilaṃ ] bile GŚ, bila GŚv.l., bilaṃ GŚv.l. praviṣṭeva ] praviṣṭe ca tato GŚ, praveśato yatra GŚv.l.
बद्धो येन सुषुम्णायां प्राणस्तूड्डीयते यतः ।
तस्मादुड्डीयणाख्योऽयं योगिभिः समुदाहृतः ॥*
baddho yena suṣumṇāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍīyate yataḥ /
tasmād uḍḍīyaṇākhyo’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ //*
baddho GŚ (em. from HP) ] vajro GŚv.l., bandho GŚv.l. yataḥ GŚ ] tataḥ GŚv.l.
उड्याणं कुरुते यस्माद् अविश्रान्तं महाखगः ।
उड्डीयाणं तदेव स्यात्तत्र बन्धो विधीयते ॥
uḍyāṇaṃ kurute yasmād aviśrāntaṃ mahākhagaḥ /
uḍḍīyāṇaṃ tad eva syāt tatra bandho vidhīyate //
In the Vivekamārtaṇḍa this verse is preceded by a passage on mūlabandha, so the likely meaning of the fourth verse quarter is that (mūla)bandha is to be performed in this practice. The δ group of the Haṭhapradīpikā witnesses has ‘the root [lock] is applied’ (mūlaṃ vidhīyate), which appears to be an attempt to clarify the meaning of the original verse.
The word uḍyāṇaṃ in the first pāda is attested in manuscripts of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa, the source of this verse, and two manuscripts of the α group. This spelling is attested
in several vernacular works (e.g., Aṣṭāṅgayoga of Caraṇadāsa 144, 275, 307–8, Jogapradīpyaka 588, 635, 686 etc.), as well as other Sanskrit yoga texts (e.g., Yogatārāvalī 6, Dhyānabindūpaniṣat 75 etc.). Other witnesses, including the Jyotsnā, have uḍḍīnaṃ, the usual form for the verbal noun from uḍ-ḍī.
aviśrāntaṃ (em.) ] aviśrānta GŚv.l., aviśrānto GŚv.l.
uḍyāṇaṃ ] uḍḍīnaṃ HRĀ YCM tatra bandho vidhīyate ] tatra bandho ’bhidhīyate HRĀ, mūlabandho ’bhidhīyate YCM
उदरे पश्चिमं ताणं नाभेरूर्ध्वं च कारयेत् ।
उड्डीयाणो ह्यसौ बन्धो मृत्युमातङ्गकेसरी ॥
udare paścimaṃ tāṇaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ ca kārayet /
uḍḍīyāṇo hy asau bandho mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī //
The spelling tāṇa (where many witnesses have tāna) reflects vernacular pronunciation (see e.g., Molesworth 1857 s.v. tāṇa).
paścimaṃ SŚ ] paścime VM ca VM ] tu ŚS uḍḍīyāṇo hy asau ] uḍḍīyāno hy asau VM, uḍyānākhyo ’tra ŚS
tāṇaṃ ] tānaṃ HRĀ YCM ca kārayet ] ca dhārayet HRĀ, samācaret YCM uḍḍīyāṇo ] uḍḍīyāno HRĀ YCM
उड्डीयाणं तु सहजं गुरुणा कथितं सदा ।
अभ्यसेदस्ततन्द्रस्तु वृद्धोऽपि तरुणो भवेत् ॥
uḍḍīyāṇaṃ tu sahajaṃ guruṇā kathitaṃ sadā /
abhyased astatandras tu vṛddho’pi taruṇo bhavet //
We have understood the first line to mean that even though the basics of the practice of uḍḍiyāṇa are easy, it still needs to be taught by the guru. Witnesses of the γ and δ groups read yathā for sadā, perhaps as a deliberate substitution of the more difficult sadā, making the verse mean that uḍḍiyāṇa is easy in the way that is taught by the guru.
guruṇā DYŚ ] guṇaughāt DYŚv.l.
sadā ] yathā YCM abhyased astatandras ] abhyaset tad atandras YCM taruṇo bhavet ] taruṇāyate YCM
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 2.56guruṇā sahajaṃ proktaṃ vṛddho’pi taruṇo bhavet/
bāhyoḍyāṇaṃ ca kurute bāhyālaṅkāravardhanam//
नाभेरूर्ध्वमधश्चापि ताणं कुर्यात्प्रयत्नतः ।
षण्मासमभ्यसन्मृत्युं जयत्येव न संशयः ॥
nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tāṇaṃ kuryāt prayatnataḥ /
ṣaṇmāsam abhyasan mṛtyuṃ jayaty eva na saṃśayaḥ //
adhaś cāpi DYŚv.l. ] ataḥ paścāt DYŚ tāṇaṃ ] tānaṃ DYŚ abhyasan ] abhyasen DYŚ
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 4.72nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tānaṃ paścimam ācaret/
uḍyānabandha eṣaḥ syāt sarvaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ//
adhaś cāpi ] adho vāpi HRĀ YCM tāṇaṃ ] tānaṃ HRĀ YCM abhyasan ] abhyasen HRĀ YCM
Cf. Yuktabhavadeva f. 76v (attrib. Śivayoga)nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tānaṃ nirbharam ācaret/
uḍḍiyāno hy ayaṃ bandhaḥ sarvaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ//
सति वज्रासने पादौ कराभ्यां धारयेद्दृढम् ।
गुल्फदेशसमीपे च कन्दं तत्र प्रपीडयेत् ॥
sati vajrāsane pādau karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham /
gulphadeśasamīpe ca kandaṃ tatra prapīḍayet //
In the Haṭhapradīpikā this verse seems to instruct the yogi to press the bulb (kanda) with the feet while holding them with the hands. The adopted reading of the source
text, the Gorakṣaśataka, which is only found in witness T (and there in the singular jānu, which has been emended to the dual jānū in Mallinson’s edition) says that it is the knees that are to be held, which would
still allow for the feet to press the bulb. In the Yuktabhavadeva (7.224), Bhavadevamiśra says that the bulb is near the navel and the legs are held
near the ankles, suggesting that the bulb is pressed by using the hands to pull the
feet into the lower abdomen.
Yuktabhavadeva 7.224 (commenting on uḍḍiyāṇabandha)
dṛḍham āsanaṃ baddhvā gulphadeśasamīpe karābhyāṃ pādau datvā nābhisamīpasthaṃ kandaṃ pīḍayann udare paścimatāṇaṃ tathā kuryād yathā vāyuḥ kukṣisandhiṃ na gacchaty evam uḍḍiyānabandho jarāmṛtyuvināśanaḥ sampadyate//
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyām/
sati vajrāsane pādau karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham/
gulphadeśasamīpe ca kandaṃ tatra nipīḍayet// [...]
siddhāsane sthitvā hastābhyāṃ pādau gulphapradeśasamīpe dṛḍhaṃ dhṛtvā tunde nālotthānaṃ sādhu vidhāya samāhitamanasā sudṛḍhamūlabandhajālandharabandhavatābhyāsinā sādhakena recakādau kuṃbhakānte udare paścimatāne kriyamāṇe nitarāṃ tadā tatra nābhikandanipīḍane paścimatānena sati nābhikandotthā nāḍaya ūrdhvamukhā vikasitā viralā vimalā asaṃhatā vāyugrahasamarthā bhavanti tadā sakuṃbhitaḥ prāṇavāyuḥ śanaiḥ//
pādau GŚv.l. ] jānū (em.), jānu GŚv.l., prādau GŚv.l.
kandaṃ tatra ] udaraṃ tat YCM
पश्चिमं ताणमुदरे कारयेद्धृदये गले ।
शनैः शनैर्यथा प्राणस्तुन्दसंधिं न गच्छति ॥*
paścimaṃ tāṇam udare kārayed dhṛdaye gale /
śanaiḥ śanair yathā prāṇas tundasaṃdhiṃ na gacchati //*
In 3.64b, the reading gale (‘in the throat’) is very well attested by manuscripts of the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, and the Hathapradīpikā (including all three α witnesses). Its meaning is not entirely clear to us as the ‘backward stretch’ (paścimaṃ tānam) usually occurs above and below the navel when the uḍḍiyāṇa lock is applied, as stated above in verse 3.60. We have not seen the neck mentioned in this regard in any other premodern work, and the absence of ca suggests that gale may be a corruption. The alternative reading cibukaṃ hṛdi in manuscripts of the Hathapradīpikā on lower branches of the stemma and in the testimonia is a reference to jālandharabandha and appears to be a patch. It is possible that the practice of uḍḍiyāṇa might affect the throat, as reported by Gore (2005: 144). Drawing on x-ray experiments on uḍḍiyāṇabandha conducted at the Kaivalyadhama Yoga Institute, the article mentions a sub-atmospheric (negative) pressure in visceral cavities, such as the oesophagus and stomach, as a physiological effect of applying uḍḍiyāṇa.
tāṇam ] tānam GŚ
paścimaṃ YCM ] paścime HSC tāṇam ] tānam YCM HSC kārayed dhṛdaye gale ] kārayec cibukaṃ hṛdi YCM, ku[r]yac ca cibukaṃ hṛdi HSC tundasaṃdhiṃ ] tundasiddhiṃ YCM, kandasaṃdhi[ṃ] HSC
सर्वेषामेव बन्धानाम् उत्तमो ह्युड्डियाणकः ।
उड्डीयाणे दृढे बन्धे मुक्तिः स्वाभाविकी भवेत् ॥
sarveṣām eva bandhānām uttamo hy uḍḍiyāṇakaḥ /
uḍḍīyāṇe dṛḍhe bandhe muktiḥ svābhāvikī bhavet //
uttamo ] hy uttamo YCM uḍḍiyāṇakaḥ ] uḍḍiyānakaḥ YCM uḍḍīyāṇe ] uḍḍiyāne YCM muktiḥ svābhāvikī ] mūlaḥ svābhāviko YCM
कण्ठमाकुञ्च्य हृदये स्थापयेद्दृढमिच्छया ।
बन्धो जालन्धराख्योऽयम् अमृताव्ययकारकः ॥*
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā /
bandho jālandharākhyo’yam amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ //*
The reading sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā in the second verse quarter is attested by the manuscripts of the α, δ, η and π groups. It is also well-attested in the transmission of the source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, but in his edition Mallinson has adopted sthāpayed cibukaṃ dṛḍham on semantic grounds. This reading is found in two of his favoured manuscripts but this is one of the very few instances where he reads against his stemmatic hypothesis. He puts this down to contamination in the transmission. Our sources, in particular the manuscripts of the α group, indicate that Svātmārāma read sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā (which is also the reading which Mallinson’s stemmatic hypothesis indicates is primary in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra) and we have adopted it accordingly. It is certainly the lectio difficilior. Taking kaṇṭhaṃ as the object of sthāpayet is awkward, as it is hard to see how one could place the throat on the chest, and the meaning of icchayā, which we have translated as “deliberately”, is uncertain.
dṛḍham icchayā DYŚv.l. ] dṛḍhayā dhiyā DYŚv.l., cibukaṃ dṛḍham DYŚ bandho jālandharākhyo ’yaṃ ] jālandharo bandha eṣa DYŚ
dṛḍham icchayā YCM ] cibukaṃ dṛḍham HRĀ amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ YCM ] jarāmṛtyuvināśakaḥ HRĀ
बध्नाति हि शिराजालमधोगामिनभोजलम् ।
ततो जालन्धरो बन्धः कण्ठदुःखौघनाशनः ॥
badhnāti hi śirājālam adhogāminabhojalam /
tato jālandharo bandhaḥ kaṇṭhaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ //
badhnāti hi HRĀ YBhD ] badhnātīha YCM adhogāminabhojalam YCM ] nādho yāti nabhojalam HRĀ YBhD bandhaḥ HRĀ YBhD ] proktaḥ YCM kaṇṭhaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ YBhD ] kaṇṭhasaṅkocane kṛte HRĀ, kaṇṭhe duḥkhaughanāśanaḥ YCM
जालन्धरे कृते बन्धे कण्ठसंकोचलक्षणे ।
न पीयूषं पतत्यग्नौ न च वायुः प्रधावति ॥
jālandhare kṛte bandhe kaṇṭhasaṃkocalakṣaṇe /
na pīyūṣaṃ pataty agnau na ca vāyuḥ pradhāvati //
pradhāvati VM ] prakupyati VMv.l.
pradhāvati ] prakupyati YCM YBhD
कण्ठसंकोचनेनैव द्वे नाड्यौ स्तम्भयेद्दृढम् ।
मध्यचक्रमिदं ज्ञेयं षोडशाधारबन्धनम् ॥
kaṇṭhasaṃkocanenaiva dve nāḍyau stambhayed dṛḍham /
madhyacakram idaṃ jñeyaṃ ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam //
The import of the second line of this verse is not entirely clear without the context
of the source text. It derives from a passage in the Jñānasāra (2.1–5), which identifies khecarīmudrā as the ‘cakra of the void’ (vyomacakra) and khecarīmudrā combined with the contraction of the throat as the ‘middle cakra’ (madhyacakra). The middle cakra seems to be so designated because it is situated between the vyomacakra and a root cakra (mūlacakra), which is located between two śaktis in the navel.
Svātmārāma appears to have incorporated the Jñānasāra’s verse on khecarī and the madhyacakra into his discussion of the jālandhara lock because its reference to contracting the throat (kaṇṭhasaṅkocana) reinforces the idea that this contraction blocks important channels, a point stated
more generally in the two preceding verses that he borrowed from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. The Jñānasāra’s verse on vyomacakra was incorporated into later versions of the Haṭhapradīpikā (see the commentary on X4.49).
In Jyotsnā 3.73, Brahmānanda, who appears to have been unaware of the Jñānasāra, says that the middle cakra (madhyacakra) is viśuddha cakra. He appears to say this because the viśuddha cakra is located in the throat and the jālandhara lock is a contraction of the throat. However, he also connects the viśuddha cakra to the sixteen supports (ṣoḍaśādhāra) at the end of this verse, perhaps because this cakra has sixteen petals (as mentioned in 3.46). On the meaning of ādhāra in yogic contexts, see entry no. 3 in the Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol. 1: 191.
saṃkocanenaiva ] saṅkocanaṃ kṛtvā JS dṛḍham ] dhruvam JS jñeyaṃ ] bhadre JS
kaṇṭhasaṅkocanaṃ kṛtvā cibukaṃ hṛdaye nyaset/
jālandhare kṛte bandhe ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam//
बन्धत्रयमिदं श्रेष्ठं महासिद्धैर्निषेवितम् ।
सर्वेषां हठतन्त्राणां साधनं योगिनो विदुः ॥
bandhatrayam idaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ mahāsiddhair niṣevitam /
sarveṣāṃ haṭhatantrāṇāṃ sādhanaṃ yogino viduḥ //
bandhatrayam idaṃ HRĀ YCM ] idaṃ bandhatrayaṃ HTK mahāsiddhair niṣevitam ] mahāsiddhaiś ca sevitam HRĀ, mahāsiddhaniṣevitam YCM, marujjayasusiddhadam HTK haṭha YCM ] yoga HRĀ HTK sādhanaṃ HRĀ HTK ] sādhane YCM yogino viduḥ HRĀ HTK ] yoginām iti YCM
अधस्तात्कुञ्चनेनाशु कण्ठसंकोचने कृते ।
मध्ये पश्चिमताणेन स्यात्प्राणो ब्रह्मनाडिगः ॥*
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte /
madhye paścimatāṇena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ //*
मूलस्थानं समाकुञ्च्य उड्डीयाणं तु कारयेत् ।
इडां च पिङ्गलां बद्ध्वा वाहयेत्पश्चिमं पथम् ॥
mūlasthānaṃ samākuñcya uḍḍīyāṇaṃ tu kārayet /
iḍāṃ ca piṅgalāṃ baddhvā vāhayet paścimaṃ patham //
samākuñcya HRĀ ] samākṛṣya YCM uḍḍīyāṇaṃ ] uḍḍiyānaṃ HRĀ, YCM paścimaṃ pathaṃ HRĀ ] paścime pathi YCM
अनेनैव विधानेन सेवयेत्पवनालयम् ।
ततो न जायते मृत्युर्जरारोगादिकं तथा ॥
anenaiva vidhānena sevayet pavanālayam /
tato na jāyate mṛtyur jarārogādikaṃ tathā //
As far as we know, the compound pavanālaya does not occur in other yoga texts. Here, it appears to refer to Suṣumṇā. The similar compound prāṇālaya) is mentioned in other yoga texts, such as the Yogayājñavalkya (4.52–53), but it refers to the locations in the body where prāṇa resides, as opposed to the other bodily winds.
sevayet YCM ] prayāti HRĀ pavanālayam YCM ] pavano layam HRĀ
ऊर्ध्वं नाभिरधस्तालुरूर्ध्वं भानुरधः शशी ।
करणी विपरीताख्या गुरुवाक्येन लभ्यते ॥*
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir adhas tālur ūrdhvaṃ bhānur adhaḥ śaśī /
karaṇī viparītākhyā guruvākyena labhyate //*
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir HRĀ YBhD ] ūrdhvanābhir YCM ūrdhvaṃ bhānur HRĀ YBhD ] ūrdhvabhānur YCM guruvākyena labhyate HRĀ ] sarvavyādhivināśinī YCM, guruvaktreṇa gamyate YBhD
करणी विपरीताख्या सर्वव्याधिविनाशिनी ।
नित्यमभ्यासयुक्तस्य जठराग्निविवर्धनी ॥
karaṇī viparītākhyā sarvavyādhivināśinī /
nityam abhyāsayuktasya jaṭharāgnivivardhanī //
karaṇī ] karaṇaṃ DYŚ vināśinī ] vināśanam DYŚ jaṭharāgnivivardhanī ] jaṭharāgnir vivardhate DYŚ
vivardhanī ] vivardhinī HRĀ, vivardhanam YCM
आहारो बहुलस्तस्य संपाद्यः साधकस्य तु ।
अल्पाहारो यदि भवेदग्निर्देहं दहेत्क्षणात् ॥
āhāro bahulas tasya saṃpādyaḥ sādhakasya tu /
alpāhāro yadi bhaved agnir dehaṃ dahet kṣaṇāt //
Svātmārāma has removed the vocative from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, changing sāṃkṛte dhruvam to sādhakasya tu.
sādhakasya tu ] sāṃkṛte dhruvam DYŚ
sādhakasya tu ] sādhakena vai HRĀ, sāṃkṛte dhruvam YCM agnir deham ] deham agnir HRĀ, agnir dāhaṃ YCM dahet kṣaṇāt ] dahet kramāt HRĀ, karoti vai YCM
Cf. Yuktabhavadeva 7.238asyāṃ kriyamāṇāyāṃ sādhakasya bhakṣyaṃ bahulaṃ sampādyam anyathā pravṛddho jāṭharānalo dhātuṃ dahatīti//
अधःशिरश्चोर्ध्वपादः क्षणं स्यात्प्रथमे दिने ।
क्षणाच्च किंचिदधिकमभ्यसेच्च दिने दिने ॥
adhaḥśiraś cordhvapādaḥ kṣaṇaṃ syāt prathame dine /
kṣaṇāc ca kiṃcid adhikam abhyasec ca dine dine //
It appears that the masculine stem form śira was widely understood in the Haṭhapradīpikā’s transmission instead of the more common śiras, which would be rendered śirāḥ at the end of a bahuvrīhi compound.
adhaḥśirāś DYŚ ] adhaḥśiraś DYŚv.l.
śirāś YCM ] śiraś HRĀ pādaḥ HRĀv.l. YCM ] pādau HRĀ
Cf. Yuktabhavadeva 7.237sa ca prathamadine kṣaṇamātraṃ vidheyā dvitīyadine/ kiñcidadhikaṃ kālam evaṃ yāmaparyantaṃ vidheyā/
वलिश्च पलितं चैव षण्मासोर्ध्वं न दृश्यते ।
याममात्रं तु यो नित्यमभ्यसेत्स तु कालजित् ॥
valiś ca palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ na dṛśyate /
yāmamātraṃ tu yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit //
We have adopted the reading ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ in the second verse quarter. It is attested by manuscripts of the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (the source text) and the Jyotsnā (3.82). It makes good sense and explains the rather odd readings in α and other manuscripts, ṣaṇmāsārdhān, ṣaṇmāsārdhaṃ and ṣaṇmāsārdhe. The γ and δ groups have a different verb as well, ṣaṇmāsārdhena naśyati.
māsordhvaṃ na DYŚ ] māsāṃ hi na DYŚv.l., māsāc ca na DYŚv.l. tu ] hi DYŚ kālajit DYŚ ] yogavit DYŚv.l.
valiś ca YCM ] valitaṃ HRĀ YBhD māsordhvaṃ na ] māsān na tu HRĀ, māsārdhe na YCM, māsārdhān na YBhD
Cf. Haṭhatattvakaumudī 14.3ūrdhvapādo hy adhomastakaḥ syāt kṣaṇaṃ
vāsare’thādime’bhyāsavṛddhyā dhayet/
evam abhyāsato yāmamātraṃ sadā
mṛtyujit syāj jarājic ca ṣaṇmāsataḥ//
यत्किंचित्स्रवते चन्द्रादमृतं दिव्यरूपिणः ।
तत्सर्वं ग्रसते सूर्यस्तेन पिण्डं जरायुतम् ॥
yat kiṃcit sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpiṇaḥ /
tat sarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ jarāyutam //
See 4.10–11, where these verses are also found.
The α group do not have 3.77*1 and 3.77*2 in the third chapter (but rather in the
fourth) and other manuscripts omit them as well (notably the η group). For a discussion
of these verses, see the introduction p. 75.
तत्रास्ति करणं दिव्यं सूर्यस्य मुखबन्धनम् ।
गुरूपदेशतो ज्ञेयं न तु शास्त्रार्थकोटिभिः ॥
tatrāsti karaṇaṃ divyaṃ sūryasya mukhabandhanam /
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ //
स्वेच्छया वर्तमानोऽपि योगोक्तैर्नियमैर्विना ।
वज्रोलीं यो विजानाति स योगी सिद्धिभाजनम् ॥*
svecchayā vartamāno’pi yogoktair niyamair vinā /
vajrolīṃ yo vijānāti sa yogī siddhibhājanam //*
In manuscripts of the delta group, the vajrolī section is placed at the end of the work and the following comment is inserted at this place in the third chapter:
atratyā vajrolī granthānte likhitā/ kramaprāptāpy atra tyaktā/ asādhāraṇaprāṇyanuṣṭheyatvāt tasyāḥ/
yogoktair ] yogokta DYŚ vajrolīṃ ] vajroliṃ DYŚ bhājanam ] bhājanaḥ DYŚ, mān bhavet DYŚv.l.
Cf. Śivasaṃhitā 4.79svecchayā vartamāno’pi yogoktaniyamair vinā/
mukto bhaved gṛhastho’pi vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ//
svasthaṃ yo vartamāno’pi yogoktair niyamair vinā/
karaṇī viparītākhyā śrīnivāsena lakṣitā//
svecchayā vartamāno’pi yogoktaniyamair vinā/
vajrolyabhyāsayogena yogī siddhim avāpnuyāt//
vajrolīṃ kathayiṣyāmi gopitāṃ sarvayogibhiḥ/
tyaktayogoktaniyamā yayā sidhyanti yoginaḥ//
तत्र वस्तुद्वयं वक्ष्ये दुर्लभं यस्य कस्यचित् ।
क्षीरं चैकं द्वितीयं तु नारी च वशवर्तिनी ॥*
tatra vastudvayaṃ vakṣye durlabhaṃ yasya kasyacit /
kṣīraṃ caikaṃ dvitīyaṃ tu nārī ca vaśavartinī //*
On the possible referents of kṣīra, see Mallinson 2024 on Dattātreyayogaśāstra 154. According to Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.84), the compound vaśavartinī, which we have translated as ‘an obedient woman,’ could be a wife (vaśavartinī svādhīnā nārī vanitā). In 3.82, the reading bhāryābhage in η1, η2 and πω supports Brahmānanda’s view that the woman is the yogi’s wife.
yasya kasya cit ] yena kena cit DYŚ tu ] ca DYŚ
tatra HYS ] atra YBhD vakṣye HYS ] manye YBhD caikaṃ HYS ] ekaṃ YBhD ca HYS ] sva YBhD
मेहनेन शनैः सम्यगूर्ध्वाकुञ्चनमभ्यसेत् ।
पुरुषो वापि नारी वा वज्रोलीसिद्धिमाप्नुयात् ॥
mehanena śanaiḥ samyag ūrdhvākuñcanam abhyaset /
puruṣo vāpi nārī vā vajrolīsiddhim āpnuyāt //
In the Haṭhatattvakaumudī, Sundaradeva states that this upward contraction of the urethra, which is the method by which fluids are drawn up it, is done in the region of apānavāyu and the anus. Brahmānanda states that this practice is done immediately after sex.
puruṣo vāpi nārī vā ] puruṣo ’py athavā nārī HYS
Cf. Haṭhatattvakaumudī 16.4apānamārgataḥ samyag ūrdhvakuñcanam abhyaset/
puruṣo vāpi nārī vā vajrolīsiddhibhājanam//
apānamārgato gudadeśena ūrdhvam upari kuñcanaṃ saṃkocanam ūrdhvam ākarṣaṇaṃ vā abhyaset// iti//
यत्नतः शरनालेन फूत्कारं वज्रकन्दरे ।
शनैः शनैः प्रकुर्वीत वायुसंचारकारणात् ॥
yatnataḥ śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare /
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurvīta vāyusaṃcārakāraṇāt //
yatnataḥ ] tatas tu DYŚ
yatnataḥ HRĀ ] yantritaḥ HSC
Cf. Yuktabhavadeva 7.248cd–249abrasanālena phūtkāraṃ vāyoḥ sañcārakāraṇāt//
kuryāt śanaiḥ śanair yogī yāvac chaktiḥ prajāyate/
नार्या भगे पतद्बिन्दुमभ्यासेनोर्ध्वमाहरेत् ।
चलितं च स्वकं बिन्दुमूर्ध्वमाकृष्य रक्षयेत् ॥
nāryā bhage patadbindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet /
calitaṃ ca svakaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet //
nāryā bhage patadbindum ] tadbhage patitaṃ bindum DYŚ svakaṃ ] tathā DYŚ
nāryā bhage ] nāryā bhagāt HRĀ, nārībhage HYS svakaṃ ] nijaṃ HRĀ HYS
Cf. Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā f. 39rapānam ākuñcya tato’balenordhvaṃ dugdham ākṛṣṭividhikrameṇa/
samabhyasen niścalam alpam alpaṃ bhage patadbindum athordhvam āharet//
एवं तु रक्षयेद्बिन्दुं मृत्युं जयति योगवित् ।
मरणं बिन्दुपातेन जीवितं बिन्दुधारणात् ॥
evaṃ tu rakṣayed binduṃ mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit /
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvitaṃ bindudhāraṇāt //
tu rakṣayed ] ca rakṣito DYŚ yogavit ] tattvataḥ DYŚ jīvitaṃ ] jīvanaṃ DYŚ
Cf. Amṛtasiddhi 3.87cdmaraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvanaṃ bindudhāraṇāt//
evaṃ tu rakṣayed binduṃ ] evaṃ saṃrakṣayed binduṃ HRĀ HYS, evaṃ bindau sthire jāte YBhD yogavit HRĀ HYS ] sarvathā YBhD jīvitaṃ HRĀ ] jīvanaṃ YBhD HYS
सुगन्धि योगिनो देहं जायते बिन्दुधारणात् ।
यावद्बिन्दुः स्थिरो देहे तावन्मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
sugandhi yogino dehaṃ jāyate bindudhāraṇāt /
yāvad binduḥ sthiro dehe tāvan mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
The omission of 3.84ab in the η group and δ3 is likely to be the result of haplography (bindudhāraṇāt is repeated).
The readings mṛtyubhayaṃ (α3, δ, ε, η, π) and kālabhayaṃ (α2, γ) are well attested by the main manuscript groups, but mṛtyubhayaṃ is in the important witnesses of the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
sugandhi yogino dehaṃ ] yogino ’ṅge sugandhaḥ syāt DYŚ jāyate ] satataṃ DYŚ sthiro ] sthito VM
sugandhi ] sugandhir HRĀ, sugandho HYS dehaṃ ] dehe HRĀ HYS mṛtyubhayaṃ ] kālabhayaṃ HYS
Cf. Haṭhatattvakaumudī 16.10 (attrib. granthāntara)calitaṃ tu svakaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākuñcya rakṣayet/
sugandho yogināṃ dehe jāyate bindudhāraṇād// iti//
मनायत्तं नृणां शुक्रं शुक्रायत्तं हि जीवितम् ।
तस्माछुक्रं मनश्चैव रक्षणीयं प्रयत्नतः ॥
manāyattaṃ nṛṇāṃ śukraṃ śukrāyattaṃ hi jīvitam /
tasmāchukraṃ manaś caiva rakṣaṇīyaṃ prayatnataḥ //
Both α2 and α3 indicate that manas instead of citta was the reading of the initial compound. Therefore, we have conjectured manāyattaṃ, assuming double sandhi from manas-āyattam.
manāyattaṃ ] cittāyattaṃ HRĀ YCM manaś caiva HRĀ ] ca śukraṃ ca YCM
ऋतुमत्या रजोऽप्येवं स्वीयं बिन्दुं च रक्षयेत् ।
मेढ्रेणाकर्षयेदूर्ध्वं सम्यगभ्यासयोगवान् ॥
ṛtumatyā rajo’py evaṃ svīyaṃ binduṃ ca rakṣayet /
meḍhreṇākarṣayed ūrdhvaṃ samyag abhyāsayogavān //
svīyaṃ ] rajo HRĀ, bijaṃ HYS yogavān ] yogavit HYS
अयं योगः पुण्यवतां धन्यानां तत्त्वशालिनाम् ।
निर्मत्सराणां सिध्येत न तु मत्सरशालिनाम् ॥
ayaṃ yogaḥ puṇyavatāṃ dhanyānāṃ tattvaśālinām /
nirmatsarāṇāṃ sidhyeta na tu matsaraśālinām //
matsara ] mātsarya DYŚ
dhanyānāṃ HRĀ ] dhīrāṇāṃ HYS śālinām HRĀ ] darśinām HYS
सहजोली चामरोली वज्रोल्या एव भेदतः ॥
sahajolī cāmarolī vajrolyā eva bhedataḥ //
These two pādas appear to stand apart and function as a heading introducing the practices of sahajolī and amarolī, which are described in the verses that follow. Some manuscript groups other than α and π insert separate headings for sahajolī and amarolī. However, since 3.87 introduces these practices, these additional headings are redundant and unlikely to be original.
vajrolir amaroliś ca sahajolis tridhā matā/
sahajolyamarolī ca vajrolyā bhedato bhavet/
sahajolī cāmarolī HRĀ ] sahajoliś cāmarolir HYS eva bhedataḥ HRĀ ] bheda eva te HYS
जलेषु भस्म निक्षिप्य दग्धगोमयसंभवम् ।
वज्रोलीमैथुनादूर्ध्वं स्त्रीपुंसोः स्वाङ्गलेपनम् ॥
jaleṣu bhasma nikṣipya dagdhagomayasaṃbhavam /
vajrolīmaithunād ūrdhvaṃ strīpuṃsoḥ svāṅgalepanam //
Some manuscripts, including α2 and α3 (missing in α1), omit 3.88ab. We have included it because in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, the source of this verse, 3.88ab specifies the substance mentioned in 3.88cd that
the man and woman are supposed to rub into their bodies after sexual intercourse.
In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s teaching on sahajolī (163 and 181–183) a rag is used to wipe up the residue of a mixture of semen and
sweat that has been rubbed into the body, and then soaked in a paste of water and
ash before being rubbed over the body.
The awkward plural jaleṣu in 3.88a was probably the result of Svātmārāma removing the pronoun from the compound
tajjale in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s verse because it has no referent in the Haṭhapradīpikā’s compilation.
jaleṣu bhasma nikṣipya ] tajjale bhasma saṃkṣipya DYŚ, tajjale bhasmasāt kṣipya DYŚv.l., tajjale bhasma saddravyaṃ DYŚv.l. puṃsoḥ svāṅga ] puṃsor aṅga DYŚ
jaleṣu bhasma ] jale subhasma HRĀ HYS puṃsoḥ svāṅga HYS ] puṃsoś cāṅga HRĀ
आसीनयोः सुखेनैव मुक्तव्यापारयोः क्षणम् ।
सहजोलीरियं प्रोक्ता श्रद्धेया योगिभिः सदा ॥
āsīnayoḥ sukhenaiva muktavyāpārayoḥ kṣaṇam /
sahajolīr iyaṃ proktā śraddheyā yogibhiḥ sadā //
We have understood the repha in sahajolīr iyam as a hiatus bridge. Elsewhere the nominative of this name is found only as sahajolī or sahajoliḥ.
sahajolīr iyaṃ proktā ] sahajolī ca saṃproktā DYŚ
kṣaṇam HRĀ ] kṣaṇāt HYS sahajolīr iyaṃ ] sahajolir iyaṃ HRĀ HYS śraddheyā HYS ] kartavyā HRĀ
अयं शुभकरो योगो भोगे भुक्तेऽपि मुक्तिदः ॥
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogo bhoge bhukte’pi muktidaḥ //
This line is absent in α2, α3 and γ1 (missing in α1). It may have been adapted from Dattātreyayogaśāstra 179cd (tasmād ayaṃ vakṣyamāṇo bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ). Cf. 3.93cd.
yogo ] yogī HYS bhoge bhukte ] bhogayukto HYS
पित्तोल्बणत्वात्प्रथमां च धारां
विहाय निःसारतयान्त्यधाराम् ।
निषेव्यते शीतलमध्यधारा
कापालिकैः खण्डमतैरमर्याः ॥*
pittolbaṇatvāt prathamāṃ ca dhārāṃ
vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārām /
niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārā
kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamatair amaryāḥ //*
We understand ‘Kāpālikas of the Khaṇḍa school’ (kāpālikair khaṇḍamataiḥ) to be referring to followers of the Khaṇḍakāpālika who is mentioned in the list of siddhas given at 1.5–9, pace Marcinkowska-Rosół and Sellmer (2021: 105–108) who understand khaṇḍamataiḥ to mean ‘whose doctrine is defective’.
pittolbaṇatvāt HRĀv.l.HTK HYS ] vihāya nityāṃ HRĀ prathamāṃ ca dhārāṃ HRĀ HTK ] prathamāmbudhārāṃ HYS vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārām HRĀ HTK ] niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārā HYS niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārā HTK ] niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārāṃ HRĀ, vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārāṃ HYS kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamatair amaryāḥ ] kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamatair anarghyām HRĀ, kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamate ’marolī HTK, kāpālike khaṇḍamate ’marolī HYS
अमरीं यः पिबेन्नित्यं नस्यं कुर्वन्दिने दिने ।
वज्रोलीं चाभ्यसेदेवममरोलीति कथ्यते ॥*
amarīṃ yaḥ piben nityaṃ nasyaṃ kurvan dine dine /
vajrolīṃ cābhyased evam amarolīti kathyate //*
abhyased evam ] abhyasec ceyam DYŚ (em.), abhyasec chrayam DYŚv.l., abhyaset yeyam DYŚv.l., abhyasec caivam DYŚv.l.
kuryād HRĀ ] kurvan HYS abhyased evam ] abhyasen nityam HRĀ, abhyaset samyag HYS
पुंसो बिन्दुं समाकृष्य सम्यगभ्यासपाटवात् ।
यदि नारी रजो रक्षेद्वज्रोल्या सा हि योगिनी ॥
puṃso binduṃ samākṛṣya samyagabhyāsapāṭavāt /
yadi nārī rajo rakṣed vajrolyā sā hi yoginī //
In the first verse quarter, the gerund samākṛṣya (γ) has been adopted, instead of the better-attested samākuñcya, as it yields a more appropriate sense and is used similarly to ākṛṣya in 3.82.
Verses 3.91*1–3 have been greyscaled because they are absent in α3 (and missing in α1). They appear to have been borrowed from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s section on vajrolī, perhaps with the intention of supplementing 3.92–93 by providing additional details
on how a woman practises vajrolī. The verses are present in α2 after verse 3.86ab where the verse quarter vajrolyā saha yoginī occurs twice (also at 3.92b), which suggests that the version of vajrolī in α2 has been subject to further revision. The fact that 3.91*1–3 are in all groups except
αindicates that they were added early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā.
sā hi ] sā ’pi HYS
तस्याः किंचिद्रजो नाशं न गच्छति न संशयः ।
तस्याः शरीरे नादस्तु बिन्दुतामेव गच्छति ॥
tasyāḥ kiṃcid rajo nāśaṃ na gacchati na saṃśayaḥ /
tasyāḥ śarīre nādas tu bindutām eva gacchati //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.91*1. On nāda and bindu see the note to 3.52.
tasyāḥ kiñ cid ] tasyās tadā DYŚ
nādas tu HRĀ ] nādaś ca HYS
स बिन्दुस्तद्रजश्चैव एकीभूय स्वदेहजौ ।
वज्रोल्याभ्यासयोगेन सर्वसिद्धिं प्रकुर्वतः ॥
sa bindus tad rajaś caiva ekībhūya svadehajau /
vajrolyābhyāsayogena sarvasiddhiṃ prakurvataḥ //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.91*1.
sarvasiddhiṃ prakurvataḥ ] sarvasiddhiḥ prajāyate DYŚ
svadehajau HRĀ ] svadehagau HYS sarvasiddhiṃ prakurvataḥ ] yogasiddhiḥ kare sthitā HRĀ, sarvasiddhiṃ prayacchataḥ HYS
रक्षेदाकुञ्चनेनोर्ध्वं या रजः सा हि योगिनी ।
अतीतानागतं वेत्ति खेचरी च भवेद्ध्रुवम् ॥
rakṣed ākuñcanenordhvaṃ yā rajaḥ sā hi yoginī /
atītānāgataṃ vetti khecarī ca bhaved dhruvam //
ca ] vā DYŚ
ākuñcanenordhvaṃ ] ākuñcanād ūrdhvaṃ HYS atītānāgatajñānaṃ khecarī ] atītānāgataṃ vetti khecarī HYS
देहसिद्धिं च लभते वज्रोल्यभ्यासयोगतः ।
अयं शुभकरो योगो भोगे भुक्तेऽपि मुक्तिदः ॥
dehasiddhiṃ ca labhate vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ /
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogo bhoge bhukte’pi muktidaḥ //
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogo ] tasmād ayaṃ vakṣyamāṇo DYŚ bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ DYŚ (conj.) ] bhoge bhukte tv abhuktidaḥ DYŚv.l., bhogo yogaś ca muktidaḥ DYŚv.l.
sarveṣām eva yogānām ayaṃ yogaḥ śubhaṅkaraḥ/
tasmād ayaṃ variṣṭho’sau bhuktimuktiphalapradaḥ//
śubhakaro ] puṇyakaro HYS
तस्मात्पुण्यवतामेव अयं योगः प्रसिध्यति ॥*
tasmāt puṇyavatām eva ayaṃ yogaḥ prasidhyati //*
कुटिलाङ्गी कुण्डलिनी भुजङ्गी शक्तिरीश्वरी ।
अकुण्डल्य्रुन्धती चेति शब्दाः पर्यायवाचकाः ॥
kuṭilāṅgī kuṇḍalinī bhujaṅgī śaktir īśvarī /
kuṇḍalyarundhatī ceti śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ //
The α3 manuscript has a significantly shorter and more coherent version of śakticālana. It omits six introductory verses, of which three are from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa or one of its longer recensions and three have no known source, including one that contains a list of synonyms for kuṇḍalinī. This section is missing in α1 (3.83–3.96) and α2 adds these verses (except 3.93*6) after 3.96, which suggests that they have been inserted from elsewhere. Generally speaking, it appears that some redactors have taken the section on śakticālana in the Haṭhapradīpikā as an opportunity to add material on kuṇḍalinī, in particular her location, shape, and soteriological importance.
phaṇī kuṇḍalinī nāgī cakrī vakrī sarasvatī/
lalanā rasanā kṣatrī lalāṭī śaktiḥ śaṃkhinī//
rajvī bhujaṅgī śeṣā ca kuṇḍalī sarpiṇī maṇiḥ/
ādhāraśaktiḥ kuṭilā karālī prāṇavāhinī//
aṣṭavakrā ṣaḍādhārā vyāpinī kalanādharā/
kurīty evaṃ ca vikhyātāḥ śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ//
kuṭilāṅgī YBhD ] kuṇḍalāṅgī YCM kuṇḍaly arundhatī YBhD ] kuṭilārundhatī YCM ceti ] devī YCM YBhD
उद्घाटयेत्कपाटं तु यथा कुञ्चिकया हठात् ।
कुण्डलिन्या तथा योगी मोक्षद्वारं विभेदयेत् ॥
udghāṭayet kapāṭaṃ tu yathā kuñcikayā haṭhāt /
kuṇḍalinyā tathā yogī mokṣadvāraṃ vibhedayet //
येन मार्गेण गन्तव्यं ब्रह्मस्थानं निरामयम् ।
मुखेनाच्छाद्य तद्द्वारं प्रसुप्ता परमेश्वरी ॥
yena mārgeṇa gantavyaṃ brahmasthānaṃ nirāmayam /
mukhenācchādya taddvāraṃ prasuptā parameśvarī //
mārgeṇa HSC ] dvāreṇa YCM
कन्दोर्ध्वं कुण्डली शक्तिः सुप्ता मोक्षाय योगिनाम् ।
बन्धनाय च मूढानां यस्तां वेत्ति स योगवित् ॥
kandordhvaṃ kuṇḍalī śaktiḥ suptā mokṣāya yoginām /
bandhanāya ca mūḍhānāṃ yas tāṃ vetti sa yogavit //
suptā mokṣāya yoginām VM ] aṣṭadhā kuṃḍalīkṛtā VMv.l., aṣṭadhā kuṇḍalākṛtiḥ VMv.l., śubhamokṣāpradāyinī VMv.l., śubhā mokṣapradāyinī VMv.l., aṣṭadhā kuṭilīkṛtā VMv.l.
kandordhvaṃ HSC ] kandordhve YCM śaktiḥ suptā HSC ] śaktir buddhā YCM
अम्भोधिशैलद्वीपानामाधारः शेषकुण्डली ।
अशेषयोगतन्त्राणामाधारः कुण्डली तथा ॥
ambhodhiśailadvīpānām ādhāraḥ śeṣakuṇḍalī /
aśeṣayogatantrāṇām ādhāraḥ kuṇḍalī tathā //
This verse is similar to 3.1.
कुण्डली कुटिलाकारा सर्पवत्परिकीर्तिता ।
सा शक्तिश्चालिता येन स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥*
kuṇḍalī kuṭilākārā sarpavat parikīrtitā /
sā śaktiś cālitā yena sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //*
गङ्गायमुनयोर्मध्ये बालरण्डा तपस्विनी ।
बलात्कारेण गृह्णीयात् तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye bālaraṇḍā tapasvinī /
balātkāreṇa gṛhṇīyāt tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //
The referent of bālaraṇḍā tapasvinī here is unclear. In some manuscripts this verse is followed by one (3.94*1) in which bālaraṇḍā is identified as sarasvatī, which in the context of śakticālana could refer to the tongue. She could also be Kuṇḍalinī, who in 3.93*5 is located at the navel, which is said to be the location of Viṣṇu (e.g. Dhyānabindūpaniṣat 28–30). In his commentary on this verse in the Bodhasāra (1906: 137), Divākara says that the seizing of Kuṇḍalinī itself is the highest state of Viṣṇu ( ... bālaraṇḍāṃ ... gṛhṇīyād vaśīkuryāt tat tasyā vaśīkaraṇam eva viṣṇor vyāpanalakṣanasya paramātmanaḥ paramaṃ kevalaṃ ... padaṃ svarūpaṃ jñeyam).
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye vahaty eṣā sarasvatī/
tāsāṃ tu saṃgame snātvā dhanyo yāti parāṃ gatim//
इडा भगवती गङ्गा पिङ्गला यमुना नदी ।
इडापिङ्गलयोर्मध्ये बालरण्डा सरस्वती ॥*
iḍā bhagavatī gaṅgā piṅgalā yamunā nadī /
iḍāpiṅgalayor madhye bālaraṇḍā sarasvatī //*
Verse 3.94*1, which has no known source, simply identifies the technical terms in 3.94, namely, gaṅgā, yamunā and bālaraṇḍā as iḍā, piṅgalā and sarasvatī. The verse appears to be missing in α3, and a different version of it occurs in α2. The relevant folio is missing in α1. Nonetheless, the verse is absent in the most reliable manuscripts of the γ, δ, ε, and π groups, and so it is likely that it came into the text as a marginal note early in the transmission.
iḍā bhagavatī gaṅgā piṅgalā yamunā nadī/
tayor madhye tṛtīyā tu tat prayāgam anusmaret//
पुच्छं प्रगृह्य भुजगीं सुप्तामुद्बोधयेदभीः ।
निद्रां विहाय सा ऋज्वी ऊर्ध्वमुत्तिष्ठते हठात् ॥
pucchaṃ pragṛhya bhujagīṃ suptām udbodhayed abhīḥ /
nidrāṃ vihāya sā ṛjvī ūrdhvam uttiṣṭhate haṭhāt //
pucchaṃ YCM ] pucche HRĀ abhīḥ HRĀ ] abhi YCM
प्रविस्तृतास्यैव फणावती सा
प्रातश्च सायं प्रहरार्धमात्रम् ।
प्रपूर्य सूर्यात्परिधानयुक्त्या
प्रगृह्य तिर्यक्परिचालनीया ॥
pravistṛtāsyaiva phaṇāvatī sā
prātaś ca sāyaṃ praharārdhamātram /
prapūrya sūryāt paridhānayuktyā
pragṛhya tiryak paricālanīyā //
Verses 3.95*1–2 are absent in α2 and α3. They introduce the idea of awakening kụṇḍalinī by moving the tongue with a cloth, which is a practice called sarasvatīcālana in the Gorakṣaśataka (16–25). These verses do not have a known source and are somewhat obscure unless one is aware of the more coherent explanation of this practice in the Gorakṣaśataka. In his Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (see testimonia), Sundaradeva makes sense of this verse by equating the tongue with Kuṇḍalinī. This enables him to understand the reference to the cloth (paridhāna) as the technique of wrapping the tongue in a cloth and milking it (i.e. sarasvatīcālana in the Gorakṣaśataka). This interpretation also makes sense of the next verse (3.95*2), which describes the cloth.
pravistṛtāsyaiva phaṇāvatī sā ] paristhitā caiva phaṇāvatī sā YCM, vajrāsanasthā bhujagī pragṛhya YLĀ sūryāt YLĀ ] sauryā YCM paridhānayuktyā ] paridhānamuktā YCM, paridhānayuktā YLĀ pragṛhya tiryak paricālanīyā ] pragṛhya niryāti vicālitā sā YCM, pāyuṃ samākuṃcya ca cālanīyā YLĀ
Cf. Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā f. 110v–111r (attrib. HP)tadvidhim āha/
paristhitā caiva phaṇāvatī sā
prātaś ca sāyaṃ praharārdhamātraṃ/
prapūrya sūryāt paridhānayuktā
pragṛhya tīrthāt paricālanīyā//
paridhānayukteti dvādaśāṅgulapramitasitasūkṣmacaturaṅgulavisṛtaśuddhavastrakhaṇḍena dṛḍhaṃ veṣṭatā sā prasiddhā phaṇāvatī suṣumṇātmakā arundhatī jihvaiva kuṇḍalinī// uktaṃ ca//
arundhatī bhavej jihvā dhruvo nāsāgramaṇḍalam iti//
tāṃ jihvāṃ laṃbikāyogenordhvaṃ tālvantarbhrūmadhyadeśe vihitāṃ tatas tīrthād bhrūmadhyāt pragṛhya adhaḥ kṛtvā tasyā gurūpadiṣṭavartmanā cālanaṃ vidheyam iti saṃketaḥ/ cālanaṃ tu khecarī mudrā sādhanavad vidheyaṃ/ tīrthaṃ bhrūmadhyaḥ/
वितस्तिप्रमितं दैर्घ्यं विस्तारं चतुरङ्गुलम् ।
मृदुलं धवलं प्रोक्तं वेष्टनाम्बरलक्षणम् ॥*
vitastipramitaṃ dairghyaṃ vistāraṃ caturaṅgulam /
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭanāmbaralakṣaṇam //*
This verse was likely added to explain ‘by the method of the cloth’ (paridhānayuktyā) in the previous verse. For information on sources and testimonia, see 3.32*5.
वज्रासनस्थितो योगी चालयित्वा तु कुण्डलीम् ।
कुर्यादनन्तरं भस्त्रीं कुण्डलीमाशु बोधयेत् ॥
vajrāsanasthito yogī cālayitvā tu kuṇḍalīm /
kuryād anantaraṃ bhastrīṃ kuṇḍalīm āśu bodhayet //
Bhastrī or bhastrikā kumbhaka is taught at 2.60–68.The reference to vajrāsana may be pointing to the practice of uḍḍiyāṇa, which was described earlier in the chapter and is supposed to awaken Kuṇḍalinī. The contraction of the sun mentioned in the next verse supports this.
kuryād YB ] sūryād YCM HSC
भानोराकुञ्चनं कुर्यात् कुण्डलीं चालयेत्ततः ।
मृत्युवक्त्रगतस्यापि तस्य मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
bhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṇḍalīṃ cālayet tataḥ /
mṛtyuvaktragatasyāpi tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
In Jyotsnā 3.116, Brahmānanda understands bhānor ākuñcanaṃ as a contraction of the navel. In contrast, Sundaradeva, in his Haṭhasaṃketacandrikā (see testimonia), interprets it as drawing prāṇa through the sun channel (sūryanāḍyākarṣaṇa), thereby intensifying the bodily fire.
vaktra YCM ] vartma YB
Cf. Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā f. 111rbhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṃḍalīṃ cālayet svataḥ/
mṛtyuvakragatasyāpi tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ//
asyārthaḥ sūryanāḍyākarṣaṇena vahneḥ prācuryaṃ tasmāj jvalanatejasā apānavāyvākarṣaṇena vā kuṇḍalyābodho bhavati/ tasya śakticālanakṛtābhyāsasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kuta iti//
नासादक्षिणमार्गवाहिपवनात्प्राणेऽतिदीर्घीकृते
चन्द्राम्भःपरिपूरितामृततनुः प्राग्घण्टिकायास्तथा ।
सिञ्चन्कालविशालवह्निवशगान्भ्रूरन्ध्रनाडीगणान्
तत्कायं कुरुते पुनर्नवतरं जीर्णद्रुमस्कन्धवत् ॥
nāsādakṣiṇamārgavāhipavanāt prāṇe’tidīrghīkṛte
candrāmbhaḥparipūritāmṛtatanuḥ prāg ghaṇṭikāyās tathā /
siñcan kālaviśālavahnivaśagān bhrūrandhranāḍīgaṇān
tat kāyaṃ kurute punar navataraṃ jīrṇadrumaskandhavat //
Verse 3.97*1 is absent in the α group. It is very close to a verse in the Amaraughaśāsana, which is likely to be its source, although the date of the Amaraughaśāsana is yet to be firmly established. This verse’s import of rejuvenating the body by flooding it with nectar is not directly connected with those proceeding it. Its meaning is not clear in the published edtion of the Amaraughaśāsana and we are not confident of the readings adopted in our edition nor the meaning of the verse.
dakṣiṇa ] paścima AŚ vāhi ] vāha AŚ prāṇo ] prāṇe AŚ candrābhaḥparipūritāmṛtatanuḥ ] candrāmbupratisāraṇāṃ sukṛtinaḥ AŚ kāyās tathaḥ ] kāyāḥ pathaḥ AŚ vaśagān bhrūrandhra ] vaśagaṃ bhūtvā sa AŚ nāḍīgaṇān ] nāḍīśataṃ AŚ, nāḍīgataṃ AŚv.l., nāḍīgaṇaṃ AŚv.l. tat kāyaṃ ] tat kāryaṃ AŚ
pavanāt ] pavano YCM prāṇo ] ghrāṇe YCM kṛte ] kṛtaḥ YCM kāyās tathaḥ ] kāyās tataḥ YCM siñcan ] bhindan YCM tat kāyaṃ ] taṃ kāyaṃ YCM
कुण्डलीं चालयित्वा तु कुर्याद्भस्त्रीं विशेषतः ।
एवमभ्यसतो नित्यं यमिनः शङ्कते यमः ॥
kuṇḍalīṃ cālayitvā tu kuryād bhastrīṃ viśeṣataḥ /
evam abhyasato nityaṃ yaminaḥ śaṅkate yamaḥ //
Verses 3.97*2–3 are absent in the α group and have no known source. They elaborate
further on the instruction to practise bhastrī kumbhaka in 3.96. The practice of other kumbhakas for moving Kuṇḍalinī is mentioned in 3.97*3.
The reading abhyāsato in 3.97*2c, which is attested by manuscripts of the γ group and the testimonia, is
possible but seems to be a corruption of the participle, abhyasato.
bhastrīṃ HSC ] bhastrāṃ YCM śaṅkate yamaḥ YCM ] śaṃphate manaḥ HSC
तदाभ्यसेत्सूर्यभेदमुज्जायीं चापि शीतलीम् ।
एवमभ्यासयुक्तस्य शमनो यमिनः कुतः ॥
tadābhyaset sūryabhedam ujjāyīṃ cāpi śītalīm /
evam abhyāsayuktasya śamano yaminaḥ kutaḥ //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.97*2.
cāpi YCM ] vāpi HSC śamano ] yamas tu YCM HSC
मुहूर्तद्वयपर्यन्तं निर्भयं चालनादसौ ।
ऊर्ध्वमाकृष्यते किंचित् सुषुम्णा कुण्डलीगता ॥
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbhayaṃ cālanād asau /
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃcit suṣumṇā kuṇḍalīgatā //
As noted in the introduction (p. 28), Svātmārāma appears not to have understood the practice of śakticālana in the same way as his primary source text for its description, the Gorakṣaśataka, in which a cloth is wrapped around the tongue so that it can be repeatedly pulled, thereby lifting up the base of the central channel. He does not include the Gorakṣaśataka verses which mention the tongue or the cloth (but some later recensions of the Haṭhapradīpikā do introduce them). Verses 98 and 99 suggest that he understood the practice to involve repeated contraction of the region of the sun at the lower end of the central channel. The result is the same, namely that Kuṇḍalinī is awakened and uncoils herself, thereby allowing Prāṇa to enter the central channel.
nirbhayaṃ ] nirbhayaś GŚ, nirbharaś GŚv.l., nirbhayāc GŚv.l. cālanād asau ] cālayed imām GŚ ākṛṣyate GŚ ] ākarṣayet GŚv.l. suṣumṇā kuṇḍalīgatā GŚ] suṣumnāṃ kuṇḍalīgatāṃ GŚv.l., suṣumnā kuṇḍalīyutā GŚv.l.
Cf. Śivasamhitā 4.109gurūpadeśavidhinā tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ/
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ vidhinā śakticālanam//
nirbhayaṃ ] nirbhītaś HRĀ, nirbhayaś YLĀ, nirbharaṃ YCM cālanād asau ] cālayed asau HRĀ, cālayed imām YLĀ, dhi vai YCM ākṛṣyate HRĀ ] ākṛṣya tau HRĀv.l. suṣumṇāṃ kuṇḍalī gatā HRĀv.l. ] suṣumṇāṃ kuṇḍalīgatām HRĀ, suṣumnā kuṇḍalīyutā YLĀ
तेन कुण्डलिनी तस्याः सुषुम्णायाः समुद्धृता ।
जहाति तस्मात्प्राणोऽयं सुषुम्णां व्रजति स्वतः ॥
tena kuṇḍalinī tasyāḥ suṣumṇāyāḥ samuddhṛtā /
jahāti tasmāt prāṇo’yaṃ suṣumṇāṃ vrajati svataḥ //
suṣumṇāyāḥ samuddhṛtā ] suṣumnāyā mukhaṃ dhruvam GŚ
suṣumṇāyāḥ samuddhṛtā ] suṣumṇāyā mukhaṃ dhruvam HTK
तस्मात्संचालयेन्नित्यं शब्दगर्भामरुन्धतीम् ।
तस्याः संचालनेनैव योगी रोगैः प्रमुच्यते ॥
tasmāt saṃcālayen nityaṃ śabdagarbhām arundhatīm /
tasyāḥ saṃcālanenaiva yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate //
In the Gorakṣaśataka (26cd–27ab), the source text, this verse occurs in a passage on sarasvatīcālana, which is the practice of moving the tongue (i.e. sarasvatī) by wrapping a cloth around it and tugging it in order to raise the lower end of the Suṣumṇā. In the Gorakṣaśataka, Sarasvatī is said to be another name for Arundhatī and, since the tongue is instrumental for speech and sarasvatī is the name of a Goddess identified with speech (vāc), the Gorakṣaśataka’s reading of śabdagarbhāṃ sarasvatīm makes good sense. However, it seems that Svātmārāma has changed 3.100b to read śabdagarbhām arundhatīm and has understood arundhatī as Kuṇḍalinī. This is affirmed in longer versions of the Haṭhapradīpikā (3.93*2) that contain a verse on synonyms of Kuṇḍalinī, which include Arundhatī. We are yet to find Arundhatī equated with Kuṇḍalinī in a text composed before the Haṭhapradīpikā but this identification is found in subsequent compendiums and commentaries (e.g. Yogacintāmaṇi f. 78v, Yuktabhavadeva 7.300, Jyotsnā 104, 119, Yogaprakāśikā 5.166).
garbhām arundhatīm ] garbhāṃ sarasvatīm GŚ tasyāḥ ] yasyāḥ GŚ
garbhām arundhatīm HSC ] garbhāṃ sarasvatī YLĀ tasyāḥ ] asyāḥ YLĀ, yasyāḥ HSC cālanenaiva ] cālanenaivaṃ YLĀ, cālanenāśu HSC yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate HSC ] rogā naśyaṃti niścitaṃ YLĀ
Cf. Haṭharatnāvalī 2.122sūryeṇa pūrayed vāyuṃ sarasvatyās tu cālayet/
śabdagarbhācālanena yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate//
येन संचालिता शक्तिः स योगी सिद्धिभाजनम् ।
किमत्र बहुनोक्तेन कालं जयति लीलया ॥
yena saṃcālitā śaktiḥ sa yogī siddhibhājanam /
kim atra bahunoktena kālaṃ jayati līlayā //
sa yogī siddhibhājanam HSC ] sa yogī siddhibhājanaḥ HRĀ, śabdagarbhā tv aruṃdhatī YLĀ kālaṃ jayati līlayā HSC ] mṛtyuṃ jayati līlayā HRĀ, tasya kālabhayaṃ na hi YLĀ
ब्रह्मचर्यव्रतस्यैव नित्यं हितमिताशिनः ।
मण्डलाद्दृश्यते सिद्धिः कुण्डल्यभ्यासयोगिनः ॥
brahmacaryavratasyaiva nityaṃ hitamitāśinaḥ /
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhiḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ //
Verse 3.101*1 has been omitted by α1 and α3. It is in α2 at the end of a block of verses (3.93*2–5, 93*7) that is excluded by α3. This block appears after 3.96 and appears to have been inserted from elsewhere.
3.101*1 has no known source and appears to have been added as a general laudatory
statement on the benefits of practising with Kuṇḍalinī.
The meaning of maṇḍalād in 3.101*1c is not clear. Brahmānanda understands it as a period of time (i.e. forty
days) but we are yet to find this attested elsewhere.
vratasyaiva ] ratasyaiva YCM, jatasyaiva HSC hitamitāśinaḥ YCM ] hitamitāṃ śanaiḥ HSC
Cf. Yogalakṣaṇāvalī (f. 31r) (attrib. Gorakṣaśataka)brahmacaryavratasyaiva kuṃḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ//
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhir iti yogavido viduḥ//
अभ्यासनिःसृतां चान्द्रीं विभूत्या सह मिश्रयेत् ।
तद्धारणं तूत्तमाङ्गे दिव्यदृष्टिप्रदायकम् ॥*
abhyāsaniḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet /
taddhāraṇaṃ tūttamāṅge divyadṛṣṭipradāyakam //*
In the witnesses of the earliest reconstructable recensions of the Haṭhapradīpikā, including the α manuscripts, this verse occurs in the section on śakticālana. This is also the case in the Yogalakṣaṇāvalī, Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā and the longer recensions of the Haṭhapradīpikā with six and ten chapters. However, in the context of śakticālana, the referent of cāndrī is unclear. It appears to be understood as some sort of lunar fluid. In his Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (see the testimonia), Sundaradeva defines it as a flow of perspiration (gharmadhārā) that arises from exertion in the practice and is emitted from the moon in forehead (lalāṭacandra). In the Yogaprakāśikā, Bālakṛṣṇa glosses it simply as nectar (sudhā) (5.182). In the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 41) and Jyotsnā (3.98), this verse is in the section on amarolī, which provides a clear referent of cāndrī as the cool middle flow of urine (see 3.96 [3.90 in our edition]).
tūttamāṅge ] cottamāṃge YLĀ
Cf. Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā f. 112v (attrib. HP)abhyāsaniḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet/
taddhāraṇaṃ tūttamāṃge divyadṛṣṭipradāyakaṃ// 19
cāndrīṃ lalāṭacandrān niḥsṛtāṃ abhyāse śramajātāṃ gharmadhārāṃ tāṃ vibhūtyā vimiśrayet/ tām uttamāṃge śirasi dhārayed asau sādhakasya divyadṛṣṭipradā bhravatīty arthaḥ/
abhyāsān niḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet/
dhārayed uttamāṅgeṣu divyadṛṣṭiḥ prajāyate//
द्विसप्ततिसहस्राणां नाडीनां मलशोधने ।
कुतः प्रक्षालनोपायः कुण्डल्यभ्यसनादृते ॥
dvisaptatisahasrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhane /
kutaḥ prakṣālanopāyaḥ kuṇḍalyabhyasanād ṛte //
This verse is omitted by the α group. Its claim is not entirely consistent with the role of the ṣaṭkarma, which are cleansing techniques that do not require Kuṇḍalinī. It was likely added to the original text as a further laudatory statement on the practice of Kuṇḍalinī.
malaśodhane ] malaśodhanam YCM, api śodhanaṃ YLĀ kutaḥ prakṣālanopāyaḥ YCM ] asatkalpaṃ smṛtaṃ siddhaiḥ YLĀ abhyasanād ṛte YLĀ ] abhyāsato vinā YCM
इति मुद्रा दश प्रोक्ता आदिनाथेन शम्भुना ।
एकैका तासु यमिनां महासिद्धिप्रदायिनी ॥*
iti mudrā daśa proktā ādināthena śambhunā /
ekaikā tāsu yamināṃ mahāsiddhipradāyinī //*
Manuscripts of the ε, ζ, η, and π groups have a different reading for the second line; ‘each mudrā is capable of bringing about all powers’ (karaṇe sarvasiddhīnāṃ ekaikāpi kṣamaiva sā).
tāsu yamināṃ YCM ] mukhyā syān HRĀ
राजयोगं विना पृथ्वी राजयोगं विना निशा ।
राजयोगं विना मुद्रा विचित्रापि न राजते ॥
rājayogaṃ vinā pṛthvī rājayogaṃ vinā niśā /
rājayogaṃ vinā mudrā vicitrāpi na rājate //
The Yogaprakāśikā (5.186) interprets the similes in this verse as we have translated them, ‘Just as without a king [and] moon, the earth and night do not shine...’ (yathā mahīpālaṃ candramasaṃ vinā pṛthvīniśe na rājete...). However, in Jyotsnā 3.126, Brahmānanda interprets the earth (pṛthvī) as āsana because both are connected by the quality of steadiness (sthairyaguṇayogāt), and the night (niśā) as breath retention (kumbhaka) because both are characterised by the absence of movement of people and wind (prāṇasañcārābhāvalakṣaṇaḥ). Brahmānanda’s interpretation seems somewhat far-fetched. The last line could also be understood in a non-yogic meaning: “Without a king a coin (or a seal) does not shine”, probably referring to coins onto which the head of the king were stamped. Strangely, this śleṣa does not have any poetical function here.
मारुतस्य विधिं सर्वं मनोयुक्तं समभ्यसेत् ।
इतरत्र न कर्तव्या मनोवृत्तिर्मनीषिणा ॥
mārutasya vidhiṃ sarvaṃ manoyuktaṃ samabhyaset /
itaratra na kartavyā manovṛttir manīṣiṇā //
mārutasya vidhiṃ sarvaṃ ] mārutābhyasanaṃ kiṃ cin HSC samabhyaset ] samācaret HSC
खिलापि मध्यमा नाडी दृढाभ्यासेन योगिनाम् ।
आसनप्राणसंयाममुद्राभिः सरला भवेत् ॥
khilāpi madhyamā nāḍī dṛḍhābhyāsena yoginām /
āsanaprāṇasaṃyāmamudrābhiḥ saralā bhavet //
The reading of khilāpi in the first verse quarter is unusual but well attested by the witnesses including the α group of manuscripts. In the Abhidhānacintāmaṇi (940), khila is defined as something uncultivated such as field (kṣetrādyaprahataṃ khilam) or, as the Amarapadavivṛti (2.1.5) puts it, ‘not marked by a plough’ (lāṅgalena na likhitam iti khilam). In the context of Haṭhapradīpikā 3.106, qualifying suṣumṇā with khila implies that the central channel has yet to be cultivated (i.e. traversed).
khilāpi ] iyaṃ tu USS
उपासने विनिद्राणां राजयोगसमुद्रवत् ।
रुद्राणी चापरा मुद्रा भद्रां सिद्धिं प्रयच्छति ॥
upāsane vinidrāṇāṃ rājayogasamudravat /
rudrāṇī cāparā mudrā bhadrāṃ siddhiṃ prayacchati //
We understand rudrāṇī mudrā to be a synonym of śāmbhavī mudrā, which is taught in the next chapter.
उपदेशं हि मुद्राणां यो धत्ते सांप्रदायिकम् ।
स एवास्तु गुरुः स्वामी साक्षादीश्वर एव सः ॥
upadeśaṃ hi mudrāṇāṃ yo dhatte sāṃpradāyikam /
sa evāstu guruḥ svāmī sākṣādīśvara eva saḥ //
Verses 3.107*1–2 have no known source and are absent in the α group. It is likely both were added to the original text as further praise of those practising the haṭhayogic mudrās.
evāstu guruḥ ] eva śrīguruḥ USS
तस्य वाक्यपरो मुद्रां योऽभ्यस्यति समाहितः ।
अणिमादिगुणैः सोऽयं जायते कालवञ्चकः ॥
tasya vākyaparo mudrāṃ yo’bhyasyati samāhitaḥ /
aṇimādiguṇaiḥ so’yaṃ jāyate kālavañcakaḥ //
No version of this verse is entirely satisfactory. See the note on 3.107*1 for why it is in greyscale.
नमः शिवाय गुरवे नादबिन्दुकलात्मने ।
निरञ्जनपदं याति नित्यं यत्रपरायणः ॥
namaḥ śivāya gurave nādabindukalātmane /
nirañjanapadaṃ yāti nityaṃ yatraparāyaṇaḥ //
The greyscale verses at the beginning of chapter four are found in all collated manuscripts
except those of the α group. These verses appear to have been added at an early stage
in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā in order to create a new opening for this chapter. The revised beginning opens with
a maṅgala verse of the kind typically found at the start of a text. The second verse, which
is from the Gorakṣaśataka, introduces the topic of samādhi. In this expanded version, two verses listing the synonyms of rājayoga then follow. In the α group, however, these verses are placed at 4.32–33, and some
manuscripts, such as π2, place them at both locations. Although the remaining additional verses relate to
various themes within chapter four, when they are read together they constitute a
a loosely organised collection on samādhi, rājayoga, the importance of the guru, the dissolution of the breath, Suṣumṇā, and related
topics.
In contrast to this revised opening, the α group begins with a cohesive discusson
on absorption (4.1–3) that transitions to the gaze (4.4) and a brief discussion of
śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās (4.5–4.8). The main topic of the chapter, which is meditating on the internal sound
(nādānusandhāna), begins at 4.12 in the α group (whereas in other groups it begins after fifty or
so verses). The hiasis on nādānusandhāna in the fourth chapter of the α group is consistent with the statement in verse 1.56
that nādānusandhāna is the fourth component of Haṭhayoga.
Its likely that the term nirañjanapada was understood here as samādhi because nirañjana is included in a list of synonyms of samādhi later in this chapter (4.32 = X4.3).
The triad nāda, bindu and kalā occurs in earlier works, in particular Śaiva Tantras, where it appears in contexts
of enunciating mantras (mantroccāra, e.g. Kubjikāmatatantra 7.65, Jñānārṇavatantra 2.4, Īśānaśivagurudevapaddhati 18–110, etc.) and sometimes qualifies deities (e.g. Parākhyatantra 5.156ab) and gurus (e.g. Gurugītā 64). The context can change the meaning of these terms, so we have chosen not to
translate them. For a discussion of their various meanings, see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol. 2: 68–73; vol. 3, 277–279.
nityaṃ yatra ] yatra yogī HV
अथेदानीं प्रवक्ष्यामि समाधिक्रममुत्तमम् ।
मृत्युघ्नं तु सुखोपायं ब्रह्मानन्दकरं परम् ॥
athedānīṃ pravakṣyāmi samādhikramam uttamam /
mṛtyughnaṃ tu sukhopāyaṃ brahmānandakaraṃ param //
sukhopāyaṃ ] sukhopāyair GŚ param ] sadā GŚ
सलिले सैन्धवं यद्वत् साम्यं भजति योगतः ।
तथात्ममनसोरैक्यं समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat sāmyaṃ bhajati yogataḥ /
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat ] ambusaindhavayoḥ sāmyaṃ VM sāmyaṃ bhajati ] yathā bhavati VM
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat HRĀ ] ambusaindhavayor aikyaṃ YBhD HTK sāmyaṃ bhajati ] sāmyaṃ bhavati HRĀ, yathā bhavati YBhD HTK yogataḥ YBhD HTK ] yogavit HRĀ samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate HRĀ ] samādhir abhidhīyate YBhD, samādhiḥ sa vidhīyate HTK
यत्समत्वं द्वयोरत्र जीवात्मपरमात्मनोः ।
समस्तनष्टसंकल्पः समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥*
yat samatvaṃ dvayor atra jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ /
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //*
yat samatvaṃ dvayor atra ] tat samatvaṃ bhaved atra HRĀ, yat sarvadvandvayor aikyaṃ YBhD
राजयोगस्य माहात्म्यं को वा जानाति तत्त्वतः ।
ज्ञानान्मुक्तिः स्थिरा सिद्धिर् गुरुवाक्येन लभ्यते ॥
rājayogasya māhātmyaṃ ko vā jānāti tattvataḥ /
jñānān muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena labhyate //
The third quarter of this verse has been subject to much revision in the Haṭhapradīpikā and the source text, the Amanaska. Unlike the manuscripts of the Amanaska, those of the Haṭhapradīpikā transmit sthirā, sthitiḥ or sthite after muktiḥ or mukti. We have adopted muktiḥ sthirā, the reading of ε, an important group for the grey-scaled verses.
muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena ] siddhir muktir iti guror jñānaṃ ca A
ko hi ] ko vā YCM jñānān muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena labhyate ] tajjñānī vasate yatra sadeśaḥ puṇyabhājanam YCM
दुर्लभो विषयत्यागो दुर्लभं तत्त्वदर्शनम् ।
दुर्लभा सहजावस्था सद्गुरोः करुणां विना ॥
durlabho viṣayatyāgo durlabhaṃ tattvadarśanam /
durlabhā sahajāvasthā sadguroḥ karuṇāṃ vinā //
विविधैरासनैः कुम्भैर्विचित्रैः करणैरपि ।
प्रबुद्धायामादिशक्तौ प्राणः शून्ये विलीयते ॥
vividhair āsanaiḥ kumbhair vicitraiḥ karaṇair api /
prabuddhāyām ādiśaktau prāṇaḥ śūnye vilīyate //
In Jyotsnā 4.10, Brahmānanda understands ‘the void’ (śūnya) as the central channel. In Haṭhapradīpikā 3.4, śūnyapadavī is a synonym of Suṣumṇā.
vicitraiḥ karaṇair ] vicitrakaraṇair YCM
उत्पन्नशक्तिबोधस्य त्यक्तनिःशेषकर्मणः ।
योगिनः सहजावस्था स्वयमेव प्रकाशते ॥
utpannaśaktibodhasya tyaktaniḥśeṣakarmaṇaḥ /
yoginaḥ sahajāvasthā svayam eva prakāśate //
prakāśate ] prajāyate YCM
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे शून्यं विशति मानसे ।
तथा समस्तकर्माणि निर्मूलयति मर्मवित् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe śūnyaṃ viśati mānase /
tathā samastakarmāṇi nirmūlayati marmavit //
śūnyaṃ ] śūnye YCM USS mānase USS ] mārute YCM tathā YCM ] tadā USS
अमरौघ नमस्तुभ्यं सोऽपि कालस्त्वया हतः ।
पतितं वदने यस्य जगदेतच्चराचरम् ॥
amaraugha namas tubhyaṃ so’pi kālas tvayā hataḥ /
patitaṃ vadane yasya jagad etac carācaram //
The vocative form of amaraugha is well attested and closely related to two other variants, amarogha and amaraughi. The term amaraugha appears in a list of synonyms for samādhi in Haṭhapradīpikā 4.32. We have adopted this reading as it is not unprecedented for an author to pay homage to samādhi (e.g. Haṭhapradīpikā X4.70) and to other yoga techniques (e.g. Yogatārāvalī 4a: nādānusandhāna namo ’stu tubhyaṃ). It is possible that this verse was inserted here together with the next one, which also contains the term amaraugha.
चित्ते समत्वमापन्ने वायौ व्रजति मध्यमे ।
तदामरौघवज्रोली †तदाशा जीवितेऽपि च† ॥
citte samatvam āpanne vāyau vrajati madhyame /
tadāmaraughavajrolī †tadāśā jīvite’pi ca† //
The second line of this verse is problematic in both the source text (the Amaraugha) and the manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā. For the last pāda, we have adopted the closest reading to that of the source text but cannot make sense of it, so have cruxed it. In addition to the tentative translation we have made, one could understand amaraughavajrolī and āśājīvite as dual forms: “ldots then amaraugha and vajrolī arise, and there is hope and life too”. The line was rewritten in η2 and other manuscripts, as well as the Jyotsnā (4.14cd), to include the two variations of vajrolī, namely amarolī and sahajolī.
samatvam AOv.l. ] tu sattvam AO vajrolī ] vajrolis AO tadāśā jīvite ’pi ] tadāśājīvitasya AO
ज्ञानं कुतो मनसि जीवति देवि यावत्
प्राणोऽपि जीवति मनो म्रियते न तावत् ।
प्राणो मनो द्वयमिदं विलयं प्रयाति
मोक्षं स गच्छति नरो न कथंचिदन्यः ॥
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati devi yāvat
prāṇo’pi jīvati mano mriyate na tāvat /
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ vilayaṃ prayāti
mokṣaṃ sa gacchati naro na kathaṃcid anyaḥ //
na tāvat ] na yāvat CA
devi yāvat ] devi tāvat YCM, durvikalpa HSC tāvat ] yāvat YCM HSC vilayaṃ prayāti ] vilayaṃ nayed yo YCM, na vilīyate ’tra HSC naro na kathañcid anyaḥ YCM ] naro ’tra kathaṃ cid eva HSC
रसस्य मनसश्चैव चञ्चलत्वं स्वभावतः ।
रसबन्धे मनोबन्धे किं न सिध्यति भूतले ॥
rasasya manasaś caiva cañcalatvaṃ svabhāvataḥ /
rasabandhe manobandhe kiṃ na sidhyati bhūtale //
svabhāvataḥ ] samāsataḥ YCM rasabandhe manobandhe ] raso baddho mano baddhaṃ YCM
मूर्छितो हरते व्याधिं मृतो जीवयति स्वयम् ।
बद्धः खेचरतां धत्ते रसो वायुश्च भैरवि ॥
mūrchito harate vyādhiṃ mṛto jīvayati svayam /
baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ dhatte raso vāyuś ca bhairavi //
The Rasārṇava is the likely source of this verse given the vocative, bhairavi. Similar verses are found in other yoga texts (see Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 57).
Disregarding the technical meaning of the terms, the verse plays with apparent contradictions
(virodhābhāsa) in saying literally that, when mercury and the breath are unconscious, they cure
disease; when dead, they restore life and, when bound, they enable one to fly up.
harate ] harati RA
Cf. Amṛtasiddhi 7.7abmūrcchito harate vyādhiṃ baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ nayet/
इन्द्रियाणां मनो नाथो मनोनाथस्तु मारुतः ।
मारुतस्य लयो नाथस्तं नाथं लयमाश्रयेत् ॥
indriyāṇāṃ mano nātho manonāthas tu mārutaḥ /
mārutasya layo nāthas taṃ nāthaṃ layam āśrayet //
taṃ nāthaṃ layam āśrayet ] sa layo nādam āśritaḥ HRĀ YCM
सोऽयमेवास्तु मोक्षाख्यो मास्तु वापि मतान्तरे ।
मनःप्राणलयानन्दो मयि कश्चित्प्रवर्तते ॥
so’yam evāstu mokṣākhyo māstu vāpi matāntare /
manaḥprāṇalayānando mayi kaścit pravartate //
The manuscripts attest two versions of the second line. It appears that the reading of ε, ζ and π groups, which we have adopted, was changed to remove the first person pronoun. The modified reading is prevalent in the γ and δ manuscripts (manaḥprāṇalayānando nāpi kaś cit vibhidyate).
so ’yam evāstu ] ayam eva tu YCM māstu ] astu YCM layānando ] layo nādo YCM na ca ] mayi YCM pravartate ] vibhidyate YCM
प्रणष्टोच्छ्वासनिश्वासः प्रध्वस्तविषयग्रहः ।
निश्चेष्टो निर्विकारश्च लयो जयति योगिनाम् ॥
praṇaṣṭocchvāsaniśvāsaḥ pradhvastaviṣayagrahaḥ /
niśceṣṭo nirvikāraś ca layo jayati yoginām //
The fourth quarter of this verse differs from that of the North Indian recension of the Amanaska (quoted as the source) but is found in two South Indian manuscripts of the Amanaska.
nirvikāraś ca ] nirgatārambho A layo jayati yoginām Av.l. ] hy ānandaṃ yāti yogavit A, layo jayati yoginaḥ Av.l.
praṇaṣṭocchvāsa YCM ] praṇaṣṭaśvāsa HSC pradhvasta HSC ] vidhvasta YCM grahaḥ YCM ] jvaraḥ HSC nirvikāraś ca HSC ] nirgatārambho YCM layo jayati yoginām ] hy ānandayati yogikaḥ YCM, layo jayati yoginā HSC
उच्छिन्नसर्वसंकल्पो निःशेषाशेषचेष्टितः ।
स्वावगम्यो लयः कोऽपि जयतां वागगोचरः ॥
ucchinnasarvasaṃkalpo niḥśeṣāśeṣaceṣṭitaḥ /
svāvagamyo layaḥ ko’pi jayatāṃ vāgagocaraḥ //
jayatāṃ Av.l. ] jāyate A, jayatā Av.l., jñāyatāṃ Av.l., jagatāṃ Av.l., japatāṃ Av.l., layatāṃ Av.l.
niḥśeṣa ] nirgata YCM ceṣṭitaḥ ] ceṣṭakaḥ YCM
यत्र दृष्टिर्लयस्तत्र भूतेन्द्रियसनातनः ।
स्याच्छक्तिर्जीवभूतानां दृष्टिर्लक्ष्ये लयं गता ॥
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanaḥ /
syāc chaktir jīvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā //
layas ] manas CA KJN sanātanaḥ ] sanātanam CA, sapudgala KJN syāc chaktir ] sā śaktis CA, sa śāntis CAv.l.svaśakti KJN jīvabhūtānāṃ ] sarvabhūtānāṃ CA, jīvabhūtā hi KJN (conj. Hatley), jīvabhūtāni KJNv.l.
sanātanaḥ HTK ] sanātanī YCM HSC syād chaktir ] na sā śaktir HTK jīvabhūtānāṃ ] sarvabhūtānāṃ YCM HSC, bhāvabhūtānāṃ HTK dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā ] dṛṣṭir lekṣeṇa saṃgatā YCM HSC, dṛṣṭe lakṣe kṣayaṃ gatā HTK
वेदशास्त्रपुराणानि सामान्यगणिका इव ।
एकैव शाम्भवी मुद्रा गुप्ता कुलवधूरिव ॥
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva /
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva //
See Birch 2013: 286 for more parallel verses.
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni A ] vedaśāstrapurāṇādyāḥ Av.l., vedaśāstrāṇi sarvāṇi Av.l., vedaśāstrapurāṇādi Av.l.
purāṇāni HRĀ HTK ] purāṇaughāḥ YCM eṣā sā ] ekaiva HRĀ YCM HTK
अन्तर्लक्ष्यं बहिर्दृष्टिर्निमेषोन्मेषवर्जिता ।
एषा सा शाम्भवी मुद्रा सर्वतन्त्रेषु गोपिता ॥
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitā /
eṣā sā śāmbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā //
As seen in the witnesses of the Amanaska, which is the source of this verse, the spellings lakṣya and lakṣa occur randomly across the manuscripts. See Birch 2013: 287 for more parallel verses.
lakṣyaṃ A CA ] lakṣya Av.l., lakṣaṃ Av.l., lakṣā Av.l., lakṣo Av.l. varjitā A ] varjitaḥ CA eṣā sā ] eṣā hi A, iyaṃ sā CA
eṣā sā ] eṣā tu YCM
अन्तर्लक्ष्यविलीनचित्तपवनो योगी यदा वर्तते
दृष्ट्या निश्चलतारया बहिरधः पश्यन्नपश्यन्नपि ।
मुद्रेयं खलु खेचरी भवति सा युष्मत्प्रसादाद्गुरो
शून्याशून्यविवर्जितं स्फुरति यत्तत्त्वं पदं शाम्भवम् ॥
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir adhaḥ paśyann apaśyann api /
mudreyaṃ khalu khecarī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādād guro
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tattvaṃ padaṃ śāmbhavam //
On the similarity of śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās in 4.5–7, see the note on 4.8.
paśyann api ] paśyet sadā CA yuṣmat ] yukta CA, yuktā CAv.l., yuṣṭa CAv.l.
lakṣya YCM AN ] lakṣa HTK adhaḥ HTK ] asau YCM AN khecarī ] śāmbhavī YCM AN HTK guro YCM AN ] guroḥ HTK
श्रीशाम्भव्याश्च खेचर्या अवस्थायामभेदता ॥*
śrīśāmbhavyāś ca khecaryā avasthāyām abhedatā //*
This line may be authorial because it is explaining the fact that 4.6 and 4.7 teach similar techniques called śāmbhavī mudrā and khecarī mudrā respectively. One would expect a verse on khecarī mudrā to be explaining the insertion of the tongue in the nasopharyngeal cavity (cf. 3.33–48), but the practice of meditating by fixing the gaze is called khecarī mudrā in 4.7 (as attested by α, η and π manuscripts) and manuscripts of the Candrāvalokana, the text from which Svātmārāma borrowed this verse. It is, therefore, likely that he added 4.8 to explain that śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās are the same with respect to the gaze and meditative state of mind. A similar conflation occurs in the Śivayogapradīpikā (5.3).
śāmbhavyāś ca khecaryā HSC ] śāmbhavyāḥ khecaryāś ca YCM avasthāyām abhedatā ] avasthāṃ ca labhed ataḥ YCM, avasthāṃ tu labhed ataḥ HSC
पाताले यद्विशति सुषिरं मेरुमूले तदस्मिन्
तत्त्वं चैतत्प्रवदति सुधीस्तन्मुखं निम्नगानाम् ।
चन्द्रात्सारः स्रवति वपुषस्तेन मृत्युर्नराणां
तं बध्नीयात्सुकरणमृदा नान्यथा कायसिद्धिः ॥
pātāle yad viśati suṣiraṃ merumūle tad asmin
tattvaṃ caitat pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām /
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
taṃ badhnīyāt sukaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ //
On the position of these verses (4.9–11) in the various recensions of the text, see
the introduction p. 75.
The first half of the verse has many variants among the witnesses, and none of the
variants are satisfactory. A different version is found in the Jyotsnā (3.52) and some manuscripts belonging to lower branches of the stemma (e.g., η2, πω, etc.). This version was likely inserted into chapter three of α2, which seems to best represent it:
yat prāleyaṃ pihitasukhire merumūle yad astī
tasmi tvaṃ pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām
yat prāleyaṃ pihitasuṣiraṃ merumūrdhny asti tathyaṃ
tasmiṃs tattvaṃ pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām
suṣiraṃ ] sukhire α2 textbullet mūrdhny P8 ] mūle α2 textbullet asti tathyaṃ ] yad astī α2
pātāle yad viśati HRĀ YBhD ] pātāle yad vitata HTK, tat pātālād viyati YCM suṣiraṃ HRĀ YBhD HTK ] śikhare YCM mūle YBhD YCM HTK ] mūlaṃ HRĀ tad asmin HTK ] tad asti HRĀ YCM, yad asti YBhD tattvaṃ HRĀ YCM ] tadvac YBhD HTK pravadati YBhD HTK YCM ] vadati HRĀ sudhīs YCM YBhD HTK ] sudhā HRĀ tan mukhaṃ HRĀ YBhD HTK ] saṃmukhe YCM sāraḥ YCM YBhD HTK ] sāraṃ HRĀ taṃ badhnīyāt HTK ] tad badhnīyāt HRĀ YCM, badhnīyāt tat YBhD sukaraṇamṛdā HTK ] sukharatimṛdur HRĀ, svakaraṇamṛdā YCM, sukaraṇam atho YBhD kāyasiddhiḥ YCM YBhD HTK ] kāryasiddhiḥ HRĀ
यत्किंचित्स्रवते चन्द्राद् अमृतं दिव्यरूपिणः ।
तत्सर्वं ग्रसते सूर्यस् तेन पिण्डं जरायुतम् ॥
yat kiṃcit sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpiṇaḥ /
tat sarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ jarāyutam //
divyarūpinaḥ ] divyarūpi ca HRĀ YCM jarāyutam ] vināśi ca HRĀ YCM
तत्रास्ति करणं दिव्यं सूर्यस्य मुखबन्धनम् ।
गुरूपदेशतो ज्ञेयं न तु शास्त्रार्थकोटिभिः ॥
tatrāsti karaṇaṃ divyaṃ sūryasya mukhabandhanam /
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ //
karaṇaṃ divyaṃ YCM ] divyaṃ karaṇaṃ HRĀ
तारे ज्योतिषि संयोज्य किंचिदुन्नमयेद्भ्रुवौ ।
पूर्वयोगस्य मार्गोऽयमुन्मनीकारकः क्षणात् ॥
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃcid unnamayed bhruvau /
pūrvayogasya mārgo’yam unmanīkārakaḥ kṣaṇāt //
This and the next verse (X4.41–42) are from the South Indian recension of the Amanaska, a later rewriting of that work which incorporates these verses in an additional passage on Tārakayoga, which is presented in this recension as the preliminary yoga (pūrvayoga). It appears to have been added here to elaborate on the meditation of fixing the gaze that is taught in 4.4–7 = X4.36–39.
tāre ] netre A unmanīkārakaḥ kṣaṇāt A ] unmunikārakakṣaṇāt Av.l., unmanīkāraṇaṃ kṣaṇāt Av.l., unmanākāśakaḥ kṣaṇāt Av.l.
unnamayed HSC ] uccālayed YCM kārakaḥ ] karaṇaḥ YCM, karaṇam HSC
केचिदागमजालेन केचिन्निगमसंकुलैः ।
केचित्तर्केण मुह्यन्ति नैव जानन्ति तारकम् ॥
kecid āgamajālena kecin nigamasaṃkulaiḥ /
kecit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam //
In the source text tārakam refers to Tāraka yoga, one of two yogas taught in the South Indian recension of the
Amanaska.
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to X4.41.
saṃkulaiḥ ] saṃkulāḥ YCM, saṃkule HTK
अर्धोद्घाटितलोचनः स्थिरमना नासाग्रदत्तेक्षणः
चन्द्रार्कावपि लीनतामुपनयन्निष्पन्दभावान्तरे ।
ज्योतीरूपमशेषबाह्यरहितं देदीप्यमानं परं
तत्त्वं तत्पदमेति वस्तु परमं वाच्यं किमत्राधिकम् ॥
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaḥ
candrārkāv api līnatām upanayan niṣpandabhāvāntare /
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tattvaṃ tat padam eti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikam //
This verse is not in the α manuscripts and was probably added because it elaborates on the gaze. In the Candrāvalokana (the source text) and the Anubhavanivedana, it follows X4.39, which may explain its position in the γ and δ groups. The attentive reader will notice that we have decided against manuscripts that agree with the source text. The reason is based on our stemmatic considerations. Cumulative evidence supports the origin of the additional verses at the beginning of the fourth chapter in the hyparchetype of the ε manuscripts. We suspect these verses contaminated the π group’s copies very early. To complicate matters, the scribe was familiar with the source text and corrected the readings accordingly.
upanayan ] upagatau CA bhāvāntare ] rūpaṃ vapuḥ CA vastu ] yat tu CA
upanayan ] upanayen YCM HTK, upagatau AN niṣpanda ] niḥspanda YCM, trispanda AN, nispanda HTK bhāvāntare AN ] bhāvottare YCM, vācyaṃ tataḥ HTK jyotīrūpam aśeṣa YCM AN ] jyotīrūpaviśeṣa HTK dedīpyamānaṃ YCM HTK ] caikaṃ pumāṃsaṃ AN padam eti YCM AN ] param asti HTK
दिवा न पूजयेल्लिङ्गं रात्रौ नैव च पूजयेत् ।
सततं पूजयेल्लिङ्गं दिवारात्रिनिरोधतः ॥
divā na pūjayel liṅgaṃ rātrau naiva ca pūjayet /
satataṃ pūjayel liṅgaṃ divārātrinirodhataḥ //
The manuscripts transmit readings for the last verse quarter that either contradict or repeat the statements in the first line. This problem likely occurred through some kind of dittographical error. We have therefore adopted the reading of Jyotsnā 4.42d (nirodhataḥ), which is the same as the source text.
divā na ] na divā KhV rātrau naiva ca pūjayet ] na rātrau ca maheśvari KhV satataṃ ] sarvadā KhV
ca pūjayet ] prapūjayet HSC divārātrinirodhataḥ ] divārātrau ca pūjayet HSC
सुषिरो ज्ञानजनकः पञ्चस्रोतःसमन्वितः ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिञ्शून्ये निरञ्जने ॥*
suṣiro jñānajanakaḥ pañcasrotaḥsamanvitaḥ /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmiñ śūnye nirañjane //*
This verse may not be referring to the cavity in which the tongue is placed but perhaps to a more esoteric sense based on the meaning of pañcasrotas as the five streams of tantric Śaiva teachings, which in this case generate knowledge. On pañcasrotas, see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa 2013, vol. 3: 361.
suṣiro jñānajanakaḥ ] suṣiraṃ jñānajanakaṃ HSC samanvitaḥ ] samanvitaṃ HSC
सव्यदक्षिणनाडीस्थो मध्ये चलति मारुतः ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिन्स्थाने न संशयः ॥
savyadakṣiṇanāḍīstho madhye calati mārutaḥ /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmin sthāne na saṃśayaḥ //
चित्तं चरति खे यस्माज् जिह्वा चरति खे गता ।
तेनैषा खेचरी नाम मुद्रा सिद्धैर्नमस्कृता ॥
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā /
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā //
See 3.37, where this verse is also found.
इडापिङ्गलयोर्योगे शून्यं चैवानिलं ग्रसेत् ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तत्र सत्यं न संशयः ॥
iḍāpiṅgalayor yoge śūnyaṃ caivānilaṃ graset /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tatra satyaṃ na saṃśayaḥ //
Cf. Rāghavabhaṭṭa ad Śāradātilaka 25.43: suṣumṇāyām eteṣu parvasu iḍāpiṅgalayor yogo bhavatīti jñeyam.
śūnyaṃ ] śūnye USS na saṃśayaḥ ] punaḥ punaḥ USS
सोमसूर्यद्वयोर्मध्ये निरालम्बे तले पुनः ।
संस्थिता व्योमचक्रे या सा मुद्रा नाम खेचरी ॥
somasūryadvayor madhye nirālambe tale punaḥ /
saṃsthitā vyomacakre yā sā mudrā nāma khecarī //
The reading tale is suspect, as is nirālambāntare, the conjecture of Brahmānanda.
The vyomacakra (‘the cakra of the void’) is also mentioned in a verse added to some later recensions of the
Haṭhapradīpikā (see 3.34*1), which states that vyomacakra is another name for khecarīmudrā. This verse derives from a passage in the Jñānasāra (2.1–5) that discusses khecarī, as well as contracting the throat (cf. the jālandhara lock), in relation to three cakras; vyomacakra, madhyacakra, and mūlacakra. For further discussion, see the commentary on 3.69.
In Jyotsnā 4.45, Brahmānanda states that the vyomacakra is associated with all the voids in the middle of the brow (bhrūmadhye sarvakhānāṃ samanvayāt) and, in the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f. 129v), Sundaradeva says that it is called the Brahmarandhra, which is between
Iḍā and Piṅgalā (iḍāpiṅgalāntargataṃ brahmarandhrākhyaṃ vyomacakraṃ tat khecarīmudrāṃ śaktiṃ kuryād
...).
somasūryadvayor USS ] sūryacandramasor GSS tale USS ] nile GSS yā sā mudrā nāma GSS ] sā mudrā nāma ca USS
सा मयोद्भेदिता वामा साक्षाच्च शिववल्लभा ।
पूरयेन्मारुतं दिव्यं सुषुम्णा पश्चिमे मुखे ॥
sā mayodbheditā vāmā sākṣāc ca śivavallabhā /
pūrayen mārutaṃ divyaṃ suṣumṇā paścime mukhe //
The referent of mayā is unspecified, and no source text has been identified. We assume it refers to the speaker, who might be Śiva. The ε manuscripts have māyodbheditā for mayodbheditā, but it is hard to make sense of this. If correct, udbheditā would more likely mean “produced” or “made manifest”. Alternatively, the first line of this verse could be referring to khecarīmudrā, in which case its being produced by māyā would make more sense. In the second line, Brahmānanda’s reading suṣumnāṃ is tempting. The line would then mean, “[The yogi] should fill Suṣumṇā with divine breath through the rear opening”.
sā mayodbheditā vāmā sākṣāc ca ] sā mayā viditā yā māyā sākṣāc YSS
पुरस्ताच्चैव पूर्येत निश्चिता खेचरी भवेत् ।
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीमुद्रामुन्मनी संप्रजायते ॥
purastāc caiva pūryeta niścitā khecarī bhavet /
abhyaset khecarīmudrām unmanī saṃprajāyate //
We have understood niścitā as an adverb. No witnesses have niścitam, but we see no other way of taking niścitā.
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीमुद्रां तावत्स्याद्योगनिद्रितः ।
संप्राप्तयोगनिद्रस्य कालो नास्ति कदाचन ॥
abhyaset khecarīmudrāṃ tāvat syād yoganidritaḥ /
saṃprāptayoganidrasya kālo nāsti kadācana //
khecarīmudrāṃ tāvat ] khecarīṃ tāvad yāvad USS nidritaḥ ] nidrataḥ USS
भ्रुवोर्मध्ये शिवस्थानं मनस्तत्र विलीयते ।
ज्ञातव्यं तत्पदं तुर्यं तत्र कालो न विद्यते ॥
bhruvor madhye śivasthānaṃ manas tatra vilīyate /
jñātavyaṃ tat padaṃ turyaṃ tatra kālo na vidyate //
padaṃ ] paraṃ USS
चन्द्रसूर्यद्वयोर्मध्ये मुद्रां दद्याच्च खेचरीम् ।
निरालम्बे महाशून्ये व्योमचक्रे व्यवस्थिताम् ॥
candrasūryadvayor madhye mudrāṃ dadyāc ca khecarīm /
nirālambe mahāśūnye vyomacakre vyavasthitām //
On the vyomacakra, see X4.49.
dadyāc ca ] dadyāt tu JS
निरालम्बं मनः कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ।
सबाह्याभ्यन्तरे व्योम्नि घटवत्तिष्ठते ध्रुवम् ॥
nirālambaṃ manaḥ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet /
sabāhyābhyantare vyomni ghaṭavat tiṣṭhate dhruvam //
api cintayet JS ] cintayet sudhīḥ ŚS
बाह्यवायुर्यथा लीनः खस्य मध्ये न संशयः ।
स्वस्थानं गच्छति प्राणः †सूर्याङ्गे मनसा तथा† ॥
bāhyavāyur yathā līnaḥ khasya madhye na saṃśayaḥ /
svasthānaṃ gacchati prāṇaḥ †sūryāṅge manasā tath↠//
It is hard to make sense of sūryāṅge here (‘on the side of the sun’?). The terms sūryāṅge and candrāṅge occur in the third chapter (3.15) in the sense of the right and left sides of the body, respectively. However, this meaning does not seem relevant here. The variant readings with pavane/pavano are not clear either, so we have cruxed the fourth verse quarter.
khasya ] svasya HP10 sūryāṅge manasā tathā ] sūryo ’gnau pavane tathā HP10
एवमभ्यस्यमानस्य वायुमार्गे दिवानिशम् ।
अभ्यासाज्जीर्यते वायुर् मनस्तत्र विलीयते ॥
evam abhyasyamānasya vāyumārge divāniśam /
abhyāsāj jīryate vāyur manas tatra vilīyate //
Brahmānanda identifies the path of the breath (vāyumārga) with Suṣumṇā.
jīryate ] līyate HSC
अमृतं प्लावयेद्देहमा पादतलमस्तकम् ।
सिध्यत्येव सदा कायो महाबलपराक्रमः ॥
amṛtaṃ plāvayed deham ā pādatalamastakam /
sidhyaty eva sadā kāyo mahābalaparākramaḥ //
eva sadā ] evaṃ tadā HSC
शक्तिमध्ये मनः कृत्वा शक्तिं च मनमध्यगाम् ।
मनसा मन आलोक्य तद्ध्यायेत्परमं पदम् ॥
śaktimadhye manaḥ kṛtvā śaktiṃ ca manamadhyagām /
manasā mana ālokya tad dhyāyet paramaṃ padam //
In the second verse quarter, mana for mano is for the metre.
śaktiṃ ca manamadhyagām ] manaś śaktes tu madhyamam CA tad CAv.l. ] taṃ CA
madhye ] madhyo HSC manamadhyagāṃ ] svāntamadhyagāṃ HSC
खमध्ये कुरु चात्मानमात्ममध्ये च खं कुरु ।
आत्मानं खमयं कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
khamadhye kuru cātmānam ātmamadhye ca khaṃ kuru /
ātmānaṃ khamayaṃ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet //
ātmānaṃ ] sarvaṃ ca HRĀ
अन्तःशून्यो बहिःशून्यः शून्यकुम्भ इवाम्बरे ।
अन्तःपूर्णो बहिःपूर्णः पूर्णकुम्भ इवार्णवे ॥
antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare /
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrṇakumbha ivārṇave //
HRĀ reverses ac and cd antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ ] antaḥśūnyaṃ bahiḥśūnyaṃ
बाह्यचिन्ता न कर्तव्या तथैवान्तरचिन्तनम् ।
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
bāhyacintā na kartavyā tathaivāntaracintanam /
sarvacintāṃ parityajya na kiṃcid api cintayet //
संकल्पमात्रकलनैव जगत्समग्रं
संकल्पमात्रकलना हि मनोविलासः ।
संकल्पमेतमत उत्सृज निर्विकल्पं
आश्रित्य निश्चयमवाप्नुहि राम शान्तिम् ॥
saṃkalpamātrakalanaiva jagat samagraṃ
saṃkalpamātrakalanā hi manovilāsaḥ /
saṃkalpam etam ata utsṛja nirvikalpaṃ
āśritya niścayam avāpnuhi rāma śāntim //
saṃkalpamātrakalanaiva ] saṃkalpajālakalanaiva LVY saṃkalpamātrakalanā hi ] °kalanāt tu LYV ata ] alam LYV
कर्पूरमनले यद्वत् सैन्धवं सलिले यथा ।
तथा संधीयमानं च मनस्तत्त्वे विलीयते ॥
karpūram anale yadvat saindhavaṃ salile yathā /
tathā saṃdhīyamānaṃ ca manas tattve vilīyate //
tattve vilīyate ] tatraive līyate HRĀ
ज्ञेयं सर्वं प्रतीतं च तज्ज्ञानं मन उच्यते ।
ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं समं नष्टं नान्यः पन्था द्वितीयकः ॥
jñeyaṃ sarvaṃ pratītaṃ ca tajjñānaṃ mana ucyate /
jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ samaṃ naṣṭaṃ nānyaḥ panthā dvitīyakaḥ //
sarvaṃ ] sarva HTK
मनोदृश्यमिदं सर्वं यत्किंचित्सचराचरं ।
मनसो ह्युन्मनीभावे द्वैताभावं प्रचक्षते ॥
manodṛśyam idaṃ sarvaṃ yat kiṃcit sacarācaraṃ /
manaso hy unmanībhāve dvaitābhāvaṃ pracakṣate //
dvaitābhāvaṃ ] ’dvaitabhāvaṃ A
Cf. Gauḍapāda’s Māṇḍūkyopaniṣatkārikā 3.31manodṛśyam idaṃ dvaitaṃ yat kiṃ cit sacarācaram/
manaso hy amanībhāve dvaitaṃ naivopalabhyate//
manaso hy unmanī ] manasas tūnmanī YCM dvaitābhāvaṃ ] ’dvaitabhāvaṃ YCM
ज्ञेयवस्तुपरित्यागाद् विलयं याति मानसम् ।
मानसे विलयं याते कैवल्यमवशिष्यते ॥
jñeyavastuparityāgād vilayaṃ yāti mānasam /
mānase vilayaṃ yāte kaivalyam avaśiṣyate //
mānasam ] mānasaḥ HRĀ avaśiṣyate ] upajāyate HRĀ
लयो लय इति प्राहुः कीदृशं लयलक्षणम् ।
अपुनर्वासनोत्थानाल्लयो विषयविस्मृतिः ॥
layo laya iti prāhuḥ kīdṛśaṃ layalakṣaṇam /
apunarvāsanotthānāl layo viṣayavismṛtiḥ //
This verse may have been inspired by the Mokṣopāya (e.g. 1.2.2).
kīdṛśaṃ HRĀ ] īdṛśaṃ YSS apunarvāsanotthānāt ] apunarbhavasaṃsthānaṃ HRĀ, tatra sarvasamādhāne YSS
एवं नानाविधोपायाः सम्यक्स्वानुभवान्विताः ।
समाधिमार्गाः कथिताः पूर्वाचार्यैर्महात्मभिः ॥
evaṃ nānāvidhopāyāḥ samyaksvānubhavānvitāḥ /
samādhimārgāḥ kathitāḥ pūrvācāryair mahātmabhiḥ //
सुषुम्णायै कुण्डलिन्यै सुधायै चन्द्रमण्डले ।
मनोन्मन्यै नमस्तुभ्यं महाशक्तिचिदात्मने ॥
suṣumṇāyai kuṇḍalinyai sudhāyai candramaṇḍale /
manonmanyai namas tubhyaṃ mahāśakticidātmane //
अशक्यतत्त्वबोधानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
प्रोक्तं गोरक्षनाथेन नादोपासनमुच्यते ॥
aśakyatattvabodhānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
proktaṃ gorakṣanāthena nādopāsanam ucyate //
श्रीआदिनाथेन सपादकोटि-
लयप्रकाराः कथिता जयन्ते ।
नादानुसन्धानकमेकमेव
मन्यामहे मान्यतमं लयानाम् ॥
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi-
layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayante /
nādānusandhānakam ekam eva
manyāmahe mānyatamaṃ layānām //
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi ] sadā śivoktāni sapādalakṣa YTĀ layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayante ] layāvadhānāni lasantu loke YTĀ nādānusandhānakam ekam eva ] nādānusandhānasamādhim ekaṃ YTĀ
jayante ] jayantu HRĀ, jayanti YCM ekam eva ] eva kāryam HRĀ YCM
मुक्तासनस्थितो योगी मुद्रां संधाय शाम्भवीम् ।
शृणुयाद्दक्षिणे कर्णे नादमन्तःस्थमेकधीः ॥*
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāmbhavīm /
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antaḥstham ekadhīḥ //*
In verse 1.37, muktāsana is said to be the same as siddhāsana.
antaḥstham ekadhīḥ ] antargataṃ sadā YCM, ekāntike sudhīḥ HSC
काष्ठे प्रवर्तितो वह्निः काष्ठेन सह शाम्यति ।
नादे प्रवर्तितं चित्तं नादेन सह लीयते ॥
kāṣṭhe pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha śāmyati /
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha līyate //
śāmyati YCM HSC ] līyate HRĀ līyate YCM HSC ] śāmyati HRĀ
विस्मृत्य सकलं बाह्यं नादे दुग्धाम्बुवन्मनः ।
एकीभूयाथ सहसा चिदाकाशे विलीयते ॥
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāmbuvan manaḥ /
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate //
manaḥ HSC USS ] naraḥ YCM ekībhūyātha sahasā YCM HSC NBU ] ekībhūtaṃ tathā cittaṃ USS cidākāśe vilīyate YCM HSC NBU ] rājayogābhidhānakam USS
औदासीन्यपरो भूत्वा सदाभ्यासेन संयमी ।
उन्मनीकरणं सद्यो नादमेवावधारयेत् ॥
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī /
unmanīkaraṇaṃ sadyo nādam evāvadhārayet //
unmanīkaraṇaṃ YCM USS ] unmanīkārakaṃ HSC NBU evāvadhārayet YCM NBU ] evānu[...]yet USS, evaṃ vadhārayet HSC
शीते काले चौपटी वा कुटी वा
पथ्याहारे गोपयो वा पयो वा ।
भोज्ये भिक्षावृन्दमारण्यकन्दं
पाणी द्रोणी कापि वा भोज्यपात्रे ॥
śīte kāle caupaṭī vā kuṭī vā
pathyāhāre gopayo vā payo vā /
bhojye bhikṣāvṛndam āraṇyakandaṃ
pāṇī droṇī kāpi vā bhojyapātre //
On caupaṭī in the first pāda, McGregor (1994: s.v.) and Callewaert (2009: s.v.) in their dictionaries of modern and old Hindi both give the meaning
“open all around” for caupaṭ. McGregor derives it from Sanskrit catuṣpaṭṭa. Molesworth (1857: s.v.) in his Marathi dictionary gives “A quadrangular expanse
or space, esp. as open and extended: also a broad and level tract” for caupaṭṭā.
We suspect that the α reading of paṭī at the end of the first pāda is the result of dittography.
śīte kāle caupaṭī vā ] śīte kāle dvau paṭī vā HRĀ, śīte kāle kāpaṭī vā YCM, audāsīnyaṃ śītakāle HTK bhojye bhikṣā ] bhakṣye bhojye HRĀ, bhakṣye bhikṣā YCM, bhojyaṃ bhikṣā HTK pāṇī HRĀ ] pāṇau YCM kāpi vā HTK ] ko ’pi vā HRĀ, kā parā YCM bhojyapātre ] bhakṣyapātre HRĀ, bhojapātram YCM, bhojyapātram HTK
सर्वचिन्तां समुत्सृज्य सर्वचेष्टां च सर्वदा ।
नादमेवानुसंधानान्नादे चित्तं विलीयते ॥
sarvacintāṃ samutsṛjya sarvaceṣṭāṃ ca sarvadā /
nādam evānusaṃdhānān nāde cittaṃ vilīyate //
The third verse quarter varies considerably among the witnesses and testimonia. We have accepted the reading of α1 (nādam evānusaṃdhānān), which is also attested by the π group and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, on the assumption that the -m – at the end of nādam is a hiatus break, the intended reading being nāda evānusaṃdhānāt. A similar hiatus break is found at 3.89.
samutsṛjya HRĀ NBU ] parityajya HSC sarvaceṣṭāṃ HRĀ ] sarvakāle HSC, sarvaceṣṭā NBU ca sarvadā HRĀ HSC ] vivarjitaḥ NBU saṃdhānān HRĀ ] sandhatte HSC, saṃdadhyān NBU
आरम्भश्च घटश्चैव तथा परिचयस्तथा ।
निष्पत्तिः सर्वयोगेषु योगावस्था भवन्ति ताः ॥
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayas tathā /
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ //
On these four stages, see Birch 2019: 968–969; Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 19–20.
tathā paricayas tathā ŚS ] paricayas tṛtīyakaḥ AO AS sarvayogeṣu AO ŚS ] sarvaśeṣeṣu AS bhavanti tāḥ ŚS ] caturvidhā AO, prakīrtitāḥ AS
paricayas tathā HRĀ HTK ] paricayo ’pi ca YCM, paricayaḥ punaḥ YBhD sarvayogeṣu HRĀ YCM HTK ] ceti yogasya YBhD yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ HRĀ YCM ] syād avasthācatuṣṭayam YBhD HTK
ब्रह्मग्रन्थेर्भवेद्भेदादानन्दः शून्यसंभवः ।
विचित्रक्वणको देहेऽनाहतः श्रूयते ध्वनिः ॥
brahmagranther bhaved bhedād ānandaḥ śūnyasaṃbhavaḥ /
vicitrakvaṇako dehe’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ //
In Jyotsnā 4.70, Brahmānanda understands the voids associated with each stage to be places in the body. However, in the Amṛtasiddhi and Amaraugha, the source text of this verse, the series of voids (along with their respective blisses and sounds) derives from a tetrad of meditative voids in Vajrayāna traditions (Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 18; Birch 2019: 968).
bhaved ] tathā AO
granther ] randhre HRĀ, granthir YCM HTK bhedād ] bhedo HRĀ, bhinna YCM, bhinnād HTK ānandaḥ YCM HTK HRĀv.l. ] yo nādaḥ HRĀ śūnya YCM HTK ] sūrya HRĀ
दिव्यदेहश्च तेजस्वी दिव्यगन्धस्त्वरोगवान् ।
संपूर्णहृदयः शून्ये त्वारम्भे योगवान्भवेत् ॥
divyadehaś ca tejasvī divyagandhas tv arogavān /
saṃpūrṇahṛdayaḥ śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet //
gandhas tv ] gandho hy AO hṛdayaḥ (=AOP)] hṛdaye AO
dehaś ca ] dehaḥ su HRĀ, gandhaś ca HTK gandhas tv HRĀ ] deho ’py HTK hṛdayaḥ ] hṛdaye HRĀ HTK
द्वितीयायां घटीकृत्य वायुर्भवति मध्यगः ।
दृढासनो भवेद्योगी ज्ञानी देवसमस्तदा ॥
dvitīyāyāṃ ghaṭīkṛtya vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ /
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī jñānī devasamas tadā //
The name of the second stage, ghaṭa (and the related form ghaṭīkṛtya found in the first pāda of this verse) can be understood in at least three ways, as union, activation or pot (the latter with an alchemical connotation, on which see 3.12 and Mallinson and Szanto 2021: 20–23). In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (verse 90) its primary meaning is union and the united pairs are prāṇa and apāna, jīvātman and paramātman, and nāda and bindu.
dvitīyāyāṃ (=AOP)] dvitīye saṃ AO
ghaṭīkṛtya HRĀ ] ghaṭīṃ kṛtvā HTK jñānī HTK ] kāma HRĀ
विष्णुग्रन्थेस्तदा भेदात्परमानन्दसूचकः ।
अतिशून्ये विमर्दश्च भेरीशब्दस्तदा भवेत् ॥
viṣṇugranthes tadā bhedāt paramānandasūcakaḥ /
atiśūnye vimardaś ca bherīśabdas tadā bhavet //
d tadā ] tato AO
a tadā ] tathā HRĀ, yadā YCM HTK c atiśūnye HRĀ ] atiśūnya YCM HTK d tadā YCM ] tathā HRĀ HTK
तृतीयायां ततो भित्त्वा विहायोमर्दलध्वनिः ।
महाशून्यं तदा याति सर्वसिद्धिसमाश्रयम् ॥
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato bhittvā vihāyomardaladhvaniḥ /
mahāśūnyaṃ tadā yāti sarvasiddhisamāśrayam //
Here the object of piercing is unspecified, but it is likely to refer to the knot
of Viṣṇu mentioned in the previous verse.
We have understood vihāyo (‘space’) as referring to the state of total emptiness (atiśūnya) that was mentioned in the previous verse.
vihāyo ] ninādo AO yāti ] jātaṃ AO
bhittvā YCM ] nityaṃ HRĀ, jitvā HTK vihāyomardala ] āviṣkāro mardala HRĀ, vimāyo mardala YCM, sahajānandasambhavaḥ HTK tadā ] tato HRĀ, tathā YCM (HTK reads 4.25cd here)
चित्तानन्दं ततो जित्वा सहजानन्दसंभवः ।
दोषदुःखजरामृत्युक्षुधानिद्राविवर्जितः ॥
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasaṃbhavaḥ /
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyukṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ //
The reading of the first verse quarter, cittānāndaṃ tato jitvā, is likely a patch for the obscure paramānandarocitvāt in the Amaraugha (40a), which is the source text.
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā (Amaraughaprabodha) ] paramānandarocitvāt AO
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā YCM ] cidānandaṃ tato jitvā HRĀ, tṛtīyāyāṃ tato jitvā HTK sahajānandasambhavaḥ YCM HTK ] paramānandasambhavaḥ HRĀ
रुद्रग्रन्थिं ततो भित्त्वा सर्वपीठगतोऽनिलः ।
निष्पत्तौ वैणवः शब्दः क्वणद्वीणाक्वणो भवेत् ॥
rudragranthiṃ tato bhittvā sarvapīṭhagato’nilaḥ /
niṣpattau vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet //
The reading we have adopted for the fourth verse quarter, kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo, Birch’s conjecture in his edition of the Amaraugha, is supported by several testimonia and Amṛtasiddhi 31.2, where it is said that the sound of a vīṇā arises in the fourth stage.
The reading śarva, i.e. Śiva, found in some testimonia and the Jyotsnā makes good sense, but in its description of this stage, the Amṛtasiddhi, which is the ultimate source of this passage has sarva (30.1).
niṣpattau AOv.l. ] niṣpanno AO, niṣpannā AOv.l.
niṣpattau HRĀ ] niṣṭhāto YCM, niṣpanno HTK ’nilaḥ HRĀ YCM ] ’nalaḥ HTK
एकीभूतं तदा चित्तं राजयोगाभिधायकम् ।
सृष्टिसंहारकर्तासौ योगीश्वरसमो भवेत् ॥
ekībhūtaṃ tadā cittaṃ rājayogābhidhāyakam /
sṛṣṭisaṃhārakartāsau yogīśvarasamo bhavet //
According to Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 4.77), the idea that the yogi becomes a creator and destroyer means that he becomes equal to God. Consequently, he construes the line as asau yogī īśvarasamo bhavet.
abhidhāyakam ] abhidhānakam AO, rājayogo ’bhidhīyate AOv.l.
abhidhāyakam YCM ] abhidhānakam USS
राजयोगपदप्राप्तौ सुखोपायोऽल्पचेतसाम् ।
सद्यःप्रत्ययसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥
rājayogapadaprāptau sukhopāyo’lpacetasām /
sadyaḥpratyayasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ //
अस्तु वा मास्तु वा मुक्तिरत्रैवाखण्डितं महत् ।
लयामृतमयं सौख्यं राजयोगादवाप्यते ॥
astu vā māstu vā muktir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ mahat /
layāmṛtamayaṃ saukhyaṃ rājayogād avāpyate //
muktir HRĀ HTK ] siddhir YCM layāmṛtamayaṃ HTK ] layāmṛtaṃ laye HRĀ
हठं विना राजयोगो राजयोगं विना हठः ।
न सिध्यति ततो युग्मम् आ निष्पत्तेः समभ्यसेत् ॥
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ /
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset //
rājayogo HRĀ YBhD HTK ] rājayogaṃ YCM Pāda cd ] vyāptiḥ syād avinābhūtā śrīrājahaṭhayogayoḥ HRĀ samabhyaset HTK YCM ] samācaret YBhD
राजयोगमजानन्तः केवलं हठकर्मठाः ।
ये तु तान्कर्षकान्मन्ये प्रयासफलवर्जितान् ॥
rājayogam ajānantaḥ kevalaṃ haṭhakarmaṭhāḥ /
ye tu tān karṣakān manye prayāsaphalavarjitān //
karmaṭhaḥ ] karmagāḥ HV tu tān karṣakān ] tān karmavaśān HV
तत्त्वं बीजं हठः क्षेत्रमौदासीन्यं जलं त्रिभिः ।
उन्मनीकल्पलतिका सद्य एवोद्भविष्यति ॥
tattvaṃ bījaṃ haṭhaḥ kṣetram audāsīnyaṃ jalaṃ tribhiḥ /
unmanīkalpalatikā sadya evodbhaviṣyati //
The meaning of tattva here is unclear. It is a synonym for samādhi and unmanī in the next verses. However, this meaning seems unlikely here as tattva is one of three factors that is supposed to lead to unmanī. In Jyotsnā 4.104, Brahmānanda says that tattva means citta, which makes sense in so far as the mind grows to the beyond-mind state. However, this interpretation seems somewhat contrived. We have understood tattva in the sense of the ‘highest reality’ (paramatattva) on the assumption that, as the seed, it is the latent cause of the state beyond mind.
tattvaṃ ] nādo YCM tribhiḥ ] smṛtam YCM
राजयोगः समाधिश्च उन्मनी च मनोन्मनी ।
अमरौघोऽपि चाद्वैतं निरालम्बं निरञ्जनम् ॥*
rājayogaḥ samādhiś ca unmanī ca manonmanī /
amaraugho’pi cādvaitaṃ nirālambaṃ nirañjanam //*
अमनस्को लयस्तत्त्वं शून्याशून्यं परं पदम् ।
जीवन्मुक्तिश्च सहजं तुर्यं चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥
amanasko layas tattvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaṃ paraṃ padam /
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakāḥ //
ca YCM ] cāpy USS amaraugho ’pi cādvaitaṃ USS ] amaraughaughacāndrīva YCM layas tattvaṃ USS ] layaś caiva YCM paraṃ padaṃ USS ] parāparam YCM ekavācakāḥ ] ekavācakam YCM USS
उन्मन्यवाप्तये शीघ्रं मार्गौ द्वौ मम संमतौ ।
तत्त्वं परमसौख्यं वा नादोपासनमेव च ॥
unmanyavāptaye śīghraṃ mārgau dvau mama saṃmatau /
tattvaṃ paramasaukhyaṃ vā nādopāsanam eva ca //
mārgau dvau USS ] dvau mārgau YCM ca ] vā YCM USS
सौख्यप्रविष्टचित्तानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
सद्यआनन्दसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥
saukhyapraviṣṭacittānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
sadyaānandasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ //
saukhya YCM ] sāṅkhye USS saṃmatam YCM ] saṃmateḥ USS sadya-ānandasandhāyī YCM ] tasya svānaṃdasa*ryo USS
एकं सृष्टिमयं बीजं एका मुद्रा च खेचरी ।
एको देवो निरालम्ब एकावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā ca khecarī /
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī //
See 3.48.
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ yadvīryaṃ sarvamantragam/
ekā mudrā khecarī ca mudraughaḥ prāṇito yayā//
yad āgamaḥ
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī/
dvāvekaṃ yo vijānāti sa vai pūjyaḥ kulāgame //
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ [sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam iti mantravīryarūpam aham iti bījam/ mudrā parabhairavīyātmā/] bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī/
dvāv etau yasya jāyete so’tiśāntapade sthitaḥ//
devo HRĀ YBhD ] deśo YCM
शङ्खदुन्दुभिनादं च न शृणोति कदाचन ।
काष्ठवज्जायते देह उन्मन्यावस्थया ध्रुवम् ॥
śaṅkhadundubhinādaṃ ca na śṛṇoti kadācana /
kāṣṭhavaj jāyate deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam //
nādaṃ ca na ] nādena na JS deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam ] yogī notpattyā vai prajāyate JS
deha ] dehe HSC
सर्वावस्थाविनिर्मुक्तः सर्वचिन्ताविवर्जितः ।
मृतवत्तिष्ठते योगी स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥*
sarvāvasthāvinirmuktaḥ sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ /
mṛtavat tiṣṭhate yogī sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //*
न हि जानाति शीतोष्णं न दुःखं न सुखं तथा ।
न मानं नापमानं च योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
na hi jānāti śītoṣṇaṃ na duḥkhaṃ na sukhaṃ tathā /
na mānaṃ nāpamānaṃ ca yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
na hi jānāti ] nābhijānāti VM
न गन्धं न रसं रूपं न स्पर्शनं न च श्रुतम् ।
नात्मानं न परं वेत्ति योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
na gandhaṃ na rasaṃ rūpaṃ na sparśanaṃ na ca śrutam /
nātmānaṃ na paraṃ vetti yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
na sparśanaṃ na ca śrutam ] na ca sparśaṃ na nisvanam VM
rūpaṃ na sparśanaṃ ] sparśaṃ na rūpaṃ na YBhD na paraṃ ] ca paraṃ YBhD
अवेध्यः सर्वशस्त्राणामवध्यः सर्वदेहिनाम् ।
अग्राह्यो मन्त्रतन्त्राणां योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
avedhyaḥ sarvaśastrāṇām avadhyaḥ sarvadehinām /
agrāhyo mantratantrāṇāṃ yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
The collated manuscripts have avadhyaḥ in both the first and second verse quarters. Although avadhyaḥ can make sense in both quarters, the repetition appears to be a dittographical error that changed avedyaḥ, which is close to the reading of the source text, into avadhyaḥ. We have therefore emended accordingly.
avedhyaḥ ] abhedyaḥ VM
चित्तं न सुप्तं नो जाग्रत् स्मृतिमन्न न चान्यथा ।
नास्तमेति न चोदेति यस्यासौ मुक्त एव सः ॥
cittaṃ na suptaṃ no jāgrat smṛtiman na na cānyathā /
nāstam eti na codeti yasyāsau mukta eva saḥ //
The first line of this verse is significantly different from the version in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka. The second quarter is corrupt in many of the Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts but smṛti and nānyathā are well attested.
na suptaṃ no jāgrat GŚv.l. ] prasuptaṃ yogena GŚ smṛtiman na na cānyathā ] jāgratsuptaṃ na cānyathā GŚ (em.), jāgratsūtir na +nyathā GŚv.l., chrutimadvacanasya ca GŚv.l. saḥ ] hi GŚ
smṛtiman na na cānyathā ] smṛtivarṇaṃ na cānyathā HSC
स्वस्थो जाग्रदवस्थायां सुप्तवद्योऽवतिष्ठते ।
निःश्वासोच्छ्वासहीनश्च निश्चितं मुक्त एव सः ॥
svastho jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavad yo’vatiṣṭhate /
niḥśvāsocchvāsahīnaś ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ //
svastho ] sadā A, svapna Av.l., supta Av.l.
svastho ] svapna KAT, sadā YCM
नादानुसन्धानसमाधिभाजां
योगीश्वराणां हृदये प्ररूढम् ।
आनन्दमेकं वचसामवाच्यं
जानाति तं श्रीगुरुनाथ एव ॥
nādānusandhānasamādhibhājāṃ
yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye prarūḍham /
ānandam ekaṃ vacasām avācyaṃ
jānāti taṃ śrīgurunātha eva //
prarūḍham ] pragūḍham YTĀ ānandam ekaṃ ] ānandamātraṃ YTĀ eva YTĀv.l. ] ekaḥ YTĀ
vacasām avācyaṃ YCM ] vacaso ’py agamyaṃ HRĀ taṃ śrī HRĀ ] tatvaṃ YCM
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य सावधानेन चेतसा ।
नाद एवानुसन्धेयो योगसाम्राज्यमिच्छता ॥
sarvacintāṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā /
nāda evānusandheyo yogasāmrājyam icchatā //
nāda evānusaṃdheyo HRĀ HSC ] nādam evānusandhatte YCM sāmrājyam icchatā YCM HSC ] sāmrājyasiddhaye HRĀ
कर्णौ पिधाय तूलेन यं शृणोति ध्वनिं मुनिः ।
तत्र चित्तं स्थिरीकुर्याद् यावत्स्थिरपदं व्रजेत् ॥
karṇau pidhāya tūlena yaṃ śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ muniḥ /
tatra cittaṃ sthirīkuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet //
The reading tūlena (‘with cotton’), which is attested by α3, makes good sense and is close to the reading of mūlena in α1 and α2. Manuscripts of several other groups instead have hastābhyām (‘with the hands’) or hastena (‘with the hand’). This reading was inspired by the technique of blocking the ears and other orifices with the fingers in order to listen to the inner sounds. This practice is attested as early as the Svacchandatantra in which it is called ṣaṇmukhīkaraṇa (Vasudeva 2004: 272 n. 66). In this karaṇa, the other openings of the head are also blocked with the fingers. Śivasaṃhitā 5.36–46 teaches a similar practice. In the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 68), the practice of blocking the ears with the hands is stipulated for bhrāmarī kumbhaka.
tūlena HRĀ ] hastena YCM, hastābhyāṃ HSC muniḥ YCM HSC ] yamī HRĀ sthirīkuryād ] sthiraṃ kuryād HRĀ YCM HSC
अभ्यस्यमानो नादोऽयं बाह्यमावृणुते ध्वनिम् ।
पक्षाद्विक्षेपमखिलं जित्वा योगी सुखी भवेत् ॥
abhyasyamāno nādo’yaṃ bāhyam āvṛṇute dhvanim /
pakṣād vikṣepam akhilaṃ jitvā yogī sukhī bhavet //
āvṛṇute NBU ] āvartayed YCM HSC yogī sukhī bhavet YCM HSC ] turyapadaṃ vrajet NBU
श्रूयते प्रथमाभ्यासे नादो नानाविधो महान् ।
वर्धमाने ततोऽभ्यासे श्रूयते सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मतः ॥
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho mahān /
vardhamāne tato’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ //
mahān YCM ] bahuḥ HRĀ HTK
आदौ जलधिजीमूतभेरीनिर्झरसंभवाः ।
मध्ये मर्दलशंखोत्था घण्टाकाहलजास्तथा ॥
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherīnirjharasaṃbhavāḥ /
madhye mardalaśaṃkhotthā ghaṇṭākāhalajās tathā //
We have translated kāhala as ‘trumpet’ on the basis of e.g. Viśvalocanakośa, lāntavarga 161 (dhvaninālā tu vīṇāyāṃ veṇukāhalayor api), but it can also mean a type of drum (see e.g. Śabdakalpadruma s.v. kāhala, where it is said to be a bṛhaḍḍhakkā, a big drum).
nirjhara HRĀ HTK ] jharjhara YCM saṃbhavāḥ HRĀ ] saṃbhavaḥ YCM HTK śaṃkhotthā HRĀ HTK ] śaṃkhottha YCM kāhalajās ] kāhalakās HRĀ YCM HTK
अन्ते तु किङ्किणीवंशवीणाभ्रमरनिस्वनाः ।
इति नानाविधा नादाः श्रूयन्ते देहमध्यतः ॥
ante tu kiṅkiṇīvaṃśavīṇābhramaranisvanāḥ /
iti nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ //
vaṃśa HTK ] vṛnda HRĀ YCM vīṇā HRĀ YCM ] nādā HTK nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ HRĀ, nānāvidho nādaḥ śrūyate dehamadhyagaḥ YCM, nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante yatra madhyataḥ HTK
महति श्रूयमाणेऽपि मेघभेर्यादिकध्वनौ ।
तत्र सूक्ष्मात्सूक्ष्मतरं नादमेव परामृशेत् ॥
mahati śrūyamāṇe’pi meghabheryādikadhvanau /
tatra sūkṣmāt sūkṣmataraṃ nādam eva parāmṛśet //
ādikadhvanau ] ādike dhvanau YCM, ādike svane HTK
घनमुत्सृज्य वा सूक्ष्मे सूक्ष्ममुत्सृज्य वा घने ।
तौ त्यक्त्वा मध्यमे स्याद्वा मनो नान्यत्र चालयेत् ॥
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣme sūkṣmam utsṛjya vā ghane /
tau tyaktvā madhyame syād vā mano nānyatra cālayet //
sūkṣme HTK NBU ] sūkṣmaṃ YCM utsṛjya HTK NBU ] pramṛjya YCM ghane HTK NBU ] ghanam YCM tau tyaktvā madhyame syād vā ] paraṃ tatraiva niḥkṣipya YCM, ramamāṇam api kṣiptaṃ HTK NBU nānyatra cālayet YCM NBU ] nātra pracālayet HTK
यत्र कुत्रापि वा नादे लगति प्रथमं मनः ।
तत्रैव तत्स्थिरीभूत्वा तेन सार्धं विलीयते ॥
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde lagati prathamaṃ manaḥ /
tatraiva tat sthirībhūtvā tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate //
lagati prathamaṃ HTK NBU ] prathamaṃ viśate YCM tatraiva tat sthirībhūtvā ] tatraiva susthiraṃ kuryāt YCM, tatraiva susthirībhūtvā HTK, tatra tatra sthirībhūtvā NBU
मकरन्दं पिबन्भृङ्गो गन्धान्नापेक्षते यथा ।
नादासक्तं तथा चित्तं विषयान्न हि काङ्क्षते ॥
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṅgo gandhān nāpekṣate yathā /
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viṣayān na hi kāṅkṣate //
piban YCM HTK NBU ] pibed HRĀ gandhān YCM NBU ] gandho HRĀ, gandhaṃ HTK nāpekṣate YCM HTK NBU ] na prekṣyate HRĀ tathā HRĀ YCM HTK ] sadā NBU viṣayān HRĀ YCM HTK ] viṣayaṃ NBU na hi HRĀ YCM NBU ] naiva HTK
बद्धं विमुक्तचाञ्चल्यं नादगन्धकजारणात् ।
मनःपारदमाप्नोति निरालम्बाख्यखोटताम् ॥
baddhaṃ vimuktacāñcalyaṃ nādagandhakajāraṇāt /
manaḥpāradam āpnoti nirālambākhyakhoṭatām //
See Hellwig 2009: 204–206 on khoṭa, “lame”, which in alchemy is a technical term used to describe mercury that has been processed many times using the māraṇa technique and no longer moves.
vimuktacāñcalyaṃ ] viyuktaṃ cāpalyaṃ HTK pāradam āpnoti HTK ] pākam avāpnoti YCM khoṭatām ] ghoṭanam YCM, kheṭakam HTK
बद्धः सुनादगन्धेन सद्यःसंत्यक्तचापलः ।
प्रयाति चेतःसूतेन्द्रः पक्षछिन्न इति प्रथाम् ॥
baddhaḥ sunādagandhena sadyaḥsaṃtyaktacāpalaḥ /
prayāti cetaḥsūtendraḥ pakṣachinna iti prathām //
On pakṣaccheda in alchemical processes of immobilizing mercury and for references in Rasaśāstra, see Hellwig 2009: 276–278.
sunādagandhena ] sugandhanādena HTK cetaḥsūtendraḥ ] sūtacittendraḥ HTK iti prathām ] ivāprabhaḥ HTK
नादश्रवणतश्चित्तमन्तरङ्गभुजङ्गमः ।
विस्मृत्य सर्वमेकाग्रः कुत्रचिन्न हि धावति ॥
nādaśravaṇataś cittam antaraṅgabhujaṅgamaḥ /
vismṛtya sarvam ekāgraḥ kutracin na hi dhāvati //
The metaphor is that of snake charming: beguiled by the inner sound, the snake that
is the mind becomes transfixed. Witnesses of the γ and δ groups have turaṅgamaḥ instead of bhujaṅgamaḥ, perhaps because forms from dhāv are unusual with the latter, but it is found at e.g. Garuḍapurāṇa (1.113.33ab).
In the third pāda we have read against α1 and α2 (as well as ε1 and π2), which have saṃsmṛtya sarvam instead of vismṛtya sarvam. The former could be understood to mean “with complete concentration” but we have
adopted vismṛtya on semantic grounds.
bhujaṅgamaḥ ] turaṅgamaḥ YCM, kuraṃgakaḥ HTK vismṛtya HTK ] viśūnyaṃ YCM sarvam YCM ] viśvam HTK ekāgraḥ HTK ] ekāgryaṃ YCM
मनोमत्तगजेन्द्रस्य विषयोद्यानचारिणः ।
नियामनसमर्थोऽयं निनादो निशिताङ्कुशः ॥
manomattagajendrasya viṣayodyānacāriṇaḥ /
niyāmanasamartho’yaṃ ninādo niśitāṅkuśaḥ //
The unusual form niyāmana is also found in Rasaśāstra works where it occurs in the context of restraining mercury and is a topic of discussion (e.g. Rasaprakāśasudhākara 1.23, Ānandakanda 1.4.58–59).
अन्तरङ्गस्य जविनो वाजिनः परिघायते ।
नादोपास्तिरतो नित्यमवधार्यापि योगिना ॥*
antaraṅgasya javino vājinaḥ parighāyate /
nādopāstir ato nityam avadhāryāpi yoginā //*
antaraṃgaturaṃgasya vājinaḥ paridhāvataḥ/
nādopāstikhalīnaṃ hi niyāmanakaraṃ dṛḍham//
नादोऽन्तरङ्गसारङ्गबन्धने वागुरायते ।
अन्तरङ्गकुरङ्गस्य रोधे व्याधायतेऽपि च ॥*
nādo’ntaraṅgasāraṅgabandhane vāgurāyate /
antaraṅgakuraṅgasya rodhe vyādhāyate’pi ca //*
rodhe vyādhāyate ’pi ca ] bandhane līyate ’pi ca YCM, nādo vyādhāyate ’pi ca HTK
घण्टादिनादसक्तस्तब्धान्तःकरणहरिणस्य ।
प्रहरणमतिसुकरं स्याच्छरसंधाता प्रवीणश्चेत् ॥
ghaṇṭādinādasaktastabdhāntaḥkaraṇahariṇasya /
praharaṇam atisukaraṃ syāc charasaṃdhātā pravīṇaś cet //
अनाहतस्य शब्दस्य तस्य शब्दस्य यो ध्वनिः ।
ध्वनेरन्तर्गतं ज्योतिर्ज्योतिरन्तर्गतं मनः ।
तन्मनो विलयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥*
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ /
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotirantargataṃ manaḥ /
tan mano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //*
The source of these lines may be the Uttaragītā as they occur in its published edition. However, in one of its manuscripts (NGMPP E 2098-11) these three lines are omitted from Kṛṣṇa’s words, which start with oṃkāra. The author of the Upāsanāsārasaṅgraha (f. 111) has quoted these lines and attributed them to the Gītāsāra.
jyotirantar YCM ] jyotiṣo ’ntar HYS
अनाहतध्वनेरन्तर्ज्ञेयं यत्सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मकम् ।
मनस्तत्र लयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥*
anāhatadhvaner antar jñeyaṃ yat sūkṣmasūkṣmakam /
manas tatra layaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //*
तावदाकाशसंकल्पो यावच्छब्दः प्रवर्तते ।
निःशब्दं तत्परं ब्रह्म परमात्मा समीर्यते ॥
tāvad ākāśasaṃkalpo yāvac chabdaḥ pravartate /
niḥśabdaṃ tat paraṃ brahma paramātmā samīryate //
paraṃ ] para VM samīryate ] sa gīyate VM
यत्किंचिन्नादरूपेण श्रूयते शक्तिरेव सा ।
यस्तच्छ्रोता निराकारः स एव परमेश्वरः ॥
yat kiṃcin nādarūpeṇa śrūyate śaktir eva sā /
yas tacchrotā nirākāraḥ sa eva parameśvaraḥ //
nādarūpeṇa ] nāmarūpeṇa YCM HSC yas tac YCM ] yasya HSC
श्रवणमुखनयननासानिरोधनं नैव कर्तव्यम् ।
शुद्धसुषुम्णासरणौ स्फुटममलः श्रूयते नादः ॥
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanaṃ naiva kartavyam /
śuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau sphuṭam amalaḥ śrūyate nādaḥ //
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanaṃ naiva kartavyaṃ ] śravaṇapuṭanayananāsāpuṭarodhanaṃ kāryam YCM, śravaṇapuṭanayanayugalanāsāmukharodham eva kartavyaṃ HSC, śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanenaiva SLU śuddhasuṣumṇāśaraṇau SLU ] śrīśuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau YCM, śuddhasuṣumṇāśaraṇe HSC
नादः शक्तिरिति ख्यातो नादज्ञानं सदाशिवः ।
ज्ञेये ज्ञाने च नष्टे तु उन्मन्येवावशिष्यते ॥
nādaḥ śaktir iti khyāto nādajñānaṃ sadāśivaḥ /
jñeye jñāne ca naṣṭe tu unmany evāvaśiṣyate //
nādaḥ śaktir HTK ] nādaga...r USS khyāto HTK ] jñeyaṃ USS nāda HTK ] nādo USS jñeye jñāne ca naṣṭe tu ] jñeyajñāne vilīne ’ṃtaḥ USS, nādajñāne vinaṣṭe ca HTK unmany evāvaśiṣyate ] sonmany evāviśiṣyate USS, tad unmany eva śiṣyate HTK
नादो यावन्मनस्तावन्नादान्ते तु मनोन्मनी ।
सशब्दं कथितं व्योम निःशब्दं ब्रह्म कथ्यते ॥
nādo yāvan manas tāvan nādānte tu manonmanī /
saśabdaṃ kathitaṃ vyoma niḥśabdaṃ brahma kathyate //
vyoma ] vāte HTK
सदा नादानुसन्धानात्संक्षीणे वासनाचये ।
निरञ्जने विलीयेते निश्चितं मनमारुतौ ॥
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇe vāsanācaye /
nirañjane vilīyete niścitaṃ manamārutau //
The term nirañjana can refer to the highest deity or the highest state of mind (see HP 4.32/X4.3 where
it is said to be a synonym of samādhi). Here it is likely to mean the deity because of devo nirañjanaḥ (‘perfect deity’) in X4.114.
The compound manamārutau with the aiśa form mana is attested in both the ε and η groups. Cf. X4.59b manamadhyagām (in a verse taken from the Candrāvalokana).
caye ] kṣaye HTK vilīyate ] ca līyate HTK manamārutau ] cittamārutau HTK
Cf. Nādabindūpaniṣat 49saśabdaś cākṣare kṣīṇe niḥśabdaṃ paramaṃ padam/
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇā vāsanā bhavet//
नादकोटिसहस्राणि बिन्दुकोटिशतानि च ।
सर्वे तत्र लयं यान्ति यत्र देवो निरञ्जनः ॥
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca /
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti yatra devo nirañjanaḥ //
On the meaning of devo nirañjana, see the note to X4.112.
... ante yāti paraṃ sthānaṃ yatra devo nirañjanaḥ/
iti bhaviṣyapurāṇoktā dharmaghaṭavratakathā samāptā//
युवा वृद्धोऽतिवृद्धो वा व्याधितो दुर्बलोऽपि वा ।
अभ्यासात्सिद्धिमाप्नोति सर्वयोगेष्वतन्द्रितः ॥
yuvā vṛddho’tivṛddho vā vyādhito durbalo’pi vā /
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ //
See 1.64 for sources and testimonia.
काष्ठगोष्ठीप्रपञ्चेन किं सखे श्रूयतामिदम् ।
पुरा मत्स्येन्द्रबोधार्थमादिनाथोदितं वचः ॥
kāṣṭhagoṣṭhīprapañcena kiṃ sakhe śrūyatām idam /
purā matsyendrabodhārtham ādināthoditaṃ vacaḥ //
This verse may have been composed by Svātmārāma to introduce the next two verses, which are from the Candrāvalokana, a dialogue between Matsyendra and Śiva. Verse 1.34, which may also be authorial like this one, has the vocative sakhe.
prapañcena ] prasaṅgena YCM kiṃ sakhe śrūyatām idam ] nādam antargataṃ śṛṇu YCM bodhārtham ] bodhāya YCM
यावन्नैव प्रविशति चरन्मारुतो मध्यमार्गे
यावद्बिन्दुर्न भवति दृढः प्राणवातप्रबद्धः ।
यावद्व्योम्ना सहजसदृशं जायते नैव तत्त्वं
तावत्सर्वं वदति यदिदं दम्भमिथ्याप्रलापः ॥*
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārge
yāvad bindur na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabaddhaḥ /
yāvad vyomnā sahajasadṛśaṃ jāyate naiva tattvaṃ
tāvat sarvaṃ vadati yad idaṃ dambhamithyāpralāpaḥ //*
vātaprabaddhaḥ ] vātaprabandhaḥ CA, ghātaprabuddhaḥ CAv.l., vāyuḥ prabuddhaḥ CAv.l., vātaprabuddhaḥ CAv.l. sahajasadṛśaṃ ] sadṛśa sarasaṃ CA naiva tattvaṃ ] nonmanatvaṃ CAs vadati yad idaṃ ] yadi ca vadate CA
prabaddhaḥ YCM ] prabaddhe USS, prabandhaḥ HTK naiva tatvam YCM ] nātmatattvaṃ USS, naiva cittaṃ HTK yad YCM USS ] tad HTK
ज्ञात्वा सुषुम्णासद्भेदं कृत्वा वायुं च मध्यगम् ।
कृत्वासावैन्दवे स्थाने घ्राणरन्ध्रे निरोधयेत् ॥
jñātvā suṣumṇāsadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam /
kṛtvāsāv aindave sthāne ghrāṇarandhre nirodhayet //
sadbhedaṃ CA ] tatbhedaṃ CAv.l. kṛtvāsāv aindave CA ] kṛtvādbaindave CAv.l.
sadbhedaṃ HSC ] tadbhedaṃ USS kṛtvāsāv aindave sthāne ] kṛtvāsau baindavasthāne USS, sthitvā sadaiva svasthena HSC, sthitvāsau baindavasthāne YKU ghrāṇarandhre USS YKU ] prāṇarandhraṃ HSC
इडायां पिङ्गलायां च चरतश्चन्द्रभास्करौ ।
चन्द्रस्तामस इत्युक्तः सूर्यो राजस उच्यते ॥
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca carataś candrabhāskarau /
candras tāmasa ity uktaḥ sūryo rājasa ucyate //
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca parataś candrabhāskarau//
carataś candrabhāskarau YCM ] somasūryau pratiṣṭhitau HRĀ candras tāmasa ity uktas sūryo rājasa ucyate YCM ] tāmaso rājasaś caiva savyadakṣinasaṃsthitau HRĀ
तावेव धत्तः सकलं कालं रात्रिंदिवात्मकम् ।
भोक्त्री सुषुम्णा कालस्य गुह्यमेतदुदाहृतम् ॥
tāv eva dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ rātriṃdivātmakam /
bhoktrī suṣumṇā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam //
The variant readings of pāda a which name the sun and moon are likely to have arisen due to the absence of the preceding verse in ε, ζ, and η.
dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ YY ] sakalaṃ dhattaḥ kālaṃ VS rātriṃ VS ] rātri YY
rātriṃ YCM ] rātri HSC guhyam etad udāhṛtam YCM ] guhyate tad udīritaṃ HSC
षट्चक्रं षोडशाधारं त्रिधा लक्ष्यं गुणत्रयम् ।
शेषं तु ग्रन्थविस्तारं त्रिकूटं परमं पदम् ॥
ṣaṭcakraṃ ṣoḍaśādhāraṃ tridhā lakṣyaṃ guṇatrayam /
śeṣaṃ tu granthavistāraṃ trikūṭaṃ paramaṃ padam //
The three components of the yogic body listed here are found together in other texts, the earliest being Netratantra 7.1ab (ṛtucakraṃ svarādhāraṃ trilakṣyaṃ vyomapañcakam). However, we are yet to find a source for this list that includes the three guṇas.
ṣaṭcakraṃ ṣoḍaśādhāraṃ trilakṣaṃ vyomapañcakam/
svadehe ye na jānanti kathaṃ sidhyanti yoginaḥ//
कुण्डली कुटिलाकारा सर्पवत्परिकीर्तिता ।
सा शक्तिश्चालिता येन स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
kuṇḍalī kuṭilākārā sarpavat parikīrtitā /
sā śaktiś cālitā yena sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
यदा कूटं त्रिकूटस्थं चित्तं चित्रं निरन्तरम् ।
कुण्डल्यास्तु प्रयोगेण स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
yadā kūṭaṃ trikūṭasthaṃ cittaṃ citraṃ nirantaram /
kuṇḍalyās tu prayogeṇa sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
We are unsure of the meaning of kūṭa here. As suggested to us by Sven Sellmer, it may mean the tip of the tongue which in, for example Khecarīvidyā 1.65–67 and 3.16–17, is to be placed at trikūṭa as part of the practice of khecarīmudrā.
citraṃ ] cittaṃ USS
द्वासप्ततिसहस्राणि नाडीद्वाराणि पञ्जरे ।
सुषुम्णा शाम्भवी शक्तिः शेषास्त्वेव निरर्थकाः ॥*
dvāsaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi pañjare /
suṣumṇā śāmbhavī śaktiḥ śeṣās tv eva nirarthakāḥ //*
The compound nāḍīdvāra is not found elsewhere (other than as nāḍīdvāreṇa) and its meaning here is unclear. Brahmānanda understands dvārāṇi to refer to routes by which breath enters the body (dvārāṇi vāyupraveśamārgāḥ) and we have translated nāḍīdvārāṇi accordingly.
dvāsaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi USS YŚU ] sūryācandramasau kṛtvā viditvā kara HSC eva USS HSC ] anye YŚU
वायुः परिचितो यत्नादग्निना सह कुण्डलीम् ।
बोधयित्वा सुषुम्णायां प्रविशेदनिरोधतः ॥
vāyuḥ paricito yatnād agninā saha kuṇḍalīm /
bodhayitvā suṣumṇāyāṃ praviśed anirodhataḥ //
yatnād ] yasmād HSC ŚP
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे सिध्यत्येव मनोन्मनी ।
अन्यथा विविधाभ्यासाः प्रयासायैव योगिनाम् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe sidhyaty eva manonmanī /
anyathā vividhābhyāsāḥ prayāsāyaiva yoginām //
vāhini HSC ] vāhinī USS manonmanī HSC ] manonmani USS anyathā USS ] anye ye HSC prayāsāyaiva USS ] prayāsā eva HSC
पवनो बध्यते येन मनस्तेनैव बध्यते ।
मनश्च बध्यते येन पवनस्तेन बध्यते ॥
pavano badhyate yena manas tenaiva badhyate /
manaś ca badhyate yena pavanas tena badhyate //
Brahmānanda understands yena here to refer to the yogi. We have taken it to refer to a practice.
हेतुद्वयं तु चित्तस्य वासना च समीरणः ।
तयोर्विनष्ट एकस्मिन्द्रुतं द्वावपि नश्यतः ॥
hetudvayaṃ tu cittasya vāsanā ca samīraṇaḥ /
tayor vinaṣṭa ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ //
The emendation of drutaṃ in the last verse quarter has been made to restore the faulty readings of the α manuscripts
(i.e. druttaṃ, dhṛtaṃ, dṛtaṃ), which are similar to an incorrect reading in an important witness of the source
text, the Gorakṣaśataka (T, dhṛtaṃ). The emendation to drutaṃ is based on the parallel verse in the Mokṣopāya and its related recensions, which have kṣipraṃ instead.
tu ] ca GŚ drutaṃ dvāv api GŚ (em.) ] dhṛtaṃ dvāv api GŚv.l., tasmai dvāv api GŚv.l., tad dvāv api vi° GŚv.l.
Cf. Mokṣopāya 5.92.48dve bīje rāma cittasya prāṇaspandanavāsane/
ekasmiṃś ca tayoḥ kṣīṇe kṣipraṃ dve api naśyataḥ//
tu ] hi YKU ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ ] ekasmiṃs tad dvāv api vinaśyataḥ YKU
मनो यत्र विलीयेत पवनस्तत्र लीयते ।
पवनो लीयते यत्र मनस्तत्रैव लीयते ॥
mano yatra vilīyeta pavanas tatra līyate /
pavano līyate yatra manas tatraiva līyate //
दुग्धाम्बुवत्संमिलितौ सदैव
तुल्यक्रियौ मानसमारुतौ हि ।
यावन्मनस्तत्र मरुत्प्रवृत्ति-
र्यावन्मरुच्चापि मनःप्रवृत्तिः ॥
dugdhāmbuvat saṃmilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau hi /
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛtti-
r yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ //
Complementing his understanding of the previous verse, Brahmānanda (and η2) has yato ... tatra in 4.70cd, taking it to mean yatra ... tatra and to be referring to cakras.
sadaiva A ] tathaiva Av.l., sad eva Av.l. hi ] ca A
hi ] ca YCM HTK yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ ] yāvan marut tatra manaḥpravṛttiḥ YCM, tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśaḥ HTK
तत्रैकनाशादपरस्य नाश
एकप्रवृत्तेरपरप्रवृत्तिः ।
अध्वस्तयोश्चेन्द्रियवर्गबुद्धि-
र्विध्वस्तयोर्मोक्षपदस्य सिद्धिः ॥
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśa
ekapravṛtter aparapravṛttiḥ /
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhi-
r vidhvastayor mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ //
buddhir A ] vṛttir Av.l., vṛddhir Av.l., vidhi Av.l., viddhir Av.l.
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhir ] adhvastayoḥ svendriyavargavṛddhir YCM, adhvastayor indriyavargavṛttir HTK
वायुमार्गे त्वसंचारे सकलां लभते महीम् ।
तथाष्टगुणमैश्वर्यं सत्यं सत्यं वरानने ॥
vāyumārge tv asaṃcāre sakalāṃ labhate mahīm /
tathāṣṭaguṇam aiśvaryaṃ satyaṃ satyaṃ varānane //
As it is found in its source text, the Jñānasāra, this verse says that the yogi flies around the world with the speed of the wind (vāyuvegena). We have understood Svātmārāma to have edited the verse to reflect the subject of the previous two verses in which the breath is to be stopped.
vāyumārge tv asaṃcāre ] vāyuvegena deveśi JS labhate ] bhramate JS tathāṣṭāguṇam ] aṣṭadhāguṇam JS varānane ] na cānyathā JS
tv ] py HSC labhate ] bhramate HSC satyaṃ satyaṃ varānane ] ity āha bhagavān śivaḥ HSC
यदा संक्षीयते प्राणो मानसं च विलीयते ।
तदा समरसत्वं यत्समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
yadā saṃkṣīyate prāṇo mānasaṃ ca vilīyate /
tadā samarasatvaṃ yat samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
The six-chapter Vivekamārtaṇḍa is attributed to Viśvarūpa, which perhaps explains the attribution of this verse to him.
yat ] ca VM
mānasaṃ ca YBhD HSC ] mānaseva HSCv.l. vilīyate ] pralīyate YBhD HSC tadā YBhDv.l.HSC ] yadā YBhD yat HSC ] ca YBhD so ’bhidhīyate HSC ] procyate tadā YBhD
मनःस्थैर्ये स्थिरो वायुस् ततो बिन्दुः स्थिरो भवेत् ।
बिन्दुस्थैर्योदयात्पुत्र पिण्डस्थैर्यं प्रजायते ॥
manaḥsthairye sthiro vāyus tato binduḥ sthiro bhavet /
bindusthairyodayāt putra piṇḍasthairyaṃ prajāyate //
The vocative putra in pāda c suggests that this verse is from a source text that we are yet to identify.
sthairyodayāt putra ] sthairyād athāpannaṃ YCM
दृष्टिः स्थिरा यस्य विनैव दृश्या-
द्वायुः स्थिरो यस्य विना प्रयत्नात् ।
चित्तं स्थिरं यस्य विनावलम्बा-
त्स एव योगी स गुरुः स सेव्यः ॥
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyā-
d vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt /
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalambā-
t sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ //
dṛśyaṃ vinā sthirā dṛṣṭir manaś cālambanaṃ vinā/
vināyāsaṃ sthiro vāyur yasya syāt sa guruḥ priye//
dṛśyād HSC ] lakṣyāt HRĀ, dṛśyaṃ YCM prayatnāt HRĀ HSC ] prayatnaṃ YCM lambāt HRĀ ] laṃbaṃ YCM HSC eva yogī HRĀ YCM ] rājayogī HSC sa sevyaḥ HRĀ HSC ] saṃsevyaḥ YCM
प्रवेशे निर्गमे वामे दक्षिणे चोर्ध्वमप्यधः ।
न यस्य वायुर्वहति स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
praveśe nirgame vāme dakṣiṇe cordhvam apy adhaḥ /
na yasya vāyur vahati sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
vahati ] vrajati GŚ
सर्वे हठलयोपाया राजयोगस्य सिद्धये ।
राजयोगसमारूढः पुरुषः कालवञ्चकः ॥*
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogasya siddhaye /
rājayogasamārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcakaḥ //*
haṭhalayopāyā HTK ] haṭhalayābhyāsād YCM rājayoga HTK ] rājayogaṃ YCM
इति तु सकलयोगशास्त्रसिन्धोः
परिमथितादवकृष्टसारभूतम् ।
अनुभवत हठामृतं यमीन्द्रा
यदि भवतामजरामरत्ववाञ्छा ॥*
iti tu sakalayogaśāstrasindhoḥ
parimathitād avakṛṣṭasārabhūtam /
anubhavata haṭhāmṛtaṃ yamīndrā
yadi bhavatām ajarāmaratvavāñchā //*
विद्यातीर्थे जगति विबुधाः साधवः सत्यतीर्थे
गङ्गातीर्थे मलिनमनसो योगिनो ज्ञानतीर्थे ।
धारातीर्थे धरणिपतयो दानतीर्थे धनाढ्याः
लज्जातीर्थे कुलयुवतयः पातकं क्षालयन्ति ॥
vidyātīrthe jagati vibudhāḥ sādhavaḥ satyatīrthe
gaṅgātīrthe malinamanaso yogino jñānatīrthe /
dhārātīrthe dharaṇipatayo dānatīrthe dhanāḍhyāḥ
lajjātīrthe kulayuvatayaḥ pātakaṃ kṣālayanti //
नमः शिवाय गुरवे नादबिन्दुकलात्मने ।
निरञ्जनपदं याति नित्यं यत्रपरायणः ॥
namaḥ śivāya gurave nādabindukalātmane /
nirañjanapadaṃ yāti nityaṃ yatraparāyaṇaḥ //
The greyscale verses at the beginning of chapter four are found in all collated manuscripts
except those of the α group. These verses appear to have been added at an early stage
in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā in order to create a new opening for this chapter. The revised beginning opens with
a maṅgala verse of the kind typically found at the start of a text. The second verse, which
is from the Gorakṣaśataka, introduces the topic of samādhi. In this expanded version, two verses listing the synonyms of rājayoga then follow. In the α group, however, these verses are placed at 4.32–33, and some
manuscripts, such as π2, place them at both locations. Although the remaining additional verses relate to
various themes within chapter four, when they are read together they constitute a
a loosely organised collection on samādhi, rājayoga, the importance of the guru, the dissolution of the breath, Suṣumṇā, and related
topics.
In contrast to this revised opening, the α group begins with a cohesive discusson
on absorption (4.1–3) that transitions to the gaze (4.4) and a brief discussion of
śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās (4.5–4.8). The main topic of the chapter, which is meditating on the internal sound
(nādānusandhāna), begins at 4.12 in the α group (whereas in other groups it begins after fifty or
so verses). The hiasis on nādānusandhāna in the fourth chapter of the α group is consistent with the statement in verse 1.56
that nādānusandhāna is the fourth component of Haṭhayoga.
Its likely that the term nirañjanapada was understood here as samādhi because nirañjana is included in a list of synonyms of samādhi later in this chapter (4.32 = X4.3).
The triad nāda, bindu and kalā occurs in earlier works, in particular Śaiva Tantras, where it appears in contexts
of enunciating mantras (mantroccāra, e.g. Kubjikāmatatantra 7.65, Jñānārṇavatantra 2.4, Īśānaśivagurudevapaddhati 18–110, etc.) and sometimes qualifies deities (e.g. Parākhyatantra 5.156ab) and gurus (e.g. Gurugītā 64). The context can change the meaning of these terms, so we have chosen not to
translate them. For a discussion of their various meanings, see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol. 2: 68–73; vol. 3, 277–279.
nityaṃ yatra ] yatra yogī HV
अथेदानीं प्रवक्ष्यामि समाधिक्रममुत्तमम् ।
मृत्युघ्नं तु सुखोपायं ब्रह्मानन्दकरं परम् ॥
athedānīṃ pravakṣyāmi samādhikramam uttamam /
mṛtyughnaṃ tu sukhopāyaṃ brahmānandakaraṃ param //
sukhopāyaṃ ] sukhopāyair GŚ param ] sadā GŚ
राजयोगः समाधिश्च उन्मनी च मनोन्मनी ।
अमरौघोऽपि चाद्वैतं निरालम्बं निरञ्जनम् ॥*
rājayogaḥ samādhiś ca unmanī ca manonmanī /
amaraugho’pi cādvaitaṃ nirālambaṃ nirañjanam //*
अमनस्को लयस्तत्त्वं शून्याशून्यं परं पदम् ।
जीवन्मुक्तिश्च सहजं तुर्यं चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥
amanasko layas tattvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaṃ paraṃ padam /
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakāḥ //
ca YCM ] cāpy USS amaraugho ’pi cādvaitaṃ USS ] amaraughaughacāndrīva YCM layas tattvaṃ USS ] layaś caiva YCM paraṃ padaṃ USS ] parāparam YCM ekavācakāḥ ] ekavācakam YCM USS
सलिले सैन्धवं यद्वत् साम्यं भजति योगतः ।
तथात्ममनसोरैक्यं समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat sāmyaṃ bhajati yogataḥ /
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat ] ambusaindhavayoḥ sāmyaṃ VM sāmyaṃ bhajati ] yathā bhavati VM
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat HRĀ ] ambusaindhavayor aikyaṃ YBhD HTK sāmyaṃ bhajati ] sāmyaṃ bhavati HRĀ, yathā bhavati YBhD HTK yogataḥ YBhD HTK ] yogavit HRĀ samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate HRĀ ] samādhir abhidhīyate YBhD, samādhiḥ sa vidhīyate HTK
यदा संक्षीयते प्राणो मानसं च विलीयते ।
तदा समरसत्वं यत्समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
yadā saṃkṣīyate prāṇo mānasaṃ ca vilīyate /
tadā samarasatvaṃ yat samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
The six-chapter Vivekamārtaṇḍa is attributed to Viśvarūpa, which perhaps explains the attribution of this verse to him.
yat ] ca VM
mānasaṃ ca YBhD HSC ] mānaseva HSCv.l. vilīyate ] pralīyate YBhD HSC tadā YBhDv.l.HSC ] yadā YBhD yat HSC ] ca YBhD so ’bhidhīyate HSC ] procyate tadā YBhD
यत्समत्वं द्वयोरत्र जीवात्मपरमात्मनोः ।
समस्तनष्टसंकल्पः समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥*
yat samatvaṃ dvayor atra jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ /
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //*
yat samatvaṃ dvayor atra ] tat samatvaṃ bhaved atra HRĀ, yat sarvadvandvayor aikyaṃ YBhD
राजयोगस्य माहात्म्यं को वा जानाति तत्त्वतः ।
ज्ञानान्मुक्तिः स्थिरा सिद्धिर् गुरुवाक्येन लभ्यते ॥
rājayogasya māhātmyaṃ ko vā jānāti tattvataḥ /
jñānān muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena labhyate //
The third quarter of this verse has been subject to much revision in the Haṭhapradīpikā and the source text, the Amanaska. Unlike the manuscripts of the Amanaska, those of the Haṭhapradīpikā transmit sthirā, sthitiḥ or sthite after muktiḥ or mukti. We have adopted muktiḥ sthirā, the reading of ε, an important group for the grey-scaled verses.
muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena ] siddhir muktir iti guror jñānaṃ ca A
ko hi ] ko vā YCM jñānān muktiḥ sthirā siddhir guruvākyena labhyate ] tajjñānī vasate yatra sadeśaḥ puṇyabhājanam YCM
दुर्लभो विषयत्यागो दुर्लभं तत्त्वदर्शनम् ।
दुर्लभा सहजावस्था सद्गुरोः करुणां विना ॥
durlabho viṣayatyāgo durlabhaṃ tattvadarśanam /
durlabhā sahajāvasthā sadguroḥ karuṇāṃ vinā //
काष्ठगोष्ठीप्रपञ्चेन किं सखे श्रूयतामिदम् ।
पुरा मत्स्येन्द्रबोधार्थमादिनाथोदितं वचः ॥
kāṣṭhagoṣṭhīprapañcena kiṃ sakhe śrūyatām idam /
purā matsyendrabodhārtham ādināthoditaṃ vacaḥ //
This verse may have been composed by Svātmārāma to introduce the next two verses, which are from the Candrāvalokana, a dialogue between Matsyendra and Śiva. Verse 1.34, which may also be authorial like this one, has the vocative sakhe.
prapañcena ] prasaṅgena YCM kiṃ sakhe śrūyatām idam ] nādam antargataṃ śṛṇu YCM bodhārtham ] bodhāya YCM
यावन्नैव प्रविशति चरन्मारुतो मध्यमार्गे
यावद्बिन्दुर्न भवति दृढः प्राणवातप्रबद्धः ।
यावद्व्योम्ना सहजसदृशं जायते नैव तत्त्वं
तावत्सर्वं वदति यदिदं दम्भमिथ्याप्रलापः ॥*
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārge
yāvad bindur na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabaddhaḥ /
yāvad vyomnā sahajasadṛśaṃ jāyate naiva tattvaṃ
tāvat sarvaṃ vadati yad idaṃ dambhamithyāpralāpaḥ //*
vātaprabaddhaḥ ] vātaprabandhaḥ CA, ghātaprabuddhaḥ CAv.l., vāyuḥ prabuddhaḥ CAv.l., vātaprabuddhaḥ CAv.l. sahajasadṛśaṃ ] sadṛśa sarasaṃ CA naiva tattvaṃ ] nonmanatvaṃ CAs vadati yad idaṃ ] yadi ca vadate CA
prabaddhaḥ YCM ] prabaddhe USS, prabandhaḥ HTK naiva tatvam YCM ] nātmatattvaṃ USS, naiva cittaṃ HTK yad YCM USS ] tad HTK
विविधैरासनैः कुम्भैर्विचित्रैः करणैरपि ।
प्रबुद्धायामादिशक्तौ प्राणः शून्ये विलीयते ॥
vividhair āsanaiḥ kumbhair vicitraiḥ karaṇair api /
prabuddhāyām ādiśaktau prāṇaḥ śūnye vilīyate //
In Jyotsnā 4.10, Brahmānanda understands ‘the void’ (śūnya) as the central channel. In Haṭhapradīpikā 3.4, śūnyapadavī is a synonym of Suṣumṇā.
vicitraiḥ karaṇair ] vicitrakaraṇair YCM
उत्पन्नशक्तिबोधस्य त्यक्तनिःशेषकर्मणः ।
योगिनः सहजावस्था स्वयमेव प्रकाशते ॥
utpannaśaktibodhasya tyaktaniḥśeṣakarmaṇaḥ /
yoginaḥ sahajāvasthā svayam eva prakāśate //
prakāśate ] prajāyate YCM
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे शून्यं विशति मानसे ।
तथा समस्तकर्माणि निर्मूलयति मर्मवित् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe śūnyaṃ viśati mānase /
tathā samastakarmāṇi nirmūlayati marmavit //
śūnyaṃ ] śūnye YCM USS mānase USS ] mārute YCM tathā YCM ] tadā USS
अमरौघ नमस्तुभ्यं सोऽपि कालस्त्वया हतः ।
पतितं वदने यस्य जगदेतच्चराचरम् ॥
amaraugha namas tubhyaṃ so’pi kālas tvayā hataḥ /
patitaṃ vadane yasya jagad etac carācaram //
The vocative form of amaraugha is well attested and closely related to two other variants, amarogha and amaraughi. The term amaraugha appears in a list of synonyms for samādhi in Haṭhapradīpikā 4.32. We have adopted this reading as it is not unprecedented for an author to pay homage to samādhi (e.g. Haṭhapradīpikā X4.70) and to other yoga techniques (e.g. Yogatārāvalī 4a: nādānusandhāna namo ’stu tubhyaṃ). It is possible that this verse was inserted here together with the next one, which also contains the term amaraugha.
चित्ते समत्वमापन्ने वायौ व्रजति मध्यमे ।
तदामरौघवज्रोली †तदाशा जीवितेऽपि च† ॥
citte samatvam āpanne vāyau vrajati madhyame /
tadāmaraughavajrolī †tadāśā jīvite’pi ca† //
The second line of this verse is problematic in both the source text (the Amaraugha) and the manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā. For the last pāda, we have adopted the closest reading to that of the source text but cannot make sense of it, so have cruxed it. In addition to the tentative translation we have made, one could understand amaraughavajrolī and āśājīvite as dual forms: “ldots then amaraugha and vajrolī arise, and there is hope and life too”. The line was rewritten in η2 and other manuscripts, as well as the Jyotsnā (4.14cd), to include the two variations of vajrolī, namely amarolī and sahajolī.
samatvam AOv.l. ] tu sattvam AO vajrolī ] vajrolis AO tadāśā jīvite ’pi ] tadāśājīvitasya AO
ज्ञानं कुतो मनसि जीवति देवि यावत्
प्राणोऽपि जीवति मनो म्रियते न तावत् ।
प्राणो मनो द्वयमिदं विलयं प्रयाति
मोक्षं स गच्छति नरो न कथंचिदन्यः ॥
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati devi yāvat
prāṇo’pi jīvati mano mriyate na tāvat /
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ vilayaṃ prayāti
mokṣaṃ sa gacchati naro na kathaṃcid anyaḥ //
na tāvat ] na yāvat CA
devi yāvat ] devi tāvat YCM, durvikalpa HSC tāvat ] yāvat YCM HSC vilayaṃ prayāti ] vilayaṃ nayed yo YCM, na vilīyate ’tra HSC naro na kathañcid anyaḥ YCM ] naro ’tra kathaṃ cid eva HSC
ज्ञात्वा सुषुम्णासद्भेदं कृत्वा वायुं च मध्यगम् ।
कृत्वासावैन्दवे स्थाने घ्राणरन्ध्रे निरोधयेत् ॥
jñātvā suṣumṇāsadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam /
kṛtvāsāv aindave sthāne ghrāṇarandhre nirodhayet //
sadbhedaṃ CA ] tatbhedaṃ CAv.l. kṛtvāsāv aindave CA ] kṛtvādbaindave CAv.l.
sadbhedaṃ HSC ] tadbhedaṃ USS kṛtvāsāv aindave sthāne ] kṛtvāsau baindavasthāne USS, sthitvā sadaiva svasthena HSC, sthitvāsau baindavasthāne YKU ghrāṇarandhre USS YKU ] prāṇarandhraṃ HSC
तावेव धत्तः सकलं कालं रात्रिंदिवात्मकम् ।
भोक्त्री सुषुम्णा कालस्य गुह्यमेतदुदाहृतम् ॥
tāv eva dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ rātriṃdivātmakam /
bhoktrī suṣumṇā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam //
The variant readings of pāda a which name the sun and moon are likely to have arisen due to the absence of the preceding verse in ε, ζ, and η.
dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ YY ] sakalaṃ dhattaḥ kālaṃ VS rātriṃ VS ] rātri YY
rātriṃ YCM ] rātri HSC guhyam etad udāhṛtam YCM ] guhyate tad udīritaṃ HSC
द्वासप्ततिसहस्राणि नाडीद्वाराणि पञ्जरे ।
सुषुम्णा शाम्भवी शक्तिः शेषास्त्वेव निरर्थकाः ॥*
dvāsaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi pañjare /
suṣumṇā śāmbhavī śaktiḥ śeṣās tv eva nirarthakāḥ //*
The compound nāḍīdvāra is not found elsewhere (other than as nāḍīdvāreṇa) and its meaning here is unclear. Brahmānanda understands dvārāṇi to refer to routes by which breath enters the body (dvārāṇi vāyupraveśamārgāḥ) and we have translated nāḍīdvārāṇi accordingly.
dvāsaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi USS YŚU ] sūryācandramasau kṛtvā viditvā kara HSC eva USS HSC ] anye YŚU
वायुः परिचितो यत्नादग्निना सह कुण्डलीम् ।
बोधयित्वा सुषुम्णायां प्रविशेदनिरोधतः ॥
vāyuḥ paricito yatnād agninā saha kuṇḍalīm /
bodhayitvā suṣumṇāyāṃ praviśed anirodhataḥ //
yatnād ] yasmād HSC ŚP
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे सिध्यत्येव मनोन्मनी ।
अन्यथा विविधाभ्यासाः प्रयासायैव योगिनाम् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe sidhyaty eva manonmanī /
anyathā vividhābhyāsāḥ prayāsāyaiva yoginām //
vāhini HSC ] vāhinī USS manonmanī HSC ] manonmani USS anyathā USS ] anye ye HSC prayāsāyaiva USS ] prayāsā eva HSC
पवनो बध्यते येन मनस्तेनैव बध्यते ।
मनश्च बध्यते येन पवनस्तेन बध्यते ॥
pavano badhyate yena manas tenaiva badhyate /
manaś ca badhyate yena pavanas tena badhyate //
Brahmānanda understands yena here to refer to the yogi. We have taken it to refer to a practice.
हेतुद्वयं तु चित्तस्य वासना च समीरणः ।
तयोर्विनष्ट एकस्मिन्द्रुतं द्वावपि नश्यतः ॥
hetudvayaṃ tu cittasya vāsanā ca samīraṇaḥ /
tayor vinaṣṭa ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ //
The emendation of drutaṃ in the last verse quarter has been made to restore the faulty readings of the α manuscripts
(i.e. druttaṃ, dhṛtaṃ, dṛtaṃ), which are similar to an incorrect reading in an important witness of the source
text, the Gorakṣaśataka (T, dhṛtaṃ). The emendation to drutaṃ is based on the parallel verse in the Mokṣopāya and its related recensions, which have kṣipraṃ instead.
tu ] ca GŚ drutaṃ dvāv api GŚ (em.) ] dhṛtaṃ dvāv api GŚv.l., tasmai dvāv api GŚv.l., tad dvāv api vi° GŚv.l.
Cf. Mokṣopāya 5.92.48dve bīje rāma cittasya prāṇaspandanavāsane/
ekasmiṃś ca tayoḥ kṣīṇe kṣipraṃ dve api naśyataḥ//
tu ] hi YKU ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ ] ekasmiṃs tad dvāv api vinaśyataḥ YKU
मनो यत्र विलीयेत पवनस्तत्र लीयते ।
पवनो लीयते यत्र मनस्तत्रैव लीयते ॥
mano yatra vilīyeta pavanas tatra līyate /
pavano līyate yatra manas tatraiva līyate //
दुग्धाम्बुवत्संमिलितौ सदैव
तुल्यक्रियौ मानसमारुतौ हि ।
यावन्मनस्तत्र मरुत्प्रवृत्ति-
र्यावन्मरुच्चापि मनःप्रवृत्तिः ॥
dugdhāmbuvat saṃmilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau hi /
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛtti-
r yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ //
Complementing his understanding of the previous verse, Brahmānanda (and η2) has yato ... tatra in 4.70cd, taking it to mean yatra ... tatra and to be referring to cakras.
sadaiva A ] tathaiva Av.l., sad eva Av.l. hi ] ca A
hi ] ca YCM HTK yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ ] yāvan marut tatra manaḥpravṛttiḥ YCM, tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśaḥ HTK
तत्रैकनाशादपरस्य नाश
एकप्रवृत्तेरपरप्रवृत्तिः ।
अध्वस्तयोश्चेन्द्रियवर्गबुद्धि-
र्विध्वस्तयोर्मोक्षपदस्य सिद्धिः ॥
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśa
ekapravṛtter aparapravṛttiḥ /
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhi-
r vidhvastayor mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ //
buddhir A ] vṛttir Av.l., vṛddhir Av.l., vidhi Av.l., viddhir Av.l.
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhir ] adhvastayoḥ svendriyavargavṛddhir YCM, adhvastayor indriyavargavṛttir HTK
रसस्य मनसश्चैव चञ्चलत्वं स्वभावतः ।
रसबन्धे मनोबन्धे किं न सिध्यति भूतले ॥
rasasya manasaś caiva cañcalatvaṃ svabhāvataḥ /
rasabandhe manobandhe kiṃ na sidhyati bhūtale //
svabhāvataḥ ] samāsataḥ YCM rasabandhe manobandhe ] raso baddho mano baddhaṃ YCM
मूर्छितो हरते व्याधिं मृतो जीवयति स्वयम् ।
बद्धः खेचरतां धत्ते रसो वायुश्च भैरवि ॥
mūrchito harate vyādhiṃ mṛto jīvayati svayam /
baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ dhatte raso vāyuś ca bhairavi //
The Rasārṇava is the likely source of this verse given the vocative, bhairavi. Similar verses are found in other yoga texts (see Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 57).
Disregarding the technical meaning of the terms, the verse plays with apparent contradictions
(virodhābhāsa) in saying literally that, when mercury and the breath are unconscious, they cure
disease; when dead, they restore life and, when bound, they enable one to fly up.
harate ] harati RA
Cf. Amṛtasiddhi 7.7abmūrcchito harate vyādhiṃ baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ nayet/
वायुमार्गे त्वसंचारे सकलां लभते महीम् ।
तथाष्टगुणमैश्वर्यं सत्यं सत्यं वरानने ॥
vāyumārge tv asaṃcāre sakalāṃ labhate mahīm /
tathāṣṭaguṇam aiśvaryaṃ satyaṃ satyaṃ varānane //
As it is found in its source text, the Jñānasāra, this verse says that the yogi flies around the world with the speed of the wind (vāyuvegena). We have understood Svātmārāma to have edited the verse to reflect the subject of the previous two verses in which the breath is to be stopped.
vāyumārge tv asaṃcāre ] vāyuvegena deveśi JS labhate ] bhramate JS tathāṣṭāguṇam ] aṣṭadhāguṇam JS varānane ] na cānyathā JS
tv ] py HSC labhate ] bhramate HSC satyaṃ satyaṃ varānane ] ity āha bhagavān śivaḥ HSC
मनःस्थैर्ये स्थिरो वायुस् ततो बिन्दुः स्थिरो भवेत् ।
बिन्दुस्थैर्योदयात्पुत्र पिण्डस्थैर्यं प्रजायते ॥
manaḥsthairye sthiro vāyus tato binduḥ sthiro bhavet /
bindusthairyodayāt putra piṇḍasthairyaṃ prajāyate //
The vocative putra in pāda c suggests that this verse is from a source text that we are yet to identify.
sthairyodayāt putra ] sthairyād athāpannaṃ YCM
इन्द्रियाणां मनो नाथो मनोनाथस्तु मारुतः ।
मारुतस्य लयो नाथस्तं नाथं लयमाश्रयेत् ॥
indriyāṇāṃ mano nātho manonāthas tu mārutaḥ /
mārutasya layo nāthas taṃ nāthaṃ layam āśrayet //
taṃ nāthaṃ layam āśrayet ] sa layo nādam āśritaḥ HRĀ YCM
सोऽयमेवास्तु मोक्षाख्यो मास्तु वापि मतान्तरे ।
मनःप्राणलयानन्दो मयि कश्चित्प्रवर्तते ॥
so’yam evāstu mokṣākhyo māstu vāpi matāntare /
manaḥprāṇalayānando mayi kaścit pravartate //
The manuscripts attest two versions of the second line. It appears that the reading of ε, ζ and π groups, which we have adopted, was changed to remove the first person pronoun. The modified reading is prevalent in the γ and δ manuscripts (manaḥprāṇalayānando nāpi kaś cit vibhidyate).
so ’yam evāstu ] ayam eva tu YCM māstu ] astu YCM layānando ] layo nādo YCM na ca ] mayi YCM pravartate ] vibhidyate YCM
प्रणष्टोच्छ्वासनिश्वासः प्रध्वस्तविषयग्रहः ।
निश्चेष्टो निर्विकारश्च लयो जयति योगिनाम् ॥
praṇaṣṭocchvāsaniśvāsaḥ pradhvastaviṣayagrahaḥ /
niśceṣṭo nirvikāraś ca layo jayati yoginām //
The fourth quarter of this verse differs from that of the North Indian recension of the Amanaska (quoted as the source) but is found in two South Indian manuscripts of the Amanaska.
nirvikāraś ca ] nirgatārambho A layo jayati yoginām Av.l. ] hy ānandaṃ yāti yogavit A, layo jayati yoginaḥ Av.l.
praṇaṣṭocchvāsa YCM ] praṇaṣṭaśvāsa HSC pradhvasta HSC ] vidhvasta YCM grahaḥ YCM ] jvaraḥ HSC nirvikāraś ca HSC ] nirgatārambho YCM layo jayati yoginām ] hy ānandayati yogikaḥ YCM, layo jayati yoginā HSC
उच्छिन्नसर्वसंकल्पो निःशेषाशेषचेष्टितः ।
स्वावगम्यो लयः कोऽपि जयतां वागगोचरः ॥
ucchinnasarvasaṃkalpo niḥśeṣāśeṣaceṣṭitaḥ /
svāvagamyo layaḥ ko’pi jayatāṃ vāgagocaraḥ //
jayatāṃ Av.l. ] jāyate A, jayatā Av.l., jñāyatāṃ Av.l., jagatāṃ Av.l., japatāṃ Av.l., layatāṃ Av.l.
niḥśeṣa ] nirgata YCM ceṣṭitaḥ ] ceṣṭakaḥ YCM
यत्र दृष्टिर्लयस्तत्र भूतेन्द्रियसनातनः ।
स्याच्छक्तिर्जीवभूतानां दृष्टिर्लक्ष्ये लयं गता ॥
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanaḥ /
syāc chaktir jīvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā //
layas ] manas CA KJN sanātanaḥ ] sanātanam CA, sapudgala KJN syāc chaktir ] sā śaktis CA, sa śāntis CAv.l.svaśakti KJN jīvabhūtānāṃ ] sarvabhūtānāṃ CA, jīvabhūtā hi KJN (conj. Hatley), jīvabhūtāni KJNv.l.
sanātanaḥ HTK ] sanātanī YCM HSC syād chaktir ] na sā śaktir HTK jīvabhūtānāṃ ] sarvabhūtānāṃ YCM HSC, bhāvabhūtānāṃ HTK dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā ] dṛṣṭir lekṣeṇa saṃgatā YCM HSC, dṛṣṭe lakṣe kṣayaṃ gatā HTK
वेदशास्त्रपुराणानि सामान्यगणिका इव ।
एकैव शाम्भवी मुद्रा गुप्ता कुलवधूरिव ॥
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva /
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva //
See Birch 2013: 286 for more parallel verses.
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni A ] vedaśāstrapurāṇādyāḥ Av.l., vedaśāstrāṇi sarvāṇi Av.l., vedaśāstrapurāṇādi Av.l.
purāṇāni HRĀ HTK ] purāṇaughāḥ YCM eṣā sā ] ekaiva HRĀ YCM HTK
अन्तर्लक्ष्यं बहिर्दृष्टिर्निमेषोन्मेषवर्जिता ।
एषा सा शाम्भवी मुद्रा सर्वतन्त्रेषु गोपिता ॥
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitā /
eṣā sā śāmbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā //
As seen in the witnesses of the Amanaska, which is the source of this verse, the spellings lakṣya and lakṣa occur randomly across the manuscripts. See Birch 2013: 287 for more parallel verses.
lakṣyaṃ A CA ] lakṣya Av.l., lakṣaṃ Av.l., lakṣā Av.l., lakṣo Av.l. varjitā A ] varjitaḥ CA eṣā sā ] eṣā hi A, iyaṃ sā CA
eṣā sā ] eṣā tu YCM
अन्तर्लक्ष्यविलीनचित्तपवनो योगी यदा वर्तते
दृष्ट्या निश्चलतारया बहिरधः पश्यन्नपश्यन्नपि ।
मुद्रेयं खलु खेचरी भवति सा युष्मत्प्रसादाद्गुरो
शून्याशून्यविवर्जितं स्फुरति यत्तत्त्वं पदं शाम्भवम् ॥
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir adhaḥ paśyann apaśyann api /
mudreyaṃ khalu khecarī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādād guro
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tattvaṃ padaṃ śāmbhavam //
On the similarity of śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās in 4.5–7, see the note on 4.8.
paśyann api ] paśyet sadā CA yuṣmat ] yukta CA, yuktā CAv.l., yuṣṭa CAv.l.
lakṣya YCM AN ] lakṣa HTK adhaḥ HTK ] asau YCM AN khecarī ] śāmbhavī YCM AN HTK guro YCM AN ] guroḥ HTK
श्रीशाम्भव्याश्च खेचर्या अवस्थायामभेदता ॥*
śrīśāmbhavyāś ca khecaryā avasthāyām abhedatā //*
This line may be authorial because it is explaining the fact that 4.6 and 4.7 teach similar techniques called śāmbhavī mudrā and khecarī mudrā respectively. One would expect a verse on khecarī mudrā to be explaining the insertion of the tongue in the nasopharyngeal cavity (cf. 3.33–48), but the practice of meditating by fixing the gaze is called khecarī mudrā in 4.7 (as attested by α, η and π manuscripts) and manuscripts of the Candrāvalokana, the text from which Svātmārāma borrowed this verse. It is, therefore, likely that he added 4.8 to explain that śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās are the same with respect to the gaze and meditative state of mind. A similar conflation occurs in the Śivayogapradīpikā (5.3).
śāmbhavyāś ca khecaryā HSC ] śāmbhavyāḥ khecaryāś ca YCM avasthāyām abhedatā ] avasthāṃ ca labhed ataḥ YCM, avasthāṃ tu labhed ataḥ HSC
तारे ज्योतिषि संयोज्य किंचिदुन्नमयेद्भ्रुवौ ।
पूर्वयोगस्य मार्गोऽयमुन्मनीकारकः क्षणात् ॥
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃcid unnamayed bhruvau /
pūrvayogasya mārgo’yam unmanīkārakaḥ kṣaṇāt //
This and the next verse (X4.41–42) are from the South Indian recension of the Amanaska, a later rewriting of that work which incorporates these verses in an additional passage on Tārakayoga, which is presented in this recension as the preliminary yoga (pūrvayoga). It appears to have been added here to elaborate on the meditation of fixing the gaze that is taught in 4.4–7 = X4.36–39.
tāre ] netre A unmanīkārakaḥ kṣaṇāt A ] unmunikārakakṣaṇāt Av.l., unmanīkāraṇaṃ kṣaṇāt Av.l., unmanākāśakaḥ kṣaṇāt Av.l.
unnamayed HSC ] uccālayed YCM kārakaḥ ] karaṇaḥ YCM, karaṇam HSC
केचिदागमजालेन केचिन्निगमसंकुलैः ।
केचित्तर्केण मुह्यन्ति नैव जानन्ति तारकम् ॥
kecid āgamajālena kecin nigamasaṃkulaiḥ /
kecit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam //
In the source text tārakam refers to Tāraka yoga, one of two yogas taught in the South Indian recension of the
Amanaska.
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to X4.41.
saṃkulaiḥ ] saṃkulāḥ YCM, saṃkule HTK
अर्धोद्घाटितलोचनः स्थिरमना नासाग्रदत्तेक्षणः
चन्द्रार्कावपि लीनतामुपनयन्निष्पन्दभावान्तरे ।
ज्योतीरूपमशेषबाह्यरहितं देदीप्यमानं परं
तत्त्वं तत्पदमेति वस्तु परमं वाच्यं किमत्राधिकम् ॥
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaḥ
candrārkāv api līnatām upanayan niṣpandabhāvāntare /
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tattvaṃ tat padam eti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikam //
This verse is not in the α manuscripts and was probably added because it elaborates on the gaze. In the Candrāvalokana (the source text) and the Anubhavanivedana, it follows X4.39, which may explain its position in the γ and δ groups. The attentive reader will notice that we have decided against manuscripts that agree with the source text. The reason is based on our stemmatic considerations. Cumulative evidence supports the origin of the additional verses at the beginning of the fourth chapter in the hyparchetype of the ε manuscripts. We suspect these verses contaminated the π group’s copies very early. To complicate matters, the scribe was familiar with the source text and corrected the readings accordingly.
upanayan ] upagatau CA bhāvāntare ] rūpaṃ vapuḥ CA vastu ] yat tu CA
upanayan ] upanayen YCM HTK, upagatau AN niṣpanda ] niḥspanda YCM, trispanda AN, nispanda HTK bhāvāntare AN ] bhāvottare YCM, vācyaṃ tataḥ HTK jyotīrūpam aśeṣa YCM AN ] jyotīrūpaviśeṣa HTK dedīpyamānaṃ YCM HTK ] caikaṃ pumāṃsaṃ AN padam eti YCM AN ] param asti HTK
दिवा न पूजयेल्लिङ्गं रात्रौ नैव च पूजयेत् ।
सततं पूजयेल्लिङ्गं दिवारात्रिनिरोधतः ॥
divā na pūjayel liṅgaṃ rātrau naiva ca pūjayet /
satataṃ pūjayel liṅgaṃ divārātrinirodhataḥ //
The manuscripts transmit readings for the last verse quarter that either contradict or repeat the statements in the first line. This problem likely occurred through some kind of dittographical error. We have therefore adopted the reading of Jyotsnā 4.42d (nirodhataḥ), which is the same as the source text.
divā na ] na divā KhV rātrau naiva ca pūjayet ] na rātrau ca maheśvari KhV satataṃ ] sarvadā KhV
ca pūjayet ] prapūjayet HSC divārātrinirodhataḥ ] divārātrau ca pūjayet HSC
सुषिरो ज्ञानजनकः पञ्चस्रोतःसमन्वितः ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिञ्शून्ये निरञ्जने ॥*
suṣiro jñānajanakaḥ pañcasrotaḥsamanvitaḥ /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmiñ śūnye nirañjane //*
This verse may not be referring to the cavity in which the tongue is placed but perhaps to a more esoteric sense based on the meaning of pañcasrotas as the five streams of tantric Śaiva teachings, which in this case generate knowledge. On pañcasrotas, see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa 2013, vol. 3: 361.
suṣiro jñānajanakaḥ ] suṣiraṃ jñānajanakaṃ HSC samanvitaḥ ] samanvitaṃ HSC
सव्यदक्षिणनाडीस्थो मध्ये चलति मारुतः ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिन्स्थाने न संशयः ॥
savyadakṣiṇanāḍīstho madhye calati mārutaḥ /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmin sthāne na saṃśayaḥ //
चित्तं चरति खे यस्माज् जिह्वा चरति खे गता ।
तेनैषा खेचरी नाम मुद्रा सिद्धैर्नमस्कृता ॥
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā /
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā //
See 3.37, where this verse is also found.
इडापिङ्गलयोर्योगे शून्यं चैवानिलं ग्रसेत् ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तत्र सत्यं न संशयः ॥
iḍāpiṅgalayor yoge śūnyaṃ caivānilaṃ graset /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tatra satyaṃ na saṃśayaḥ //
Cf. Rāghavabhaṭṭa ad Śāradātilaka 25.43: suṣumṇāyām eteṣu parvasu iḍāpiṅgalayor yogo bhavatīti jñeyam.
śūnyaṃ ] śūnye USS na saṃśayaḥ ] punaḥ punaḥ USS
सोमसूर्यद्वयोर्मध्ये निरालम्बे तले पुनः ।
संस्थिता व्योमचक्रे या सा मुद्रा नाम खेचरी ॥
somasūryadvayor madhye nirālambe tale punaḥ /
saṃsthitā vyomacakre yā sā mudrā nāma khecarī //
The reading tale is suspect, as is nirālambāntare, the conjecture of Brahmānanda.
The vyomacakra (‘the cakra of the void’) is also mentioned in a verse added to some later recensions of the
Haṭhapradīpikā (see 3.34*1), which states that vyomacakra is another name for khecarīmudrā. This verse derives from a passage in the Jñānasāra (2.1–5) that discusses khecarī, as well as contracting the throat (cf. the jālandhara lock), in relation to three cakras; vyomacakra, madhyacakra, and mūlacakra. For further discussion, see the commentary on 3.69.
In Jyotsnā 4.45, Brahmānanda states that the vyomacakra is associated with all the voids in the middle of the brow (bhrūmadhye sarvakhānāṃ samanvayāt) and, in the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f. 129v), Sundaradeva says that it is called the Brahmarandhra, which is between
Iḍā and Piṅgalā (iḍāpiṅgalāntargataṃ brahmarandhrākhyaṃ vyomacakraṃ tat khecarīmudrāṃ śaktiṃ kuryād
...).
somasūryadvayor USS ] sūryacandramasor GSS tale USS ] nile GSS yā sā mudrā nāma GSS ] sā mudrā nāma ca USS
सा मयोद्भेदिता वामा साक्षाच्च शिववल्लभा ।
पूरयेन्मारुतं दिव्यं सुषुम्णा पश्चिमे मुखे ॥
sā mayodbheditā vāmā sākṣāc ca śivavallabhā /
pūrayen mārutaṃ divyaṃ suṣumṇā paścime mukhe //
The referent of mayā is unspecified, and no source text has been identified. We assume it refers to the speaker, who might be Śiva. The ε manuscripts have māyodbheditā for mayodbheditā, but it is hard to make sense of this. If correct, udbheditā would more likely mean “produced” or “made manifest”. Alternatively, the first line of this verse could be referring to khecarīmudrā, in which case its being produced by māyā would make more sense. In the second line, Brahmānanda’s reading suṣumnāṃ is tempting. The line would then mean, “[The yogi] should fill Suṣumṇā with divine breath through the rear opening”.
sā mayodbheditā vāmā sākṣāc ca ] sā mayā viditā yā māyā sākṣāc YSS
पुरस्ताच्चैव पूर्येत निश्चिता खेचरी भवेत् ।
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीमुद्रामुन्मनी संप्रजायते ॥
purastāc caiva pūryeta niścitā khecarī bhavet /
abhyaset khecarīmudrām unmanī saṃprajāyate //
We have understood niścitā as an adverb. No witnesses have niścitam, but we see no other way of taking niścitā.
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीमुद्रां तावत्स्याद्योगनिद्रितः ।
संप्राप्तयोगनिद्रस्य कालो नास्ति कदाचन ॥
abhyaset khecarīmudrāṃ tāvat syād yoganidritaḥ /
saṃprāptayoganidrasya kālo nāsti kadācana //
khecarīmudrāṃ tāvat ] khecarīṃ tāvad yāvad USS nidritaḥ ] nidrataḥ USS
भ्रुवोर्मध्ये शिवस्थानं मनस्तत्र विलीयते ।
ज्ञातव्यं तत्पदं तुर्यं तत्र कालो न विद्यते ॥
bhruvor madhye śivasthānaṃ manas tatra vilīyate /
jñātavyaṃ tat padaṃ turyaṃ tatra kālo na vidyate //
padaṃ ] paraṃ USS
चन्द्रसूर्यद्वयोर्मध्ये मुद्रां दद्याच्च खेचरीम् ।
निरालम्बे महाशून्ये व्योमचक्रे व्यवस्थिताम् ॥
candrasūryadvayor madhye mudrāṃ dadyāc ca khecarīm /
nirālambe mahāśūnye vyomacakre vyavasthitām //
On the vyomacakra, see X4.49.
dadyāc ca ] dadyāt tu JS
निरालम्बं मनः कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ।
सबाह्याभ्यन्तरे व्योम्नि घटवत्तिष्ठते ध्रुवम् ॥
nirālambaṃ manaḥ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet /
sabāhyābhyantare vyomni ghaṭavat tiṣṭhate dhruvam //
api cintayet JS ] cintayet sudhīḥ ŚS
बाह्यवायुर्यथा लीनः खस्य मध्ये न संशयः ।
स्वस्थानं गच्छति प्राणः †सूर्याङ्गे मनसा तथा† ॥
bāhyavāyur yathā līnaḥ khasya madhye na saṃśayaḥ /
svasthānaṃ gacchati prāṇaḥ †sūryāṅge manasā tath↠//
It is hard to make sense of sūryāṅge here (‘on the side of the sun’?). The terms sūryāṅge and candrāṅge occur in the third chapter (3.15) in the sense of the right and left sides of the body, respectively. However, this meaning does not seem relevant here. The variant readings with pavane/pavano are not clear either, so we have cruxed the fourth verse quarter.
khasya ] svasya HP10 sūryāṅge manasā tathā ] sūryo ’gnau pavane tathā HP10
एवमभ्यस्यमानस्य वायुमार्गे दिवानिशम् ।
अभ्यासाज्जीर्यते वायुर् मनस्तत्र विलीयते ॥
evam abhyasyamānasya vāyumārge divāniśam /
abhyāsāj jīryate vāyur manas tatra vilīyate //
Brahmānanda identifies the path of the breath (vāyumārga) with Suṣumṇā.
jīryate ] līyate HSC
अमृतं प्लावयेद्देहमा पादतलमस्तकम् ।
सिध्यत्येव सदा कायो महाबलपराक्रमः ॥
amṛtaṃ plāvayed deham ā pādatalamastakam /
sidhyaty eva sadā kāyo mahābalaparākramaḥ //
eva sadā ] evaṃ tadā HSC
शक्तिमध्ये मनः कृत्वा शक्तिं च मनमध्यगाम् ।
मनसा मन आलोक्य तद्ध्यायेत्परमं पदम् ॥
śaktimadhye manaḥ kṛtvā śaktiṃ ca manamadhyagām /
manasā mana ālokya tad dhyāyet paramaṃ padam //
In the second verse quarter, mana for mano is for the metre.
śaktiṃ ca manamadhyagām ] manaś śaktes tu madhyamam CA tad CAv.l. ] taṃ CA
madhye ] madhyo HSC manamadhyagāṃ ] svāntamadhyagāṃ HSC
खमध्ये कुरु चात्मानमात्ममध्ये च खं कुरु ।
आत्मानं खमयं कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
khamadhye kuru cātmānam ātmamadhye ca khaṃ kuru /
ātmānaṃ khamayaṃ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet //
ātmānaṃ ] sarvaṃ ca HRĀ
अन्तःशून्यो बहिःशून्यः शून्यकुम्भ इवाम्बरे ।
अन्तःपूर्णो बहिःपूर्णः पूर्णकुम्भ इवार्णवे ॥
antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare /
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrṇakumbha ivārṇave //
HRĀ reverses ac and cd antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ ] antaḥśūnyaṃ bahiḥśūnyaṃ
बाह्यचिन्ता न कर्तव्या तथैवान्तरचिन्तनम् ।
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
bāhyacintā na kartavyā tathaivāntaracintanam /
sarvacintāṃ parityajya na kiṃcid api cintayet //
संकल्पमात्रकलनैव जगत्समग्रं
संकल्पमात्रकलना हि मनोविलासः ।
संकल्पमेतमत उत्सृज निर्विकल्पं
आश्रित्य निश्चयमवाप्नुहि राम शान्तिम् ॥
saṃkalpamātrakalanaiva jagat samagraṃ
saṃkalpamātrakalanā hi manovilāsaḥ /
saṃkalpam etam ata utsṛja nirvikalpaṃ
āśritya niścayam avāpnuhi rāma śāntim //
saṃkalpamātrakalanaiva ] saṃkalpajālakalanaiva LVY saṃkalpamātrakalanā hi ] °kalanāt tu LYV ata ] alam LYV
कर्पूरमनले यद्वत् सैन्धवं सलिले यथा ।
तथा संधीयमानं च मनस्तत्त्वे विलीयते ॥
karpūram anale yadvat saindhavaṃ salile yathā /
tathā saṃdhīyamānaṃ ca manas tattve vilīyate //
tattve vilīyate ] tatraive līyate HRĀ
ज्ञेयं सर्वं प्रतीतं च तज्ज्ञानं मन उच्यते ।
ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं समं नष्टं नान्यः पन्था द्वितीयकः ॥
jñeyaṃ sarvaṃ pratītaṃ ca tajjñānaṃ mana ucyate /
jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ samaṃ naṣṭaṃ nānyaḥ panthā dvitīyakaḥ //
sarvaṃ ] sarva HTK
मनोदृश्यमिदं सर्वं यत्किंचित्सचराचरं ।
मनसो ह्युन्मनीभावे द्वैताभावं प्रचक्षते ॥
manodṛśyam idaṃ sarvaṃ yat kiṃcit sacarācaraṃ /
manaso hy unmanībhāve dvaitābhāvaṃ pracakṣate //
dvaitābhāvaṃ ] ’dvaitabhāvaṃ A
Cf. Gauḍapāda’s Māṇḍūkyopaniṣatkārikā 3.31manodṛśyam idaṃ dvaitaṃ yat kiṃ cit sacarācaram/
manaso hy amanībhāve dvaitaṃ naivopalabhyate//
manaso hy unmanī ] manasas tūnmanī YCM dvaitābhāvaṃ ] ’dvaitabhāvaṃ YCM
ज्ञेयवस्तुपरित्यागाद् विलयं याति मानसम् ।
मानसे विलयं याते कैवल्यमवशिष्यते ॥
jñeyavastuparityāgād vilayaṃ yāti mānasam /
mānase vilayaṃ yāte kaivalyam avaśiṣyate //
mānasam ] mānasaḥ HRĀ avaśiṣyate ] upajāyate HRĀ
लयो लय इति प्राहुः कीदृशं लयलक्षणम् ।
अपुनर्वासनोत्थानाल्लयो विषयविस्मृतिः ॥
layo laya iti prāhuḥ kīdṛśaṃ layalakṣaṇam /
apunarvāsanotthānāl layo viṣayavismṛtiḥ //
This verse may have been inspired by the Mokṣopāya (e.g. 1.2.2).
kīdṛśaṃ HRĀ ] īdṛśaṃ YSS apunarvāsanotthānāt ] apunarbhavasaṃsthānaṃ HRĀ, tatra sarvasamādhāne YSS
एवं नानाविधोपायाः सम्यक्स्वानुभवान्विताः ।
समाधिमार्गाः कथिताः पूर्वाचार्यैर्महात्मभिः ॥
evaṃ nānāvidhopāyāḥ samyaksvānubhavānvitāḥ /
samādhimārgāḥ kathitāḥ pūrvācāryair mahātmabhiḥ //
सुषुम्णायै कुण्डलिन्यै सुधायै चन्द्रमण्डले ।
मनोन्मन्यै नमस्तुभ्यं महाशक्तिचिदात्मने ॥
suṣumṇāyai kuṇḍalinyai sudhāyai candramaṇḍale /
manonmanyai namas tubhyaṃ mahāśakticidātmane //
अशक्यतत्त्वबोधानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
प्रोक्तं गोरक्षनाथेन नादोपासनमुच्यते ॥
aśakyatattvabodhānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
proktaṃ gorakṣanāthena nādopāsanam ucyate //
श्रीआदिनाथेन सपादकोटि-
लयप्रकाराः कथिता जयन्ते ।
नादानुसन्धानकमेकमेव
मन्यामहे मान्यतमं लयानाम् ॥
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi-
layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayante /
nādānusandhānakam ekam eva
manyāmahe mānyatamaṃ layānām //
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi ] sadā śivoktāni sapādalakṣa YTĀ layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayante ] layāvadhānāni lasantu loke YTĀ nādānusandhānakam ekam eva ] nādānusandhānasamādhim ekaṃ YTĀ
jayante ] jayantu HRĀ, jayanti YCM ekam eva ] eva kāryam HRĀ YCM
श्रवणमुखनयननासानिरोधनं नैव कर्तव्यम् ।
शुद्धसुषुम्णासरणौ स्फुटममलः श्रूयते नादः ॥
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanaṃ naiva kartavyam /
śuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau sphuṭam amalaḥ śrūyate nādaḥ //
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanaṃ naiva kartavyaṃ ] śravaṇapuṭanayananāsāpuṭarodhanaṃ kāryam YCM, śravaṇapuṭanayanayugalanāsāmukharodham eva kartavyaṃ HSC, śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanenaiva SLU śuddhasuṣumṇāśaraṇau SLU ] śrīśuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau YCM, śuddhasuṣumṇāśaraṇe HSC
आरम्भश्च घटश्चैव तथा परिचयस्तथा ।
निष्पत्तिः सर्वयोगेषु योगावस्था भवन्ति ताः ॥
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayas tathā /
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ //
On these four stages, see Birch 2019: 968–969; Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 19–20.
tathā paricayas tathā ŚS ] paricayas tṛtīyakaḥ AO AS sarvayogeṣu AO ŚS ] sarvaśeṣeṣu AS bhavanti tāḥ ŚS ] caturvidhā AO, prakīrtitāḥ AS
paricayas tathā HRĀ HTK ] paricayo ’pi ca YCM, paricayaḥ punaḥ YBhD sarvayogeṣu HRĀ YCM HTK ] ceti yogasya YBhD yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ HRĀ YCM ] syād avasthācatuṣṭayam YBhD HTK
ब्रह्मग्रन्थेर्भवेद्भेदादानन्दः शून्यसंभवः ।
विचित्रक्वणको देहेऽनाहतः श्रूयते ध्वनिः ॥
brahmagranther bhaved bhedād ānandaḥ śūnyasaṃbhavaḥ /
vicitrakvaṇako dehe’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ //
In Jyotsnā 4.70, Brahmānanda understands the voids associated with each stage to be places in the body. However, in the Amṛtasiddhi and Amaraugha, the source text of this verse, the series of voids (along with their respective blisses and sounds) derives from a tetrad of meditative voids in Vajrayāna traditions (Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 18; Birch 2019: 968).
bhaved ] tathā AO
granther ] randhre HRĀ, granthir YCM HTK bhedād ] bhedo HRĀ, bhinna YCM, bhinnād HTK ānandaḥ YCM HTK HRĀv.l. ] yo nādaḥ HRĀ śūnya YCM HTK ] sūrya HRĀ
दिव्यदेहश्च तेजस्वी दिव्यगन्धस्त्वरोगवान् ।
संपूर्णहृदयः शून्ये त्वारम्भे योगवान्भवेत् ॥
divyadehaś ca tejasvī divyagandhas tv arogavān /
saṃpūrṇahṛdayaḥ śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet //
gandhas tv ] gandho hy AO hṛdayaḥ (=AOP)] hṛdaye AO
dehaś ca ] dehaḥ su HRĀ, gandhaś ca HTK gandhas tv HRĀ ] deho ’py HTK hṛdayaḥ ] hṛdaye HRĀ HTK
द्वितीयायां घटीकृत्य वायुर्भवति मध्यगः ।
दृढासनो भवेद्योगी ज्ञानी देवसमस्तदा ॥
dvitīyāyāṃ ghaṭīkṛtya vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ /
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī jñānī devasamas tadā //
The name of the second stage, ghaṭa (and the related form ghaṭīkṛtya found in the first pāda of this verse) can be understood in at least three ways, as union, activation or pot (the latter with an alchemical connotation, on which see 3.12 and Mallinson and Szanto 2021: 20–23). In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (verse 90) its primary meaning is union and the united pairs are prāṇa and apāna, jīvātman and paramātman, and nāda and bindu.
dvitīyāyāṃ (=AOP)] dvitīye saṃ AO
ghaṭīkṛtya HRĀ ] ghaṭīṃ kṛtvā HTK jñānī HTK ] kāma HRĀ
विष्णुग्रन्थेस्तदा भेदात्परमानन्दसूचकः ।
अतिशून्ये विमर्दश्च भेरीशब्दस्तदा भवेत् ॥
viṣṇugranthes tadā bhedāt paramānandasūcakaḥ /
atiśūnye vimardaś ca bherīśabdas tadā bhavet //
d tadā ] tato AO
a tadā ] tathā HRĀ, yadā YCM HTK c atiśūnye HRĀ ] atiśūnya YCM HTK d tadā YCM ] tathā HRĀ HTK
तृतीयायां ततो भित्त्वा विहायोमर्दलध्वनिः ।
महाशून्यं तदा याति सर्वसिद्धिसमाश्रयम् ॥
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato bhittvā vihāyomardaladhvaniḥ /
mahāśūnyaṃ tadā yāti sarvasiddhisamāśrayam //
Here the object of piercing is unspecified, but it is likely to refer to the knot
of Viṣṇu mentioned in the previous verse.
We have understood vihāyo (‘space’) as referring to the state of total emptiness (atiśūnya) that was mentioned in the previous verse.
vihāyo ] ninādo AO yāti ] jātaṃ AO
bhittvā YCM ] nityaṃ HRĀ, jitvā HTK vihāyomardala ] āviṣkāro mardala HRĀ, vimāyo mardala YCM, sahajānandasambhavaḥ HTK tadā ] tato HRĀ, tathā YCM (HTK reads 4.25cd here)
चित्तानन्दं ततो जित्वा सहजानन्दसंभवः ।
दोषदुःखजरामृत्युक्षुधानिद्राविवर्जितः ॥
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasaṃbhavaḥ /
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyukṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ //
The reading of the first verse quarter, cittānāndaṃ tato jitvā, is likely a patch for the obscure paramānandarocitvāt in the Amaraugha (40a), which is the source text.
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā (Amaraughaprabodha) ] paramānandarocitvāt AO
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā YCM ] cidānandaṃ tato jitvā HRĀ, tṛtīyāyāṃ tato jitvā HTK sahajānandasambhavaḥ YCM HTK ] paramānandasambhavaḥ HRĀ
रुद्रग्रन्थिं ततो भित्त्वा सर्वपीठगतोऽनिलः ।
निष्पत्तौ वैणवः शब्दः क्वणद्वीणाक्वणो भवेत् ॥
rudragranthiṃ tato bhittvā sarvapīṭhagato’nilaḥ /
niṣpattau vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet //
The reading we have adopted for the fourth verse quarter, kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo, Birch’s conjecture in his edition of the Amaraugha, is supported by several testimonia and Amṛtasiddhi 31.2, where it is said that the sound of a vīṇā arises in the fourth stage.
The reading śarva, i.e. Śiva, found in some testimonia and the Jyotsnā makes good sense, but in its description of this stage, the Amṛtasiddhi, which is the ultimate source of this passage has sarva (30.1).
niṣpattau AOv.l. ] niṣpanno AO, niṣpannā AOv.l.
niṣpattau HRĀ ] niṣṭhāto YCM, niṣpanno HTK ’nilaḥ HRĀ YCM ] ’nalaḥ HTK
एकीभूतं तदा चित्तं राजयोगाभिधायकम् ।
सृष्टिसंहारकर्तासौ योगीश्वरसमो भवेत् ॥
ekībhūtaṃ tadā cittaṃ rājayogābhidhāyakam /
sṛṣṭisaṃhārakartāsau yogīśvarasamo bhavet //
According to Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 4.77), the idea that the yogi becomes a creator and destroyer means that he becomes equal to God. Consequently, he construes the line as asau yogī īśvarasamo bhavet.
abhidhāyakam ] abhidhānakam AO, rājayogo ’bhidhīyate AOv.l.
abhidhāyakam YCM ] abhidhānakam USS
राजयोगपदप्राप्तौ सुखोपायोऽल्पचेतसाम् ।
सद्यःप्रत्ययसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥
rājayogapadaprāptau sukhopāyo’lpacetasām /
sadyaḥpratyayasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ //
नादानुसन्धानसमाधिभाजां
योगीश्वराणां हृदये प्ररूढम् ।
आनन्दमेकं वचसामवाच्यं
जानाति तं श्रीगुरुनाथ एव ॥
nādānusandhānasamādhibhājāṃ
yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye prarūḍham /
ānandam ekaṃ vacasām avācyaṃ
jānāti taṃ śrīgurunātha eva //
prarūḍham ] pragūḍham YTĀ ānandam ekaṃ ] ānandamātraṃ YTĀ eva YTĀv.l. ] ekaḥ YTĀ
vacasām avācyaṃ YCM ] vacaso ’py agamyaṃ HRĀ taṃ śrī HRĀ ] tatvaṃ YCM
मुक्तासनस्थितो योगी मुद्रां संधाय शाम्भवीम् ।
शृणुयाद्दक्षिणे कर्णे नादमन्तःस्थमेकधीः ॥*
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāmbhavīm /
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antaḥstham ekadhīḥ //*
In verse 1.37, muktāsana is said to be the same as siddhāsana.
antaḥstham ekadhīḥ ] antargataṃ sadā YCM, ekāntike sudhīḥ HSC
कर्णौ पिधाय तूलेन यं शृणोति ध्वनिं मुनिः ।
तत्र चित्तं स्थिरीकुर्याद् यावत्स्थिरपदं व्रजेत् ॥
karṇau pidhāya tūlena yaṃ śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ muniḥ /
tatra cittaṃ sthirīkuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet //
The reading tūlena (‘with cotton’), which is attested by α3, makes good sense and is close to the reading of mūlena in α1 and α2. Manuscripts of several other groups instead have hastābhyām (‘with the hands’) or hastena (‘with the hand’). This reading was inspired by the technique of blocking the ears and other orifices with the fingers in order to listen to the inner sounds. This practice is attested as early as the Svacchandatantra in which it is called ṣaṇmukhīkaraṇa (Vasudeva 2004: 272 n. 66). In this karaṇa, the other openings of the head are also blocked with the fingers. Śivasaṃhitā 5.36–46 teaches a similar practice. In the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 68), the practice of blocking the ears with the hands is stipulated for bhrāmarī kumbhaka.
tūlena HRĀ ] hastena YCM, hastābhyāṃ HSC muniḥ YCM HSC ] yamī HRĀ sthirīkuryād ] sthiraṃ kuryād HRĀ YCM HSC
अभ्यस्यमानो नादोऽयं बाह्यमावृणुते ध्वनिम् ।
पक्षाद्विक्षेपमखिलं जित्वा योगी सुखी भवेत् ॥
abhyasyamāno nādo’yaṃ bāhyam āvṛṇute dhvanim /
pakṣād vikṣepam akhilaṃ jitvā yogī sukhī bhavet //
āvṛṇute NBU ] āvartayed YCM HSC yogī sukhī bhavet YCM HSC ] turyapadaṃ vrajet NBU
श्रूयते प्रथमाभ्यासे नादो नानाविधो महान् ।
वर्धमाने ततोऽभ्यासे श्रूयते सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मतः ॥
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho mahān /
vardhamāne tato’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ //
mahān YCM ] bahuḥ HRĀ HTK
आदौ जलधिजीमूतभेरीनिर्झरसंभवाः ।
मध्ये मर्दलशंखोत्था घण्टाकाहलजास्तथा ॥
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherīnirjharasaṃbhavāḥ /
madhye mardalaśaṃkhotthā ghaṇṭākāhalajās tathā //
We have translated kāhala as ‘trumpet’ on the basis of e.g. Viśvalocanakośa, lāntavarga 161 (dhvaninālā tu vīṇāyāṃ veṇukāhalayor api), but it can also mean a type of drum (see e.g. Śabdakalpadruma s.v. kāhala, where it is said to be a bṛhaḍḍhakkā, a big drum).
nirjhara HRĀ HTK ] jharjhara YCM saṃbhavāḥ HRĀ ] saṃbhavaḥ YCM HTK śaṃkhotthā HRĀ HTK ] śaṃkhottha YCM kāhalajās ] kāhalakās HRĀ YCM HTK
अन्ते तु किङ्किणीवंशवीणाभ्रमरनिस्वनाः ।
इति नानाविधा नादाः श्रूयन्ते देहमध्यतः ॥
ante tu kiṅkiṇīvaṃśavīṇābhramaranisvanāḥ /
iti nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ //
vaṃśa HTK ] vṛnda HRĀ YCM vīṇā HRĀ YCM ] nādā HTK nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ HRĀ, nānāvidho nādaḥ śrūyate dehamadhyagaḥ YCM, nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante yatra madhyataḥ HTK
महति श्रूयमाणेऽपि मेघभेर्यादिकध्वनौ ।
तत्र सूक्ष्मात्सूक्ष्मतरं नादमेव परामृशेत् ॥
mahati śrūyamāṇe’pi meghabheryādikadhvanau /
tatra sūkṣmāt sūkṣmataraṃ nādam eva parāmṛśet //
ādikadhvanau ] ādike dhvanau YCM, ādike svane HTK
घनमुत्सृज्य वा सूक्ष्मे सूक्ष्ममुत्सृज्य वा घने ।
तौ त्यक्त्वा मध्यमे स्याद्वा मनो नान्यत्र चालयेत् ॥
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣme sūkṣmam utsṛjya vā ghane /
tau tyaktvā madhyame syād vā mano nānyatra cālayet //
sūkṣme HTK NBU ] sūkṣmaṃ YCM utsṛjya HTK NBU ] pramṛjya YCM ghane HTK NBU ] ghanam YCM tau tyaktvā madhyame syād vā ] paraṃ tatraiva niḥkṣipya YCM, ramamāṇam api kṣiptaṃ HTK NBU nānyatra cālayet YCM NBU ] nātra pracālayet HTK
यत्र कुत्रापि वा नादे लगति प्रथमं मनः ।
तत्रैव तत्स्थिरीभूत्वा तेन सार्धं विलीयते ॥
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde lagati prathamaṃ manaḥ /
tatraiva tat sthirībhūtvā tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate //
lagati prathamaṃ HTK NBU ] prathamaṃ viśate YCM tatraiva tat sthirībhūtvā ] tatraiva susthiraṃ kuryāt YCM, tatraiva susthirībhūtvā HTK, tatra tatra sthirībhūtvā NBU
काष्ठे प्रवर्तितो वह्निः काष्ठेन सह शाम्यति ।
नादे प्रवर्तितं चित्तं नादेन सह लीयते ॥
kāṣṭhe pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha śāmyati /
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha līyate //
śāmyati YCM HSC ] līyate HRĀ līyate YCM HSC ] śāmyati HRĀ
विस्मृत्य सकलं बाह्यं नादे दुग्धाम्बुवन्मनः ।
एकीभूयाथ सहसा चिदाकाशे विलीयते ॥
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāmbuvan manaḥ /
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate //
manaḥ HSC USS ] naraḥ YCM ekībhūyātha sahasā YCM HSC NBU ] ekībhūtaṃ tathā cittaṃ USS cidākāśe vilīyate YCM HSC NBU ] rājayogābhidhānakam USS
औदासीन्यपरो भूत्वा सदाभ्यासेन संयमी ।
उन्मनीकरणं सद्यो नादमेवावधारयेत् ॥
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī /
unmanīkaraṇaṃ sadyo nādam evāvadhārayet //
unmanīkaraṇaṃ YCM USS ] unmanīkārakaṃ HSC NBU evāvadhārayet YCM NBU ] evānu[...]yet USS, evaṃ vadhārayet HSC
शीते काले चौपटी वा कुटी वा
पथ्याहारे गोपयो वा पयो वा ।
भोज्ये भिक्षावृन्दमारण्यकन्दं
पाणी द्रोणी कापि वा भोज्यपात्रे ॥
śīte kāle caupaṭī vā kuṭī vā
pathyāhāre gopayo vā payo vā /
bhojye bhikṣāvṛndam āraṇyakandaṃ
pāṇī droṇī kāpi vā bhojyapātre //
On caupaṭī in the first pāda, McGregor (1994: s.v.) and Callewaert (2009: s.v.) in their dictionaries of modern and old Hindi both give the meaning
“open all around” for caupaṭ. McGregor derives it from Sanskrit catuṣpaṭṭa. Molesworth (1857: s.v.) in his Marathi dictionary gives “A quadrangular expanse
or space, esp. as open and extended: also a broad and level tract” for caupaṭṭā.
We suspect that the α reading of paṭī at the end of the first pāda is the result of dittography.
śīte kāle caupaṭī vā ] śīte kāle dvau paṭī vā HRĀ, śīte kāle kāpaṭī vā YCM, audāsīnyaṃ śītakāle HTK bhojye bhikṣā ] bhakṣye bhojye HRĀ, bhakṣye bhikṣā YCM, bhojyaṃ bhikṣā HTK pāṇī HRĀ ] pāṇau YCM kāpi vā HTK ] ko ’pi vā HRĀ, kā parā YCM bhojyapātre ] bhakṣyapātre HRĀ, bhojapātram YCM, bhojyapātram HTK
सर्वचिन्तां समुत्सृज्य सर्वचेष्टां च सर्वदा ।
नादमेवानुसंधानान्नादे चित्तं विलीयते ॥
sarvacintāṃ samutsṛjya sarvaceṣṭāṃ ca sarvadā /
nādam evānusaṃdhānān nāde cittaṃ vilīyate //
The third verse quarter varies considerably among the witnesses and testimonia. We have accepted the reading of α1 (nādam evānusaṃdhānān), which is also attested by the π group and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, on the assumption that the -m – at the end of nādam is a hiatus break, the intended reading being nāda evānusaṃdhānāt. A similar hiatus break is found at 3.89.
samutsṛjya HRĀ NBU ] parityajya HSC sarvaceṣṭāṃ HRĀ ] sarvakāle HSC, sarvaceṣṭā NBU ca sarvadā HRĀ HSC ] vivarjitaḥ NBU saṃdhānān HRĀ ] sandhatte HSC, saṃdadhyān NBU
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य सावधानेन चेतसा ।
नाद एवानुसन्धेयो योगसाम्राज्यमिच्छता ॥
sarvacintāṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā /
nāda evānusandheyo yogasāmrājyam icchatā //
nāda evānusaṃdheyo HRĀ HSC ] nādam evānusandhatte YCM sāmrājyam icchatā YCM HSC ] sāmrājyasiddhaye HRĀ
मकरन्दं पिबन्भृङ्गो गन्धान्नापेक्षते यथा ।
नादासक्तं तथा चित्तं विषयान्न हि काङ्क्षते ॥
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṅgo gandhān nāpekṣate yathā /
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viṣayān na hi kāṅkṣate //
piban YCM HTK NBU ] pibed HRĀ gandhān YCM NBU ] gandho HRĀ, gandhaṃ HTK nāpekṣate YCM HTK NBU ] na prekṣyate HRĀ tathā HRĀ YCM HTK ] sadā NBU viṣayān HRĀ YCM HTK ] viṣayaṃ NBU na hi HRĀ YCM NBU ] naiva HTK
बद्धं विमुक्तचाञ्चल्यं नादगन्धकजारणात् ।
मनःपारदमाप्नोति निरालम्बाख्यखोटताम् ॥
baddhaṃ vimuktacāñcalyaṃ nādagandhakajāraṇāt /
manaḥpāradam āpnoti nirālambākhyakhoṭatām //
See Hellwig 2009: 204–206 on khoṭa, “lame”, which in alchemy is a technical term used to describe mercury that has been processed many times using the māraṇa technique and no longer moves.
vimuktacāñcalyaṃ ] viyuktaṃ cāpalyaṃ HTK pāradam āpnoti HTK ] pākam avāpnoti YCM khoṭatām ] ghoṭanam YCM, kheṭakam HTK
बद्धः सुनादगन्धेन सद्यःसंत्यक्तचापलः ।
प्रयाति चेतःसूतेन्द्रः पक्षछिन्न इति प्रथाम् ॥
baddhaḥ sunādagandhena sadyaḥsaṃtyaktacāpalaḥ /
prayāti cetaḥsūtendraḥ pakṣachinna iti prathām //
On pakṣaccheda in alchemical processes of immobilizing mercury and for references in Rasaśāstra, see Hellwig 2009: 276–278.
sunādagandhena ] sugandhanādena HTK cetaḥsūtendraḥ ] sūtacittendraḥ HTK iti prathām ] ivāprabhaḥ HTK
मनोमत्तगजेन्द्रस्य विषयोद्यानचारिणः ।
नियामनसमर्थोऽयं निनादो निशिताङ्कुशः ॥
manomattagajendrasya viṣayodyānacāriṇaḥ /
niyāmanasamartho’yaṃ ninādo niśitāṅkuśaḥ //
The unusual form niyāmana is also found in Rasaśāstra works where it occurs in the context of restraining mercury and is a topic of discussion (e.g. Rasaprakāśasudhākara 1.23, Ānandakanda 1.4.58–59).
नादश्रवणतश्चित्तमन्तरङ्गभुजङ्गमः ।
विस्मृत्य सर्वमेकाग्रः कुत्रचिन्न हि धावति ॥
nādaśravaṇataś cittam antaraṅgabhujaṅgamaḥ /
vismṛtya sarvam ekāgraḥ kutracin na hi dhāvati //
The metaphor is that of snake charming: beguiled by the inner sound, the snake that
is the mind becomes transfixed. Witnesses of the γ and δ groups have turaṅgamaḥ instead of bhujaṅgamaḥ, perhaps because forms from dhāv are unusual with the latter, but it is found at e.g. Garuḍapurāṇa (1.113.33ab).
In the third pāda we have read against α1 and α2 (as well as ε1 and π2), which have saṃsmṛtya sarvam instead of vismṛtya sarvam. The former could be understood to mean “with complete concentration” but we have
adopted vismṛtya on semantic grounds.
bhujaṅgamaḥ ] turaṅgamaḥ YCM, kuraṃgakaḥ HTK vismṛtya HTK ] viśūnyaṃ YCM sarvam YCM ] viśvam HTK ekāgraḥ HTK ] ekāgryaṃ YCM
अन्तरङ्गस्य जविनो वाजिनः परिघायते ।
नादोपास्तिरतो नित्यमवधार्यापि योगिना ॥*
antaraṅgasya javino vājinaḥ parighāyate /
nādopāstir ato nityam avadhāryāpi yoginā //*
antaraṃgaturaṃgasya vājinaḥ paridhāvataḥ/
nādopāstikhalīnaṃ hi niyāmanakaraṃ dṛḍham//
नादोऽन्तरङ्गसारङ्गबन्धने वागुरायते ।
अन्तरङ्गकुरङ्गस्य रोधे व्याधायतेऽपि च ॥*
nādo’ntaraṅgasāraṅgabandhane vāgurāyate /
antaraṅgakuraṅgasya rodhe vyādhāyate’pi ca //*
rodhe vyādhāyate ’pi ca ] bandhane līyate ’pi ca YCM, nādo vyādhāyate ’pi ca HTK
अनाहतध्वनेरन्तर्ज्ञेयं यत्सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मकम् ।
मनस्तत्र लयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥*
anāhatadhvaner antar jñeyaṃ yat sūkṣmasūkṣmakam /
manas tatra layaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //*
तावदाकाशसंकल्पो यावच्छब्दः प्रवर्तते ।
निःशब्दं तत्परं ब्रह्म परमात्मा समीर्यते ॥
tāvad ākāśasaṃkalpo yāvac chabdaḥ pravartate /
niḥśabdaṃ tat paraṃ brahma paramātmā samīryate //
paraṃ ] para VM samīryate ] sa gīyate VM
यत्किंचिन्नादरूपेण श्रूयते शक्तिरेव सा ।
यस्तच्छ्रोता निराकारः स एव परमेश्वरः ॥
yat kiṃcin nādarūpeṇa śrūyate śaktir eva sā /
yas tacchrotā nirākāraḥ sa eva parameśvaraḥ //
nādarūpeṇa ] nāmarūpeṇa YCM HSC yas tac YCM ] yasya HSC
नादः शक्तिरिति ख्यातो नादज्ञानं सदाशिवः ।
ज्ञेये ज्ञाने च नष्टे तु उन्मन्येवावशिष्यते ॥
nādaḥ śaktir iti khyāto nādajñānaṃ sadāśivaḥ /
jñeye jñāne ca naṣṭe tu unmany evāvaśiṣyate //
nādaḥ śaktir HTK ] nādaga...r USS khyāto HTK ] jñeyaṃ USS nāda HTK ] nādo USS jñeye jñāne ca naṣṭe tu ] jñeyajñāne vilīne ’ṃtaḥ USS, nādajñāne vinaṣṭe ca HTK unmany evāvaśiṣyate ] sonmany evāviśiṣyate USS, tad unmany eva śiṣyate HTK
नादो यावन्मनस्तावन्नादान्ते तु मनोन्मनी ।
सशब्दं कथितं व्योम निःशब्दं ब्रह्म कथ्यते ॥
nādo yāvan manas tāvan nādānte tu manonmanī /
saśabdaṃ kathitaṃ vyoma niḥśabdaṃ brahma kathyate //
vyoma ] vāte HTK
सदा नादानुसन्धानात्संक्षीणे वासनाचये ।
निरञ्जने विलीयेते निश्चितं मनमारुतौ ॥
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇe vāsanācaye /
nirañjane vilīyete niścitaṃ manamārutau //
The term nirañjana can refer to the highest deity or the highest state of mind (see HP 4.32/X4.3 where
it is said to be a synonym of samādhi). Here it is likely to mean the deity because of devo nirañjanaḥ (‘perfect deity’) in X4.114.
The compound manamārutau with the aiśa form mana is attested in both the ε and η groups. Cf. X4.59b manamadhyagām (in a verse taken from the Candrāvalokana).
caye ] kṣaye HTK vilīyate ] ca līyate HTK manamārutau ] cittamārutau HTK
Cf. Nādabindūpaniṣat 49saśabdaś cākṣare kṣīṇe niḥśabdaṃ paramaṃ padam/
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇā vāsanā bhavet//
अनाहतस्य शब्दस्य तस्य शब्दस्य यो ध्वनिः ।
ध्वनेरन्तर्गतं ज्योतिर्ज्योतिरन्तर्गतं मनः ।
तन्मनो विलयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥*
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ /
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotirantargataṃ manaḥ /
tan mano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //*
The source of these lines may be the Uttaragītā as they occur in its published edition. However, in one of its manuscripts (NGMPP E 2098-11) these three lines are omitted from Kṛṣṇa’s words, which start with oṃkāra. The author of the Upāsanāsārasaṅgraha (f. 111) has quoted these lines and attributed them to the Gītāsāra.
jyotirantar YCM ] jyotiṣo ’ntar HYS
नादकोटिसहस्राणि बिन्दुकोटिशतानि च ।
सर्वे तत्र लयं यान्ति यत्र देवो निरञ्जनः ॥
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca /
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti yatra devo nirañjanaḥ //
On the meaning of devo nirañjana, see the note to X4.112.
... ante yāti paraṃ sthānaṃ yatra devo nirañjanaḥ/
iti bhaviṣyapurāṇoktā dharmaghaṭavratakathā samāptā//
युवा वृद्धोऽतिवृद्धो वा व्याधितो दुर्बलोऽपि वा ।
अभ्यासात्सिद्धिमाप्नोति सर्वयोगेष्वतन्द्रितः ॥
yuvā vṛddho’tivṛddho vā vyādhito durbalo’pi vā /
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ //
See 1.64 for sources and testimonia.
सर्वे हठलयोपाया राजयोगस्य सिद्धये ।
राजयोगसमारूढः पुरुषः कालवञ्चकः ॥*
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogasya siddhaye /
rājayogasamārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcakaḥ //*
haṭhalayopāyā HTK ] haṭhalayābhyāsād YCM rājayoga HTK ] rājayogaṃ YCM
अस्तु वा मास्तु वा मुक्तिरत्रैवाखण्डितं महत् ।
लयामृतमयं सौख्यं राजयोगादवाप्यते ॥
astu vā māstu vā muktir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ mahat /
layāmṛtamayaṃ saukhyaṃ rājayogād avāpyate //
muktir HRĀ HTK ] siddhir YCM layāmṛtamayaṃ HTK ] layāmṛtaṃ laye HRĀ
हठं विना राजयोगो राजयोगं विना हठः ।
न सिध्यति ततो युग्मम् आ निष्पत्तेः समभ्यसेत् ॥
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ /
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset //
rājayogo HRĀ YBhD HTK ] rājayogaṃ YCM Pāda cd ] vyāptiḥ syād avinābhūtā śrīrājahaṭhayogayoḥ HRĀ samabhyaset HTK YCM ] samācaret YBhD
राजयोगमजानन्तः केवलं हठकर्मठाः ।
ये तु तान्कर्षकान्मन्ये प्रयासफलवर्जितान् ॥
rājayogam ajānantaḥ kevalaṃ haṭhakarmaṭhāḥ /
ye tu tān karṣakān manye prayāsaphalavarjitān //
karmaṭhaḥ ] karmagāḥ HV tu tān karṣakān ] tān karmavaśān HV
तत्त्वं बीजं हठः क्षेत्रमौदासीन्यं जलं त्रिभिः ।
उन्मनीकल्पलतिका सद्य एवोद्भविष्यति ॥
tattvaṃ bījaṃ haṭhaḥ kṣetram audāsīnyaṃ jalaṃ tribhiḥ /
unmanīkalpalatikā sadya evodbhaviṣyati //
The meaning of tattva here is unclear. It is a synonym for samādhi and unmanī in the next verses. However, this meaning seems unlikely here as tattva is one of three factors that is supposed to lead to unmanī. In Jyotsnā 4.104, Brahmānanda says that tattva means citta, which makes sense in so far as the mind grows to the beyond-mind state. However, this interpretation seems somewhat contrived. We have understood tattva in the sense of the ‘highest reality’ (paramatattva) on the assumption that, as the seed, it is the latent cause of the state beyond mind.
tattvaṃ ] nādo YCM tribhiḥ ] smṛtam YCM
उन्मन्यवाप्तये शीघ्रं मार्गौ द्वौ मम संमतौ ।
तत्त्वं परमसौख्यं वा नादोपासनमेव च ॥
unmanyavāptaye śīghraṃ mārgau dvau mama saṃmatau /
tattvaṃ paramasaukhyaṃ vā nādopāsanam eva ca //
mārgau dvau USS ] dvau mārgau YCM ca ] vā YCM USS
सौख्यप्रविष्टचित्तानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
सद्यआनन्दसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥
saukhyapraviṣṭacittānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
sadyaānandasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ //
saukhya YCM ] sāṅkhye USS saṃmatam YCM ] saṃmateḥ USS sadya-ānandasandhāyī YCM ] tasya svānaṃdasa*ryo USS
घण्टादिनादसक्तस्तब्धान्तःकरणहरिणस्य ।
प्रहरणमतिसुकरं स्याच्छरसंधाता प्रवीणश्चेत् ॥
ghaṇṭādinādasaktastabdhāntaḥkaraṇahariṇasya /
praharaṇam atisukaraṃ syāc charasaṃdhātā pravīṇaś cet //
एकं सृष्टिमयं बीजं एका मुद्रा च खेचरी ।
एको देवो निरालम्ब एकावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā ca khecarī /
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī //
See 3.48.
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ yadvīryaṃ sarvamantragam/
ekā mudrā khecarī ca mudraughaḥ prāṇito yayā//
yad āgamaḥ
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī/
dvāvekaṃ yo vijānāti sa vai pūjyaḥ kulāgame //
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ [sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam iti mantravīryarūpam aham iti bījam/ mudrā parabhairavīyātmā/] bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī/
dvāv etau yasya jāyete so’tiśāntapade sthitaḥ//
devo HRĀ YBhD ] deśo YCM
शङ्खदुन्दुभिनादं च न शृणोति कदाचन ।
काष्ठवज्जायते देह उन्मन्यावस्थया ध्रुवम् ॥
śaṅkhadundubhinādaṃ ca na śṛṇoti kadācana /
kāṣṭhavaj jāyate deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam //
nādaṃ ca na ] nādena na JS deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam ] yogī notpattyā vai prajāyate JS
deha ] dehe HSC
सर्वावस्थाविनिर्मुक्तः सर्वचिन्ताविवर्जितः ।
मृतवत्तिष्ठते योगी स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥*
sarvāvasthāvinirmuktaḥ sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ /
mṛtavat tiṣṭhate yogī sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //*
न हि जानाति शीतोष्णं न दुःखं न सुखं तथा ।
न मानं नापमानं च योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
na hi jānāti śītoṣṇaṃ na duḥkhaṃ na sukhaṃ tathā /
na mānaṃ nāpamānaṃ ca yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
na hi jānāti ] nābhijānāti VM
न गन्धं न रसं रूपं न स्पर्शनं न च श्रुतम् ।
नात्मानं न परं वेत्ति योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
na gandhaṃ na rasaṃ rūpaṃ na sparśanaṃ na ca śrutam /
nātmānaṃ na paraṃ vetti yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
na sparśanaṃ na ca śrutam ] na ca sparśaṃ na nisvanam VM
rūpaṃ na sparśanaṃ ] sparśaṃ na rūpaṃ na YBhD na paraṃ ] ca paraṃ YBhD
अवेध्यः सर्वशस्त्राणामवध्यः सर्वदेहिनाम् ।
अग्राह्यो मन्त्रतन्त्राणां योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥
avedhyaḥ sarvaśastrāṇām avadhyaḥ sarvadehinām /
agrāhyo mantratantrāṇāṃ yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā //
The collated manuscripts have avadhyaḥ in both the first and second verse quarters. Although avadhyaḥ can make sense in both quarters, the repetition appears to be a dittographical error that changed avedyaḥ, which is close to the reading of the source text, into avadhyaḥ. We have therefore emended accordingly.
avedhyaḥ ] abhedyaḥ VM
प्रवेशे निर्गमे वामे दक्षिणे चोर्ध्वमप्यधः ।
न यस्य वायुर्वहति स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
praveśe nirgame vāme dakṣiṇe cordhvam apy adhaḥ /
na yasya vāyur vahati sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
vahati ] vrajati GŚ
चित्तं न सुप्तं नो जाग्रत् स्मृतिमन्न न चान्यथा ।
नास्तमेति न चोदेति यस्यासौ मुक्त एव सः ॥
cittaṃ na suptaṃ no jāgrat smṛtiman na na cānyathā /
nāstam eti na codeti yasyāsau mukta eva saḥ //
The first line of this verse is significantly different from the version in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka. The second quarter is corrupt in many of the Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts but smṛti and nānyathā are well attested.
na suptaṃ no jāgrat GŚv.l. ] prasuptaṃ yogena GŚ smṛtiman na na cānyathā ] jāgratsuptaṃ na cānyathā GŚ (em.), jāgratsūtir na +nyathā GŚv.l., chrutimadvacanasya ca GŚv.l. saḥ ] hi GŚ
smṛtiman na na cānyathā ] smṛtivarṇaṃ na cānyathā HSC
स्वस्थो जाग्रदवस्थायां सुप्तवद्योऽवतिष्ठते ।
निःश्वासोच्छ्वासहीनश्च निश्चितं मुक्त एव सः ॥
svastho jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavad yo’vatiṣṭhate /
niḥśvāsocchvāsahīnaś ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ //
svastho ] sadā A, svapna Av.l., supta Av.l.
svastho ] svapna KAT, sadā YCM
दृष्टिः स्थिरा यस्य विनैव दृश्या-
द्वायुः स्थिरो यस्य विना प्रयत्नात् ।
चित्तं स्थिरं यस्य विनावलम्बा-
त्स एव योगी स गुरुः स सेव्यः ॥
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyā-
d vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt /
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalambā-
t sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ //
dṛśyaṃ vinā sthirā dṛṣṭir manaś cālambanaṃ vinā/
vināyāsaṃ sthiro vāyur yasya syāt sa guruḥ priye//
dṛśyād HSC ] lakṣyāt HRĀ, dṛśyaṃ YCM prayatnāt HRĀ HSC ] prayatnaṃ YCM lambāt HRĀ ] laṃbaṃ YCM HSC eva yogī HRĀ YCM ] rājayogī HSC sa sevyaḥ HRĀ HSC ] saṃsevyaḥ YCM
इति तु सकलयोगशास्त्रसिन्धोः
परिमथितादवकृष्टसारभूतम् ।
अनुभवत हठामृतं यमीन्द्रा
यदि भवतामजरामरत्ववाञ्छा ॥*
iti tu sakalayogaśāstrasindhoḥ
parimathitād avakṛṣṭasārabhūtam /
anubhavata haṭhāmṛtaṃ yamīndrā
yadi bhavatām ajarāmaratvavāñchā //*
अहिंसा सत्यमस्तेयं ब्रह्मचर्यं क्षमा धृतिः ।
दयार्जवं मिताहारः शौचं चैव यमा दश ॥
ahiṃsā satyam asteyaṃ brahmacaryaṃ kṣamā dhṛtiḥ /
dayārjavaṃ mitāhāraḥ śaucaṃ caiva yamā daśa //
तपः संतोषमास्तिक्यं दानमीश्वरपूजनम् ।
सिद्धान्तश्रवणं चैव ह्रीर्मतिश्च जपो हुतम् ॥
tapaḥ saṃtoṣam āstikyaṃ dānam īśvarapūjanam /
siddhāntaśravaṇaṃ caiva hrīr matiś ca japo hutam //
स्नुहीपत्त्रनिभं शस्त्रं सुतीक्ष्णं स्निग्धनिर्मलम् ।
समादाय ततस्तेन रोममात्रं समुच्छिदेत् ॥
snuhīpattranibhaṃ śastraṃ sutīkṣṇaṃ snigdhanirmalam /
samādāya tatas tena romamātraṃ samucchidet //
कृत्वा सैन्धवपथ्याभ्यां चूर्णिताभ्यां प्रघर्षयेत् ।
पुनः सप्तदिने प्राप्ते रोममात्रं समुच्छिदेत् ॥
kṛtvā saindhavapathyābhyāṃ cūrṇitābhyāṃ pragharṣayet /
punaḥ saptadine prāpte romamātraṃ samucchidet //
एवं क्रमेण षण्मासं नित्ययुक्तं समाचरेत् ।
षण्मासाद्रसनामूलशिराबन्धं विनश्यति ॥
evaṃ krameṇa ṣaṇmāsaṃ nityayuktaṃ samācaret /
ṣaṇmāsād rasanāmūlaśirābandhaṃ vinaśyati //
अथ वागीश्वरीधामशिरो वस्त्रेण वेष्टयेत् ।
शनैरुत्कर्षयेद्योगी कालवेलाविधानवित् ॥
atha vāgīśvarīdhāmaśiro vastreṇa veṣṭayet /
śanair utkarṣayed yogī kālavelāvidhānavit //
वितस्तिप्रमितं दैर्घ्यं विस्तारं चतुरङ्गुलम् ।
मृदुलं धवलं प्रोक्तं वेष्टिताम्बरलक्षणम् ॥
vitastipramitaṃ dairghyaṃ vistāraṃ caturaṅgulam /
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭitāmbaralakṣaṇam //
One would expect to read caturaṅgulavistāram in the second verse quarter, and the current reading is probably a result of the metre. This verse also occurs at 3.95*2.
dvādaśāṅguladairghyaṃ cāmbaraṃ caturaṅgulam
dairghyaṃ YB ] dīrgha YCM, dīrghaṃ vistāraṃ YCM ] vistāre YB HYS proktaṃ YB YCM ] sūkṣmaṃ HYS āmbara YB HYS ] ādhāra YCM
पुनः षण्मासमात्रेण नित्यसंकर्षणात्प्रिये ।
भ्रूमध्यावधि वर्धेत तिर्यक्कर्णबिलावधि ॥
punaḥ ṣaṇmāsamātreṇa nityasaṃkarṣaṇāt priye /
bhrūmadhyāvadhi vardheta tiryak karṇabilāvadhi //
vardheta ] sābhyeti KhV
अधस्ताच्चिबुकं मूलं प्रयाति क्रमकारिता ।
केशान्तमूर्ध्वं क्रमति तिर्यक्शङ्खावधि प्रिये ॥
adhastāc cibukaṃ mūlaṃ prayāti kramakāritā /
keśāntam ūrdhvaṃ kramati tiryak śaṅkhāvadhi priye //
adhastāc ] adhaś ca KhV
पुनः संवत्सराद्देवि द्वितीयाच्चैव लीलया ।
ब्रह्मरन्ध्रान्तमावृत्य तिष्ठेत्परमवन्दिते ॥
punaḥ saṃvatsarād devi dvitīyāc caiva līlayā /
brahmarandhrāntam āvṛtya tiṣṭhet paramavandite //
saṃvatsarād devi dvitīyād ] saṃvatsarāṇāṃ tu tṛtīyād KhV tiṣṭhet paramavandite ] tiṣṭhaty amaravandite KhV
स्वतालुमूलं संघृष्य सप्तवासरमात्मवित् ।
स्वगुरूक्तप्रकारेण मलं सर्वं विशोषयेत् ॥
svatālumūlaṃ saṃghṛṣya saptavāsaram ātmavit /
svagurūktaprakāreṇa malaṃ sarvaṃ viśoṣayet //
svatālumūlaṃ saṃghṛṣya ] tālumūlaṃ samutkṛṣya KhV
अङ्गुल्यग्रेण संघृष्य जिह्वां तत्र निवेशयेत् ।
शनैः शनैर्मस्तकाच्च महावज्रकपाटभित् ॥
aṅgulyagreṇa saṃghṛṣya jihvāṃ tatra niveśayet /
śanaiḥ śanair mastakāc ca mahāvajrakapāṭabhit //
mastakākhyā mahācaṇḍā śikhivahnikavajrabhṛt//
पूर्वबीजयुतां विद्यां व्याख्यातामतिदुर्लभाम् ।
अस्याः षडङ्गं कुर्वीत तया षट्चक्रभिन्नया ॥
pūrvabījayutāṃ vidyāṃ vyākhyātām atidurlabhām /
asyāḥ ṣaḍaṅgaṃ kurvīta tayā ṣaṭcakrabhinnayā //
This verse is a reworking (or corruption) of Khecarīvidyā 1.34 which is difficult to make sense of. On the Khecarī mantra see Khecarīvidyā 1.29–44 and the notes thereon in Mallinson’s edition.
pūrvabījayutā vidyā vyākhyātā hy atidurlabhā/
ṣaḍaṅgavidyāṃ vakṣyāmi tayā ṣaṭsvarabhinnayā//
खे निरस्तसकलक्रियाक्रमे
या चितिश्चरति शाश्वतोदये ।
सा शिवत्वसमवायकारिणी
खेचरी च भवखेदहारिणी ॥
khe nirastasakalakriyākrame
yā citiś carati śāśvatodaye /
sā śivatvasamavāyakāriṇī
khecarī ca bhavakhedahāriṇī //
क्रमेणैव प्रकर्तव्याभ्यासेन वरवर्णिनि ।
युगपद्यतते तस्य शरीरं विलयं व्रजेत् ॥
krameṇaiva prakartavyābhyāsena varavarṇini /
yugapad yatate tasya śarīraṃ vilayaṃ vrajet //
krameṇaiva ] śanair eva KhV varavarṇini ] yugapan na hi KhV yatate ] yaś caret KhV
तस्माच्छनैः शनैः कार्योऽभ्यासो न युगपत्प्रिये ।
एवं वर्षत्रयं कृत्वा ब्रह्मद्वारं विशेद्ध्रुवम् ॥
tasmāc chanaiḥ śanaiḥ kāryo’bhyāso na yugapat priye /
evaṃ varṣatrayaṃ kṛtvā brahmadvāraṃ viśed dhruvam //
kāryo ’bhyāso na yugapat priye ] kāryam abhyāsaṃ varavarṇini KhV viśed dhruvam ] praviśyati KhV
षट्चक्राणि विभिद्य शक्तिभुजगीं प्रोत्थाप्य मूलस्थितां
भित्त्वा ग्रन्थित्रयं च पश्चिमशिराप्राकाररूपं महत् ।
नीत्वा प्राणमतः शिरोबिलमलं निर्मथ्य चित्तेन तत्
लिङ्गं यः पिबतीन्दुमण्डलगलन्मुक्तः स साक्षाच्छिवः ॥
ṣaṭcakrāṇi vibhidya śaktibhujagīṃ protthāpya mūlasthitāṃ
bhittvā granthitrayaṃ ca paścimaśirāprākārarūpaṃ mahat /
nītvā prāṇam ataḥ śirobilam alaṃ nirmathya cittena tat
liṅgaṃ yaḥ pibatīndumaṇḍalagalan muktaḥ sa sākṣācchivaḥ //
The referent of tat, rendered here as “that” in “that liṅga”, is unclear and may refer to something in a previous verse in an unidentified source text.
नित्यं यस्तूर्ध्वजिह्वो यदि पिबति पुमान्सप्तधारामृतौघं
सुस्वादं शीतलाङ्गं दुरितभयहरं क्षुत्पिपासानिवारि ।
पिण्डस्थैर्यं हि तस्माद्भवति मृतपथा मृत्युरोगाद्भवन्ति
दौर्भाग्यं याति नाशं प्रसरति सकलं याति कालं भ्रमित्वा ॥
nityaṃ yas tūrdhvajihvo yadi pibati pumān saptadhārāmṛtaughaṃ
susvādaṃ śītalāṅgaṃ duritabhayaharaṃ kṣutpipāsānivāri /
piṇḍasthairyaṃ hi tasmād bhavati mṛtapathā mṛtyurogād bhavanti
daurbhāgyaṃ yāti nāśaṃ prasarati sakalaṃ yāti kālaṃ bhramitvā //
The second half of this verse, which is found in the published 10-chapter Haṭhapradīpikā (5.51), is corrupt.
तीक्ष्णकं हरते व्याधिं कटुकं कुष्ठनाशनम् ।
घृतस्वादूपमं चैव अमरत्वं लभेद्ध्रुवम् ॥
tīkṣṇakaṃ harate vyādhiṃ kaṭukaṃ kuṣṭhanāśanam /
ghṛtasvādūpamaṃ caiva amaratvaṃ labhed dhruvam //
ghṛtāsvādūpamānāś ca hy amaratvaṃ na saṃśayaḥ/
मधुस्वादूपमं चैव शास्त्रमुद्गिरते बहु ।
†लड्डुषण्डकखाद्यानि पक्वान्नानि अनेकशः† ॥
madhusvādūpamaṃ caiva śāstram udgirate bahu /
†laḍḍuṣaṇḍakakhādyāni pakvānnāni anekaśaḥ† //
The second half of this verse is related to Jñānasāra 2.11ab but makes no sense on its own. Perhaps the second half of the Jñānasāra verse has dropped out.
madhusvādūpamānāś ca śāstrodgīraṇatā bhavet//
mṛṣṭāni khaṇḍakādyāni laḍukāśokavartikāḥ/
evaṃ vārāhy aneke ca kāmadevo vyavasthitaḥ//
दिव्यकल्पं रमेन्नित्यम् उत्कृष्टो जायते ध्रुवम् ।
तन्मयत्वमवाप्नोति कोशकारीव कीटकः ॥
divyakalpaṃ ramen nityam utkṛṣṭo jāyate dhruvam /
tanmayatvam avāpnoti kośakārīva kīṭakaḥ //
अरिष्टानि विशिष्टानि तानि वक्ष्यामि त्वं शृणु ।
येषामालोकनान्मृत्युं निजं जानाति योगवित् ॥
ariṣṭāni viśiṣṭāni tāni vakṣyāmi tvaṃ śṛṇu /
yeṣām ālokanān mṛtyuṃ nijaṃ jānāti yogavit //
viśiṣṭāni tāni vakṣyāmi tvaṃ śṛṇu ] mahārāja śṛṇu vakṣyāmi tāni te MP, viśiṣṭāni śṛṇu vakṣyāmi tāni te ŚP
देवमार्गं ध्रुवं शुक्रं सोमच्छायामरुन्धतीम् ।
यो न पश्येन्न जीवेत्स नरः संवत्सरात्परम् ॥
devamārgaṃ dhruvaṃ śukraṃ somacchāyām arundhatīm /
yo na paśyen na jīvet sa naraḥ saṃvatsarāt param //
We are not certain of the meaning of devamārga here. Monier-Williams (s.v. 1899) says it means the sky but one would expect it to have a more specific
astrological meaning in a list of stars and planets. It could be a synonym for devapatha, which can mean the Milky Way according to one lexicographical source (Trikāṇḍaśeṣa 1.1.97). The reference in the Viṣṇudharmottarapurāṇa (see the Testimonia) suggests it is a celestial object that shines.
Arundhatī is mentioned in the Bṛhatsaṃhitā (13.6) and is said to be close to Vasiṣṭha (tatra vasiṣṭhaṃ munivaram upāśritārundhatī sādhvī). Vasiṣṭha and Arundhatī are the double star, Mizar and Alcor in the saptarṣi nakṣatra (Ursa Major). See Rao 2019: 53.
arundhatīṃ dhruvañ caiva somacchāyāṃ mahāpathaṃ/
yo na paśyen na jīveta naraḥ saṃvatsarāt paraṃ//
na paśyati tu yo vyabhre prabhām arkaniśākṛtoḥ/
chāyāṃ candrārkayoś cāpi tayoś ca gamanaṃ tathā/
devamārgaprabhāṃ vahner dhruvaṃ tārām arundhatīm/
paśyaty adṛṣṭam anyair vā mṛtyuḥ syāt tasya vatsarāt//
अरश्मि बिम्बं सूर्यस्य वह्निं चैवांशुमालिनम् ।
दृष्ट्वैकादशमासेभ्यो नरो नोर्ध्वं स जीवति ॥
araśmi bimbaṃ sūryasya vahniṃ caivāṃśumālinam /
dṛṣṭvaikādaśamāsebhyo naro nordhvaṃ sa jīvati //
māsāt tu ] māsebhyo MP, māsāṃś ca ŚP sa ŚP ] tu MP
Cf. Śivasvarodaya 343araśmi bimbaṃ sūryasya vahneḥ śītāṃśumālinaḥ/
dṛṣṭvaikādaśamāsāyur naraś cordhvaṃ na jīvati//
वमेन्मूत्रपुरीषं यः सुवर्णं रजतं तथा ।
प्रत्यक्षमथवा स्वप्ने जीवितं दशमासिकम् ॥
vamenmūtrapurīṣaṃ yaḥ suvarṇaṃ rajataṃ tathā /
pratyakṣam athavā svapne jīvitaṃ daśamāsikam //
In the version of this verse transmitted in the Haṭhapradīpikā, the relative pronoun yaḥ requires a verb in the first hemistich, as seen in the Yogacintāmaṇi, whose verse is a close parallel to the one in question, hence our emendation of
vātyāṃ to vamen (cf. Yogacintāmaṇi).
The idea behind this verse is clearly expressed in the Dharmaputrikā, where the yogi whose urine and faeces become gold and silver, in reality or in sleep,
has eight months left to live.
vamen ] vānte MP, vāntyā ŚP purīṣaṃ ŚP ] purīṣe MP suvarṇaṃ rajataṃ tathā MP ] suvarṇarajataṃ vamet ŚP athavā ŚP ] kurute MP jīvitaṃ ŚP ] jīvet sa MP
Cf. Dharmaputrikā 200chardimūtrapuriṣāṇi yasya hemarajo bhavet/
pratyakṣam athavā svapne tv aṣṭau māsān sa jīvati//
mūtra ] mūtraṃ YCM yaḥ su ] ca yaḥ YCM
दृष्ट्वा प्रेतपिशाचादीन् गन्धर्वनगराणि च ।
सुवर्णवर्णान्वृक्षांश्च नवमासान्स जीवति ॥
dṛṣṭvā pretapiśācādīn gandharvanagarāṇi ca /
suvarṇavarṇān vṛkṣāṃś ca navamāsān sa jīvati //
varṇān MP ] varṇa ŚP
varṇān ] varṇa YCM
स्थूलः कृशः कृशः स्थूलो योऽकस्मादेव जायते ।
प्रकृत्याश्च निवर्तेत तस्यायुश्चाष्टमासिकम् ॥
sthūlaḥ kṛśaḥ kṛśaḥ sthūlo yo’kasmād eva jāyate /
prakṛtyāś ca nivarteta tasyāyuś cāṣṭamāsikam //
prakṛtyāś ] prakṛteś MP, ŚP
खण्डं यस्य पदं पार्ष्णौ पादस्याग्रे तथा भवेत् ।
पांशुकर्दमयोर्मध्ये सप्तमासान्स जीवति ॥
khaṇḍaṃ yasya padaṃ pārṣṇau pādasyāgre tathā bhavet /
pāṃśukardamayor madhye saptamāsān sa jīvati //
pārṣṇau ] pārṣṇyāṃ MP, pārṣṇyoḥ ŚP tathā ] ca vā MP, ’thavā ŚP kardamayor madhye MP ] kardamamadhye vā ŚP
Cf. Liṅgapurāṇa 1.91.7agrataḥ pṛṣṭhato vāpi khaṇḍaṃ yasya padaṃ bhavet/
pāṃsuke kardame vāpi saptamāsān sa jīvati//
pārṣṇau ] pārṣṇyāṃ YCM tathā ] ’thavā YCM
कपोतगृध्रौ काकोलो वायसो वापि मूर्धनि ।
क्रव्यादो वा खगो लीनः* षण्मासायुःप्रदर्शकः ॥
kapotagṛdhrau kākolo vāyaso vāpi mūrdhani /
kravyādo vā khago līnaḥ* ṣaṇmāsāyuḥpradarśakaḥ //
kapotagṛdhrau ] gṛdhraḥ kapotaḥ MP, kapotagṛdhra ŚP kākolo MP ] kākolā ŚP vā khago MP ] vāparo ŚP
kapotagṛdhrau kākolo ] kapoto gṛdhrakākolau YCM līnaḥ ] tiṣṭhet YCM
हन्यते काकश्रेणीभिः पांशुवर्षेन वा नरः ।
स्वच्छायां वान्यथा दृष्ट्वा चतुर्मासान्स जीवति ॥
hanyate kākaśreṇībhiḥ pāṃśuvarṣena vā naraḥ /
svacchāyāṃ vānyathā dṛṣṭvā caturmāsān sa jīvati //
śreṇībhiḥ ] paṅktībhiḥ MP, ŚP sva ŚP ] svāṃ MP vānyathā ] anyathā MP, cānyathā ŚP caturmāsān ŚP ] catuḥpañca MP
śreṇībhiḥ ] paṅktībhiḥ YCM svacchāyāṃ vānyathā dṛṣṭvā caturmāsān sa jīvati ] śuṣyec ca vai yasya marma snānād vāmād adhastanam YCM
अनभ्रे विद्युतं दृष्ट्वा दक्षिणां दिशमाश्रिताम् ।
पयसीन्द्रधनुर्वापि जीवितं द्वित्रिमासिकम् ॥
anabhre vidyutaṃ dṛṣṭvā dakṣiṇāṃ diśam āśritām /
payasīndradhanur vāpi jīvitaṃ dvitrimāsikam //
The Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa preserves the original idea of seeing a rainbow at night, which is as extraordinary as the first sign (i.e. seeing lightning in a cloudless sky).
payasīndradhanur vāpi ŚP ] rātrāv indradhanuś cāpi MP dvitrimāsikam ] hi trimāsikam MP, tridvimāsikam ŚP
payasīndra ] udakendra YCM
घृते तैले तथादर्शे तोये वानात्मनस्तनुम् ।
यः पश्येदशिरस्कां च मासादूर्ध्वं न जीवति ॥
ghṛte taile tathādarśe toye vānātmanas tanum /
yaḥ paśyed aśiraskāṃ ca māsād ūrdhvaṃ na jīvati //
vānātmanas MP ] vāpy ātmanas ŚP aśiraskāṃ ca ] aśiraskāṃ vā MP, aśiraḥskandhāṃ ŚP
vānātmanas ] vāpy ātmanas YCM ca ] sa YCM
यस्यास्थिसदृशो गन्धो गात्रे शवसमोऽपि वा ।
तस्यार्धमासिकं ज्ञेयं योगिनो नृप जीवितम् ॥
yasyāsthisadṛśo gandho gātre śavasamo’pi vā /
tasyārdhamāsikaṃ jñeyaṃ yogino nṛpa jīvitam //
yasyāsthisadṛśo ] yasya bastasamo MP ŚP tasyārdhamāsikaṃ MP ] tasya māsārdhakaṃ ŚP yogino nṛpa MP ] yoginaḥ kila ŚP
यस्य वै स्नातमात्रस्य हृत्पादमवशुष्यति ।
पिबतश्च जलं शोषो दशाहं सोऽपि जीवति ॥
yasya vai snātamātrasya hṛtpādam avaśuṣyati /
pibataś ca jalaṃ śoṣo daśāhaṃ so’pi jīvati //
hṛtpādam MP ] hṛttoyam ŚP avaśuṣyati ŚP ] avaśuṣyate MP
सम्भिन्नो मारुतो यस्य मर्मस्थानानि कृन्तति ।
न हृष्यत्यम्बुसंस्पर्शात्तस्य मृत्युरुपस्थितः ॥
sambhinno māruto yasya marmasthānāni kṛntati /
na hṛṣyaty ambusaṃsparśāt tasya mṛtyur upasthitaḥ //
It seems more likely that mārutaḥ here refers to the breath rather than external wind, since it is difficult to conceive how wind could cut the vital points, which are located inside the body. In his commentary on Chāndogyopaniṣat 6.8.6, Śaṅkara describes an internal process in which the breath cuts vital points as a person dies, with the breath merging into heat, which in turn merges into the highest deity (prāṇaś ca tadordhvocchvāsī svātmany upasaṃhṛtabāhyakaraṇaḥ saṃvargavidyāyāṃ darśanād dhastapādādīn vikṣipan marmasthānāni nikṛntann ivotsṛjan krameṇopasaṃhṛtas tejasi sampadyate [...]). Similarly, the first half of a parallel verse in the Dharmaputrikā (213) appears to be describing an internal process in which the breath is disturbed and then escapes from the vital points.
na hṛṣyaty ambusparśāt ] hṛṣyate nāmbusparśāt MP, adbhiḥ spṛṣṭo na hṛṣyeta LP
Cf. Dharmaputrikā 213sambhidya māruto yasya marmasthānāc ca bhraśyate/
jyotiś caiva na paśyed yo dinam ekaṃ sa jīvati//
ऋक्षवानरयुग्यस्थो गायन्यो दक्षिणां दिशम् ।
स्वप्ने प्रयाति तस्यापि मृत्युकाल उपस्थितः ॥
ṛkṣavānarayugyastho gāyan yo dakṣiṇāṃ diśam /
svapne prayāti tasyāpi mṛtyukāla upasthitaḥ //
The idea behind this verse is more clearly expressed in the Vāyupurāṇa (19.13), where a chariot is drawn by a bear and monkey.
yugyastho ] yānastho MP mṛtyukāla upasthitaḥ ] na mṛtyuḥ kālam icchati MP
Cf. Skandapurāṇa 1.2.55.76ṛkṣavānarayugyastho gāyan yo dakṣiṇāṃ diśam/
yāti majjed dadhau paṅke gomaye vā na jīvati//
ṛkṣavānarayuktena rathenāśāṃ tu dakṣiṇām/
gāyan atha vrajet svapne vidyān mṛtyur upasthitaḥ//
रक्तकृष्णाम्बरधरा गायन्ती च हसन्त्यपि ।
दक्षिणाशां नयेन्नारी स्वप्ने सोऽपि न जीवति ॥
raktakṛṣṇāmbaradharā gāyantī ca hasanty api /
dakṣiṇāśāṃ nayen nārī svapne so’pi na jīvati //
gāyantī ca hasanty api ] gāyantī hasatī ca yam MP, gītahāsyaparā ca yam ŚP
नग्नं क्षपणकं स्वप्ने हसन्तं नृत्यतत्परम् ।
एकं संवीक्ष्य वल्गन्तं विद्यान्मृत्युमुपस्थितम् ॥
nagnaṃ kṣapaṇakaṃ svapne hasantaṃ nṛtyatatparam /
ekaṃ saṃvīkṣya valgantaṃ vidyān mṛtyum upasthitam //
Other printed versions of the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa read ekaṃ saṃvīkṣya, e.g. Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa 43.17 (ed. Vihārilāl Sarkar, Kalikātā-rājadhānyām, 1890)
hasantaṃ nṛtyatatparam ŚP ] hasamānaṃ mahābalam MP ekaṃ ŚP ] evaṃ MP saṃvīkṣya valgantaṃ MP ] vilakṣaṃ vibhrāntaṃ ŚP
Cf. Skandapurāṇa 1.2.55.75cd–76abnagnaṃ kṣapaṇakaṃ svapne hasamānaṃ pradṛśya ca//
enaṃ ca vīkṣya valgantaṃ taṃ vidyān mṛtyum āgatam/
आ मस्तकतलाद्यस्तु निमग्नं पङ्कसागरे ।
स्वप्ने पश्यत्यथात्मानं यः सद्यो म्रियते च सः ॥
ā mastakatalād yas tu nimagnaṃ paṅkasāgare /
svapne paśyaty athātmānaṃ yaḥ sadyo mriyate ca saḥ //
yaḥ sadyo mriyate ca saḥ ] sa sadyar mriyate naraḥ MP
केशाङ्गारांस्तथा भस्मभुजङ्गान्निर्जलां नदीम् ।
दृष्ट्वा स्वप्ने दशाहं तु मृत्युरेकादशे दिने ॥
keśāṅgārāṃs tathā bhasmabhujaṅgān nirjalāṃ nadīm /
dṛṣṭvā svapne daśāhaṃ tu mṛtyur ekādaśe dine //
The original version of the first line was probably that of the Skandapurāṇa, where the verse conveys the idea of a waterless river filled with hair, charcoal, ash or snakes. However, it seems that at some point this idea was lost, and each of these elements came to be treated separately, as in Liṅgapurāṇa 1.91.19.
daśāhaṃ ] daśāhāt MP
Cf. Skandapurāṇa 1.2.55.77cd–78abkeśāṅgārais tathā bhasmabhujaṅgair nirjalāṃ nadīm//
eṣām anyatamaiḥ pūrṇāṃ dṛṣṭvā svapne na jīvati/
bhasmāṅgārāṃś ca keśāṃś ca nadīṃ śuṣkāṃ bhujaṅgamān/
paśyed yo daśarātraṃ tu na sa jīvati tādṛśaḥ//
करालैर्विकटै रूक्षैः पुरुषैरुद्यतायुधैः ।
पाषाणैस्ताडितः स्वप्ने सद्योमृत्युर्भवेन्नरः ॥
karālair vikaṭai rūkṣaiḥ puruṣair udyatāyudhaiḥ /
pāṣāṇais tāḍitaḥ svapne sadyomṛtyur bhaven naraḥ //
The syntax of the verse transmitted by the Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts is faulty, since mṛtyuḥ appears as the subject, whereas the subject should be a man (naraḥ), as found in the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa (40.20) and Śārṅgadharapaddhati (4585). It makes little sense for death to be struck by stones etc., so the reading of the Śārṅgadharapaddhati’s final pāda has been adopted.
vikaṭai rūkṣaiḥ puruṣair ] vikaṭaiḥ kṛṣṇaiḥ puruṣair MP, puruṣaiḥ kṛṣṇair vikaṭair ŚP mṛtyur bhaven naraḥ ŚP ] mṛtyuṃ labhen naraḥ MP
सूर्योदये शिवा यस्य क्रोशन्ती याति संमुखम् ।
विपरीतं परीतं वा सद्योमृत्युरुपस्थितः ॥
sūryodaye śivā yasya krośantī yāti saṃmukham /
viparītaṃ parītaṃ vā sadyomṛtyur upasthitaḥ //
sadyomṛtyur upasthitaḥ ] sa sadyomṛtyum ṛcchati MP SP
यस्य वै भुक्तमात्रस्य हृदयं पीड्यते क्षुधा ।
जायते दन्तघर्षश्च स गतायुरसंशयः ॥
yasya vai bhuktamātrasya hṛdayaṃ pīḍyate kṣudhā /
jāyate dantagharṣaś ca sa gatāyur asaṃśayaḥ //
The meaning of hṛdaya as stomach, which makes good sense here, is rare in this type of literature (where it usually means ‘heart’ or ‘chest’) but is attested, e.g. at Arthaśāstra 4.7.12–13.
pīḍyate ] bādhyate MP asaṃśayaḥ ] na saṃśayaḥ MP
pīḍyate ] bādhate HTK asaṃśayaḥ ] asaṃśayam HTK
दीपादिगन्धं नो वेत्ति स्वप्नेऽप्यह्नि तथा निशि ।
नात्मानं परनेत्रस्थं वीक्षते न स जीवति ॥
dīpādigandhaṃ no vetti svapne’py ahni tathā niśi /
nātmānaṃ paranetrasthaṃ vīkṣate na sa jīvati //
dīpādigandhaṃ no ŚP ] dīpagandhaṃ na yo MP svapne ’py ahni ] trasyaty ahni MP, paśyaty agniṃ ŚP na sa jīvati MP ] yaḥ mṛtyumān ŚP
शक्रायुधं चार्धरात्रे दिवा ग्रहगणं तथा ।
दृष्ट्वा मन्येत संक्षीणम् आत्मजीवितमात्मवान् ॥
śakrāyudhaṃ cārdharātre divā grahagaṇaṃ tathā /
dṛṣṭvā manyeta saṃkṣīṇam ātmajīvitam ātmavān //
grahagaṇān MP ] vā grahaṇaṃ SP saṃkṣīṇam ātmajīvitam MP ] sa kṣīṇam ātmajīvitam SP ātmavān ] ātmavit MP, āptavān SP
नासिका वक्रतामेति कर्णयोर्नमनोन्नती ।
नेत्रं च वामं श्रवति यस्य तस्यायुरुद्गतम् ॥
nāsikā vakratām eti karṇayor namanonnatī /
netraṃ ca vāmaṃ śravati yasya tasyāyur udgatam //
आरक्ततामेति मुखं जिह्वा चाप्यसिता यदा ।
तदा प्राज्ञो विजानीयान् मृत्युमात्मानमागतम् ॥
āraktatām eti mukhaṃ jihvā cāpy asitā yadā /
tadā prājño vijānīyān mṛtyum ātmānam āgatam //
vāpy asitā ŚP ] vā śyāmatāṃ MP yadā MP ] bhavet ŚP ātmānam āgatam ] āsannam ātmanaḥ MP, āsannam āgatam ŚP
यस्य कृष्णा खरा जिह्वा पद्माकारं च वै मुखम् ।
गण्डे वा पिण्डिका रक्ता तदन्तं तस्य जीवितम् ॥
yasya kṛṣṇā kharā jihvā padmākāraṃ ca vai mukham /
gaṇḍe vā piṇḍikā raktā tad antaṃ tasya jīvitam //
We have understood gaṇḍe vā piṇḍikā as the fleshy region on the cheek in line with Mitākṣarā’s gloss on Yājñavalkyasmṛti 3.97cd (piṇḍikā māṃsalapradeśaḥ). The original idea appears to be expressed in the Dharmaputrikā, where the cheeks turn yellow and red (gaṇḍau tu pītakau raktau), and the introduction of the word piṇḍikā has caused confusion.
yasya kṛṣṇā kharā jihvā padmavarṇaṃ mukhaṃ bhavet/
gaṇḍau tu pītakau raktau dīpagandhaṃ na jighrati//
yasya kṛṣṇā kharā jihvā padmābhāsaṃ ca vai mukham/
gaṇḍe vā piṇḍikārakte tasya mṛtyur upasthitaḥ//
yasya kṛṣṇā bhavej jihvā padmavarṇaṃ mukhaṃ bhavet/
gaṇḍapṛṣṭhau suraktābhau trirātraṃ ca sa jīvati//
kṛṣṇā kharā ] kṛṣṇaparā HP10 ca ] tu HP10 gaṇḍe ] gaṇḍaṃ HP10
जिह्वा मूले भवेत्स्थूला रोमोद्वृत्तिसमुद्गमे ।
मणिबन्धं वीक्ष्य स्थूलं म्रियते सार्धवर्षतः ॥
jihvā mūle bhavet sthūlā romodvṛttisamudgame /
maṇibandhaṃ vīkṣya sthūlaṃ mriyate sārdhavarṣataḥ //
This verse does not appear outside the Haṭhapradīpikā’s transmission, yet the notion of the tongue becoming thick seems to be an old omen (see e.g. the Tantrasadbhava parallel). Also, the timeframe is not consistent with the verses that precede and follow it.
yasya jihvā bhavet sthūlā dantāḥ klidyanti bhāmini//
mriyate so naro devi varṣānte ca na saṃśayaḥ/
mūle ] mūlo HP10, mūlaṃ HP6 sthūlā HP6 ] sthūlo HP10 romoddhṛti HP6 ] romaharṣa HP10 vīkṣya HP10 ] vīkṣa HP6 varṣataḥ HP6 ] māsataḥ HP10
श्रुतिध्वंसं वहेद्यस्तु सप्ताहैर्गन्धनाशनम् ।
कृष्णत्वं दन्तजिह्वायां त्रिपञ्चाह्ने ध्रुवं म्रियेत् ॥
śrutidhvaṃsaṃ vahed yas tu saptāhair gandhanāśanam /
kṛṣṇatvaṃ dantajihvāyāṃ tripañcāhne dhruvaṃ mriyet //
dhvaṃsaṃ ] pathaṃ HP6
Cf. Haṭhapradīpikā (10 chapter) 9.13śrutipathaṃ yadā śabdo nādhirohati sarvathā/
kṛṣṇatvaṃ dantajihvāyāṃ tripakṣe mriyate dhruvam//
उष्ट्ररासभयानेन यः स्वप्ने दक्षिणां दिशम् ।
प्रयाति तं विजानीयात् सद्योमृत्युं नरेश्वर ॥
uṣṭrarāsabhayānena yaḥ svapne dakṣiṇāṃ diśam /
prayāti taṃ vijānīyāt sadyomṛtyuṃ nareśvara //
The syntax of the transmitted reading for the fourth pāda (mṛtyur bhaven nṛṇām) does not make sense, so the reading of the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa has been adopted. A similar idea is expressed in verse 15.
vi ] ca MP
पिधाय कर्णौ निर्घोषं न शृणोत्यात्मसम्भवम् ।
न पश्येच्चक्षुषोर्ज्योतिर् यश्च सोऽपि न जीवति ॥
pidhāya karṇau nirghoṣaṃ na śṛṇoty ātmasambhavam /
na paśyec cakṣuṣor jyotir yaś ca so’pi na jīvati //
A different idea is expressed in the third quarter of the parallel verses of the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa and Śārṅgadharapaddhati (i.e. ‘and the light in his eyes disappears’).
na paśyec ] naśyate MP ŚP yaś ca ] yasya MP ŚP
पततो यस्य वै गर्ते स्वप्ने द्वारं पिधीयते ।
न चोत्तिष्ठति यः श्वभ्रात् तदन्तं तस्य जीवितम् ॥
patato yasya vai garte svapne dvāraṃ pidhīyate /
na cottiṣṭhati yaḥ śvabhrāt tad antaṃ tasya jīvitam //
ऊर्ध्वा च दृष्टिर्न च संप्रतिष्ठा
रक्ता पुनः संपरिवर्तमाना ।
मुखस्य चोष्मा शिशिरा च नाभिः
शंसन्ति पुंसामपरं शरीरम् ॥
ūrdhvā ca dṛṣṭir na ca saṃpratiṣṭhā
raktā punaḥ saṃparivartamānā /
mukhasya coṣmā śiśirā ca nābhiḥ
śaṃsanti puṃsām aparaṃ śarīram //
Metre: upajāti (indravajrā + upendravajrā)
coṣmā MP ] śoṣaḥ LP śaṃsanti puṃsām aparaṃ śarīram MP ] atyuṣṇamūtro viṣamastha eva LP
स्वप्नेऽग्निं प्रविशेद्यस्तु न च निष्क्रमते पुनः ।
जलप्रवेशादपि वा तदन्तं तस्य जीवितम् ॥
svapne’gniṃ praviśed yas tu na ca niṣkramate punaḥ /
jalapraveśād api vā tadantaṃ tasya jīvitam //
यस्यापि हन्यते दृष्टिर् भूतै रात्रावथो दिवा ।
स मृत्युं सप्तरात्रान्ते पुमान्प्राप्नोत्यसंशयम् ॥
yasyāpi hanyate dṛṣṭir bhūtai rātrāv atho divā /
sa mṛtyuṃ saptarātrānte pumān prāpnoty asaṃśayam //
yasyāpi ŚP ] yaś cābhi MP dṛṣṭair ŚP ] duṣṭair MP pumān ŚP ] naraḥ MP
स्ववस्त्रममलं शुक्लं रक्तं पश्यत्यथासितम् ।
यः पुमान्मृत्युमासन्नं तस्यापि हि विनिर्दिशेत् ॥
svavastram amalaṃ śuklaṃ raktaṃ paśyaty athāsitam /
yaḥ pumān mṛtyum āsannaṃ tasyāpi hi vinirdiśet //
athāsitam ] atho ’sitam MP
āsannaṃ ] āpannaṃ YCM
स्वभावविपरीतत्वं प्रकृतेश्च विपर्ययः ।
कथयन्ति मनुष्याणां समासन्नौ यमान्तकौ ॥
svabhāvaviparītatvaṃ prakṛteś ca viparyayaḥ /
kathayanti manuṣyāṇāṃ samāsannau yamāntakau //
We have adopted the readings viparītatvaṃ and viparyayaḥ in keeping with the parallel verse in the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa. Both viparītam and viparyayam in the Haṭhapradīpikā witnesses are adjectives without an implied noun. It also seems more probable that viparītaṃ ca is a corruption of viparītatvaṃ than vaiparītyaṃ tu.
viparītatvaṃ ] vaiparītyaṃ tu MP, vaiparītyena ŚP viparyayaḥ MP ] viparyaye ŚP
लोहदण्डधरं ह्रस्वं कृष्णवस्त्रपरिच्छदम् ।
स्वप्ने प्रपश्यतस्तस्य त्रिरात्रान्मरणं भवेत् ॥
lohadaṇḍadharaṃ hrasvaṃ kṛṣṇavastraparicchadam /
svapne prapaśyatas tasya trirātrān maraṇaṃ bhavet //
hrasvaṃ ] kṛṣṇaṃ VS trirātrān ] trimāsān VS
Cf. Yogaśāstra 5.155kṛṣṇaṃ kṛṣṇaparīvāraṃ lohadaṇḍadharaṃ naram/
yadā svapne nirīkṣeta mṛtyur māsais tribhis tadā//
lohadaṇḍadharaṃ bhīmaṃ puruṣaṃ kṛṣṇapiṅgalam/
yaḥ svapne paśyati kruddhaṃ tribhir māsaiḥ sa gacchati//
इन्द्रियाणि न गृह्णीयुः स्वकीयान्विषयान्यदि ।
मासान्ते मरणं तस्य भविष्यति न संशयः ॥
indriyāṇi na gṛhṇīyuḥ svakīyān viṣayān yadi /
māsānte maraṇaṃ tasya bhaviṣyati na saṃśayaḥ //
gṛhṇīyuḥ ] gṛhnanti VS viṣayān ] viṣayaṃ VS
दर्पणे स्वात्मनश्छायामप्सु वा यो न पश्यति ।
मासान्ते मरणं तस्य भविष्यति न संशयः ॥
darpaṇe svātmanaś chāyām apsu vā yo na paśyati /
māsānte maraṇaṃ tasya bhaviṣyati na saṃśayaḥ //
māsānte maraṇaṃ tasya ] tasyāpi māsato mṛtyur VS
chāyām apsu ] kāyam āsyaṃ HP10
उष्णं यस्य शरीरार्धम् अर्धं चापि च शीतलम् ।
कर्णश्रुतिविनाशो वा सप्तरात्रे मरिष्यति ॥
uṣṇaṃ yasya śarīrārdham ardhaṃ cāpi ca śītalam /
karṇaśrutivināśo vā saptarātre mariṣyati //
cāpi ca ] vāpy ati VS śruti ] smṛti VS saptarātre ] saptāhāt sa VS
योगिनां ज्ञानविदुषाम्अन्येषां च महात्मनाम् ।
प्राप्तेऽन्तकाले पुरुषैस्तद्विज्ञेयं विचक्षणैः ॥
yogināṃ jñānaviduṣāmanyeṣāṃ ca mahātmanām /
prāpte’ntakāle puruṣaistad vijñeyaṃ vicakṣaṇaiḥ //
ca MP ] vā ŚP ’ntakāle ] tu kāle MP, ca kāle ŚP vijñeyaṃ MP ] vicāryaṃ ŚP
पूर्वाह्ने वापराह्ने वा मध्याह्ने वा दिने क्वचित् ।
यत्र वा रजनीभागे तदारिष्टं निरीक्षयेत् ॥
pūrvāhne vāparāhne vā madhyāhne vā dine kvacit /
yatra vā rajanībhāge tadāriṣṭaṃ nirīkṣayet //
vā ŚP ] ca MP vā dine kvacit ] vā pare kvacit ŚP, cāpi taddine MP
vāparāhne vā ] cāparāhṇe ca YCM kvacit ] dine YCM
विनिश्चित्यात्मनः कालं बाह्याभ्यन्तरलक्षणैः ।
न्यासतः स प्रसन्नात्मा निर्द्वन्द्वो विजितेन्द्रियः ॥
viniścityātmanaḥ kālaṃ bāhyābhyantaralakṣaṇaiḥ /
nyāsataḥ sa prasannātmā nirdvandvo vijitendriyaḥ //
nyāsataḥ sa] nirbhayas tu VS
कुरुते युक्तकर्माणि नित्यनैमित्तिकानि च ।
योगेन परमात्मानं गुहायां प्राप्य चेतसा ॥
kurute yuktakarmāṇi nityanaimittikāni ca /
yogena paramātmānaṃ guhāyāṃ prāpya cetasā //
kurute yukta ] kurvan vidhyukta VS
तारकेण यजेन्नित्यं जितासुः कामवर्जितः ।
जपेच्च तारकं ब्रह्म निष्कामश्चाच्युतप्रियः ॥
tārakeṇa yajen nityaṃ jitāsuḥ kāmavarjitaḥ /
japec ca tārakaṃ brahma niṣkāmaś cācyutapriyaḥ //
The term tārakam brahma (“salvific mantra”) is found in various Purāṇas and more recent Upaniṣads. On its meaning in Śaiva sources and its reinterpretion as the six-syllable Rāma mantra by Vaiṣṇava scholars, see Bakker 2019: 467–468.
yajen ] japen VS japec ca ] japed vā VS cācyutapriyaḥ ] cācyutaḥ pathāt VS
तस्य भागे तथैवाह्नो योगं युञ्जीत योगवित् ।
विदेहमुक्तये ज्ञानी त्यक्त्वा जननजं भयम् ॥
tasya bhāge tathaivāhno yogaṃ yuñjīta yogavit /
videhamuktaye jñānī tyaktvā jananajaṃ bhayam //
jananajaṃ ] maraṇajaṃ ŚP
Cf. Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa 40.41, 40.42abdṛṣṭvāriṣṭaṃ tathā yogī tyaktvā maraṇajaṃ bhayam/
tatsvabhāvaṃ tadālokya kālo yāvad vipākadaḥ//
tasya bhāge tathaivāhno yogaṃ yuñjīta yogavit/
बद्धपद्मासनो धीमान् समसंस्थानकन्धरः ।
निरुध्य प्राणापानौ च दन्तैर्दन्तानसंस्पृशन् ॥
baddhapadmāsano dhīmān samasaṃsthānakandharaḥ /
nirudhya prāṇāpānau ca dantair dantān asaṃspṛśan //
nirudhya prāṇāpānau ca ] niruddhaprāṇapavano ŚP dantān asaṃpṛśan ] dantān na saṃspṛśet ŚP
बुद्ध्या निरुध्य द्वाराणि नव मीलितलोचनः ।
ओंकारं तु धनुः कृत्वा गुणं सत्त्वं नियोजयेत् ॥
buddhyā nirudhya dvārāṇi nava mīlitalocanaḥ /
oṃkāraṃ tu dhanuḥ kṛtvā guṇaṃ sattvaṃ niyojayet //
niyojayet ] niyojya ca ŚP
तत्रात्मानं शरं सोऽपि वृतो भूतेन्द्रियादिभिः ।
प्राणवायुमनःक्षेपैः क्षिप्तो हृत्कमलस्थितः ॥
tatrātmānaṃ śaraṃ so’pi vṛto bhūtendriyādibhiḥ /
prāṇavāyumanaḥkṣepaiḥ kṣipto hṛtkamalasthitaḥ //
praṇavo dhanuḥ śaro hy ātmā brahma tallakṣyam ucyate/
apramattena veddhavyaṃ śaravat tanmayo bhavet//
tatrātmānaṃ śaraṃ so ’pi ] ātmānaṃ prāṇam āsādya HP10
दशमद्वारमार्गेण लक्ष्यं प्राप्य ततः परम् ।
षट्त्रिंशत्तत्त्वसंयुक्तः परमात्मनि लीयते ॥
daśamadvāramārgeṇa lakṣyaṃ prāpya tataḥ param /
ṣaṭtriṃśattattvasaṃyuktaḥ paramātmani līyate //
ततः परममाकाशम् अतीन्द्रियमगोचरम् ।
यद्बुद्ध्या नैव चाख्यातुं शक्यते न च वस्तु तत् ॥
tataḥ paramam ākāśam atīndriyam agocaram /
yad buddhyā naiva cākhyātuṃ śakyate na ca vastu tat //
We have adopted the Śārṅgadharapaddhati’s reading (yad buddhyā naiva cākhyātuṃ) to make sense of third pāda. We have retained the unique ending of the fourth pāda (na ca vastu tat) but the readings of the Mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇa (tat samaśnute) and Śārṅgadharapaddhati (’nantam aśnute) are much better.
paramam ākāśam ŚP ] paramanirvāṇam MP buddhyā ŚP ] buddher MP naiva ŚP ] yan na MP na ca vastu tat ] ’nantam aśnute ŚP, tat samaśnute MP
tataḥ paramam ] etad dhi parama HP10 yad buddhyā naiva cākhyātuṃ ] yat tu dhyānenākhyātu[ṃ] HP10 vastu tat ] vastutaḥ HP10
जीवन्मुक्तः सदेहोऽहं विचरामि जगत्त्रये ।
इति सा जायते वाञ्छा योगिनस्तन्निबोध मे ॥
jīvanmuktaḥ sadeho’haṃ vicarāmi jagattraye /
iti sā jāyate vāñchā yoginas tan nibodha me //
sā ] cej ŚP
sā ] cej YCM HSC vāñchā YCM ] vāṃchāṃ HSC
शरीरं न त्यजत्येव कालः कस्यापि कुत्रचित् ।
अतः शरीररक्षार्थं यत्नः कार्यस्तु योगिना ॥
śarīraṃ na tyajaty eva kālaḥ kasyāpi kutracit /
ataḥ śarīrarakṣārthaṃ yatnaḥ kāryas tu yoginā //
tyajaty ] nayaty ŚP
tyajaty eva ] tyajed eṣa YCM, tyajed eva HSC
योगिना सततं यत्नादरिष्टानां विचारणा ।
कर्तव्या येन कालोऽसौ ज्ञातो हन्ति च्छलान्न तम् ॥
yoginā satataṃ yatnād ariṣṭānāṃ vicāraṇā /
kartavyā yena kālo’sau jñāto hanti cchalān na tam //
’sau jñāto hanti cchalān na ] sāvajñāto na nihanti tam YCM, sāvajñāto na haṃti tam HSC
ज्ञात्वा च कालं तं सम्यग् लयस्थानं समाश्रितः ।
युञ्जीत योगं कालोऽस्य यथासौ जायतेऽफलः ॥
jñātvā ca kālaṃ taṃ samyag layasthānaṃ samāśritaḥ /
yuñjīta yogaṃ kālo’sya yathāsau jāyate’phalaḥ //
In Haṭhapradīpikā 10.21, Bālakṛṣṇa glosses layasthānaṃ (“the place of dissolution”) with brahmarandhraṃ. This makes good sense here because in verse 51 the self goes to the tenth door (i.e. the brahmarandhra) to dissolve into the supreme self and, in verse 60, the yogi meditates on dissolving into Śiva, who is on the thousand-petalled lotus, which is usually located at the brahmarandhra.
ca kālaṃ ] kālaṃ ca ŚP MP layasthānaṃ sam ŚP ] abhayasthānam MP yogaṃ ŚP ] yogī MP ’sya yathāsau jāyate ’phalaḥ ŚP ] ’sau yathā nāsyāphalo bhavet MP
ca kālaṃ taṃ samyag ] kālaṃ ca taṃ samyag YCM, kālaṃ nijaṃ yogī HSC ’phalaḥ YCM HSCv.l. ] kalaḥ HSC
बद्धसिद्धासनो देहं पूरयेत्प्राणवायुना ।
कृत्वा दण्डं स्थिरं बुद्ध्या दश द्वाराणि रुन्धयेत् ॥
baddhasiddhāsano dehaṃ pūrayet prāṇavāyunā /
kṛtvā daṇḍaṃ sthiraṃ buddhyā daśa dvārāṇi rundhayet //
rundhayet ] dhārayet YCM, rodhayet HSC
बन्धयेत्खेचरीमुद्रां ग्रीवायां च जलन्धरम् ।
अपाने मूलबन्धं च उड्डियाणं तथोदरे ॥
bandhayet khecarīmudrāṃ grīvāyāṃ ca jalandharam /
apāne mūlabandhaṃ ca uḍḍiyāṇaṃ tathodare //
bandhayet YCM ] baddhvā ca HSC
उत्थाप्य भुजगीं शक्तिं मूलाद्घातैरधःस्थिताम् ।
सुषुम्नान्तर्गतां पञ्चचक्राणां भेदिनीं शिवाम् ॥
utthāpya bhujagīṃ śaktiṃ mūlād ghātair adhaḥsthitām /
suṣumnāntargatāṃ pañcacakrāṇāṃ bhedinīṃ śivām //
mūlād ] mūla ŚP
mūlād ghātair adhaḥsthitām ] mūlādhārāmbujasthitām YCM HSC
जीवं हृद्याश्रयं नीत्वा यान्तीं बुद्धिमनोयुताम् ।
सहस्रदलपद्मस्थे शिवे लीनां विचिन्तयेत् ॥
jīvaṃ hṛdyāśrayaṃ nītvā yāntīṃ buddhimanoyutām /
sahasradalapadmasthe śive līnāṃ vicintayet //
hṛdyā ] hṛdā ŚP buddhi ] buddhiṃ ŚP sthe ] stha ŚP vicintayet ] sudhāmaye ŚP
hṛdyā ] hṛdā YCM HSC sthe YCM ] stha HSC vicintayet ] sudhāmaye YCM HSC
ततः सुधाकरोद्भूतममृतं तेन मूलतः ।
सिञ्चन्तीं सकलं देहं प्लावयन्तीं विचिन्तयेत् ॥
tataḥ sudhākarodbhūtam amṛtaṃ tena mūlataḥ /
siñcantīṃ sakalaṃ dehaṃ plāvayantīṃ vicintayet //
tataḥ ] pītvā ŚP
तया सार्धं ततो योगी शिवेनैकात्मतां व्रजेत् ।
परानन्दमयो भूत्वा चिद्वृत्तिमपि संत्यजेत् ॥*
tayā sārdhaṃ tato yogī śivenaikātmatāṃ vrajet /
parānandamayo bhūtvā cidvṛttim api saṃtyajet //*
bhūtvā YCM HSCv.l. ] sūtvā HSC
ततोऽलक्ष्यमनाभासम् अहंभावविवर्जितम् ।
सर्वाङ्गकल्पनाहीनं कथं कालो निहन्ति तम् ॥
tato’lakṣyam anābhāsam ahaṃbhāvavivarjitam /
sarvāṅgakalpanāhīnaṃ kathaṃ kālo nihanti tam //
sarvāṅga YCM HSCv.l. ] sarvāṅgai HSC
स एव कालः स शिवः स सर्वं नापि किञ्चन ।
कः केन हन्यते तत्र म्रियते नापि कश्चन ॥
sa eva kālaḥ sa śivaḥ sa sarvaṃ nāpi kiñ cana /
kaḥ kena hanyate tatra mriyate nāpi kaścana //
eva ] eka ŚP
ततो व्यतीते समये कालस्य भ्रान्तिरूपिणः ।
योगी सुप्तोत्थित इव बोधं याति प्रबोधतः ॥
tato vyatīte samaye kālasya bhrāntirūpiṇaḥ /
yogī suptotthita iva bodhaṃ yāti prabodhataḥ //
Death is puzzled (bhrāntirūpiṇaḥ) because the yogi has cheated death.
bodhaṃ yāti prabodhataḥ ] prabodhaṃ yāti bodhitaḥ ŚP
bodhaṃ yāti prabodhataḥ ] prabodhe pratibodhitaḥ YCM, pratibodhe prabodhitaḥ HSC
एवं सिद्धो भवेद्योगी वञ्चयित्वा विधानतः ।
कालं कलितसंसारं पौरुषेणाद्भुतेन हि ॥
evaṃ siddho bhaved yogī vañcayitvā vidhānataḥ /
kālaṃ kalitasaṃsāraṃ pauruṣeṇādbhutena hi //
तत्र त्रिभुवने योगी विहरत्येक एव सः ।
पश्यन्संसारवैचित्र्यं स्वेच्छया निरहंकृतिः ॥
tatra tribhuvane yogī viharaty eka eva saḥ /
paśyan saṃsāravaicitryaṃ svecchayā nirahaṃkṛtiḥ //
tatra ] tatas ŚP viharaty ] vicaraty ŚP
tatra ] tatas YCM HSC viharaty ] vicaraty YCM HSC
यथार्करश्मिसंयोगादर्ककान्तो हुताशनम् ।
आविष्करोति नैकः सन् दृष्टान्तस्तु स योगिनः ॥
yathārkaraśmisaṃyogād arkakānto hutāśanam /
āviṣkaroti naikaḥ san dṛṣṭāntas tu sa yoginaḥ //
The reason the sun-stone seems to be an example of a yogi here is that this stone was used to create fire like a magnifying glass, when it was in contact with the sun, much like the yogi is liberated-in-life when he becomes one with Śiva (62b). The fire-producing quality of the sun-stone (more commonly known as sūryakānta or agnimaṇi, etc.) is described in Rājanighaṇṭu 13.205cd: “That is a sun-stone from which real fire is emitted upon contact with the sun rays” (yaḥ sūryāṃśusparśaniṣṭhyūtavahnir jātyaḥ so ’yaṃ jāyate sūryakāntaḥ).
dṛṣṭāntas tu sa ] dṛṣṭāntaḥ sa tu ŚP, upamā sāpi MP